S P E C I F I C A T I O N S - Laredo, Texas...2018/08/16 · (956) 722-4411 Website: @synergy-se.com Page 1 of 5 CITY OF LAREDO NORTH LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ADMINISTRATION

CITY OF LAREDO NORTH LAREDO

WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

2815 SHILOH LAREDO, TEXAS

ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO. 2017-2

JUNE 11, 2018

DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 16

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

SEPULVEDA ASSOCIATES A R C H I T E C T S

INC.

1820 HOUSTON ST. • LAREDO, TEXAS 78040 (956) 725-1985 FAX (956) 725-2396 E-MAIL saainc@saarchitects.

00002

SECTION 00002

PROJECT DIRECTORY

CITY OF LAREDO NORTH LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING


ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO. 2017-2

JUNE 11, 2018

Owner: CITY OF LAREDO UTILITIES DEPARTMENT

Attn: Riazul Mia, P.E., Director 5816 Daugherty Ave.

Laredo, TX 78044 Tel: (956)721-2000 Website: cityoflaredo.com/utilities/administration

Architect: SEPULVEDA ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS, INC. Attn: Roberto J. Sepulveda, AIA Robert S. Sepulveda, Project Manager

1820 Houston St. Laredo, Texas 78040 (956) 725-1985 Website: www.saarchitects.net Civil Engineer: HOWLAND ENGINEERING & SURVEY CO.

Attn: Mr. Oscar Sepulveda, P. E. 7615 N. Bartlett Ave. Laredo, Texas 78041 (956) 722-4411 Website: www.howlandcompanies.com

MEP Engineer: NRG ENGINEERING

Attn: Mr. John Rodriguez, Jr., P.E. 5656 S. Staples, Ste. 360 Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 (361)-852-2727 Website: [email protected] Structural Engineer: SYNERGY ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS

Attn: Mr. Victor de Anda, P. E. 1119 Flores, Ste. 300 Laredo, Texas 78041 (956) 722-4411 Website: [email protected]

Page 1 of 5

CITY OF LAREDO

NORTH LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING 2815 SHILOH

LAREDO, TEXAS

ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO. 2017-2 JUNE 11, 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS

No. of Pages Front Cover 1 Project Directory 1 Table of Contents 5 Division A Texas Administrative Code 3 Texas Ethics Commission 4 Invitation For Bid………………………………………………………….. 2 Information to Bidders……………………………………………………. 3 Advise to Bidders…………………………………………………………. 1 Bid Form 13 Construction Contract……………………………………………………. 2 Performance Bond/Payment Bond………………………………………. 8 Minimum Insurance Provisions and Limits 4 Contractors/Subcontractors Certificate of Insurance……………………. 4 Notice of Award…………………………………………………………. 1 Notice to Proceed………………………………………………………… 1 Certificate of Owner’s Attorney…………………………………………. 1 Division B Contract Time & Liquidated Damages…………………… ……………. 1 Equal Opportunity Clause………………………………………………. 2 Inspection by City………………………………………………………. 1 Project Sign…………………………………………………………….. 2 Illegal Dumping………………………………………………………… 1 Division C Definition of Terms……………………………………………………. 3 Definition of Abbreviations…………………………………………… 2

Page 2 of 5

Instruction to Bidders………………………………………………….. 3 Award and Execution of Contract…………………………………….. 3 Scope of Work………………………………………………………… 3 Control of Work and Materials……………………………………….. 6 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public…………………… 4 Prosecution and Progress……………………………………………… 6 Measurement and Payment………………………………………….… 8 Right of Way Ordinance 1 Warranty Statement Form 1 Division D - ………………………………… Technical Provisions…………………………………………………… 1 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: No. of Pages 01010 Summary of Work 4 01015 Soil Investigation Data 1 Howland Engineering and Surveying Company, Inc.

Geotechnical Engineering Study Project No. 48567 Dated: _March 09, 2018 33

01020 Allowances 2 01030 Alternates 2 01040 Coordination 3 01045 Cutting and Patching 4 01050 Field Engineering 2 01090 References 8 01160 Contractor Requirements 3 01200 Project Meeting 4 01300 Submittals 3 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Color 12 01410 Testing Lab Service 13 01415 Facilities for the Disabled 1 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 9 01600 Materials & Equipment 4 01700 Contract Closeout 4 01710 Cleaning 3 01720 Project Record Documents 3 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data 4 01735 Maintenance Instructions 3 01740 Warranties 5 01750 Maintenance Materials 1 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK: 02000 NPDES - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 7 02070 Selective Demolition 2 02110 Site Clearing 3

Page 3 of 5

02200 Earthwork 12 02240 Paving Base Course 3 02281 Termite Control 3 02410 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 5 02510 Pre-cast Concrete Wheel Stops 1 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Flatwork 4 02580 Pavement Markings 1 02590 Parking Lot Signage 1 02665 Water System 11 02730 Sanitary System 7 02810 Irrigation System 16 02875 Metal Fence and Gates 4 02876 Metal Rolling Motorized Gate / Motor 4 02900 Landscaping Work 11 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE: 03100 Concrete Formwork 5 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 4 03300 Cast In Place Concrete 18 03345 Concrete Finishing 6 DIVISION 4 MASONRY: 04220 Concrete Masonry Units 6 04230 Reinforced Masonry Units 4 04430 Natural Stone Veneer 8 DIVISION 5 METALS: 05120 Structural Steel 8 05310 Structural Steel Deck 5 05400 Cold Formed Structural Metal Framing 3 05500 Metal Fabrications 17 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS: 06100 Miscellaneous Carpentry 5 06300 Wood Treatment 1 06400 Architectural Woodwork 4 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION: 07110 Membrane Waterproofing 2 07210 Building Insulation & Fire Safing 3 07216 Metal Building Insulation System 5 07220 Roof Deck Insulation 2 07240 Exterior Finish & Insulation System (EFIS) 9

Page 4 of 5

07410 Pre-finished Pre-form Standing Seam Roof System-Soffit Panels 4 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 7 07720 Roof Hatch 3 07900 Sealants and Caulking 6 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS: 08100 Metal Doors and Frames 3 08210 HP Plastic Laminate Wood Doors 5 08420 Aluminum Storefront and Windows 4 08710 Finish Hardware 18 08800 Glazing 3 DIVISION 9 FINISHES: 09110 Metal Stud System 3 09260 Gypsum Wallboard System 6 09300 Tile Work 3 09510 Acoustical Suspended Ceilings 3 09515 Acoustical Wall Panels 1 09900 Painting 8 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES: 10100 Visual Display Boards 2 10170 Toilet Compartment 2 10200 Architectural Louvers & Vents 3 10350 Aluminum Flagpole 1 10450 Signage & Cast Letters 3 10500 Metal Lockers & Benches 3 10520 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 3 10800 Toilet Room Accessories 2 10810 Metal Plaque 1 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT: 11132 Electronically Operated Projection Screen 6 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS: 12520 Horizontal Louver Blinds 2 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION: 13122 Metal Building Systems 5 DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM: Section not required

Page 5 of 5

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL: 15050 Basic Material Methods 20 15051 Starting of Systems 2 15070 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction 3 15080 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction 3 15140 Supports and Anchors 6 15170 Motors and Motor Controllers 3 15171 Combination and Non-Combination Motor Starters 6 15190 System Identification & Pipe Marking 3 15260 Pipe Insulation 4 15290 Ductwork Insulation 4 15410 Plumbing Piping & Valves 12 15430 Plumbing Specialties 5 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 4 15450 Plumbing Equipment 4 15530 Refrigerant Piping 2 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units 2 15781 Rooftop Electric Heating and Cooling units 3 15854 “DX” Fan Coil Unit 2 15860 Power Ventilators 4 15881 Air Distribution Devices 3 15885 Air Filters 1 15890 Metal Ductwork 7 15910 Duct Accessories 7 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 10 Division 16 – ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical General Provisions 6 16060 Grounding 5 16075 Electrical Identification 4 16123 Wire and Cable 6 16136 Raceways 8 16140 Wiring Device 4 16441 Disconnect Switches 3 16442 Low Voltage Panel Boards 8 16510 Luminaires 9 16671 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) for Low – Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 4 16740 Telephone / Data System 2 16750 Cable TV System 2

End of Table of Contents

1 of 3

TEXAS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE

Chapter 46. Disclosure of Interested Parties (effective December 24, 2015)

Text of Adopted Rule

Chapter 46. DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTED PARTIES

§46.1. Application

(a) This chapter applies to section 2252.908 of the Government Code.

(b) Section 2252.908 of the Government Code applies only to a contract of a governmental entity or state agency entered into after December 31, 2015, that meets either of the following conditions:

(1) The contract requires an action or vote by the governing body of the entity or agency; or

(2) The value of the contract is at least $1 million.

(c) A contract does not require an action or vote by the governing body of a governmental entity or state agency if:

(1) The governing body has legal authority to delegate to its staff the authority to execute the contract;

(2) The governing body has delegated to its staff the authority to execute the contract; and

(3) The governing body does not participate in the selection of the business entity with which the contract is entered into.

§46.3. Definitions

(a) “Contract” includes an amended, extended, or renewed contract.

(b) “Business entity” includes an entity through which business is conducted with a governmental entity or state agency, regardless of whether the entity is a for-profit or nonprofit entity. The term does not include a governmental entity or state agency.

(c) “Controlling interest” means: (1) an ownership interest or participating interest in a business entity by virtue of units, percentage, shares, stock, or otherwise that

2 of 3

exceeds 10 percent; (2) membership on the board of directors or other governing body of a business entity of which the board or other governing body is composed of not more than 10 members; or (3) service as an officer of a business entity that has four or fewer officers, or service as one of the four officers most highly compensated by a business entity that has more than four officers.

(d)“Interested party” means: (1) a person who has a controlling interest in a business entity with whom a governmental entity or state agency contracts; or (2) a person who actively participates in facilitating a contract or negotiating the terms of a contract with a governmental entity or state agency, including a broker, intermediary, adviser, or attorney for the business entity.

(e)“Intermediary,” for purposes of this rule, means, a person who actively participates in the facilitation of the contract or negotiating the contract, including a broker, adviser, attorney, or representative of or agent for the business entity who:

(1) receives compensation from the business entity for the person’s participation;

(2) communicates directly with the governmental entity or state agency on behalf of the business entity regarding the contract; and

(3) is not an employee of the business entity.

§46.5. Disclosure of Interested Parties Form

(a) A disclosure of interested parties form required by section 2252.908 of the Government Code must be filed on an electronic form prescribed by the commission that contains the following:

(1) The name of the business entity filing the form and the city, state, and country of the business entity’s place of business;

(2) The name of the governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is being filed;

(3) The name of each interested party and the city, state, and country of the place of business of each interested party;

(4) The identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract for which the form is being filed and a short

3 of 3

description of the goods or services used by the governmental entity or state agency provided under the contract; and

(5) An indication of whether each interested party has a controlling interest in the business entity, is an intermediary in the contract for which the disclosure is being filed, or both.

(b) The certification of filing and the completed disclosure of interested parties form generated by the commission’s electronic filing application must be printed, signed by an authorized agent of the contracting business entity, and submitted to the governmental entity or state agency that is the party to the contract for which the form is being filed.

(c) A governmental entity or state agency that receives a completed disclosure of interested parties form and certification of filing shall notify the commission, in an electronic format prescribed by the commission, of the receipt of those documents not later than the 30th day after the date the contract for which the form was filed binds all parties to the contract.

(d) The commission shall make each disclosure of interested parties form filed with the commission under section 2252.908(f) of the Government Code available to the public on the commission’s Internet website not later than the seventh business day after the date the commission receives the notice required under subsection (c) of this section.

Page 1 of 4

TEXAS ETHICS COMMISSION

OVERVIEW

In 2015, the Texas Legislature adopted House Bill 1295, which added Section 2252.908 of the Government Code. The law states that a governmental entity or state agency may not enter into certain contracts with a business entity unless the business entity submits a disclosure of interested parties to the governmental entity or state agency at the time the business entity submits the signed contract to the governmental entity or state agency. The law applies only to a contract of a governmental entity or state agency that either (1) requires an action or vote by the governing body of the entity or agency before the contract may be signed or (2) has a value of at least $1 million. The disclosure requirement applies to a contract entered into on or after January 1, 2016. The Texas Ethics Commission was required to adopt rules necessary to implement that law, prescribe the disclosure of interested parties form, and post a copy of the form on the Commission’s website. (See attached Rules.) The Commission adopted the Certificate of Interested Parties form (Form 1295) on October 5, 2015. The Commission also adopted new rules (Chapter 46) on November 30, 2015, to implement the law. Filing Process: By January 1, 2016, the commission will make available on its website a new filing application that must be used to file Form 1295. A business entity must use the application to enter the required information on Form 1295 and print a copy of the completed form, which will include a certification of filing that will contain a unique certification number. An authorized agent of the business entity must sign the printed copy of the form and have the form notarized. The completed Form 1295 with the certification of filing must be filed with the governmental body or state agency with which the business entity is entering into the contract. The governmental entity or state agency must notify the commission, using the commission’s filing application, of the receipt of the filed Form 1295 with the certification of filing not later than the 30th day after the date the contract binds all parties to the contract. The commission will post the completed Form 1295 to its website within seven business days after receiving notice from the governmental entity or state agency. Information regarding how to use the filing application will be available on this site by January 1, 2016.

Page 2 of 4

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS FOR DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTED PARTIES (FORM 1295)

1. WHO IS REQUIRED TO FILE FORM 1295?

In 2015, the Texas Legislature adopted House Bill 1295, which added section 2252.908 of the Government Code. The law states that a governmental entity or state agency may not enter into certain contracts with a business entity unless the business entity submits a disclosure of interested parties (Form 1295) to the governmental entity or state agency at the time the business entity submits the signed contract to the governmental entity or state agency. The Texas Ethics Commission has adopted rules requiring the business entity to file Form 1295 electronically with the Commission.

2. WHAT CONTRACTS DOES FORM 1295 APPLY TO?

The law applies only to a contract of a governmental entity or state agency that either:

(1) requires an action or vote by the governing body of the entity or agency before the contract may be signed; or

(2) has a value of at least $1 million.

Gov’t Code § 2252.908. The disclosure requirement applies to a contract entered into on or after January 1, 2016.

A contract does not require an action or vote by the governing body of a governmental entity or state agency if:

(1) the governing body has legal authority to delegate to its staff the authority to execute the contract;

(2) the governing body has delegated to its staff the authority to execute the contract; and

(3) the governing body does not participate in the selection of the business entity with which the contract is entered into.

1 T.A.C. § 46.1(c).

3. CAN I FILE FORM 1295 ON PAPER?

No. A business entity must file Form 1295 electronically with the Texas Ethics Commission using the online filing application. See Question #4 for information about logging in to the online filing application.

4. HOW DO I LOGIN TO THE FILING APPLICATION?

If this is your first time logging in, you will need to create an account in order to register and receive a password. Once you have registered, you will receive an email containing a password setup link. Click on the link to set your password. After you have established an account, you will use your email address, password, and user type (either “Business Entity” or “Governmental Entity/State Agency”) to log in to the filing application. Watch our short videos on "Logging In The First Time" on the Form 1295 File Reports Electronically web page.

5. IS THERE A MOBILE VERSION?

The mobile version is not complete at this time, but will be available soon.

Page 3 of 4

6. HELP! I FORGOT MY PASSWORD.

If you forgot your password, you can reset your password by clicking the “Forgot Password?” link on the filing application login screen. Once you enter your email address and filer type and successfully answer the security questions, you will receive an email containing a password reset link. If you cannot successfully answer your security questions, you will need to call the Texas Ethics Commission at (512)463-5800.

7. CAN I HAVE MULTIPLE ACCOUNTS?

You can have a separate account associated with each unique email address. However, once an account is established, there is no way to combine it with another account. You can only view those certificates created under your own unique email address. If you want to view all your certificates together in one account, we highly encourage you to setup a specific email address to register your account and use that email address each time you login to the filing application.

8. HOW MUCH TIME DO I HAVE TO ACKNOWLEDGE A FORM 1295?

A state agency or other governmental entity must acknowledge the receipt of the filed Form 1295 not later than the 30th day after the date the contract binds all parties to the contract. Once a Form 1295 is acknowledged, it will be posted to the Texas Ethics Commission’s website within seven business days.

9. DO I SEND A COPY OF THE NOTARIZED FORM 1295 TO THE TEXAS ETHICS COMMISSION?

No. Do not send a paper copy of the notarized Form 1295 to the Texas Ethics Commission. If you are with a state agency or other governmental entity, you will login to the filing application and acknowledge receipt of Form 1295 electronically. See Question #4 for more information about logging into the filing application.

10. WHAT IF I ACCIDENTALLY ACKNOWLEDGE THE WRONG FORM 1295?

Before you acknowledge a Form 1295, you should double check that you are acknowledging the correct one. If you acknowledge a Form 1295 in error, you cannot undo the certification. Contact the Texas Ethics Commission at 512-463-5800 and ask to speak with Technical Support.

11. THE FILING APPLICATION SAYS THIS FORM 1295 HAS ALREADY BEEN ACKNOWLEDGED. WHAT DO I DO NOW?

First, you should double check that you are entering the correct certification number. If you still receive an error, contact the Texas Ethics Commission at 512-463-5800 and ask to speak to technical support.

12. I SUBMITTED A FORM 1295 AND REALIZED THERE IS AN ERROR. CAN I STILL EDIT IT?

No. Once a Form 1295 has been submitted by the business entity, it can no longer be edited. If you found an error, you will need to start a new certificate and re-enter all the required information.

13. WHAT IF THE CONTRACT ASSOCIATED WITH THE FORM 1295 IS NEVER FULFILLED?

All certificates that are filed with the Texas Ethics Commission and acknowledged by a governmental entity will be posted to the Commission’s website regardless of the eventual outcome of the contract associated with the certificate.

Page 4 of 4

14. WHY AM I NOT RECEIVING EMAIL MESSAGES FROM THE TEXAS ETHICS COMMISSION?

All password reset links will be sent to the email address you provided when you registered. This should be an email address that is current and that you check often. You can verify and update your email address right after you log in. Also, be sure to “whitelist” or mark as “safe” emails that come from “[email protected]” and be sure to check your Spam or Junk folder for any missing messages.

Page 1 of 3

INFORMATION TO BIDDERS

Sealed bids will be received at City Secretary’s Office, 1110 Houston Street, 3rd floor, City Hall Building, Laredo, Texas, until 4:00 P.M. on Thursday, August 16th, 2018, and then publicly opened, read, and taken under advisement on Friday, August 17th, 2018 at 10:00A.M. for the furnishing of all necessary materials, machinery, equipment, labor, superintendence, and all other services and appurtenances required for the North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Administration Building at 2815 Shiloh, Laredo, Texas for the City of Laredo and shall include acknowledgment of addenda submitted, and all other documents included in said bid call. Said bids shall be marked,

City of Laredo North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant

Administration Building 2815 Shiloh

Laredo, Texas 78045

Bids shall be based on a per unit of work basis and shall include dollar amounts for each specific unit in improvements listed including those items listed as alternatives as per the proposal sheet included in the specifications of this project.

Each proposal and a proposal guaranty must be originals and must be sealed in an envelope plainly marked with the name of the project as shown above, and the name and address of the Bidder. When submitted by mail, this envelope shall be placed in another envelope addressed as indicated in this Notice to Bidders and shall be marked as a bid for the project above referred.

Notice is hereby given of the Special Provisions of this Project as it pertains to the

Labor Standards Provisions Execution Order No. 11246, Secretary’s Order No. 28, concerning an Affirmative Action Program for eligible projects guidelines for resident employment of Wage Determination.

Only the bids and bid guaranties actually in the hands of the designated official at

the time set in this Notice to Bidders shall be considered. Bids submitted by telephone, telegraph, or fax, will not be considered.

The City reserves the right to award the contract on the basis of the alternative which appears most advantageous to the City, to reject any or all bids, to waive objections based on failure to comply with formalities, and to allow the correction of obvious or patent errors. Bidders are expressly advised to review Section C-3 of the General Conditions of the proposed contract as to the causes which may lead to the disqualification of a bidder and/or the rejection of a bid proposal. Unless all bids are

Page 2 of 3

rejected, Owner agrees to give Notice of Award of contract to the successful bidder within ninety (90) days from the date of the bid opening.

Bidders for the construction work must submit a satisfactory cashier’s or certified check, or bidder’s bond having a minimum Best’s Rating A according to Best’s Key Rating Guide Latest Edition from a surety duly authorized and licensed in the State of Texas, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Laredo, Texas, in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total bid based on the bid which check or bond shall be submitted as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract, and execute performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after Notice of Award of contract is given to him for contracts in excess of $25,000.00. Bids without the required check or bond will NOT be considered.

The successful bidder for the construction of the improvements must furnish a

Certificate of Insurance, and a satisfactory Performance Bond in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, and a satisfactory Payment Bond in such amount, duly executed by such bidder as principal and by a corporate surety duly authorized so to act under the laws of the State of Texas. The successful bidder will be required to provide Performance and Payment Bonds issued by an insurance company which meets the minimum State requirements and is licensed in the State of Texas, and has a Best’s Key according to Best’s Key Rating Guide Latest Edition as follows: Construction Contract Minimum Best’s Rating 25,001 - 250,000 A 250,000 - 1,000,000 A Over 1,000,000 A

All lump sum and unit prices must be stated in both script and figures.

Bidders are expected to inspect the site of the work and to inform themselves regarding all local conditions.

The Instructions to Bidders, Forms of Bid, Form of Contract, Plans, Specifications, Form of Bid Bond, Performance and Payment Bonds and other contractual documents may be examined free of charge at the City of Laredo Utilities Department, Laredo, Texas, 5816 Daugherty, Laredo, Texas 78041.

Copies of the plans and specifications in CD’s are free of charge at the office of the City of Laredo Utilities Department, 5816 Daugherty Laredo, Texas, 78041.

Bid proposals over $25,000.00 shall comply with all conditions of the bid documents. In the event the base bid amount is $25,000.00 or LESS than $25,000.00, a Payment Bond and Performance Bond will NOT BE REQUIRED. A Bid Guarantee in the form of

Page 3 of 3

a Cashier’s or Certified Check or Bid Bond and the Certificate of Insurance however, WILL BE REQUIRED. Under the above conditions, the successful bidder for the City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant at 2815 Shiloh , Laredo, Texas is hereby advised that the total contract price will be paid in ONE PAYMENT upon completion and acceptance of the project by the City of Laredo. Cashier’s checks are not to be released until a contract for the project has been approved by City Council and signed by the City Manager.

Any other division or section of this project’s specifications having reference to

Bid Guarantee, Cashier’s or Certified Check, Bid Bond, Payment Bond, or Performance Bond, or having mention at all, to the requirements of bonds, is hereby amended to concur with the above conditions ONLY when the base bid is LESS THAN $25,000.00.

Bidders are advised to contact the City of Laredo Utilities Department at 5816 Daugherty Ave., Laredo, Texas, 78041, telephone number (956) 721-2000, for visits to project site, and for any additional information required on the project. A Pre-Bid conference with prospective bidders will be held on Tuesday, July 24th, 2018, at 10:00 A.M. at the City of Laredo Utilities Department Conference Room, located at 5816 Daugherty, Laredo, Texas 78041.

1 OF 1

ADVISE TO BIDDERS

City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant

Administration Building 2815 Shiloh

Laredo, Texas 78045

The Contractor’s attention is directed to the State of Texas Comptroller of Public Accounts Limited Sales Excise and Use Tax Rules and Regulations, Paragraph 3 of Ruling No. 9. Repairmen and Contractors (amended April 3, 1972). Reference Article 20.01 (T). Upon compliance with certain conditions, this ruling provides for exemption from this tax of materials incorporated into work done for an exempt agency under a Contract. The City is an exempt agency. Any Bidder may elect to exclude this sales tax from his bid. If the Bidder submitting the lowest acceptable bid for performing the work on this project elects to comply with the above ruling on any bid item included in this Contact by obtaining any necessary permit or permits from the State Comptroller allowing the purchase of material for incorporation into this project without having to pay the Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax at the time of purchase, he shall upon Award of Contract submit a statement in satisfactory form in which his bid prices to the City for materials are listed separately from all other charges, either by bid item or by total as required by the comptroller. This statement shall be included in and made part of the Contract. The City will furnish the Contractor with its exemption certificate for those materials incorporated in the project for which the above required statement is submitted. The City will make no further allowance for and will make no price adjustment above or below the originally bid unit price on account of this tax. It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility, if he elects to exclude the sales tax from his bid, to comply with the aforementioned Ruling No. 9 and with any other applicable rules, regulation, or laws pertaining to the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax which may now or at any time during the performance of this Contract be in effect, and the City shall have no responsibility for any sales or use tax which the Contractor may be required to pass as a result of his failure or the City’s failure to comply with said rules, regulations or laws, or as the result of the performance of the Contract or any part thereof by the Contractor. Bidders are cautioned that materials which are not permanently incorporated into the work are not eligible for exemption and are not to be included in the statements as “Materials” (example: fuel, lubricants, tools, forming materials, etc.).

Page 1 of 13 ____________ Initial

BID FORM

CITY OF LAREDO

NORTH LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING 2815 SHILOH

LAREDO, TEXAS

ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO. 2017-2 JUNE 11, 2018

Required Submission of Bid Form INCLUDE ALL SHEETS 1 THRU 13

Please Submit 1 Original

Sign and Initial All Pages as Required

Page 2 of 13 ____________ Initial

BID FORM

To: The City of Laredo, Texas Honorable Pete Saenz, Mayor From: Contractor Address: Phone: Project: City of Laredo

North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Laredo, Texas 78045

Pursuant to Notice to Bidders, the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to furnish the labor, materials, and equipment in accordance with the plans and specifications, general conditions of the agreement, special provisions of the Agreement, and Addenda, if any. The bidder binds himself upon acceptance of his proposal to execute a contract and bonds accompanying form of performing and completing the said work within the time stated as required by the detailed specifications at the following unit prices. The quantities shown below are based on the Engineer’s estimate of quantities and it is agreed that the quantities may be increased or diminished, and may be considered necessary in the opinion of the City of Laredo, Texas to complete the work fully as planned and contemplated, and that all quantities of work, either increased or decreased, are to be performed at the unit prices set forth below (except as provided in the General Conditions of the Agreement or the specifications, the contract documents). Acknowledgment of Addenda: (Please initial and date): Addendum No. 1: Addendum No. 2: Addendum No. 3: Addendum No. 4: Addendum No. 5:

Acknowledgment of other documents: (Please initial and date): Wage Determination: ______________________________________________________

Labor Provisions:

Affirmative Action Program:

Page 3 of 13 ____________ Initial

Project: City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Laredo, Texas 78045

FORM OF NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT

STATE OF TEXAS {} COUNTY OF WEBB {} being first duly sworn, deposes and says That he is (a Partner of Officer of the firm of, etc.) the party making the foregoing proposal or bid, that such proposal or bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said Bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any Bidder or Person, to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or of any other Bidder or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or of that of any other Bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Laredo or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and that all statements in said proposal or bid are true. Signature of Bidder, if the Bidder is an individual Partner, if the Bidder is a Partnership Officer, if the Bidder is a Corporation Subscribed and sworn before me this day of , 2018. Notary Public My Commission expires

Page 4 of 13 ____________ Initial

BID BOND Project: City of Laredo


KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned as Principal, and as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto as Owner in the penal sum of for payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly an severally bid ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrations, successors and assigns. Signed, this day of , 2018. The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a Contract in writing for the NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the

Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid,

then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that he obligations of said Surety, and its bonds shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.

Page 5 of 13 ____________ Initial

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set fourth herein. (L.S.) Principal Surety By:

Page 6 of 13 ____________ Initial

CITY OF LAREDO UTILITIES DEPARTMENT

BID SCHEDULE PROJECT: City of Laredo

North Laredo Waste water Treatment Plant Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Laredo, Texas 78045

BASE BID: BASE BID AMOUNT $ .00 WRITTEN IN WORDS: ALTERNATES: DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 $ (__________________.00) Delete Fountain – Pond $25,000.00 plus GC OH & P DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE NO. 2 $ (__________________.00) Delete Northwest Tower DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE NO. 3 $ (__________________.00) Delete Select Fill for Building Pad and Immediate Surrounding Areas Per Civil Grading Plans ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 4 $ (__________________.00) Add Proposed Sanitary Sewer Line and Manhole Per Civil Plans Contractor Signature Title Address City/State Zip Code Telephone Number:( ) Fax Number:( ) Date: NOTE: ALL BID ITEMS WILL BE PAID FOR WHEN COMPLETED IN PLACE,

TESTED, AND ACCEPTED BY THE OWNER.

Page 7 of 13 ____________ Initial

STATEMENT OF MATERIALS AND OTHER CHARGES

PROJECT: City of Laredo


Base Bid Materials Incorporated into the project: $ All Other Charges (include Allowances) For Base Bid:……………………$_________________ Total For Base Bid: ………………………………………………………$_________________ For purposes of complying with the Texas Tax Code, the Contractor agrees that the charges for any material incorporated into the project in excess of the estimated quantity provided for herein will be no less than the invoice price for such material to the Contractor. NOTE: ONLY THE COPY OF THIS FORM IN THE BOUND CONTRACTS IS TO BE FILLED

OUT.

Construction contract time for the project is 180 Working Days.

Page 8 of 13 ____________ Initial

INFORMATION FROM BIDDERS

MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH BID PROPOSAL Project: City of Laredo


Statement of Qualifications: (Similar Projects Completed by Bidder within last 10 years) 1. Name of Project: Value of Contract: Date Completed: 2. Name of Project: Value of Contract: Date Completed: 3. Name of Project: Value of Contract: Date Completed: 4. Name of Project: Value of Contract: Date Completed: 5. Name of Project: Value of Contract: Date Completed: Experience Data: Include the resume of the full time Job Superintendent. Financial Status: A confidential financial statement will be submitted by the apparent successful low

Bidder only if the Owner deems it necessary. NOTE: TO BE SUBMITTED UPON REQUEST IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE ANSWER.

Page 9 of 13 ____________ Initial

Project: City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Laredo, Texas 78045

Proposed Progress Schedules: ( Include as attachment, if required.) Data on Equipment to be used on the Work: (Include the number of machines, the type, capacity, age and conditions and location) Subcontractors: (Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers. List sources, types

and manufacturers of proposed materials) Attached List is required to be submitted with Bid Forms. See Page 10, 11 and 12. NOTE: TO BE SUBMITTED UPON REQUEST IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE ANSWER.

Page 10 of 13 ____________ Initial

City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant

Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Laredo, Texas 78045

GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS

THIS LIST MUST BE FILLED OUT AND SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL FORMS! ITEM NAME CONTACT PHONE NO. DIVISION 2 SITEWORK: 02070 Selective Demolition _______________________________________________________ 02110 Site Clearing ____________________________________________________________ 02200 Earthwork ____________________________________________________________ 02240 Paving Base Course ______________________________________________________ 02281 Termite Control ______________________________________________________ 02565 Water System ______________________________________________________ 02730 Sanitary System ______________________________________________________ 02810 Irrigation System ______________________________________________________ 02875 Metal Fence and Gates _____________________________________________________ 02876 Metal Rolling Motorized Gate / Motor _________________________________________ 02900 Landscaping Work_________________________________________________________ Fountain/Pond Contractor Option 1 ___________________________________________ Fountain/Pond Contractor Option 2 ___________________________________________ Fountain/Pond Contractor Option 3 ___________________________________________ DIVISION 3 CONCRETE: 03100 Concrete Formwork ______________________________________________________ 03200 Concrete Reinforcement ________________________________________________ 03300 Cast In Place Concrete ________________________________________________ 03345 Concrete Finishing ______________________________________________________ DIVISION 4 MASONRY: 04220 Concrete Masonry Units ________________________________________________ 04230 Reinforced Masonry Units ________________________________________________ 04430 Natural Stone Veneer ____________ DIVISION 5 METALS: 05120 Structural Steel 05400 Cold formed Structural Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications ______________________________________________________

Page 11 of 13 ____________ Initial

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS: 06100 Miscellaneous Carpentry ________________________________________________ 06300 Wood Treatment ______________________________________________________ 06400 Architectural Woodwork ________________________________________________ DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION: 07110 Membrane Waterproofing ________________________________________________ 07210 Building Insulation & Fire Safing __________________________________________ 07216 Pre-Engineered Bldg. Blanket Insulation 07220 Roof Deck Insulation ______________________________________________________ 07240 Exterior Finish & Insulation System (EFIS) ____________________________________ 07410 Pre-finished Pre-form Standing Seam Roof System-Soffit Panels __________________________________________ 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal ________________________________________________ 07720 Roof Hatch ____________________________________________________________ 07900 Sealants and Caulking ________________________________________________ DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS: 08100 Metal Doors and Frames ________________________________________________ 08210 HP Plastic Laminate Wood Doors __________________________________________ 08420 Aluminum Fixed Window System __________________________________________ 08710 Finish Hardware ______________________________________________________ 08800 Glazing ____________________________________________________________ DIVISION 9 FINISHES: 09110 Metal Stud System ______________________________________________________ 09260 Gypsum Wallboard System ________________________________________________ 09300 Tile Work ____________________________________________________________ 09510 Acoustical Suspended Ceilings __________________________________________ 09515 Acoustical Wall Panels ________________________________________________ 09900 Painting ____________________________________________________________ DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES: 10100 Visual Display Boards ________________________________________________ 10170 Toilet Compartment ________________________________________________ 10200 Architectural Louvers & Vents __________________________________________ 10350 Aluminum Flagpole ______________________________________________________ 10450 Signage ________________________________________________ 10500 Metal Lockers & Benches ________________________________________________ 10520 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets __________________________________________ 10800 Toilet Room Accessories ________________________________________________ 10810 Metal Plaque ____________________________________________________________

Page 12 of 13 ____________ Initial

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT: 11132 Electronically Operated Projection Screen ______________________________________ DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS: 12520 Horizontal Louver Blind ________________________________________________ DIVISION 13 SPECIAL SYSTEMS 13122 Metal Building Systems ________________________________________________ DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM: Section not required DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL: HVAC System Supplier __________________________________________________________ HVAC System Subcontractor______________________________________________________ Plumbing System Supplier ________________________________________________________ Plumbing System Subcontractor____________________________________________________ Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ___________________________________________________ Division 16 – ELECTRICAL Electrical System Supplier ________________________________________________________ Electrical System Subcontractor___ _________________________________________________ General Contractor’s FULL TIME Superintendent _____________________________________________________ Others… __________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________ __________________________________________ NOTE: Owner and Architect have the right to accept or reject manufacturer, supplier, subcontractor for not complying with specifications, or poor past performance as determined by Owner or references. No additional compensation will be allowed.

Page 13 of 13 ____________ Initial

CHECKLIST FOR BIDDERS (INCLUDE WITH BID FORM FORMS)

Project: City of Laredo


All information required by the terms of the Bid Documents must be furnished. MISTAKES OR OMISSIONS CAN BE COSTLY AND CAN RESULT IN THE REJECTION OF YOUR BID. Important items for you to check are included in but not limited to, those listed below. [ ] Have you acknowledged receipt of all addenda to the plans and specifications? [ ] Have you acknowledged reading Spec Section Texas Ethics Commission Sheets 1 thru 4? [ ] Have you acknowledged reading Spec section Texas Administrative Code Sheets 1 thru 3? [ ] Is your bid properly signed? And Initialed? (Refer to Bid Documents) [ ] Include bid guarantee. [ ] Is your bid guarantee in the proper amount? (5% of total bid price) [ ] Your bid guarantee must be in the form of a Bidder’s Bond, a Certified Check or Cashier’s Check. [ ] If your bid guarantee is in the form of a Bidder’s Bond, is the bond properly signed by both the

bidder and surety and are all required seals affixed? [ ] Is the surety company qualified and licensed by the State of Texas as required by the provisions of

the bid documents? [ ] Is the name in which you submitted the bid the same on your bid proposal as on the Bidder’s

Bond? [ ] Are decimals in unit prices in the proper places? Are your figures legible? [ ] Are all erasures or corrections initialed by the person signing the bid or by an authorized

representative of the person signing the bid. [ ] Do not restrict your bid by altering any provisions of the Bid Document or by attaching any

documents to the Bid Form that takes exception to the Bid Documents. [ ] Have you included all pages of the Bid Form with your bid? Total 13 Pages. Are all blanks in

the Proposal properly completed (equipment brands, alternate materials, etc.)? [ ] Is the envelope containing your bid properly identified that it is a sealed bid and does it contain the

correct project name and bid opening date? [ ] Attach signed copy of this Check List (Page 13/ Bid Form 1 thru 13) for Bidders.

_________________________________________ ________________ Type Name and Title Date _________________________________________ Firm Name _________________________________________ Signature

Page 1 of 2

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Agenda Item: _____________ STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF WEBB THIS AGREEMENT, made this _____ day of _______________ by and between the City of Laredo, Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager hereinafter termed the Owner, and ________________________ of the City of ____________, County of ___________, State of __________, his/their executors, administrators, heirs, successors, or assigns, hereinafter termed the Contractor. WHEREAS, the Owner desired to enter into Contract for the City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building in accordance with the provisions of the Invitation for Bids, the Specifications and Plans titled as above, and published by City of Laredo, Texas, 1110 Houston Street, (mailing address: P.O. Box 579), Laredo, Texas 78040 all of which are a part thereof; and, WHEREAS, the Contractor has been engaged in and now does such work and represents that he is fully equipped, competent and capable to perform the above desired and outlined work, and is ready and willing to perform the work in accordance with the provisions of the Invitation for Bids, the Specifications and Plans, titled, City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building WITNESS: THAT for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be made and performed by the Owner, the Contractor hereby agrees at the unit price set forth in his Bid, made a part thereof totaling the sum of _____________________________________________($______________) based on the Engineer's estimate of quantities, payable in the manner set out in Division C, Section 9, General Provisions of the contractual Documents to commence and complete the City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building improvements in the City of Laredo, Tx, in accordance with Instructions to Bidders, Special Provisions, General Provisions, Technical Provisions, and all other requirements of the contractual Documents, and in accordance with the Specifications and Plans (including all maps, plats, blueprints, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof) prepared by the Owner's Engineer, a part thereof and collectively, together with this Agreement constitute the entire Contract; and the Contractor agrees to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other insurance and other accessories and services, and whatever else may be necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with said specifications, plans, and other contractual documents including such proposal.

Project: City of Laredo North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building

Said Contractor further agrees to begin the work on or before the tenth day following the date set by the Owner in the written notice to proceed and to complete the work within 180 Working Days. The Contractor further agrees to pay the sum of $850.00 for each consecutive day there-in-after as herein provided in Division B, Section 1. And the Owner in consideration of the full and true performance of the said work by said Contractor hereby agrees to and binds itself to pay the said Contractor the unit price set forth in the attached Bid, and in the manner provided in the Specifications. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR have hereunto set their hand this_____ day of ______________. WITNESS: Contractor/Firm (Typed) _________________ ______________________ Name Signature ________________ _______________________ Address Signature (Typed) Title: _________________ ___________________________ Address ___________________________ City/State/Zip Code ___________________________ Telephone Number: ___________________________ Fax Number

ATTEST: CITY OF LAREDO, TEXAS _____________________ _ _________________________ _ Jose A. Valdez, Jr., Horacio A. De Leon City Secretary City Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: _____________________ __ Kristina Laurel Hale, City Attorney Page 2 of 2

Performance Bond Page 1 of 8

Division A

SECTION A-8 PERFORMANCE BOND

(As required by Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code)

THE STATE OF {} COUNTY OF {} KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we (1) a (2) of hereafter called Principal and (3) of , State of , hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (4) of hereinafter called Owner, in the penal sum of ($ ) Dollars in lawful money of the United Stated, to be paid in (5) WEBB COUNTY, TEXAS for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain Contract with (6) the Owner, dated the day of a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the Construction of: (hereinafter called the “Work”) These notes refer to the numbers in body of Contract above: Date of Bond must not be prior to Date of Contract. (1) Correct name of Contractor.


Division A

(2) A Corporation, or Partnership or an Individual, as case may be. (3) Correct name of Surety. (4) Correct name of Owner. (5) County and State. (6) Owner. NOW THEREFORE, if the Principals shall well, truly and faithfully perform the work in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner with or without notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this Bond, venue shall lie WEBB County, State of Texas, and that the said surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the Specifications. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Instrument is executed in six counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of . ATTEST: (Principal) Secretary PRINCIPAL By: (SEAL) Address (State and Zip Code) Witness as to Principal Telephone Number Address (State and Zip Code)


Division A

ATTEST: SURETY: (Surety) Secretary By: (SEAL) (Surety) Secretary Address (State and Zip Code) Telephone No. (Area Code) (SEAL) Witness as to Surety Address (State and Zip Code)


Division A

PAYMENT BOND (As required by Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code)

THE STATE OF {} COUNTY OF {} KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we (1) (2) of hereinafter called Principal and (3) of , State of , hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (4) of hereinafter called Owner, and unto all Persons, Firms, and Corporations who may furnish materials for, or perform labor upon the building or improvements hereinafter referred to in the penal sum of ($ ) Dollars in lawful money of the United Stated, to be paid in (5) WEBB COUNTY, TEXAS for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain Contract with (6) the Owner, dated the day of a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: (hereinafter called the “Work”) These footnotes refer to the numbers in body of contract above: Date of Bond must not be prior to Date of Contract. (1) Correct name of Contractor. (2) A Corporation, or Partnership or an Individual, as case may be. (3) Correct name of Surety. (4) Correct name of Owner. (5) County and State. (6) Owner.


Division A

NOW THEREFORE, if the Principals shall well, truly and faithfully perform the work in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner with or without notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. This Bond is made and entered into solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and material in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, and all such claimants shall have a direct right of action under the Bond as provided in Section 2253.073, Texas Government Code. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this Bond, venue shall lie WEBB County, State of Texas, and that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in six counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of . ATTEST: (Principal) Secretary PRINCIPAL By: (SEAL) Address (State and Zip Code) Witness as to Principal Telephone Number (SEAL) Surety


Division A

ATTEST: (Surety Secretary) By: (SEAL) Address (State and Zip Code) Telephone Number NOTE: If Contractor is Partnership, all Partners should execute Bond.


Division A

PERFORMANCE - PAYMENT BOND FORM M-24, 25, Attach. Sa (SEAL) Individual Principal Address (State and Zip Code) Business - Address Telephone Number (Area Code) Telephone Number (Area Code) ATTEST: Corporate Principal (State and Zip Code) Business Address Name Telephone Number (Area Code) Address (State and Zip Code) (Affix Corporate Seal) By: ATTEST: Address (State and Zip Code) ______________________________________________ Corporate Surety _____________________________________________ Business Address (Affix Corporate Seal) Telephone:


Division A

CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, , certify that I am the , Secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the within Bond; that , who signed the said Bond on behalf of the Principal was then , of said Corporation; that I know his signature thereof is genuine; and that said Bond was duly signed, sealed, an attested for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. Title Date: (Affix Corporate Seal) Telephone No. The rate of premium on this Bond is per thousand. Total of premium charge $ NOTE: The above must be filled in by Corporate Surety. Power-of-Attorney of person

signed for Surety company must be attached.

Page 1

CITY OF LAREDO MINIMUM INSURANCE PROVISIONS AND LIMITS

FOR CONSTRUCTION, REPAIR, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTORS

Contractor shall provide and continuously maintain the minimum insurance coverages set forth below during the term of its agreement with the City of Laredo; and Contractor shall require its subcontractors to purchase the same types and amounts of insurance, at a minimum, as set forth below with respect to statutory workers’ compensation and liability insurance. 1. Standard ISO commercial general liability insurance at minimum combined single limits of

$1,000,000 per-occurrence and $2,000,000 general aggregate for bodily injury and property damage, which coverage shall include: products/completed operations ($2,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate); XCU (explosion, collapse, underground) hazards; and contractual liability. Without limitation, the commercial general liability coverage must cover all operations required in the contract, as well as contractual liability for the indemnity obligations assumed by the Contractor in the contract. Coverage must be written on an occurrence form.

2. Workers’ compensation insurance at statutory limits, including employers liability coverage

at minimum limits of $1,000,000 each-occurrence, each accident/$1,000,000 by disease each-occurrence/$1,000,000 by disease aggregate.

3. Commercial automobile liability insurance at a minimum combined single limit of $1,000,000

per-occurrence for bodily injury and property damage, including non-owned and hired car coverage and owned vehicles if any are owned.

4. Umbrella liability or following-form excess liability at minimum limits of $

each-occurrence/$ aggregate where applicable in any underlying coverage. Coverage must be at least as broad as the underlying commercial general liability, auto liability, and employer’s liability.

5. Pollution Legal Liability—

a) Project costs of $1,000,000 to $10,000,000 and over $10,000,000 b) Contractors Pollution Liability:

$ per-claim/ $ aggregate (applies to operations that include the use, application, or consumption of pollutants)

Retro date shall not be later than the inception date of contract Contractual liability coverage to be included in contractor’s pollution liability

coverage c) Environmental Liability (Asbestos and removal of other hazardous materials and/or

repair, maintenance, installation, construction operations that are high hazard) $5,000,000 per- claim/$10,000,000 aggregate minimum Retro date shall not be later than the inception date of contract Contractual liability coverage to be included in contractor’s pollution liability

coverage At a minimum, coverage must apply to on-premises and transit operations

Page 2

6. Professional liability for design build contractors, engineers, and architects at minimum limits of $ per-claim/$ aggregate. The retro date shall not be later than the inception date of the contract.

7. Builders Risk—

a) “All-risk” including collapse, flood, and earthquake, to be written on completed value

form. b) Coverage to include limits of at least $250,000 for off-premises storage and transit of

construction materials. Soft costs to be included at a minimum limit of $500,000. c) Thirty (30)-day occupancy clause to apply. d) No testing exclusion should apply.

City of Laredo reserves the right to purchase the builder’s risk coverage at its sole discretion. With reference to the foregoing insurance requirements, Contractor shall specifically endorse applicable insurance policies as follows: 1. City of Laredo shall be named as an additional insured on a primary and non-contributory

basis, regardless of the application of other insurance, with respect to all liability coverages, except for the professional liability and workers’ compensation.

2. All liability policies shall contain no cross-liability exclusions or insured versus insured

restrictions. 3. A waiver of subrogation in favor of City of Laredo shall be contained in all policies. 4. All insurance policies shall be endorsed to require the insurer to immediately notify City of

Laredo of any material change in the insurance coverage. 5. All insurance policies shall be endorsed to the effect that City of Laredo will receive at least

thirty (30) days’ notice prior to cancellation or non-renewal of the insurance. 6. The additional insured coverage in the CGL policy in favor of City of Laredo must apply to

the ongoing operations of Contractor for contract costs or up to $1,000,000 and expanded to include products/completed operation for contract costs in excess of $1,000,000.

7. Required limits may be satisfied by any combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability

insurances. 8. Contractor may maintain reasonable and customary deductibles, subject to approval by City

of Laredo.

9. Insurance must be purchased from insurers that are financially acceptable to City of Laredo with a minimum A.M. Best financial rating of A-:VII.

10. Coverage for commercial general liability, professional liability, and pollution legal liability

must be maintained for at least one (1) to two (2) years after the project is completed.

11. For projects in excess of $10,000,000 in cost, a per-project aggregate limit must be included in the commercial general liability.

Page 3

All insurance must be written on standard ISO or equivalent forms. Certificates of insurance shall be prepared and executed by the insurance company, or its authorized agent, shall be furnished to City of Laredo within five (5) business days of being notified of the award of the contract, and shall contain provisions representing and warranting the following: Shall set forth all endorsements and insurance coverages according to requirements and

instructions contained herein. Shall specifically set forth the notice-of-cancellation or termination provisions to City of

Laredo.

Copies of all required endorsements must be attached to the certificate of insurance. The certificates of insurance must be updated and resubmitted to the City of Laredo to show renewal coverages, as applicable, at least thirty (30) days prior to expiration of any one or more policies.

Upon request, Contractor shall furnish City of Laredo with certified copies of all insurance policies.

BONDS (APPLIES TO MAJOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS)

Bonds are required for public works contracts under the following circumstance: 1. Payment and Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, each in a personal

sum equal to 100% of the contract cost. 2. A Bid Bond is also required in the amount of the bid submitted to the City of Laredo.

All of the above requirements are minimum, as referenced, and may be modified at the sole discretion of the City of Laredo.

Page 4

CITY OF LAREDO RECOMMENDED INSURANCE PROVISIONS FOR

CONSTRUCTION, REPAIR, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTORS CONTRACT COST TYPE OF INSURANCE LIMITS Less than $1,000,000 Umbrella Liability Not Required Professional Liability $1,000,000 Per-Claim/ $2,000,000 Aggregate $1,000,000 to $5,000,000 Umbrella Liability $4,000,000 Per-Occ/ Professional Liability $1,500,000 Per-Claim/ $3,000,000 Aggregate $5,000,000 to $10,000,000 Umbrella Liability $9,000,000 to $10,000,000 Per-Occ Professional Liability $1,500,000 Per-Claim/ $3,000,000 Aggregate to $2,000,000 Per- Claim/$4,000,000 Aggregate Over $10,000,000 Umbrella Liability $10,000,000 or Higher Professional Liability $2,000,000 Per-Claim/ $4,000,000 Aggregate or Higher $1,000,000 to $10,000,000 Contractor’s Pollution Liability $1,000,000 Per-Claim/ $2,000,000 Aggregate Over $10,000,000 Contractor’s Pollution Liability $2,000,000 Per-Claim/ $4,000,000 Aggregate

TAIL COVERAGE

$1,000,000 to $5,000,000 CGL, PL, and PLL One (1) Year Over $5,000,000 CGL, PL and PLL Two (2) Years Any Contract Size Hazardous Environmental Work Two (2) Years

CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE

The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he/she has obtained all the insurance required under this paragraph and such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his/her Sub-Contract until the insurance required of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. a. Compensation Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this Contract Workmen's Compensation Insurance as required by applicable State or Territorial law for all of his/her employees to be engaged in work at the site of the project under this Contract and, in case of any such work sublet, the 5 Contractor shall require the Subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in such work unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the Contractor's Workmen's Compensation Insurance. In the case where any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this Contract and is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, The Contractor shall provide and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide adequate employee's liability insurance for the protection of such of his/her employee as are not otherwise protected. b. Contractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle Liability Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during the life of his Contract: Contractor's Public Liability Insurance, Contractor's Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle Liability Insurance in the amount of not less than $1,000,000 for bodily injury, including accidental death, to any one person and an amount not less than $1,000,000 on account of any one occurrence: Property Damage in the amount not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $1,000,000 aggregate; and Vehicle Liability of $1,000,000 for any one person or $1,000,000 for each occurrence. c. Subcontractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle Liability Insurance: The Contractor shall either (1) require each of his/her Subcontractor to procure and shall maintain during the life of his /her Subcontractor, Subcontractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle Liability Insurance of the type and in the amount specified in Subparagraph b. above or, (2) insure the activities of his/her Subcontractors in his/her policy specified in Subparagraph b. above. d. Scope of Insurance and Special Hazards: The insurance required under Subparagraph b. and c. above shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his/her Subcontractor's, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by any one directly or indirectly employed by him/her and also against any of the special hazard which may be encountered in the performance of this Contract. e. Builder's Risk Insurance (Fire and Extended Coverage): Unless otherwise provided by the Owner, the Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this Contract Builder's Risk Insurance (Fire and Extended Coverage on a 100 percent (100%)

completed value basis on the insurable portion of the project. The Owner, the Contractor, and Subcontractor (as their interests may appear), shall be named as the Insured. f. Proof of Carriage of Insurance: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and dates of expiration of policies. Such certificates shall also contain substantially the following statement: "The Insurance covered by this certificate will not be cancelled or materially altered, except after ten (10) days written notice has been received by the Owner". The Owner, the Contractor, and Subcontractor (as their interests may appear), shall be named as the Insured. g. The City of Laredo shall be named as an additional insured with respect to General Liability and Automobile Liability. A blanket waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Laredo shall be contained in the Workers Compensation, and all liability policies.

CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE

To: CITY OF LAREDO__________Date:_________________________ Owner 1110 Houston Street; Laredo, Texas 78040 Project: _______________________________________

This is to certify that ___________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Name & Address of Insured and telephone number is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, and further, hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policies used by this company, and further, hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted on reverse side hereof.

TYPE OF INSURANCE __________________________________________________________________ Policy No. ________________________ Effective _________________________ Expires: __________________________ Limits of availability: _______________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ Workmen's Compensation: _____________________________________________________ Public 1 Person: $ ___________________ Liability: ____________________ 1 Accident: $ _________________ Contingent Liability: _________________________________________________ Property Damage: _____________________________________________________ Builder's Risk: ______________________________________________________ Automobile: ________________________________________________ Other: _____________________________________________________

The foregoing policies (do) (do not) cover all subcontractors Locations covered: ____________________________________________ Descriptions of Operations covered: ______________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or cancelled by the insurer in less than five days after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation. WITNESS: ___________________________ Contractor/Firm (Typed) __________________ ______________________ Name Signature ________________ _______________________ Address Signature (Typed) Title: _________________ ___________________________ Address ____________________________ City/State/Zip Code ____________________________ Telephone Number: ___________________________ Fax Number

1

NOTICE OF AWARD Project: City of Laredo


The City of Laredo has considered the bids submitted for the above described project in response to its advertisement for bids dated __________, and ____________, and related information to Bidders. You are hereby notified that your bid in the net amount of $___________ has been favorable considered for the project by the City Council at its regular council meeting on ____________. Pursuant to the information to Bidders you are asked to sign the proposed Contract (in five duplicate originals) and to return the same, along with the required Certificate of Insurance, and Payment Bond and Performance Bond within ten (10) days of your receipt of this Notice, for the approval and signature of the City Manager. For the purpose of effective date of the required Certificate of Insurance, and the Performance Bond and the Payment Bond, the date of _______________, may be considered the date of the contract, if the Documents are approved by the City Manager. If you fail to submit the signed Contract Performance and Payment Bonds, and the Certificate of Insurance within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice, your bid will be considered as withdrawn and your bid bond will be forfeited, unless an extension for submittals has been requested in writing and approved by the City. The Construction Contract time of 180 Working Days is to be strictly adhered to per Division B Section 1 and contractor agrees to pay penalty for late completion an amount of $850.00 for each consecutive day exceeding the contract time allotted. You are asked to acknowledge receipt of this Notice by signing in the appropriate place below. Dated this the ______ day of ____________ of _______. CITY OF LAREDO UTILITIES DEPT. Riazul I. Mia, P.E., CFM Director Utilities _______________________________ ACKNOWLEDGMENT: Receipt of this Notice is hereby acknowledged _________________ Dated this ______________________ __________________________________ Authorized Signature Title:______________________________ Div-A Notice of Award

1

NOTICE TO PROCEED

Date: To: Project: City of Laredo


In accordance with the construction contract dated you are hereby authorized to proceed on________________________________________. Contract time is 180 Working Days including material handling and inventory.

CITY OF LAREDO UTILITIES DEPT.

Riazul I. Mia, P.E., CFM Director Utilities

The above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by on this the day of . Authorized Signature Typed Name: Title:

Page 1 of 1

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY Project: City of Laredo


Awarded by the City Council: I, the undersigned, Kristina Laurel Hale, City Attorney the duly authorized and acting legal representative of THE CITY OF LAREDO, do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the attached Contract(s) and Surety bonds and the manner of execution thereof, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid Agreements has been duly executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that said representatives have full power and authority to execute said Agreements on behalf of the respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing Agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the parties executing the same in accordance with terms, conditions, and provisions thereof. Kristina Laurel Hale, City Attorney Date:

1

DIVISION B SECTION 1

CONTRACT TIME & LIQUIDATED DAMAGES



The Contract Performance for this project shall be 180 Working Days as defined in the Specifications under General Provisions, Division C, Section 1. The time set forth in the proposal for the completion of the work is an essential element of the Contract. For each day under the conditions described in the preceding Paragraph that any work shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the days specified in the Contract, together with any additional days allowed, the amount per day given in the following schedule will be deducted from the money due or to become due the Contractor, as a penalty for late completion of the specified work.

FOR AMOUNT OF CONTRACT

From More Than To and Including Amount of Penalty Per Day over Contract Time

$0 $100,000 $200 100,000 500,000 400 500,000 1,000,000 550

1,000,000 2,000,000 700 2,000,000 5,000,000 850 5,000,000 10,000,000 1,200 10,000,000 15,000,000 1,500 15,000,000 20,000,000 1,700 20,000,000 Over 20,000,000 2,500

1

DIVISION B

SECTION 2 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE

PROJECT: City of Laredo


1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, religion, color, sex or natural origin. The Contractor will take Affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, creed, color or national origin. Such action shall include, but not limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection of training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause.

2. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or

on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex or natural origin.

3. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which

he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or worker’s representative of the Contractor’s commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246, as amended (3CFR 169 (1974) and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

4. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246, as

amended, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. 5. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order

No. 11246, as amended, and by the rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders.

6. In the event of the Contractor’s noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of

this Contract or with any of such rules, regulations or orders, this Contract may be

2

canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoke as provided in Executive Order No. 11246, as amended or by rule, regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.

7. The Contractor will include the Provisions of Paragraph 1 through 7 in every

Subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, so that such provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or Vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any Subcontract or Purchase Order, as the contracting may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a Subcontractor or Vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States.

1

DIVISION B

SECTION 4

INSPECTION BY CITY



The work covered by these Specifications shall at all times be subject to inspection by the City of Laredo (City) authorized inspectors. The Contractor shall furnish the City Inspector with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether the work performed is substandard and deviates from the requirements of the plans and specifications. The City Inspector shall have the authority to halt the construction of any portion of the work not meeting requirements until such time as said work has been corrected to the satisfaction of the Inspector and the Engineer. City’s normal working hours are Monday through Friday from 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. The contractor shall notify the City at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance for any work that is to be scheduled beyond the limits of the City’s working hours, and the Contractor shall not begin any such work scheduled unless proper inspection and/or testing has been pre-arranged with the City, with the cost for such inspection beyond the City’s working hours borne by the Contractor. The City Inspector’s overtime rate shall be $64.57 per hour.

1 of 2

DIVISION B

SECTION 5

PROJECT SIGN The general contractor shall erect two (2) signs, unless otherwise noted by the Director Utilities, at the project site identifying the project and indicating that the City of Laredo is participating in the development of the project. The project signs shall be substantially in accordance with the drawing printed on the following page and shall be made from ¾ inch plywood, placed in a prominent location and maintained in good condition until completion of the project. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF THE PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SIGN WHEN THE WORK HAS BEEN COMPLETED

Page 2 of 2

Project Sign

CITY OF LAREDO, TEXAS

CITY OF LAREDO

NORTH LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT ADMINISTRATION BUILDING


Honorable Pete Saenz, Mayor

Charlie San Miguel Mayor Pro Tempore Alberto Torres, Jr. Council Member Rudy Gonzalez, Jr. Council Member Nelly Vielma Council Member Vidal Rodriguez Council Member George J. Altgelt Council Member Alejandro Perez, Jr Council Member Roberto Balli Council Member Horacio A. De Leon, Jr., City Manager (956) 791-7300

Riazul I. Mia, P.E.,CFM, Director Utilities (956) 721-2000

Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc. 1820 Houston Street Laredo, Texas, 78040 956-725-1985 Office Website: www.saarchitects.net

Contractor’s Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number Fax Number

NOTE: Signs are to be installed in ground on 4” x 4” posts

Blue borders White background Red letter Two (2) project signs are required - 4’ x 8’ per graphic abv.

CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE SIGNS UPON COMPLETION OF PROJECT

1

DIVISION B

SECTION 7

ILLEGAL DUMPING

The general contractor shall not dispose of any material whatsoever taken from the project site, onto any areas not considered to be legal dump sites. Materials such as broken concrete, asphalt, rebar, trash, etc. are to be disposed of properly, i.e. at the city landfill or as directed by the city engineer. Unless otherwise noted, no material, including dirt, is to be dumped or place into an existing creek or channel. The general contractor is hereby instructed to contact John Porter, P.E. at the City Environmental Dept. at 956-794-1650 for additional information on illegal dumping city ordinances.

Definition of Terms Page 1 of 3

DEFINITION OF TERMS C-1.01 DEFINITION OF TERMS:

Whenever the terms defined herein occur on the Plans, in any other documents or instrument herein contemplated or to which the Specifications apply, the intent and meaning shall be as follows:

C-1.02 OWNER: (Or Party of the First Party):

The individual, firm corporation or the political subdivision for whom the facilities covered by these Plans and Specifications are to be constructed.

C-1.03 CONTRACTOR: (Or Party of the Second Part):

The individual, firm or corporation with whom the Contract is made by the Owner.

C-1.04 ENGINEER:

Engineer/consultant employed by the Owner, or such other Engineer, or Supervisor authorized by the Engineer/Consultant or the Owner to act on their behalf.

C-1.05 CONSULTANT:

Licensed Engineer or Architect employed by the Owner, and authorized by the Engineer/consultant or the Owner to act on their behalf. The decisions by the Engineer/consultant are final.

C-1.06 BIDDER:

An individual, firm or corporation submitting a proposal. C-1.07 SUPERINTENDENT:

An authorized representative of the Contractor. C-1.08 INSPECTOR:

An authorized representative of the Owner and Engineer C-1.09 LABORATORY:


A testing laboratory approved by the Owner and Engineer. C-1.10 CONTRACT:

The Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor covering the furnishing of all materials and labor necessary to complete the work and consisting of the Plans and Specifications, together with such supplemental agreements as may be made from time to time.

C-1.11 WORKING DAY:

A “Working Day” is defined as any day not including Saturdays, Sundays, or any legal holidays, observed by the City of Laredo, in which weather or other conditions, not under the control of the Contractor, will permit construction of the principal units of work for a continuous period of not less than seven (7) hours. If the contractor opts to work on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday requiring construction inspection, said days are considered working days and charged to the contract time.

C-1.12 WORK:

All structures, services, machinery, equipment, or other facilities that are described in the Plans and Specifications together with such additions or modifications as may be ordered by the Owner from time to time.

C-1.13 WORK, ORDER, OR NOTICE TO PROCEED:

A document authorized by the Owner and issued by the Engineer directing the Contractor to proceed on all or part of the work and a specified date.

C-1.14 CHANGE ORDER:

A supplemental agreement adding to or modifying the Contract, including such additional Plans and Specifications as necessary to properly describe the required change.

C-1.15 SURETY:

The corporate body which is bound with the Contractor for the faithful performance of the work covered by the Contract.

C-1.16 PLANS:

The drawings published by the Engineer showing the locations, character, dimensions and details of the work which are part of the Contract.


C-1.17 SPECIFICATIONS: The directions, provisions and requirements contained herein pertaining to the method and manner of performing the work, or to the quantities, or to the qualities of materials to be furnished under the Contract. The term “Specifications” shall be deemed to include the Contract Documents, the Special Provisions, the General Provision, and the Technical Provisions as contained herein, together with all supplemental agreements and change orders. Specifications are part of the Contract. Plans take precedence over Specifications if in conflict.

C-1.18 CALENDAR DAYS:

A “Calendar Day” is defined as any day of the week inclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays.

Definition of Abbreviations Page 1 of 2

DEFINITION OF ABBREVIATIONS C-2.01 DEFINITION OF ABBREVIATIONS:

Whenever the abbreviations defined herein occur on the Plans, in the Specifications, Contract, Bond, advertisement, Proposal, or in any other Instrument herein contemplated or to which the Specifications apply or may apply, the intent and meaning shall be as follows:

A.S.H.O American Association of State Highways Official

HP Horsepower K.W. Kilowatt Am. or Amp. Ampere KVA Kilovolt A.S.T.M. American Society for Testing Materials In. or " Inch or Inches Lin. Linear Asph. Asphalt Lb. or # Pound Ave. Avenue A.W.W.A. American Waterworks Association Max. Maximum Min. Minimum MH Manhole I.P. Iron Pin B & S. Bell and Spigot Mono. Monolithic Blvd. Boulevard No. Number B.T.U. British Thermal Unit % Percent B.M. Bench Mark PL Property Line C.I. Cast Iron R. Radius C.C.C. Center to Center Rein. Reinforced or reinforcing C/G Curb & Gutter C.L. Center Line V.G. Valley Gutter Con. or Conc. Concrete Rem. Remove C.S.P. Concrete Sewer Pipe Rep. Replace

Definition of Abbreviations Page 2 of 2

C.M. Circular Mil R.C.S.D.P. Reinforced Concrete Storm Drain Pipe C.F.M. Cubic Feet per Minute C.O. Cleanout R.P.M. Revolutions per minute Cond. Conduit Minute Corr. Corrugated ROW or R of W Right of Way Cu. Cubic Vol. Volume Culv. Culvert S.S. Sanitary Sewer Dia. Diameter S.D. Storm Drain D.S. Double Strength Sq. Square Dr. Driveway Std. Standard Elev. or El. Elevation T.H.D. Texas Highway Department F. Fahrenheit V.C.P. Vitrified Clay Pipe Ft. or ' Foot or Feet V Volt Gal. Gallon Yd. Yard S.O.P . Secretaria de Obras Publicas (Mexican Secretaries of Public Works) Tex. D.O.T., or TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation

l Instruction to Bidders Page 1 of 3

INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS C-3.01 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL PROVISIONS, AND SITE OF WORK:

Submission of a Bid shall constitute prima facie evidence that the Bidder has carefully examined the site of the proposed work, the Bid, Contract Forms, Plans and Specifications, and has satisfied himself as to the character, quality, and quantity of work to be performed, materials to be furnished, and as to the requirements of these Specifications, Special Provisions, and Contract.

Any information on the Plans or in the Specifications as to the soil, or material borings, or tests of existing materials, or location of existing utilities is for the convenience of the Bidder. The accuracy of the information is not guaranteed, and no claims for extra work or damages will be considered if it is found during construction that the actual conditions or locations vary from those indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications.

C-3.02 INTERPRETATION OF ESTIMATES:

Any estimate of quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished in the proposal or on the Plans is given only as a basis of comparison of Bids and the Award of the Contract. Such estimate is the result of careful calculation and is believed to be correct, but the Owner does not expressly, or by implication, agree that the actual quantities involved will correspond exactly therewith, nor shall the Bidder plead misunderstanding or deception because of such estimate of quantities, or of the character, location or other conditions pertaining to the work. Payment to the Contractor under unit price contracts will be made only for the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and it is understood that the quantities may be increased or diminished as hereinafter provided without in any way invalidating the unit bid prices.

C-3.03 PREPARATION OF BID:

The Bidder shall submit his bid on the forms furnished by the Owner. All blank space in the bid form shall be filled in for each and every item for which quantity is given, and the Bidder shall state the price (typed, or written in ink, both in words and numerals for which he proposed to do each item of work. In case of conflict between words and numerals, the words will govern.

The Bid shall be signed in ink by the person or persons making, or authorized to make the bid. If the Bid is offered by an individual, his name and post office address shall be given. If the proposal is offered by a firm or partnership, the name and post office address of each member of the firm or partnership shall be


given. If the Bid is offered by a corporation, the name and title of the person signing the Bid, and the post office address of the corporation shall be given.

Any person signing a Bid as agent must file with the Owner legal evidence that he has the authority to do so, and that the signature is binding upon the firm or corporation.

C-3.04 REJECTION OF BID:

A bid showing any alterations or of words or figures, erasures, additions not called for, alternate bids not called for, incomplete bids, condition bids, not accompanied by bid guaranty as required, will be considered as an irregular bid and may be rejected. The Owner reserves the right to waive technicalities as to changes, alterations, or reservations, and to make the award to the best interest of the Owner.

C-3.05 PROPOSAL GUARANTY:

Each Bid shall be accompanied a certified check, cashier’s check or bid bond in the amount of five (5%) percent of the total amount bid. Checks shall be made payable unconditionally to the Owner.

C-3.06 DELIVERY OF BID:

Each Proposal must be an original and must be sealed, together with the bid guaranty, in an envelope plainly marked with the name of the project as shown on the Notice to Bidders, and the name and address of the Bidder. When submitted by mail, this envelope shall be placed in another envelope addressed as indicated in the Notice to Bidders.

Only those proposals actually in the hands of the designated official at the time set in the Notice to Bidders shall be considered. Bids submitted by telephone, telegraph or fax, will NOT be considered.

C-3.07 WITHDRAWAL OF BID:

A Bidder may withdraw his proposal provided he submits to the official designated to receive bids his request in writing to do so prior to the time set for opening of bids.

C-3.08 PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS:

Proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud at the time and place set in the Notice to Bidders.

C-3.09 COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS:


Before any Contract is awarded, the Owner may require the Bidder to furnish a complete statement of his financial resources. His experience in similar work, his equipment available for the work proposed, or any other information necessary to establish his competency and reliability as a Contractor.

C-3.10 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER:

Any of the following causes may be considered as sufficient for the disqualification of the Bidder and the rejection of his Proposal:

More than one proposal for the same work from an individual or corporation under the same of different name. Evidence of collusion among Bidders.

An unbalanced Proposal.

Failure to submit a unit price for each item of work shown on the Proposal.

Lack of competency as revealed by the financial statement, experience record, or plant and equipment statement furnished.

Lack of responsibility as shown by past work judged from the standpoint of workmanship and progress.

Uncompleted work which, in the judgment of the Owner, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of additional work if awarded.

Being in arrears on existing Contracts.

Having defaulted on a previous Contract.

C-3.11 MATERIALS GUARANTY:

Before any Contract is awarded, the Owner may require the Bidder to furnish a complete statement of the origin, composition or manufacturer of any and all materials proposed to be used in the work, together with samples, which may be subjected to tests to determined their quality and fitness for the work.

Award and Execution of Contract Page 1 of 3

AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT C-4.01 CONSIDERATION OF Bids:

For the purpose of award, after the proposals are opened and read, the bids considered the most advantageous to the Owner will be carefully studied. The bids will then be compared and the results made public. Until the award of the Contract is made, the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waiver technicalities, to advertise for new proposals, or to proceed to do the work otherwise when the best interests of the Owner will be thereby promoted.

C-4.02 AWARD TO CONTRACT:

Contract will not be awarded until the necessary investigations as to the competency of the low bidder are made. Award of Contract will be made by the Owner, upon recommendation by the Engineer, to the lowest responsible bidder meeting the requirements of the Owner. Award of Contract will be made within sixty (60) days after the opening of proposals, unless stated otherwise in the Notice to Bidders.

C-4.03 RETURN OF BID GUARANTIES:

As soon as the bid price has been compared the Engineer may, at his discretion, return the proposal guaranties accompanying in those proposals which, in his judgment, will not be considered in making the award. When award is made, the successful bidder’s proposal guaranty only will be retained until after Contract and Bond have been executed.

C-4.04 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND:

With ten (10) days after Notification of Award of Contract, the successful bidder shall execute and file with the Owner a separate surety and payment bond as required by Chapter 93 of the Acts of the Regular Session of the 56th Legislature of Texas, in the full amount of the contract price as a guarantee of the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations which may be incurred for material and labor used in the work. Bonds shall be executed by a surety company authorized to do business in the State of Texas on the bond forms provided in these Documents. Any surety shall be subject to the approval of the Owner.


C-4.05 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT:

Within ten (10) days after Notification of Award of contract, the successful bidder shall sign and place in the hands of the Owner the necessary agreement entering into a Contract with the Owner.

C-4.06 NOTICE TO PROCEED:

The Notice to Proceed shall be issued within ten (10) days of the execution of the Agreement by the City provided that the Contractor has properly executed and submitted all Documents required by the City of Laredo within the same period of time. Should there be reasons why the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued within such period, the time may be extended by mutual agreement between the City and Contractor. If the Contractor has submitted all Documents required and the Notice to Proceed has not been issued within the ten (10) day period or within the time extension, the Contractor may terminate the Agreement without further liability on the part of either party. Furthermore, should the Contractor fail to execute all the requirements within this same ten (10) days period or within the time extension, the City may terminate the Agreement.

C-4.07

The City of Laredo may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the City all such information and data for this purpose as the City may request.

C-4.08 APPROVAL OF CONTRACT:

No Contract shall be binding upon the Owner until it has been signed by the Owner and returned to the Contractor.

C-4.09 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT:

Failure to comply with any of the requirements of these Specifications, to execute Contract within ten (10) days after notification of work, or to furnish surety as required, shall be just cause for the annulment of the award. In case of annulment of award, the proposal guaranty shall become the property of the Owner, not as penalty, but as a liquidated damage.


C-4.10

After the Notice to Proceed is issued, the Owner shall provide the Contractor with three (3) complete sets of Plans and Specifications for Contractor’s use during construction. In the case that additional sets are required, the Contractor shall make arrangements to obtain the extra sets at his own expense.

C-4.11 RESPONSE TIME DURING THE PROSECUTION OF THE PROJECT:

The contractor shall furnish the owner with three (3) local telephone numbers where contractor or a responsible representative of contractor can be reached at any and all time during the prosecution of this project, and especially during weekends or holidays. Failure of contractor to respond to any such emergency which causes city personnel, equipment and materials to be used in such emergency will result in the contractor being charged an amount which shall be twice the cost incurred by the City in using personnel, equipment and materials to handle such emergency due to failure of the contractor to do so, and, in addition, the contractor will be charged a penalty of $500.00 for each emergency to which it does not respond. In this connection, “failure to respond” means the failure of the contractor to respond to telephone calls from the relevant staff or owner.

Scope of Work Page 1 of 3

SCOPE OF WORK C-5.01 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

It is the intent of the Plans and Specifications to describe the complete work to be performed under the Contract. Except as provided on the Plans or in the Specifications, it is also the intent that the Contractor shall furnish all materials, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

C-5.02 CHANGES AND INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES OF WORK:

The Owner has the right to make such changes and alterations in the Plans or in the quantities of work as he may consider necessary or desirable, and such changes and alterations shall not be considered as a waiver of any condition of the Contract, nor shall they invalidate any provision thereof. The Contractor shall perform the work as increased or decreased, and no allowance will be made for anticipated profits.

Payment to the contractor will be made for the actual quantities of work done and materials furnished at the unit prices as set forth in the Contract, except as follows:

When the total cost of work to be done, or of materials to be furnished, is more than one hundred and twenty-five 125 percent of the total contract price for the item stated in the Proposal, then either party to the Contract, upon demand, shall be entitled to a revised consideration on that portion of the work above one hundred and twenty-five (125%) percent of the total contract price stated in the Proposal.

When the total cost of work to be done, or of materials to be furnished, is less than seventy-five (75%) percent on the total contract price for the item stated in the Proposal, then either party to the Contract, upon demand, shall be entitled to a revised consideration on the work actually done.

Revised consideration shall be determined by supplemental agreement between the parties, which supplemental agreement shall be included with, and shall become a party of, the Contract.

C-5.03 OMITTED ITEMS:

The Owner may, in writing, order the omission from the work of any item found unnecessary to the project. Such omission shall be subject to all provisions of Par. C-5.02.


C-5.04 EXTRA WORK:

When the proper completion of the project requires work for which no quantities or prices were shown in the Proposal, such work shall be called “EXTRA WORK” and shall be performed by the Contractor when so directed in writing by the Owner. “EXTRA WORK” shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications and as may be directed by the Engineer.

Prices for extra work shall be itemized and covered by a supplement agreement submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner prior to the starting of such work.

Claims for extra work not authorized in writing by the Owner prior to the performance thereof will be rejected.

C-5.05 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC:

When the work requires partial or complete closing of any driveway, alley, street, or roadway, the Contractor shall so schedule and prosecute his work that traffic will be hindered to a minimum.

C-5.06 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS:

All structures and/or obstructions on the site of the work, which are not to remain in place or which are not to be used in the new construction shall be removed as directed by the Engineer. Such items of removal are not listed in the Proposal will not be paid for as separate items; the cost of doing such work shall be included in the unit price bid for other items.

C-5.07 TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES:

When special wrenches, gauges, or other special tools or accessories are required to properly maintain and operate any machine or equipment furnished under this Contract, the furnishing of such tools and accessories shall be deemed to have been included in the Contract and they shall be furnished by the Contractor without extra cost to the Owner.

C-5.08 GUARANTEES:

All structural, mechanical and electrical equipment or instrument shall be guaranteed against mechanical and physical defects, leakage, breakage, or other damage occurring during normal operation for a period of one (1) year after such equipment or instruments have been accepted by the Owner. The Contractor shall


promptly repair or make good, at his own expense, any defect in such equipment or instruments.

C-5.09 GENERAL GUARANTEE:

All work included in the Contract shall be guaranteed against faulty material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the work has been accepted by the Owner.

Neither final acceptance of the work, nor final payment thereof, nor occupancy and use of the work by the Owner shall constitute a waiver of the Owner’s right to require the Contractor to repair or make good any such faulty materials or workmanship.

C-5.10 FINAL CLEANING UP:

Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall remove from the site all machinery, equipment, tools, and materials and shall dispose of all rubbish, temporary structures, and surplus backfill. The site shall be left in a neat and presentable condition throughout. Any land area, driveway, sidewalk, alley, street or road (concrete or asphalt) which has been cut or disturbed during the prosecution of the work shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense to a condition at least as good or better as originally existed.

C-5.11 EXISTING STRUCTURES:

The Plans show the locations of all known surfaces and subsurface structures. However, the exact location of gas mains, water mains, conduits, sewer etc., is unknown and the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any of these structures on the Plans or to show them in their exact location. It is mutually agreed such failure will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever, unless the obstruction encountered is such as necessitates, or requires the building of special work, provision for which is not made in the Plans and Proposal, in which case the provisions in these Specifications for extra work shall apply.

Control of Work and Materials Page 1 of 6

CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS C-6.01 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER:

The work will be observed, tested and inspected by the Engineer, and performed to his satisfaction, in accordance with the Contract, Plans and Specifications. The Engineer will decide all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished and work performed, as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of said work, as to the interpretation of the Plans or Specifications relating to the work, as to the fulfillment of the Contract on the part of the Contractor and to the rights of different Contractors on the project.

The decisions of the City Engineer will be final.

C-6.02 CITY ENGINEER AS REFEREE:

The City Engineer will act as referee in all questions, arising under the terms of the Contract between the parties thereto, and his decisions shall be final and binding.

C-6.03 ADEQUACY OF DESIGN:

It is understood that the Owner selected the Engineer named herein to prepare the Plans and Specifications, and all supplements thereto, and it is agreed that the Owner will be responsible for the adequacy of the design, sufficiency of the Plans and Specifications, and safety of structures, provided the Contractor has complied with said Plans and Specifications, all modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereto approved by the Engineer. The burden of proof shall be upon the contractor to show that he has fully complied with the Plans and Specifications, all modifications thereof, and all additions and alterations thereof.

C-6.04 PLANS:

Plans will show the lines, grades, cross sections, details and general features of the work. Where shop drawings or working drawings are required, they shall be furnished by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Authorized alterations to the Plans will be endorsed on approved copies of the Plans or shown on supplementary sheets.

The approval by the Engineer of the Contractor’s shop drawings or working drawings will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility under the Contract.

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with such blue print copies of shop drawings or working drawings as may be required for approval and for the purposes of supervision.


The contract price shall include the cost of furnishing all such prints.

C-6.05 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS:

The finished work shall conform with the lines, grades, cross sections, details and dimensions shown on the Plans. Such deviations from the Plans as may be required will, in all cases, be determined by the Engineer and authorized in wiring.

C-6.06 COORDINATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENTS:

The Plans, Specifications, and supplemental agreements are essential parts of the Contract, and a requirement occurring in one is as binding as though occurring in all. In case of disagreement, Plans shall govern over “Technical Provisions,” and “Special Provisions” shall govern over “Technical Provisions.” The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission on the Plans or Specifications. In the event the Contractor discovers any apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call upon the Engineer for his interpretation and decision, and such decision shall be final.

C-6.07 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR:

The Contractor shall give the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer and with other Contractors in every way possible.

The Contractor shall have on the work at all times, a satisfactory and competent English-speaking Superintendent, authorized to receive order, and act for him as his agent. The Contractor shall designate to the Engineer in writing the name of such Superintendent, and the designated Superintendent may not be removed from the work without the written permission of the Engineer.

C-6.08 CONSTRUCTION STAKES:

The Contractor shall furnish and set at his own expense any and all construction stakes and blue tops as seems necessary for the satisfactory prosecution of the work.

Any missing construction stakes which have been destroyed by the different utility companies, vandals and/or the contractor at the time of construction will be replaced by the contractor at this own expense.


The Engineer may, at his option, make spot or complete checks on all construction alignment and grades to determine the accuracy of the contractor’s survey work. These checks, however, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility of constructing the work to the lines and grades as shown on the plans or approved change orders. Computations, sketches, and other drawings used in the design and layout of this project will be made available to the Contractor, however these items will not relieve the contractor of his responsibility.

C-6.09 QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS:

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all quantities of materials shown on the Plans before ordering such materials. Payment is provided for acceptable materials, and materials rejected due to improper fabrication or excess quantity or other reasons within the control of the Contractor will not be paid for regardless of the quantities or dimension shown on the Plans.

C-6.10 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS:

The sources of supply of materials shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Representative samples of materials proposed for use shall be submitted, if required, for examination and testing by an independent testing laboratory selected by the City.

Results obtained from testing such samples may be used for preliminary approval, but will not be used as final acceptance of materials. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation or use.

If at any time, it is found that sources of supply which have been approved do not furnish a product of uniform quality, or if the product becomes unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from another source.

Any material, which after approval has for any reason become unfit for use, shall not be incorporated into the work.

C-6.11 SAMPLES AND TESTS:

Samples and testing procedures shall conform to the requirements of appropriate designations of the American Association of State Highway Officials or the American Society for Testing Materials.

Test for determining the fitness of materials; tests for the purpose of obtaining preliminary approval of materials; tests for determining concrete mixes will be at the expense of the Contractor. Tests for the actual control of the work, such as soil compacting tests and concrete compressive strength test, will be at the expense of the Owner. Any and all retesting because of failure in soil compaction


or concrete compressive strength tests shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. Tested and accepted subgrade shall be covered and protected with the flexible base within a maximum of seven (7) days. Tested and accepted flexible base shall be primed and cured a minimum of seventy two (72) hours and shall be cured with asphalt within seven (7) days. Failure to comply with the seven (7) days limitations may result in the need for re-testing at the Contractors expense depending on weather conditions and at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as the Engineer may require for conducting field tests and collecting and forwarding samples. All sampling and testing shall be under the control of the Engineer and shall be done in laboratories approved by him.

C-6.12 STORAGE:

Materials shall be stored as to insure the preservation of the quality and fitness for the work. Material which is not, in the opinion of the Engineer, properly stored and protected will not be included as material in hand in the estimates.

C-6.13 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS:

Inspectors employed by the Owner shall be authorized to inspect all work done in any part of the project and all preparation, fabrication, or manufacturer of the materials to be used.

The Inspector shall be authorized to call to the attention of the Contractor any failure of the work or materials to conform to the Specifications or the Plans. He will in no case act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, nor shall he interfere with the management of the work. In the event the Contractor does not comply with the requirements of the Owner and the Engineer, he may stop all work until the non-compliance is corrected.

If the progress of the work becomes unduly delayed because of negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Inspector shall notify the Owner and the Engineer, who may require the Contractor to give reasons for the delay. If it is found that the Contractor is at fault, then it is the prerogative of the Owner to demand correction.

Inspection as provided herein shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work in conformity with the requirements of the Plan and Specifications. No Inspector shall be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge or release any requirements of the Plans and Specifications, or to issue instructions contrary to the Plans and Specifications, or to approve or accept any portion of the work.

The Contractor shall furnish every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work is performed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.


No backfill shall be made unless inspected by the Engineer or the City’s representative designated in writing and verbal approval of field Engineer is given to such work; if the Contractor should backfill any work without such inspection and approval, the Contractor shall remove or uncover such portions of the finished work as may be directed. After examinations, the Contractor shall restore said portion of the work to the standard required by the Plans and Specifications. Should the work thus exposed and examined prove acceptable or unacceptable, the uncovering or removing and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

C-6.14 SUSPENSION OF WORK:

In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the Inspector as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have authority to reject materials or suspend work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer.

If the Contractor refuses to suspend work on verbal order, the Inspector shall issue a written order to suspend work giving the reason for such suspension. After placing the order in the hands of the Contractor’s man in charge, the Inspector shall immediately leave the job. Work done during the absence of the Inspector shall not be paid for.

C-6.15 REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK:

All work which has been rejected or condemned shall be repaired or removed and replaced as the Engineer may direct, at the expense of the Contractor. Materials not conforming to the requirements of the Plans and Specifications shall be removed immediately from the site of the work and replaced with satisfactory material at the expense of the Contractor.

Work done without lines and grades, work done beyond the lines and grade shown on the Plans, work done without inspection, or any extra or unclassified work done without written authority and prior agreement in writing as to the prices will be done at the Contractor’s risk and will be considered unauthorized. At the option of the Engineer, such work may not be measured and paid for, or may be ordered removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

Upon the failure of the Contractor to repair satisfactorily or to remove and replace rejected, unauthorized, or condemned work or materials immediately after receiving formal notice from the Engineer, the Owner may at his own option:

a. Recover for such defective work or materials on the Contractor’s bond, or;


b. Recover from such defective work or materials by action in a court having proper jurisdiction in such matter, or;

c. Employ labor and equipment and satisfactorily repair, or remove and

replace, such defective work or materials and charge the cost of same to the Contractor, which cost will be deducted from any money due him.

C-6.16 DISPUTED CLAIMS FOR EXTRA WORK:

In case the Contractor deems extra compensation is due him for work or materials not clearly covered in the Contract, or not ordered by the Engineer as “EXTRA WORK”, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of his intention to make claim for such extra compensation before he begins the work on which he bases the claim and shall afford the Engineer every facility for keeping actual cost of the work.

Failure on the part of the Contractor to give such notice or to afford the Engineer every facility for keeping account of actual cost of the work shall constitute waiver of the claim for extra compensation. The filing of such notice by the Contractor and the keeping of cost by the Engineer shall not in any way be construed to prove the validity of the claim. Extra work of any kind should only be performed by Contractor upon receipt of an approved Change Order issued by Owner. When the work has been completed, the Contractor shall within ten (10) day file claim for extra compensation with the Engineer, who will present it to the Owner for consideration.

C-6.17 FINAL INSPECTION

Whenever the work provided for under the Contract has been satisfactorily completed and the final cleaning up performed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to make the “Final Inspection”. Such inspection will be made within ten (10) days of such notification. After such final inspection, if the work is found to be satisfactory, the Contractor will be notified in writing of the acceptance of same. No time charge will be made against the Contractor between the date of notification of the Engineer and the date of the final inspection.

Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public , Page 1 of 4

LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC C-7.01 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED:

The Contractor shall make himself familiar with and shall observe and comply with, all Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances and regulations which in any manner affect the conduct of the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Owner’s representative against any claim arising from the violation of any such law, ordinance, or regulation whether by himself or by his employees.

C-7.02 PERMITS AND LICENSES:

The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary to the due and lawful prosecution of the work.

C-7.03 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES:

If the Contractor is required or desires, to use any design, device, material or process covered by letters, patent, or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or Owner of such patent. The Contractor and his surety shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such patented design, device, material, or process, or any trademark or copyright in connection with the work agreed to be performed under this Contract, and shall indemnify the Owner for any costs, expenses, and damages which it may be obliged to pay for reasons of any such infringement at any time during the prosecution, or after the completion of the work.

C-7.04 PUBLIC, SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE:

The safety of the public and the convenience of traffic shall be regarded as of prime importance during construction and provisions thereof, made necessary by the work, shall be the direct responsibility of the Contractor, and shall be performed at his own expense.

Where the Contractor is required to construct temporary crossings for streams, culverts, ditches or trenches, his responsibility for accidents shall include the approaches as well as the structures of such crossing.

C-7.05 SANITARY PROVISIONS:

The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide and maintain in a neat, sanitary condition such accommodations for the use of his employees as may be necessary


to comply with the requirements or the State Department of Health and of other authorities having jurisdiction.

C-7.06 BARRICADES AND WARNING SIGNS:

The Contractor shall furnish and maintain adequate barricades, warning and directing signs, red flags, lights and other traffic control devices as are necessary to comply with the latest edition of the TEXAS MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR STREET AND HIGHWAYS.

All provisions of barricades and warning signs shall be considered an incidental and necessary part of the work and no direct payment will be made therefore. All costs of providing such safe guards shall be included in the prices bid for other parts of the work.

C-7.07 USE OF EXPLOSIVES:

When the use of explosives is necessary in the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall use the utmost care not to endanger life or property. All explosives shall be stored in a secured manner and all storage places shall be marked clearly with the words “DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES”. The method of storing and handling explosives and highly inflammable materials shall conform to the requirements of Federal and State laws and regulations. The Contractor shall not use explosives until he has taken the legal precautions necessary to save harmless the Owner from any claims arising from such use of explosives.

C-7.08 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY:

The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect public or private property which might be injured by any process of construction, and in case of any injury or damage to said property, he shall restore at his own expense the damaged property to a condition similar or equal to the existing before such injury damage was done, or he shall make good such injury or damage in an acceptable manner.

Where the work involves excavation any public or private driveway, alley street or roadway, the Contractor shall do any work necessary to restore such driveway, alley, street or roadway to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such work was done. The Contractor shall be responsible for any subsidence of backfill or pavement failure due to such excavation, and shall promptly repair any such subsidence or failure.

C-7.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES:

The Contractor shall contact the utility company for exact location prior to doing any work that might interfere with or damage present utilities.


The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect existing surface drains, seers, underdrains, conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, and to provide temporary service when service in any of these is interrupted.

When such facilities are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer who will arrange for their removal, if necessary. Any utility lines cut or damaged shall be repaired and restored to working conditions as determined by the Engineer.

C-7.10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS:

The Contractor shall save harmless the Owner from all suits, action in or claims brought on account of any injuries or damages sustained by any person or property in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work by the Contractor; or on account of any claim or amount recovered for any infringement of patent or reward under the “Workmen’s Compensation Laws” or any other laws. He shall be held responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character occurring during the prosecution of the work resulting from any omission, neglect, or misconduct on his part in the manner or method executing the work, or from defective work or materials.

C-7.11 RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK:

Until acceptance of the work by the Engineer, in writing, it shall be under the charges and care of the Contractor. The Contractor shall rebuild and make good at his own expense all injuries and damage to the work occurring before its completion and acceptance. In case of suspension of work for any cause, the Contractor shall be responsible for all the preservation of all materials.

C-7.12 USE OF COMPLETED WORK:

Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any portion of the work is in acceptable conditions, it may be entered upon and used by the Owner upon the written order of the Engineer. Such use shall be held an acceptance of that portion of the work, but not into be considered as a waiver of any of the provisions of these Specifications. Pending final completion and acceptance of the entire work, all necessary repairs and renewal of any part of the work so used, due to defective material or work, to natural causes other than wear and tear, or to the operations of the Contractor, shall be performed by the Contractor at his own expense.

C-7.13 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHT:

Inspection by the Engineer or by any of his duly representatives, any order, measurement, or certificate by the Engineer; any order by the Owner for the payment of money, any payment for or acceptance of any of work, or extension of


time; or any possession taken by the Owner shall not operate as a wavier of any provision of the Contract, or any power therein preserved to the Owner, or of any right to damages therein provided. An waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.

The Owner reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid, and to adjust that or any subsequent estimate to meet the requirements of the Contract. The Owner reserves the right to claim and recover sums as may be sufficient to correct any error or make good any deficit in the work resulting from error, dishonesty, or collusion in the work after the final payment has been made.

C-7.14 RESPONSIBILITIES OF PARTIES AS TO UTILITY WORK:

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to check and coordinate his work with the public and private utility companies which have authority from the City of Laredo to own and operate lines, pipes, conduits, or other means of conveyance within the streets Right-of-Way. The Contractor shall contact the Engineer concerning any and all utility relocation work needed, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to advise the Engineer of any lines or utility poles to be relocated. The Engineer shall assist in coordinating the various utility relocation activities but shall not be responsible for any delays occasioned by this work, although appropriate allowance for additional contract time will be made by the Engineer if warranted. The Owner shall not be responsible for any acts of the Contractor or any damages resulting from work done by the Contractor relating to the removal, alteration, or other activity concerning utilities.

C-7.15 KEY POINTS OF PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY ORDINANCE:

1.) All projects in public R.O.W. must go through Utility Coordination Committee. 2.) All Contractors must be registered at The Building Development Service Department to

be able to work in public R.O.W. Registration Fee $50.00 / yr

3.) All work in Public R.O.W. requires a permit from The Building Development Services Department. Permit cost is $50.00 plus inspection fee of $200.00. Any additional inspections requested after normal working hours of 8 am to 5 pm are charged at $40.00 / hr Monday to Friday. Saturday and Sunday and holidays inspection rates are $70.00 / hr. Permits must be secured prior to pre-construction meeting.

4.) All work done in Public R.O.W. that impedes the flow of traffic or pedestrian path requires a traffic control plan or pedestrian accessibility.

5.) Contractor must provide certificate of insurance. Insurance must be liability, workman compensation and performance bond.

Prosecution and Progress Page 1 of 6

PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS C-8.01 RIGHT-OF-WAY:

The Owner will furnish all and or right-of-way necessary for the performance of the contract and will use due diligence in acquiring land or right-of-way. Should all necessary land or right-of-way not be acquired prior to the beginning of construction, the Contractor shall begin with work upon such land or right-of-way as the Owner may have acquired.

C-8.02 DELAYS DUE TO OWNER:

Should the Owner be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with the work or authorizing its prosecution, either before or after its commencement, by reason of any litigation or by reason of the Owner’s inability to acquire necessary land or right-of-way, the Contractor shall not entitled to make or assert any claim for damage by reason of such delay, or to withdraw from the contract except by consent of Owner.

The time for completion of the work will be extended by such time as determined by the Engineer as will compensate for the time lost by reason of said delay.

C-8.03 SUBLETTING OR ASSIGNING OF CONTRACT:

The “City” does not allow, permit, negotiate, authorize nor approve any assignment of contract proceeds between the “City”, the “Contractor”, and/or with a bank, lending institution or any type of financial institution either before, during or after a contract award.

The “City” agrees to pay the “Contractor” for specified services as stated in the agreed contract. The “City” does not agree to pay any additional party either jointly or separately for the contract under discussion.

C-8.04 SUBCONTRACTING:

The Owner will not recognize any subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them.

C-8.05 PROSECUTION OF WORK:

Prior to beginning of the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer such schedules, charts, or briefs as may be required, outlining the manner of prosecution of the work. The contractor shall begin the work within ten (10) calendar days after the date set in the “Work Order” or notice to proceed and shall continuously prosecute same with such diligence as will enable him to complete the work within the time specified. Upon completion of work submit forms of Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens and Letter for Certificate of Warranty.


FORM LETTER FOR CERTIFICATE OF WARRANTY

DATE:

Riazul I. Mia, P.E.,CFM Director Utilities 5816 Daugherty Ave. Laredo, Texas 78041 Re: Dear Mr. Mia, __________________________ guarantees all materials and workmanship on the above referred project to be free of defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the owner. Upon notice, any defective materials or faulty workmanship developing within this period, will be replace at no cost to the owner. Sincerely, ___________________________ Company Name

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF ______________ Before me, Notary Public for and in __________________ County, State of ____________________ on this personally appeared _________________________ known to me to be person(s) whose name(s) subscribed to the foregoing affidavit and acknowledge to me that he executed the same for the purpose and consideration expressed therein. GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE, THIS _______ DAY OF _____________, _____________. ______________________________________ Notary Public in and for ______________ County, State of __________ My Commission Expires:


AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS AND RELEASE OF LIENS

TO: CITY OF LAREDO PROJECT: WEBB COUNTY, TEXAS By this instrument the undersigned contractor engaged in the construction of the above project certifies that on this date, or anytime prior thereto, except listed below, contractor has paid in full or has otherwise satisfied all obligations for all materials and for all known indebtedness and claims against the project, its land, improvements and equipment of every kind. The undersigned hereby certifies that he has received all payments currently due under his contract for work on the project above referred. Therefore, the undersigned does hereby waive and/or release any and all liens against the property, project and as of the _________ day of ___________, ____________. ________________________________ Company Name STATE OF TEXAS: COUNTY OF ______________: Before me, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared ___________________, known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and being first duly sworn, acknowledge to me that he executed the same for the purposes and consideration therein expressed and declared to me that the statements therein are true. SWORN AND SUBSCRIBED TO BEFORE ME THIS ______________ DAY OF ___________, _____________. NOTARY PUBLIC MY COMMISSION EXIPRES ____________________________


The contractor shall notify the Engineer at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to the beginning at any point. He shall not begin new portions of the work to the detriment of portions already begun.

Owner’s normal working hours are Monday through Friday from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM. The contractor shall notify the owner at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance for any work that is to be scheduled beyond the limits of the owner’s working hours, and he shall not begin any such work schedule unless proper inspection by the Contractor has been pre-arranged with the Owner, with the cost for such work beyond the owner’s working hours borne by the Contractor.

If at any time the methods, equipment, or sequence of operations sued by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of the work or rate of progress required by the contract, the Engineer may in writing order such modifications in the Contractor’s methods, equipment, or sequence of operations as he may deem necessary and the contractor shall comply with such order.

C-8.06 WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT:

All workmen employed by the Contractor shall be skilled and competent. Any person employed by the Contractor who in the opinion of the Engineer does not perform his work in a proper and skillful manner or who is disrespectful, intemperate, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable shall at the written order of the Engineer be immediately removed from the work and shall not be employed again on any part of the work without written consent from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall furnish and use such suitable machinery and equipment as may be required in the opinion of the Engineer to properly prosecute the work. The Contractor shall at the written order of the Engineer remove from the work any equipment found unsuited to properly perform the work.

Upon failure of the Contractor remove the work any person or equipment as ordered by the Engineer, the Engineer may withhold all estimates which have or may become due, or may suspend the work until such orders are complied with.

C-8.07 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK:

The Engineer shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part for such period or periods as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the prosecution of the work or for such time as is necessary due to failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the contract.

If work is stopped for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not become an obstruction nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed.


The Contractor shall not suspend the work without written authority from the Engineer and shall proceed with the work promptly when notified by the Engineer to resume operations.

C-8.08 COMPUTATION OF CONTRACT TIME:

The Contractor shall complete the work within the number of days stated in the contract. The number of days used shall be the number of days from the first day of actual commencement of operations or the 10th day after the date set in the Work Order or Notice to Proceed whichever comes first, and counting that day as the first elapsed day of contract time.

If the completion of the contract requires unforeseen work, or work and materials in greater quantities than those set forth in the proposal, then additional days or suspension of time charge will be allowed the Contractor equal to the time which in the opinion of the Engineers the work as a whole is delayed.

C-8.09 FAILURE TO COMPLETE THE WORK ON TIME:

The time set forth in the proposal for the completion of the work is an essential element of the contract. If the contractor fails to complete the work in the number of contract days specified, a time charge will be made for each day thereafter until the work has been satisfactorily completed.

An amount per day is set forth in the Division B Section 1, and said amount is to be deducted from the amount due the Contractor for each day charged in excess of the number specified, the time charge shall be based on the total days of such delay. Such deductions shall be considered a penalty, and may be used as compensation to the Owner for the added expenses for engineering supervision, testing, inspection, and other costs.

C-8.10 ABANDONMENT OF WORK OR DEFAULT OF CONTRACT:

The Engineer may give notice in writing to the Contractor and his surety of delay, neglect, or default stating which if the Contractor:

- Fails to begin work within the time specified, or fails to perform the work with

sufficient workmen and equipment; - Fails to provide materials of sufficient quantity to insure the completion of the

work within the contract time; or

- Performs the work unsuitable; or

- Neglects or refuses to remove materials or perform new work such as may have been rejected; or


- Discontinues the work without authority; or

- Refuses to suspend or resume operations when so directed by the Engineer; or

- Becomes insolvent or is declared bankrupt; or

- Commits any act of bankruptcy insolvency; or

- Makes an authorized assignment for the benefit of any creditor; or

- Fails from any other cause whatsoever to carry out the work in an acceptable manner.

The ten (10) days after such notice if given, if a satisfactory effort has not been made by the Contractor or his surety to correct such delay, neglect, or default, the Owner may declare the work abandoned and so notify the Contractor and his surety.

After receiving such notification of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the site. The Owner shall have the power and authority without violating the contract to take prosecution of the work out of the hands of the contractor and to appropriate or use any or all materials and equipment on the site as may be suitable and acceptable and enter into an agreement for the completion of the contract according to the terms and provisions thereof, or use such other methods as he may elect for the completion of the contract in an acceptable manner.

All costs and charges incurred by the Owner, together with the cost of completing the work under the contract shall be deducted from any money due or which may become due to the contractor. In the case the cost to the Owner is less than the amount which would have been payable under the contract if it had been completed by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the difference. In case the cost to the Owner exceeds the amount which would have been payable under the contract, if it had been completed by the Contractor, the Contractor and his surety shall be liable and shall pay the Owner the amount of such excess.

Measurement and Payment , Page 1 of 8

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

C-9.01 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES:

All work completed under the Contract will be measured in United States standard measures. Linear and surface measurements will be taken horizontally unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Structures will be measured to the neat lines shown on the Plans.

When any material is cubic yards in the vehicle, such measurement will be made at the point of delivery. The capacity of each vehicle shall be plainly marked on said vehicle and the capacity of marking shall not be changed without written permission of the Engineer. The Engineer shall have authority to require all vehicles to have uniform capacity.

C-9.02 SCOPE OF PAYMENT:

The Contractor shall accept the payment as provided in this Contract as full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work and for performing all work contemplated and embraced under this contract, as full compensation for loss or damage arising from the nature of the work, or from action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the prosecution of the work; as full compensation for all expenses incurred in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of the work; as full compensation for all expenses incurred in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of the work herein specified; as full compensation for expenses incurred in any infringement of patent, trade-mark, or copyright; and as full compensation for completing the work in conformity with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. Payment will be made only on items which are complete, in place, tested and accepted by the owner. Materials on hand shall be considered for payment ONLY when proper PAID invoices are submitted with Contractor’s pay estimates. Materials on hand must be placed in a secured area designed for the project under this contract and be available for inspection by City Engineers at all times. The Contractor must provide an inventory of all materials on a form acceptable to the Engineer/consultant and which must accompany each pay request. The payment of any partial or current estimate shall in no way affect the obligation of the Contractor at his own cost to repair or renew any defective parts of the construction or to replace any defective materials used in the construction and to be responsible for all damages due to such defects. Any items to complete the work indicated on plan shall be considered subsidiary to include positions of work and no further compensation will be made.


No monies payable under this contract, except the estimate for he first month or period, shall become due and payable until the Contractor shall satisfy the Owner that he has fully settled and paid for all materials and equipment used in or upon the work and labor done in connection therewith and the Owner may if he so elects pay and or all bills wholly or in part, and deduct the amount or amounts paid from any estimate(s) except the first estimate.

In event the surety on any bond given by the Contractor becomes insolvent or is placed in the hands of a receiver or has its right to do business in the State revoked by Law, the Owner may if he so elects withhold payment of any or all estimates until the Contractor shall give a good and sufficient bond in lieu of the bond so executed by said surety.

C-9.03 PAYMENT FOR ALTERED QUANTITIES:

When alterations in the Plans or quantities of work not requiring supplemental agreements are ordered and performed, the Contractor shall accept payment in full at the contract price for the actual quantities of work done. No allowance for anticipated profits will be made. Increased or decreased work involving supplemental agreements will be paid for as stipulated in such agreements.

C-9.04 PAYMENT FOR OMITTED ITEMS:

When any item ordered omitted from the Contract, the Contractor shall accept payment in full at the contract price for any work actually performed on such item prior to the date of issuance of such order. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work ordered omitted. Acceptable materials ordered by the Contractor, or delivered on the work prior to the date of issuance of such order will be paid for at the actual cost to the Contractor and shall thereupon become the property of the Owner. The Contractor shall submit immediately certified statements covering all money expended in the preparation for any item ordered omitted and shall be entitle to reimbursement for any money expended in preparation for any items when such preparation is of no value to the remaining items of the Contract.

C-9.05 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK:

Extra work performed under a supplemental agreement will be paid for according to the terms of such supplemental agreement.

Extra work if performed on a force account basis will be paid for as follows:

For all labor and foreman, the Contractor will receive the wage paid on the project for each hour that said labor and foremen are actually engaged on such work to which shall be added the actual cost of premiums for public liability and


workmen’s compensation insurance and social security taxes for the actual amount of such payroll.

For all materials used on such work the Contractor will receive the actual cost of such materials including freight charges.

For machinery and equipment used on such work the Contractor will receive an agreed rental price for each hour that such machinery and equipment is actually used on such work. The agreed price shall include the cost of fuel, lubrication and repairs.

To the sum of the foregoing an amount equal to fifteen (15) percent thereof will be added, as compensation for the use of small tools, Superintendent’s services, timekeeper’s services.

Premium on bond and all other overhead expenses incurred in the prosecution of the extra work including Contractor’s profit. The sum of such payments provided for shall be accepted by the Contractor’s as full compensation as provided in C-9.02.

C-9.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS:

Once a month and within the thirty (30) days after submittal of a correct and complete estimate, the Owner shall make a progress payment to the basis of a duly certified and approved estimate of the work performed during the preceding calendar month under this Contract. To insure the proper performance of the Contract, the Owner shall retain ten (10) percent ** of the amount of each estimate until final completion and acceptance of all work covered by this Contract.

**NOTE Retainage for construction contracts over four hundred

thousand ($400,000) shall be five (5) percent.

In the event that the base bid is less than twenty-five thousand ($25,000) the total contract price will be paid in one payment upon completion and acceptance of the project.

Should any defective material or work be discovered or should a reasonable doubt arise as to the integrity of any part of the work completed prior to final acceptance and payment, there will be deducted from the first estimate presented after the discovery of such work, an amount equal to the value of the defective or questionable work. Such defective work will be made from all subsequent estimates until the defects have been remedied or the cause for doubt removed.


C-9.07 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT BY THE CONTRACTOR:

If the work is stopped for a period of thirty (30) days under an order of any court of other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the Contractor or subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the work under a Contract with the Contractor, or if the work should be stopped for a period of thirty (30) days by the Contractor because the Engineer has not issued a Certificate for payment as provided in C-9.06 or because the Owner has not made payment within the ten(10) days after such stopping of work, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days written notice to the Owner and the Engineer, terminated the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable profit and damages.

C-9.08 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT BY THE OWNER:

If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refused or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen, or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contracts Documents, then the Owner, upon certification by the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished.

C-9.09

If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the work, including compensation for the Engineer’s additional services made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Engineer, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract.


C-9.10 ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT:

When the work provided for in the contract has been completed and the final inspection has been made by the Engineer, and all parts of the work have been approved and accepted, the final estimate showing all sums due the Contractor shall be prepared. All prior partial estimates and payments shall be subject to correction in the final estimate and payment. No payment on the final estimate will be made until the Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that all claims growing out of lawful demands of laborers, work, men, mechanics, subcontractors, material, men, furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, and suppliers of all kinds have been satisfied. Upon final payment the Contractor shall execute a certificate and release upon the Owner on the form specified.

C-9.11 AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS AND RELEASE OF LIENS:

Each and every pay estimate must be accompanied by an “Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims and Release of Liens” form (sample of which follows this Section).

C-9.12 MATERIALS ON HAND INVENTORY:

When materials on hand payment is requested, and “Inventory of Materials on Hand” is required and must be included with Contractor’s Pay Estimate. Proof of payment for materials on hand is also to be included with the Materials Inventory. A sample form follows this section.

C-9.13 PHOTOGRAPHS

The Contractor shall submit with each monthly progress pay estimate four (4) each 3 ½" x 5" color photographs depicting generally the work done during that month, and each photograph properly identified and dated.


AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS AND RELEASE OF

LIENS TO: CITY OF LAREDO PROJECT: WEBB COUNTY, TEXAS By this instrument the undersigned Contractor engaged in the construction of the above project hereby certified that on this date, or any time prior thereto, except listed below, the Contractor has paid the full or has otherwise satisfied all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed and for all known indebtedness and claims against the undersigned for damages arising in any manner on or against the project, its land, improvements and equipment of every kind. The undersigned hereby certified that he has received all payments currently due under his Contract for work on the above referred (except retainage). Therefore, the undersigned does hereby waive and/or release any and all liens against the property project and as of the day of , 20 . Contractor Authorized Signature Typed Signature and Title STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF WEBB Before me, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and being first duly sworn, acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same for the purpose and consideration therein expressed and declared to me that the statements contained herein are true. SWORN AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this day of , 20 . Signature - Notary Public for the State of Texas Notary Public’s Typed Signature My Commission expires:


CITY OF LAREDO

CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROJECT: ESTIMATE NO.: DATE FROM: TO: ORIGINAL CONTRACT: TOTAL WORK TO DATE: $ CHANGE ORDERS: MATERIALS ON HAND: $ 10% RETAINAGE: $ TOTAL TO DATE: PREVIOUS PAYMENTS: $ % COMPLETE: AMOUNT DUE: $ CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTOR: I certify that all items and amounts shown on this request for partial payment are correct and that all work has been performed and/or materials supplied in full in accordance with the requirements on the contract documents. (CONTRACTOR) By: ______________________________________ Signature Date

___________________________________ Print Name CERTIFICATE OF FIELD REPRESENTATIVE: I have checked this request for partial payment against the notes and reports of my inspections of the project and in my opinion the statement of work performed and/or material supplied is accurate and that the contractor is observing the requirements of the contract documents. (INSPECTOR ) By:_______________________________________ Signature Date

_______________________________________ Print Name CERTIFICATE OF ENGINEER: I certify that I have checked and verified the above and foregoing request for partial payment and that it is a true and correct statement of work performed and/or material supplied by the contractor and that same has been performed and/or supplied in full accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. (CONSULTANT) By:_____________________________________ Signature Date

____________________________________ Print Name RECOMMENDED FOR PAYMENT: VERIFIED FOR PAYMENT: _______________________________________ ________________________ Project Manager DATE: _________________________________ DATE: APPROVED FOR PAYMENT: DATE: _______________________________________ Finance Department


MATERIALS ON HAND INVENTORY

Project: Contractor: Estimate No. Dates: From to No. Invoice No. Vendor Balance

Last Period Received Current

Placed Current

Balance

1

Key points of Public R.O.W. Ordinance

1.) All projects in public R.O.W. must go through Utility Coordination Committee. 2.) All Contractors must be registered at The Building Development Service

Department to be able to work in public R.O.W. Registration Fee $50.00 / yr

3.) All work in Public R.O.W. requires a permit from The Building Development Services Department. Permit cost is $50.00 plus inspection fee of $200.00. Any additional inspections requested after normal working hours of 8 am to 5 pm are charged at $40.00 / hr Monday to Friday. Saturday and Sunday and holidays inspection rates are $70.00 / hr. Permits must be secured prior to pre-construction meeting.

4.) All work done in Public R.O.W. that impedes the flow of traffic or pedestrian

path requires a traffic control plan or pedestrian accessibility. 5.) Contractor must provide certificate of insurance. Insurance must be liability,

workman compensation and performance bond.

1

City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications The City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications shall apply to this project. A copy of the document can be viewed at the City’s website at: http://www.ci.laredo.tx.us/ Then, click on “City Departments”, Then, on “Planning and Zoning”, Then, on “Books and Manuals”, then on “Standard Technical Specifications Manual” Or, click directly on the following link: http://www.ci.laredo.tx.us/city-planning/Standard_Technical_Specifications_Manual.pdf Please call this office should there be any problems opening up the above to Mr. Gabriel Martinez, P.E., Asst. City Engineer at (956)791-7346.

http://www.ci.laredo.tx.us/

http://www.ci.laredo.tx.us/city-planning/Standard_Technical_Specifications_Manual.pdf

01010 - 1

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Work covered by Contract Documents.

B. Contract Method.

C. Starting Work.

D. Work by Others.

E. Contractor’s Use of Premises.

F. Owner Occupancy.

G. Partial Owner Occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. The Work of this Contract comprises the general construction of the City of Laredo – North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant Administration Building located at 2815 Shiloh in Laredo, Texas, Webb County.

1. The scope involves the general construction of the new administration building and site work requirements as per the plans and specifications prepared by Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc. and respective professional consultants dated June 11, 2018.

2. Construction trades consists of paying all fees for acquiring the required city,

county, state and federal permits for the following but not limited to: complete field engineering, scarification of site work, temporary barriers, utility excavation, backfill, and compacting, soil treatment, and concrete flatwork.

Also included but not limited to: site grading, over-excavation, select fill for the

new building pad per the geo-technical report and structural drawings recommendations, a tap to existing domestic water system per MEP documents, tap to existing sanitary sewer system per MEP documents, concrete - Gunite fountain-pond and associated pump and filtration systems, poured in place foundations, concrete flatwork, concrete curing, concrete block work, natural stone veneer, masonry accessories, EFIS, steel fabricated canopies, structural framing, light gauge drywall framing, rough carpentry, millwork with hardware, granite-quartz counter tops, wooden shelving with adjustable hardware, treated

01010 - 2

wood, membrane water proofing, wall, ceiling and roof pre-engineered metal purling building insulation, fire-stopping, prefinished metal roof and ceiling soffit panel system, pre-finished downspouts and gutters, sheet metal flashing and trim, joint sealants.

Also included are hollow metal doors and frames, solid core wood plastic

laminate doors, aluminum fixed windows, hollow metal window frames, ADA approved door hardware, low “e” double insulated glass and glazing, metal stud framing and furr-downs, gypsum board, porcelain floor and wall tile, tectum sound board panels, interior and exterior paint work, visual display boards, toilet and shower compartments, aluminum flagpole, parking lot and interior signage, cast letters, fire extinguishers and cabinets, roof access hatch, metal ladder, building specialties, building plaque, horizontal louver blinds, lab ventilation hood, a fire alarm system and the pre-engineered metal building system per structural drawings.

3. Mechanical items consist of paying all fees, obtain permits, new mechanical

insulation, new plumbing lines and fixtures, including water and sewer utilities, tied-in to existing sewer line, domestic and irrigation systems, new air conditioning units, exhaust fan systems and prep work for future large aquarium per MEP documents, and latest adopted codes and ordinances.

4. Electrical items consist of paying all fees, obtain permits, provide new

underground duct banks with feeders to tie in to the existing duct banks and service, new fire alarm system and main panel, security system, preparation of future close camera and communication systems, site lighting, utility work and prep work for future large aquarium per MEP documents and latest adopted codes and ordinances.

B. The Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily indicate or describe all Work

required for completion of Project.

C. The Contract Documents describe the essential elements sufficiently to determine the scope of the Project.

D Provide all items required for complete operating systems including items not

necessarily shown in these Contract Documents, but that can be reasonably inferred as being required for a complete operating system.

E. The Drawings and Specifications indicate the basic quality of material and quality

of construction required for the entire Project.

1.03 CONTRACT METHOD:

A. Construct the Work under a single lump sum contract.

01010 - 3

1.04 STARTING WORK:

The Contractor shall begin work when: A. The Contractor has furnished to the Owner’s Architect, the required Insurance

Certificates and Performance Bond.

B. The Contractor is in receipt of the Notice to from the Owner. 1.05 WORK BY OTHERS:

A. Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate its Work with Work provided under other contracts. Separate Contracts will include, but not necessarily be limited to

the following:

1. Owners Testing Laboratory Services (Quality Control). 2. Asbestos Abatement and Selective Demolition Contractor 3. N.I.C. (Not In Contract) Work.

1.06 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES:

A. Contractor shall have complete and exclusive use of premises within the construction limits indicated on the Drawings, for execution of Work.

1. Where it is necessary for the Contractor to use portions of existing

buildings and/or grounds for operations, such use shall be strictly in accordance with requirements and approval of the Owner. Contractor shall provide proper and safe access to the Owner occupied areas at all times.

2. All interruption of mechanical and electrical underground services shall be only at such time and for lengths of time as approved by Owner. If required, where modifications to adjacent existing facilities are required the Contractor shall organize its work in order that inconvenience to the Owner be minimized. Give minimum 7 day notice to Owner’s Representative prior to interruption of services.

3. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, or unless otherwise directed by Owner; water, gas, lighting, power and telephone conduits and wires, sewer lines, and other surface and subsurface structures and lines, shall be maintained by Contractor and shall not be disturbed, disconnected or damaged by him during progress of Work; should Contractor in performance of Work disturb, disconnect or damage any of above, expenses arising from disturbance or in replacing or repair shall be borne by Contractor.

B. Contractor shall:

1. Not unreasonably encumber site with materials and equipment. 2. Not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. 3. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of stored

01010 - 4

products. 4. Move stored products which interfere with operations of Owner and other

contractors. 5. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage land work areas needed for

operations.

C. Upon receipt, by the Contractor, of Notice to Proceed from the Owner, the Owner will make the Project site available to the Contractor to execute the Work under the Contract.

D. Coordinate use of the premises with the Owner’s Representative. Contractor must

comply with Owner’s requirements concerning Contractors operations and use of the premises, parking, loading and unloading.

1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY:

A. Owner will occupy the areas – buildings and facilities surrounding the Project Site during the entire period of construction for the conduct of its normal operations. Cooperate with Owner’s Representative in all construction operations to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner usage.

B. Contractor shall at all times conduct its operations as to ensure the least

inconvenience to the local staff. 1.08 PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY:

A. Owner reserves right to use and occupy in whole or any part of the improvements which have been completed sufficiently to permit use and occupancy without delaying Contractor’s work. Use and occupancy by Owner shall not, however, be construed as an acceptance of Work of any part, and any claim which Owner may have against Contractor shall not be deemed to have been waived by occupancy. 1. For each partial use and occupancy prior to Certificate of Occupancy,

Owner agrees to obtain written consent of Contractor, secure endorsement from insurance carriers, and consent of Surety.

2. Prior to each use and occupancy, Owner and Contractor shall make mutually acceptable arrangements for security, protection and insurance for people and property; warranties; and operation, maintenance and payment for utilities and services for each such partial use and occupancy.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED END OF SECTION

01015 - 1

SECTION 01015 SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

Test borings have been made, prior to bidding, for the purpose of obtaining information regarding the soils and subsurface conditions at the Project site. The test borings were made and recorded in accordance with generally accepted procedures, using reasonable care and accuracy.

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Subsurface soils report: Titled: Geotechnical Engineering Study City of Laredo North Laredo WWTP Administration Building Project No.48567

Dated: March 9, 2018

1.02 CONDITIONS:

A. These documents are not a part of the Contract Documents and are included by reference only as an aid to the Contractor for estimating the Contract Sum. By offering a Proposal, the Contractor accepts responsibility for conclusions drawn from the subsurface soils report. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor accepts responsibility for subsequent action taken based upon its conclusions. Neither Owner nor A/E assume any responsibility for conclusions Contractor may draw therefrom. These documents take precedence over the Drawings and Specifications with regard to existing subsurface conditions; however, the Drawings and Specifications take precedence for new construction.

1.03 ADDITIONAL INVESTIGATION:

A. Contractor shall make any additional investigations it deems necessary to properly bid any and all Work related thereto. No additional amounts will be made available to the Contractor for work arising from failure to examine the site or subsoil conditions unless specifically provided for elsewhere in the Specifications for this Project.

1.04 BORING LOGS:

A. A copy of the boring plan and boring logs are included on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT

NORTH LAREDO WASTE WATER TREATMENT PLANT ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

2815 SHILOH DRIVE LAREDO, WEBB COUNTY, TEXAS

Prepared for:

Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc. 1820 Houston Street Laredo, TX 78040

Attn.: Roberto J. Sepulveda, AIA

Project Architect

Submitted By:

ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING CO.

www.howlandcompanies.com 7615 N. Bartlett Avenue P.O. Box 451128 (78045) Laredo, TX 78041 P. 956.722.4411 F. 956.722.5414

4902 Sinclair Road San Antonio, TX 78222 P. 210.648.1600 F. 210.648.1605 16225 Park Ten Place, Suite 500 Houston, TX 77048 P. 956.251.3890

TBPE Firm Registration No. F‐4097 TBPLS Firm Registration No. 10046400 TBPLS Firm Registration No. 10194361

TABLEOFCONTENTS INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................... 4 PURPOSE AND SCOPE .............................................................................................................. 4 FIELD INVESTIGATION ........................................................................................................... 4 LABORATORY TESTING ......................................................................................................... 5 GENERAL SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS .......................................................... 5

Site Physiography ........................................................................................................................ 5 Site Geology ................................................................................................................................ 6 2006 International Building Code (IBC) Seismic Criteria .......................................................... 7 Subsurface Stratigraphy ............................................................................................................... 8 Groundwater ................................................................................................................................ 8 Potential Vertical Rise (PVR)...................................................................................................... 8

FOUNDATION EVALUATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................ 9

General......................................................................................................................................... 9 Site Preparation for Building Area .............................................................................................. 9 Selection and Placement of Fill ................................................................................................. 10 Foundation Recommendations .................................................................................................. 11

Shallow Foundation................................................................................................................ 11 Vapor Barrier ............................................................................................................................. 11 Utilities ...................................................................................................................................... 11 Drainage and Landscaping ........................................................................................................ 12

TOPSOIL ..................................................................................................................................... 12 TRENCH RECOMMENDATIONS.......................................................................................... 12

General....................................................................................................................................... 12 Trench Excavations ................................................................................................................... 13 Trench Safety Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 13 Utility Trench Backfill Methods................................................................................................ 13

PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................... 14

General....................................................................................................................................... 14 Subgrade Preparation ................................................................................................................. 14 Flexible Pavement ..................................................................................................................... 15 Rigid Pavement.......................................................................................................................... 15 Drainage Considerations ............................................................................................................ 16

LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 17

APPENDICES

Soil Boring Location Plan

Boring Logs Photographs Symbols and Terms used on Boring Logs Field and Laboratory Testing Procedures Recommended Specifications for Placement of Compacted Select Fill DCP Test Data Relevant Information About Your Geotechnical Engineering Report

Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc. Howland Engineering and Surveying Co., Inc. Geotechnical Report – North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Administration Building March 9, 2018 Page 4 of 17

INTRODUCTION On March 2, 2018, Howland conducted a geotechnical investigation for the proposed North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Administration Building in Laredo, Texas. The site is currently operating as a waste water treatment plant. The site development will be situated in an unplatted lot, consisting of approximately 48.8-AC and accessing from Shiloh Drive. Based on our understanding, the proposed project will consist of an approximate 6,450-SF administration building with 33 car parking stalls and 2 driveway entrances. The anticipated loads are considered moderate for the one-story building. Flexible and rigid pavement is considered for the proposed vehicle parking and drive lanes connecting to an existing concrete and asphalt paved road. The following report provides foundation and pavement recommendations. PURPOSE AND SCOPE The purpose of this exploration was to determine the stratification and engineering properties of the soil and to develop recommendations for site preparation and provide foundation and pavement recommendations with compaction requirements for the proposed construction of the above referenced project. The scope of this exploration includes the following: 1) a field investigation phase for determining the surface conditions (slope & drainage) and subsurface conditions obtaining representative soil samples for classification and testing, 2) a laboratory testing program designed to establish pertinent engineering properties of subsurface soils encountered, and 3) a compilation and evaluation of field and laboratory data in order to develop foundation and pavement recommendations. FIELD INVESTIGATION The site was explored by drilling two (2) 20-ft soil test borings within the proposed building footprint and two (2) 5-ft soil test borings within the proposed parking area. The borehole locations were specified by Howland with a preliminary layout.

Building Bore Nos. Depth Drill Date Administration Building B-1 & B-2 20-FT March 2, 2018

Pavement Section P-1 & P-2 5-FT March 2, 2018 The borehole locations were specified by and staked out by Howland Engineering and Surveying Co., Inc. based on a site plan provided by Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc.

The borings were advanced using a mobile B-53 drilling rig utilizing continuous flight solid stem augers. Samples of the materials encountered were obtained by split barrel sampling in conjunction with automatic standard penetration testing. The test boring logs are presented in the appendix along with descriptions of the test methods. The field sampling and testing were performed in substantial compliance with applicable ASTM standards D-1586.


LABORATORY TESTING The soil samples were examined and visually classified by our senior laboratory technician and samples representative of the various soil strata encountered were selected for laboratory testing. Twelve (12) sets of Atterberg limits, moisture content and percent fines tests were performed to assist in classifying the soils and to provide indicators of soil behavior. The test results are presented on the boring logs and the test procedures are described in the appendix. GENERAL SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Site Physiography The approximate 6,450-SF administration building will be located on 2815 Shiloh Drive on an approximate 48.8 AC tract of unplatted land within the existing North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant. At the time of our field activities, the project site can be described as low grass-covered (lanscaped) tract of land with isolated landscaped trees. The site topography is of a relatively flat gradient with approximate existing grades range from 566.5' to 556.0' sloping to the southeast towards a man-made swale adjacent north to the clear water clarifiers and aeration basins. The site is bounded north by the Shiloh Drive, east by landscaped and native vacant land, west by concrete and asphalt pavement, and south by the clear water clarifiers and aeration basin structures.

Existing site elevations based on preliminary civil plans by Howland Engineering and Surveying Co., Inc.


Site Geology Bureau of Economic Geology The University of Texas at Austin The “Geologic Atlas of Texas”, Laredo Sheet, indicates the Laredo Formation, El underlie the site with adjacent Uvalde Gravel, T-Qu and Alluvium, Qal. The Laredo Formation, El, typically consists of clays interbedded with seams and/or layers of sandstones and clay with thick sandstone members in upper and lower part, very fine to fine grained, in part glauconitic, micaceous, ferruginous, crossbedded. The Laredo Formation is about 620 feet thick with some fossiliferous, marine megafossils abundant. Uvalde Gravel, T-Qu, are chert, well-rounded pebbles and cobbles, occupying divide areas with thickness up to about 20 feet. Alluvium, Qal, are floodplain deposits typically consisting of clay, sands, silts and gravels. A cursory review of available geologic maps of this area indicates that several faults are located in the general area of the site; however, faults in the area of Laredo are considered inactive. Therefore, seismic risk should be noted as low.


2006 International Building Code (IBC) Seismic Criteria A cursory review of available United States Geological Survey (USGS) seismic hazard maps of this area indicates the site to be located within an area of lowest seismic hazard potential. Faults located in the general area of Laredo, Texas are considered inactive. Based on our knowledge of the deeper strata encountered in the area the site seismic soil classification is considered a Type D. The following table from the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) illustrates the site class definitions. TABLE 1613.5.2

SITE CLASS DEFINITIONS

SITE CLASS

SOIL PROFILE

NAME

AVERAGE PROPERTIES IN TOP 100 feet, SEE SECTION 1613.5.5 Soil Shear Wave Velocity,

⊽s, (ft/s) Standard Penetration

Resistance, N Soil Undrained Shear Strength,

u, (psf)

A Hard rock ⊽s > 5,000 N/A N/A

B Rock 2,500 < ⊽s < 5,000 N/A N/A

C Very dense soil and soft rock 1,200 < ⊽s < 2,500 N > 50 u > 2,000

D Stiff soil profile 600 < ⊽s < 1,200 15 < N < 50 1,000 < u < 2,000

E Soft soil profile ⊽s < 600 N < 15 u < 1,000

E ─

Any profile with more than 10 feet of soil having the following characteristics: 1. Plasticity index PI > 20, 2. Moisture content w > 40%, and 3. Undrained shear strength u < 500 psf

F ─

Any profile containing soils having one or more of the following characteristics: 1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under seismic loading such as

liquefiable soils, quick and highly sensitive clays, collapsible weakly cemented soils.

2. Peats and/or highly organic clays (H > 10 feet of peat and/or highly organic clay where H = thickness of soil)

3. Very high plasticity clays (H > 25 feet with plasticity index PI > 75) 4. Very thick soft/medium stiff clays (H > 120 feet)

For SI: 1 foot = 304.8 mm, 1 square foot = 0.0929 m², 1 pound per square foot = 0.0479 kPa. N/A = Not applicable


Subsurface Stratigraphy The subsurface Stratigraphy at this site encountered various conditions that can be described by one (1) generalized strata described below. The stratum has been identified by grouping soils that possess similar physical and engineering characteristics following the guidelines, presented in the ASTM D-2487 (Unified Soil Classification System). The lines designating the interfaces between strata on the boring logs represent approximate boundaries.

Lean Clay with Sand, Sandy Lean Clay – Firm to very stiff, very stiff to hard, stiff, firm to stiff, yellowish brown, grayish, brown, brown to light brown lean clay with sand and sandy lean clay soils were encountered from the surface to bore termination at bores B-1, B-2, P-1, & P-2. The soil samples tested from these stratums had liquid limits ranging from 28 to 47, plasticity index ranging from 11 to 25 with fines fractions ranging from 55% to 80%. This soil is classified as low to high plasticity, CL, soils under the Unified Soil Classification System.

The consistency of these stratums is firm to hard based on automatic standard penetration resistance test values of 5 blows per foot of penetration to 54 blows per foot of penetration.

The above descriptions are generalized to highlight the major subsurface stratification. The boring logs should be consulted for specific information at each boring location. Groundwater Groundwater was not encountered during the drilling operations. The recovered soil samples contained generally dry soil moisture conditions during our subsurface investigation. It should be noted that groundwater levels usually will fluctuate with seasonal variations in rainfall, during the construction process and surface water run-off. The short-term field observations are not a complete evaluation of the subsurface water levels at this location. The Contractor should check the subsurface water conditions prior to excavation activities. Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Potential vertical soil movements have been estimated using the Texas Department of Transportation test method TEX-124-E, Potential Vertical Rise. This method utilizes the soils in-situ moisture conditions and plasticity characteristics within the active zone. It is estimated that depth of the active zone in this area is approximately fifteen feet. The potential vertical rise is expressed in inches and hence is the latent or potential ability of a soil material to swell, at a given density, moisture, and loading condition. When the soil material is exposed to capillary or surface water an increase in elevation (heave) of the upper surface along with anything resting on it is plausible. The soils encountered at the site exhibit a low shrink / swell potential. Estimated PVR values are calculated at a range as follows:


Building PVR Range (in) Low High

Building Area 0.63" 0.67" Parking Area 0.18" 0.47" Please note the analysis is based on approximate depth of bores Please note that the above reported values represent total vertical in-situ movements and does not take into account movements by uncontrolled water sources such as poor drainage, migration of subsurface water from off-site locations and utility line leaks. FOUNDATION EVALUATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS General In general, the exploration and testing of the soil samples indicated a consistency of soil conditions with firm to hard, lean clay with sand and sandy lean clay soils. The soils encountered at the site exhibit a low shrink / swell potential. This report may not reflect the exact variations of the subsurface conditions throughout the site. The nature and extent of variations across the site may not become evidence until construction commences. If variations then appear evident, it may be essential to reevaluate our recommendations after performing on-site observations and test to establish the engineering significance of such variations. Site preparation recommendations for the proposed building pad area are included in the following section. Site Preparation for Building Area Site preparation for the entire area should consist initially of clearing and grubbing a minimum of 8" of the surface of any existing vegetation at least 5' beyond the building footprint. Depth of clearing may vary depending on the existing conditions of the site. This work shall consist of cutting, removing from the ground and properly disposing trees, stumps, brush, roots, weeds, construction debris and trash and other materials that will interfere with the work or are considered objectionable Removal of trees and shrubs shall include the removal of stumps and roots greater than 3" in diameter. Grubbing shall include removal of stumps and 3" roots to 2' below finished grade elevations. Burning is not permitted on the subject property and all waste material and unsuitable materials should be disposed of legally. Exposed subgrades should be thoroughly proofrolled in order to locate and densify any weak, compressible zones. A minimum of 5 passes of a fully-loaded dump truck or a similar heavily-loaded piece of construction equipment should be used for planning purposes.


Proofrolling operations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative to document subgrade condition and preparation. Weak or soft areas identified during proofrolling should be removed and replaced with suitable, compacted on-site soils, free of organics, oversized materials, and degradable or deleterious materials. Upon completion of the proofrolling operations and just prior to fill placement, the exposed subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of 10" and watered and compacted to a maximum of 98% of maximum dry density determined in accordance with Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) at ± 2% of optimum moisture. The subsequent backfill lifts utilizing the native soils shall be compacted in the same manner. This will reduce the magnitude of soil movements and provide increased soil bearing pressures. Select fill needed for the building pads should be low plasticity sandy lean clay, clayey sand, or granular base material (7≤PI≤18). Specifications for fill and placement are attached. The building pad should be constructed to the specified final pad elevation using this method. Cut areas within the building area should be scarified and compacted to the same minimum requirements as the filled areas. The following sections offer additional recommendations for foundation design. Selection and Placement of Fill Select fill material will be required to accomplish the finish floor elevation as determined in the preliminary civil plans as follows:

Building Ext. Grades Range Est. Finish Floor Elevation

Prop. Fill Range Low High Lower Upper

Building Area 558.6' 560.9' 564.0' 3.1' 5.4' Based on preliminary information from Howland Engineering and Surveying Co., Inc. The soil compaction for the select fill in 6" lifts should not be less than 98% of maximum dry density determined in accordance with Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) at ± 2% of optimum moisture content as specified by the foundation engineer. Any fill material lifts not meeting the required compaction specification must be reworked and compacted until the specified density is achieved. Select fill needed for the building pads should be low plasticity sandy lean clay, clayey sand, or granular base material (7≤PI≤18) with a liquid limit LL ≤ 40. Specifications for fill and placement are attached. The building pad should be constructed to the specified final pad elevation using this method. The following sections offer additional recommendations for foundation design.


Foundation Recommendations The following is our recommendations based on the proposed preliminary information. Shallow Foundation The proposed building may be founded on a conventional reinforced slab-on-grade rigid foundation system consisting of exterior and interior grade beams. A method to design a rigid foundation system is the Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) criteria. Based on the geotechnical bore of the subsurface stratigraphy encountered, the following is recommended:

Building Design PI Allowable Bearing Capacity (PSF) TL DL + LT LL

Building Area 18 2,500 1,660 Total Load (TL) w/ Factor of Safety of 2 Dead Load plus Long Term Live Load (DL + LT LL) w/ Factor of Safety of 3 Allowable Bearing Capacity Values after Soil Conditioning from Fill Operations The beam and footings widths and depths may vary depending on the total load. The final foundation design should be designed by a professional engineer in accordance with standard engineering practices to account for the approximate soil bearing pressures, the encountered potential vertical rise and plasticity indexes of the soils. Vapor Barrier A vapor barrier is sheeting material placed under a ground level concrete slab in order to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the soils below the foundation up through the concrete slab. Placement of concrete directly on the soil will require wetting of the soil adding further moisture. We recommend a vapor barrier be used where moisture can migrate upward from below the slab and cause damage to those areas which will contain moisture sensitive equipment or that will receive a floor covering or surface-hardening agent. Utilities Slab-on-ground foundations are designed to move vertically with underlying soil movements and to deflect or bend within certain limits. It is, therefore, inadvisable to embed utility lines, heating ducts or other conduits in the slab. Pipes should pass vertically through the slab and be provided with expansion joints. Service lines should pass beneath the foundation system.


Drainage and Landscaping Backfills adjacent to foundation walls should be non-swelling, low permeable material. Non-swelling material minimizes the forces exerted on walls, while low permeable backfill minimizes infiltration of surface water through the backfill into the foundation soil. Site grading should direct surface runoff waters away from the foundation in order to reduce non-uniform moisture changes in the bearing soils. Excessive collection of surface water near part of the foundation will increase differential soil movements. Flower beds adjacent to the foundation are not recommended. The most commonly used technique is grading of a positive slope away from the structures. The slope should be adequate to promote rapid runoff and to avoid collecting ponded water near the structure, which could migrate down the foundation/soil interface. These slopes should be, greater than 1 % and preferably 5 % within 10 feet of the foundation. Maintenance programs are directed toward promoting uniform soil moisture beneath the foundation. A typical program consists of the following:

Maintain a positive slope of about 5% around the structure for drainage and elimination of water catch areas.

Maintenance of original drainage channels and installation of new channels as necessary. Maintenance of gutters around the roof and diversion of runoff away from the structure. Elimination of heavy vegetation within 10 to 15 feet of the foundation or 1 to 1.5 times

the height of mature trees. Uniform limited watering around the structure during droughts to replace lost moisture.

TOPSOIL Topsoil should be friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of no less than 4". Satisfactory topsoil should be free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones larger than 2" in diameter and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. The topsoil should be stockpiled and covered to prevent wind and rain erosion. The unsuitable or excess topsoil should be disposed of properly. TRENCH RECOMMENDATIONS General In general, the exploration and testing of the soil samples indicated a consistency of soil conditions with firm to hard, lean clay with sand and sandy lean clay soils. The soils encountered at the site exhibit a low shrink/swell potential. This report may not reflect the exact variations of the subsurface conditions throughout the site. The nature and extent of variations across the site may not become evidence until construction commences. If variations then appear evident, it may be essential to reevaluate our recommendations after performing on-site observations and test to establish the engineering significance of such variations.


Trench Excavations In regard to groundwater, groundwater was not observed during our drilling operations. Each excavation should be kept dry during the preparation of the subgrade until the utility installation is completed. Due to the long distance spacing between boreholes, the extent of subsurface groundwater depth and locations between our borings is not certain. However, the Contractor should provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of all surface and groundwater, if encountered. The utility trenching, safety and backfill considerations are included in the following section. Trench Safety Guidelines Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Safety and Health Standards contained in the Section 1926.652 of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR) require that all trenches in excess of five (5) feet deep be shored or appropriately sloped or benched unless the trench sidewalls are comprised of solid rock. Based on our laboratory results, the soils encountered at the boring locations should be considered primarily a Type A soils which means cohesive soils; i.e., clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam, and in some cases silty loam and sandy clay loam. If during the construction process dissimilar soils are encountered, then the following soil types should be considered. Cemented soils; i.e., caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A according to OSHA soil classification guidelines. If soils are granular cohesion-less similar to crushed rock or fissured then Type B is the appropriate classification and if groundwater or water seepage is present in these strata then Type C is the appropriate classification. Please note that the Contractor is responsible for development of the excavation plan which will meet all city, state and federal requirements with regard to trench safety. Utility Trench Backfill Methods Contractor shall conform to the local building requirements. Please see the latest City of Laredo "Utility Trench Backfill Methods" in the City’s web site (www.cityoflaredo.com) as a method. The design team is to verify the latest specifications of the City of Laredo at date of design insurance.


PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS General Specific tests to determine the soil parameters for pavements for pavement design were not within the scope of this study. However, the following recommendations are based on the soil test results and our experience with pavements in areas with similar subsoil conditions. The minimum pavement section recommended for the parking areas are discussed in the following paragraphs. Subgrade Preparation The proposed parking area should consist initially of clearing the surface of the remaining existing vegetation and any other miscellaneous debris arising after site clearance. The exposed subgrade for both cut and fill areas should be thoroughly proofrolled a minimum of 5 passes with a fully-loaded dump truck or a similar heavily-loaded piece of construction equipment. Proofrolling operations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative to document subgrade condition and preparation. Weak or soft areas identified during proofrolling should be removed and replaced with suitable, compacted on-site soils, free of organics, oversized materials, and degradable or deleterious materials. Upon completion of proofrolling operations, the preparation of the exposed subgrade should consist of reworking the surface to the 10" depth by watering and re-compacting the soils to a minimum of 98% of the Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) or TxDOT Method TEX 114-E at ± 2% of optimum moisture content in 10" lifts or less. The fill material should be watered and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6" lifts to 98% of the Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) or TxDOT Method TEX 114-E ± 2% of optimum moisture content. All lifts not meeting the required compaction must be reworked and compacted until the specified density is achieved. Select fill needed for the pavement area should be low plasticity sandy lean clay, clayey sand, or granular base material (7≤PI≤20). Howland recommends to blade the soils approximately 18" creating a windrow in the areas that were not tested to visually inspect and sample for Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) determination of the in-situ soils.


Flexible Pavement Resulting pavement sections are as follows:

Pavement Component Material Thickness, in Light Duty

Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 1½" Flexible Base (Type B, Grade 1-2) 8" Moisture Conditioned Subgrade 10"

Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement: The Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC) shall meet the requirements set forth by the Texas Department of Highways (TXDOT) Specifications, Item 340, using Type "D" mix. The asphaltic concrete should be compacted to a minimum of 1.5% below the optimum density of the laboratory density as determined using TxDOT, Tex 206-F test method or ASTM D-1560 (Hveem or Marshall Method). Flexible Base Material: The base should meet the requirements of the TXDOT specifications for Item 247, Type B, Grade 1 – 2. The base should be compacted to at least 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor (ASTM D-1557) or TxDOT Method TEX 113-E, at 2% of optimum moisture content. Moisture Conditioned Subgrade: The subgrade should be moisture conditioned by re-working the surface to the 10" depth by watering and compacting the soils to a minimum of 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) at 2% of the optimum moisture content at 10" lifts. Rigid Pavement Concrete pavement is also considered as an alternative option for the vehicle parking, entrances, and drive lanes. The following is our recommendation:

Pavement Component Material Thickness, in

Drive Lanes and Parking Areas

Entrances, Drive Lanes and Dumpster Pad

Concrete Pavement 6" 7" Moisture Conditioned Subgrade 10" 10"

Portland Cement Concrete: The concrete should have a maximum slump of 4½" ± 1". The concrete should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi for heavy duty. The design assumes doweled or keyed joints, temperature and flexural reinforcing steel of #4 @ 12" o.c.e.w. and adequate control, expansion and construction joints. Moisture Conditioned Subgrade: The subgrade should be moisture conditioned by reworking the surface to the 10" depth by watering and re-compacting the soils to a minimum of 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) at 2% of the optimum moisture content at 10" lifts.


All joints should be sealed as per manufacture recommendations. A control joint spacing of no more than ten (10) feet is recommended. Since rainfall is light, no special provisions for drainage, such as permeable base course is necessary. Drainage Considerations Proper perimeter drainage is extremely important and should be provided so infiltration of surface water from unpaved areas surrounding the pavement is minimized. Improper drainage which allows saturation of the pavement subgrade will greatly reduce the performance and service life of the pavement systems, even when the system is constructed using either typical pavement sections or design recommendations based on site-specific soils testing. Surface and subsurface drainage considerations crucial to the performance of pavements at this site include, but are not limited, to the following:

The installation of landscape beds or islands in the pavement areas is not recommended. Above grade planter boxes with drainage discharge directly into storm sewers should be considered if landscaping features are desired. Drainage discharge directly onto the top of the pavement may be considered; however, may pose a maintenance problem.

Any man-made subsurface or known natural seepage at the site as to influence moisture contents within the subgrade should be intercepted by drainage ditches or below grade French drains.

Final site grading should eliminate isolated depressions adjacent to curbs which may allow surface water to pond and infiltrate into the underlying soils. Concrete curbs should be constructed to a sufficient depth to reduce infiltration of water beneath the curbs.

Pavement surfaces should be maintained to minimize surface ponding and to provide proper sealing of any developing cracks. These measures will help reduce infiltration of surface water downward through the pavement section.


LIMITATIONS The evaluation and recommendations submitted in this report are based, in part, upon the information obtained from the four (4) soil test borings. The nature and extent of variations in soil conditions between or beyond the borings may not become evident until actual construction. It is also noted that the transition lines shown on the boring logs are approximate and the actual transitions may be gradual. Also, this report does not consider environmental opinions. If changes in the nature or design of the project are planned, the conclusions and recommendations in this report should be reviewed by the soils engineer and, if necessary, modified. Soil samples recovered for laboratory testing will be retained for a period of 30 days and then, unless we are directed otherwise, will be discarded. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc. and their design team for specific application to the proposed North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant in Laredo, Texas in accordance to generally accepted foundation engineering practices. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made. Additional information regarding the limitations and use of geotechnical engineering reports is included in the appendix.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING NORT LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

APPROXIMATE TEST BORING LOCATION PLAN

PROJECT: North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant – Administration Building

LOCATION: LAREDO, WEBB COUNTY, TX

REPORT NUMBER: 48567

7615 N. Bartlett Avenue Laredo, TX 78041

P. 956.722.4411 F. 956.722.5414

TBPE Firm Registration No. F-4097 TBPLS Firm Registration No. 100464-00

www.howlandcompanies.com

B-1

B-2

P-2

P-1

PROJECT: North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant - Admin. Building REPORT NO.:CLIENT: Sepulveda Associates Architects, Inc. DATE: PROJECT LOCATION: 2815 Shiloh DriveBORING LOCATION: As Per PlanDRILLER: Hugo Rendon ELEVATION: NADRILLING METHOD: Straight Flight Auger WEATHER: Sunny and Warm

LOGGED BY: J. ReyesDEPTH TO WATER INITIAL: NE AFTER 24 HOURS: NR

Sam

ples

SPT

N-V

alue

(BL

/LF)

Soil

Sym

bol

Min

us 2

00 (%

)

Liq

uid

Lim

it

Plas

tic L

imit

Plas

tic. I

ndex

qu (T

SF)

L.L. P. L. P. I.

1 2P1 3

2 3 6 56 11 28 16 12

3

4 5P2 7

5 11 18 62 11 37 18 19

6

7 8P3 9

8 15 24

9

10 6P4 10

11 15 25 72 16 40 19 21

12

13

14 9P5 14

15 18 32

16

17

18

19 10P6 12

20 19 31 80 19 47 22 25

SPT = Standard Penetration Resistance 0.5 FT Intervals NE = Not Encountered NA = Not Applicable N = Total Blows Final 1FT within Sample Depth ( BL/FT ) NR = Not Required ND = Not DeterminedQp = Pocket Penetrometer Test ( TSF )qu = Unconfined Compressive Strength TestST = Shelby Tube Sample PAGE 1 OF 1

(CL)

BORING TERMINATED

LOG OF BORING NUMBER B-1

Depth

Atterberg Limits (%)

Description of Stratum

48567

Lean Clay with Sand

March 2, 2018

Firm to Very Stiff, Yellowish Brown

UN

IT D

RY

WT

(PC

F)

Moi

stur

e C

onte

nt (%

)

(Feet)

Very Stiff to Hard, Grayish

(CL)

Sandy Lean Clay



Sam

ples

SPT

N-V

alue

(BL

/LF)

Soil

Sym

bol

Min

us 2

00 (%

)

Liq

uid

Lim

it

Plas

tic L

imit

Plas

tic. I

ndex

qu (T

SF)

L.L. P. L. P. I.

1 4P1 5

2 6 11 55 8 29 17 12

3

4 6P2 8

5 11 19

6

7 11P3 11

8 19 30 72 10 37 19 18

9

10 13P4 23

11 31 54 71 10 35 17 18

12

13

14 11P5 18

15 24 42 75 17 40 19 21

16

17

18

19 11P6 14

20 19 33


LOG OF BORING NUMBER B-248567March 2, 2018

Moi

stur

e C

onte

nt (%

)


UN

IT D

RY

WT

(PC

F)

Depth


(Feet)

Stiff, BrownSandy Lean Clay

(CL)

Very Stiff to Hard, GrayishLean Clay with Sand

BORING TERMINATED

(CL)



Sam

ples

SPT

N-V

alue

(BL

/LF)

Soil

Sym

bol

Min

us 2

00 (%

)

Liq

uid

Lim

it

Plas

tic L

imit

Plas

tic. I

ndex

qu (T

SF)

L.L. P. L. P. I.

1 3P1 3

2 3 6 56 11 29 17 12

3

4 2P2 3

5 10 13 69 16 37 18 19

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20


LOG OF BORING NUMBER P-148567March 2, 2018

Moi

stur

e C

onte

nt (%

)


UN

IT D

RY

WT

(PC

F)

Depth


(Feet)

Firm to Stiff, Brown to Light BrownSandy Lean Clay

(CL)BORING TERMINATED



Sam

ples

SPT

N-V

alue

(BL

/LF)

Soil

Sym

bol

Min

us 2

00 (%

)

Liq

uid

Lim

it

Plas

tic L

imit

Plas

tic. I

ndex

qu (T

SF)

L.L. P. L. P. I.

1 1P1 2

2 3 5 55 10 28 17 11

3

4 2P2 6

5 4 10 59 14 28 16 12

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20


LOG OF BORING NUMBER P-248567March 2, 2018

Moi

stur

e C

onte

nt (%

)


UN

IT D

RY

WT

(PC

F)

Depth


(Feet)

Firm to Stiff, BrownSandy Lean Clay

(CL)BORING TERMINATED

North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Drive Report No.: 48567

View east towards bore B-1

View north towards bore B-2

North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Administration Building 2815 Shiloh Drive Report No.: 48567

View northeast towards bore P-1

FIELD AND LABORATORY TESTING PROCEDURES (TEST PROCEDURES ARE PRESENTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES)

FIELD TESTING A. Boring Procedure between Samples The borehole is extended downward, between samples, by continuous flight, hollow or solid stem augers or by rotary drilling techniques using bentonite drilling fluid or water. B. Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils (ASTM D-1586) This sampling method consists of driving a 2 inch outside diameter split barrel sampler using a 140 pound hammer freely falling through a distance of 30 inches. The sampler is first seated 6 inches into the material to be sampled and then driven an additional 12 inches. The number of blows required to drive the sampler the final 12 inches is known as the Standard Penetration Resistance. Recovered samples are first classified as to color and texture by the driller. Later, in the laboratory, the driller’s field classification is reviewed by the soils engineer who examines each sample. C. Thin-walled Tube Geotechnical Sampling of Soils (ASTM D-1587) This method consists of pushing thin walled steel tubes, usually 3 inches in diameter, into the soils to be sampled using hydraulic or other means. Cohesive soils are usually sampled in this manner and relatively undisturbed samples are recovered. D. Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings (ASTM D-1452) This method consists if augering a hole and removing representative soil samples from the auger flight or bit at 5 foot intervals or with each change in the substrata. Disturbed samples are obtained and this method is, therefore, limited to situations where it is satisfactory to determine the approximate subsurface profile. E. Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation (ASTM D-2113) This method consists of advancing a hole into hard strata by rotating a single or double tube core barrel equipped with a cutting bit. Diamond, tungsten carbide, or other cutting agents may be used for the bit. Wash water is used to remove the cuttings and to cool the bit. Normally, a 2 inch outside diameter by 1-3/8 inch inside diameter (NX) coring bit is used unless otherwise noted. The rock or hard material recovered within core barrel is examined in the field and in the laboratory and the core samples are stored in partitioned boxes. The core recovery is the length of material recovered and is expressed as a percentage of the total distance penetrated.

LABORATORY TESTING A. Atterberg Limits: Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils (ASTM D-4318, TEX 104-E, 105-E and 106-E) Atterberg Limits determine the soil’s plasticity characteristics. The soil’s Plasticity Index (PI) is representative of this characteristic and is the difference between the Liquid Limit (LL) and the Plastic Limit (PL). The LL is the moisture content at which the soil will flow as a heavy viscous fluid. The PL is the moisture content at which the soil begins to lose its plasticity. The test results are presented on the boring logs adjacent to the appropriate sampling information.

B. Particle Size Analysis of Soils (Minus 200) (ASTM D-422 and TEX 110-E) Grain size analysis tests are performed to determine the particle size and distribution of the samples tested. The grain size distribution of the soils coarser than the Standard Number 200 sieve was determined by passing the sample through a standard set of nested sieves. The test results are presented on the boring logs. C. Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock (ASTM D-2216 and TEX 103-E) The moisture content of soil is defined as the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the weight of water in a given soil mass to the weight of solid particles. It is determined by measuring the wet and oven dry weights of a soil sample. The test results are presented on the boring logs. D. Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil (ASTM D-2166) The unconfined compressive strength of soil is determined by placing a section of an undisturbed sample into a loading frame and applying an axial load until the sample fails in shear. The test results are presented on the boring logs adjacent to the appropriate sampling information. E. California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of Lab Compacted Soils (ASTM D-1883) The CBR test is performed by compacting soil in a six inch diameter mold at the desired density, soaking the sample for four days under a surcharge load approximating the pavement weight and then testing the soil in punching shear. A two inch diameter piston is forced into the soil to determine the resistance to penetration. The CBR is the ratio of the actual load required to produce 0.1 inches of penetration to that producing the same penetration in a standard crushed stone. F. Swell Test (ASTM D-4546) The Swell Test is performed by compacting soil in a steel mold at varying moisture contents. Layers are compacted using a hammer weight and number of blows per layer which vary with the different test procedures. ASTM D-698, D-1557, TEX-113-E and 114 E. The data is plotted and the maximum unit weight and optimum moisture content determined. The test results are given in the appendix with a notation of the test method used. G. Compaction Tests (ASTM D-698, D-1557, TEX 113E or 114-E) The compaction test is performed by compacting soil in a steel mold at varying moisture contents. Layers are compacted using a hammer weight and number of blows per layer which vary with the different test procedures, ASTM D-698, D-1557, TEX-113-E and 114-E. The data is plotted and the maximum unit weight and optimum moisture content determined. The test results are given in the appendix with a notation of the test method used.

RECOMMENDED SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLACEMENT OF COMPACTED SELECT FILL

1. General The soils engineer shall be the owners’ representative to control the placement of compacted fill. The soils engineer shall approve the subgrade preparation, the fill materials, the method of placement and compaction; and shall give written approval of the completed fill. 2. Preparation of Existing Ground All topsoil, plants and other organic material shall be removed. The exposed surface shall be scarified, moistened if necessary, and compacted in the manner specified for subsequent layers of fill. 3. Select Fill Material Fill shall have a liquid limit of 40 or less and a Plasticity Index between 7 and 18. The fill shall contain no organic or other perishable material, and no stones larger than two (2) inches. The soils engineer shall approve select fill material. 4. Placing Fill Fill materials shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding six (6) inches thickness after compaction. Successive loads of material shall be dumped so as to secure even distribution avoiding the formation of layers or lenses of dissimilar materials. The contractor shall route his hauling equipment to distribute travel evenly over the fill area. 5. Compaction of Fill a. Moisture Control: The moisture content of the fill material shall be distributed uniformly throughout each

layer of the material. The allowable range of moisture content during compaction shall be within plus two (+2) and minus two (-2) percentage points of the optimum moisture content. The contractor may be directed to add necessary moisture to the material either in the borrow area or upon the fill surface or to dry the material, as directed by the soils engineer. The drying of cohesive soils between lifts to moisture contents less than seventy percent (70 %) of optimum before the placement of subsequent lifts shall be avoided or the fill reworked at the proper moisture content.

b. Compaction: The material in each layer shall be compacted to obtain proper densities. Compaction by

the hauling equipment alone will not be considered sufficient. Structural fills, including pavement subgrade, sub base and base, shall be compacted to densities equivalent to the percentages of the Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) or the Modified Proctor (ASTM D-1557) maximum dry density listed in Table I. The Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation Method TEX-113-E compaction test, which varies the compactive effort with soil type, may be substituted for the Standard or Modified Proctor methods and the percentages listed in table I used.

Recommended Specifications for Placement of Compacted Select Fill (Cont.’d)

TABLE I

AREA PERCENT COMPACTION

Fine Grained Soils ASTM D-698 Standard Proctor

Coarse Grained Soils ASTM D-1557 Modified Proctor

Within five (5) feet of building lines, under footings floor slabs, slab-on-grade foundations and structures attached to buildings (i.e. walls, patios, steps)

95 95 +

More than five (5) feet beyond building lines, under walks, and fill areas to be landscaped

90 90

Pavement subgrade and subbase, including lime treated soils

95 95 +

Flexible Base N/A 98 Soils classified as coarse grained soils are those with more than fifty (50) percent, by weight, retained on the No. 200 Standard Sieve and with plasticity index of less than 4. 6. Compaction Testing A qualified testing laboratory in accordance with recognized procedures for making such tests shall perform Field density tests for the determination of the compaction of the fill. A representative number of tests shall be made in each compacted lift at locations selected by the soils engineer or his representative. For general structural and paving fills, we suggest one test per 3,000 square feet per lift with a minimum of four (4) tests per lift.

DCP TEST DATA

Project: North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Date:Location: P-1 Soil Type(s):

No. of Accumulative Type ofBlows Penetration Hammer

(mm)0 238.85 292.16 342.96 391.26 447.04 492.84 548.63 594.43 645.23 701.03 754.43 810.32 848.43 911.9

March 2, 2018

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

0.1 1.0 10.0 100.00

127

254

381

508

635

762

889

10160.1 1.0 10.0 100.0

DEP

TH, i

n.

CBR

DEP

TH, m

m

0

127

254

381

508

635

762

889

10160 14 28 42 56 69 83

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000

DEP

TH, m

m

BEARING CAPACITY, psi

DEP

TH, i

n

BEARING CAPACITY, psf

Based on approximate interrelationships of CBR and Bearing values (Design of Concrete Airport Pavement, Portland Cement Association, page 8, 1955)

10.1 lbs.

17.6 lbs.

Both hammers used

Soil Type

CH CL

All other soils

Hammer

DCP TEST DATA

Project: North Laredo Waste Water Treatment Plant Date:Location: P-2 Soil Type(s):

No. of Accumulative Type ofBlows Penetration Hammer

(mm)0 241.33 292.16 340.48 391.29 439.411 492.88 541.08 599.45 650.24 698.53 751.83 802.63 856.02 904.2

March 2, 2018

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

0.1 1.0 10.0 100.00

127

254

381

508

635

762

889

10160.1 1.0 10.0 100.0

DEP

TH, i

n.

CBR

DEP

TH, m

m

0

127

254

381

508

635

762

889

10160 14 28 42 56 69 83

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000

DEP

TH, m

m

BEARING CAPACITY, psi

DEP

TH, i

n

BEARING CAPACITY, psf

Based on approximate interrelationships of CBR and Bearing values (Design of Concrete Airport Pavement, Portland Cement Association, page 8, 1955)

10.1 lbs.

17.6 lbs.

Both hammers used

Soil Type

CH CL

All other soils

Hammer

01020 - 1

SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES

PART 1. – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY (All allowances are to be included in the Base Proposal as per construction document and required Scope of Work)

A. The general contractor shall include in the contract sum all allowances stated in the contract documents. These allowances shall cover the net cost of the materials and equipment delivered and unloaded at the site. The general contractor's handling costs on the site, labor and installation costs, overhead and profit, and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance. The contractor shall cause the work covered by these allowances to be performed for such amounts and be such persons as the Architect or Owner may direct but he will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objections. If the cost, when determined, is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Field Order, which could include additional handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses resulting to the general contractor from any increase or decease over the original allowance. If there is a balance at the end of the project, the allowance amount will be credited to the Owner through a formal change order and include the general contractor’s overhead and profit amount..

B. Item No. 1. Betterment Fund Allowance: This allowance is reserved for

potential additional general construction items related to the existing site, and/or proposed improvements as approved by Architect. Allowance $125,000.00 (excluding contractor's overhead and profit). This item is to be included in the Base Proposal amount.

Item No. 2. Hardware Allowance: This allowance is reserved for all finish

door hardware as required as approved by Architect. Allowance $35,000.00 (excluding contractor's overhead and profit). The labor installation cost is to be a separate cost to this allowance and to be included by the general contractor. This item is to be included in the Base Proposal amount.

Item No. 3 Quartz Counter Tops & Backsplash Base, Floor, Wall, Base

Tile Allowance: Refer to the Floor Pattern Plan. Quartz Counter Tops and back splash = $45/SF, material only. Floor and wall tile = $4.00/SF material only, wall base = $5.00/lf. All labor installation and required material supplies costs are to be included in the base proposal by the general contractor. This item is to be included in the Base Proposal amount.

Item No. 4 Fountain – Pond per schematic design drawings, scope of work and intent. Allowance: $25,000.00 The Owner and Architect will select a fountain-pond contractor (from a list of three provided by the general contractor) to be a subcontractor to the general contractor for the construction of the fountain-pond as

01020 - 2

per the schematic drawings – scope. The scope shall include all labor and equipment per the schematic design intent for a complete operating system (no extras allowed) with warranties per drawing notes. The allowance will be a net total to the Owner and the general contractor will be include, project supervision, overhead and profit to the allowance total.

Item No. 5. Audio/Video Projector and Speakers Allowance: This allowance is

reserved for the purchase of the Owner preferred A/V and ceiling mounted speakers as approved by the Owner and Architect. Allowance $10,000.00 (excluding contractor's overhead and profit). The installation cost of the A/V projector, ceiling speakers and all necessary multi-media high quality cablings from projector to wall plate location, wall plates, rough in conduits, back-boxes, and misc. items, etc… are to be a separate cost to this allowance and to be included by the general contractor. This allowance and items are to be included in the Base Proposal amount.

PART 2. – PRODUCTS NOT USED IN THIS SECTION PART 3. – EXECUTION NOT USED IN THIS SECTION

END OF SECTION

01030 - 1

SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:

A. Identification and Description of Alternates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Divisions 2 through 16: Sections affected by each Alternate.

1.03 PROCEDURES:

A. Alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner. Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into the Work are identified in the Contract.

B. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to complete the

Work, including changes under each Alternate, when acceptance is designated in Contract.

1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES:

DELETE Alternate No. 1 Delete all required materials, labor, services, equipment, appliances, overhead and profit in conjunction with and properly incidental to all work for the complete installation and properly coordinated with all associated trades for the FOUNTAIN – POND per Section Allowance 01020 = $25,000.00 with general contractor’s OH & P and plans and specifications. Base Proposal is to INCLUDE the fountain-pond allowance.

DELETE Alternate No. 2 Delete all required materials, labor, services, equipment,

appliances, overhead and profit in conjunction with and properly incidental to all work for the complete installation and properly coordinated with all associated trades for the NORTHWEST TOWER (foundation, CMU reinforced walls, EFIS, sloped concrete tops, roofing, and lighting), excluding the fountain-pond per plans and specifications. Base Proposal is to INCLUDE this tower.

DELETE Alternate No. 3 Delete all required materials, labor, services, equipment,

appliances, overhead and profit in conjunction with and properly incidental to all work for the complete installation and properly coordinated with all associated trades for the REQUIRED SELECT FILL FOR BUILDING PAD AND IMMEDIATE SURROUNDING AREAS per civil grading plans and specifications. Base Proposal is to INCLUDE the required select fill.

01030 - 2

ADDITIVE Alternate No. 4 Add all required materials, labor, services, equipment, appliances, overhead and profit in conjunction with and properly incidental to all work for the complete installation and properly coordinated with all associated trades for the PROPOSED SANITARY SEWER LINE AND MANHOLE per the prepared civil drawings, excluding the fountain-pond per plans and specifications. Base Proposal is to NOT INCLUDE this item.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01040 - 1

SECTION 01040 COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 101 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:

A. Coordination of Work of Contract. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Related Work of Other Sections:

1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01045 - Cuffing and Patching. 3. Section 01160 - Contractor Requirements. 4. Section 01200 - Project Meetings. 5. Section 01300 - Submittals. 6. Section 01310 - Schedules, Reports and Payments. 7. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Colors. 8. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. 9. Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 10. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Closeout submittals. 11. Division 15 Sections: Mechanical and Plumbing Work. 12. Division 16 Sections: Electrical Work.

103 COORDINATION, GENERAL:

A. Coordinate all portions of the Work under the Contract. Require each Subcontractor to coordinate their portion of the Work and provide their requirements for coordination of their Work with other related Work.

B. Coordinate mechanical and electrical Work with that of other trades in order that

various components of systems are installed at proper time, fit available space, and allow proper service access to those requiring maintenance, including equipment specified in other Divisions.

C. Coordinate Work of sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,

connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical, plumbing, and electrical Work which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs

01040 - 2

E. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, conduit, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. Provide escutcheon plates at penetrations through finished walls and ceilings with finish appropriate to adjacent finish surface.

F. Coordination Drawings: Before materials are fabricated or Work begun, prepare

coordination Drawings including plans, elevations, sections, and other details as required to clearly define relationships between sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit, ceiling, lighting, and other mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment with other components of the building such as beams, columns, ceilings, and walls.

1. Hold coordination meetings with trades providing the above Work, to

coordinate Work of the trades for each floor and mechanical areas. 2. Prepare coordination Drawings to 1/4” = 1’-0” scale for general layout and

3/8” = 1’-0” for plans and sections in congested areas such as equipment spaces.

3. Resolve conflicts between trades, prepare composite coordination Drawings and obtain signatures on original composite coordination Drawings.

4. When conflicts cannot be resolved, Contractor shall request clarification prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work affected by such conflicts or discrepancies. Prepare interference Drawings to scale and include plans, elevations, sections, and other details as required to clearly define the conflict between the various systems and other components of the building such as beams, columns, and walls, and to indicate the Contractor’s proposed solution.

5. Submit Drawings for approval whenever job measurements and an analysis of the Drawings and Specifications by the Contractor indicate that the various systems cannot be installed without significant deviation from the intent of the Contract. When such an interference is encountered, cease Work in the general areas of the conflict until a solution to the question has been approved by the A/E.

6. Submit original composite coordination Drawings as part of record document submittals specified in Section 01720.

G. Remove and relocate items which are installed without regard to proper access as

directed by the A/E, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.04 CORRESPONDENCE:

All correspondence relating to this Project must show the Project name. Project number and Contract number. Copies of all correspondence between the Owner, Contractor and A/E (except shop Drawings and submittals) should be provided to all parties. Copies of correspondence for the Owner should be provided to both the Project Manager and Inspector.

01040 - 3

1.05 MEETINGS:

A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01200, hold coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to assure coordination of Work.

1.06 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS:

A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Sections 01300, 01310, 01340, 01630 and 01700 and other Sections.

B Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating

elements, and effect on Work of other sections. 107 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT:

A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of Work of separate sections in preparation for Beneficial Occupancy.

B After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for

correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner’s activities.

1.08 COORDINATION WITH LOCAL PERSONNEL:

A. Problems concerning traffic, parking or blocking streets must be referred to the City of Laredo Traffic Department. Coordination is to be through the Owner’s Representative. Submit traffic control plans as required to obtain permits.

B. Any exterior problems, including the moving of utilities is to be referred to the City

of Laredo Utilities Department. Coordination is to be through the Owner’s Representative.

C. The scheduling of utility outages must be coordinated with the Owner’s project

manager of the individual institution at least one week in advance. This coordination is to be arranged through the Owner’s Representative.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

NOT USED PART 3 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01045 - 1

SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED: A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. Coordinate through

the City’s Utility Department. The contractor shall ensure that all permits and approval of cutting locations be obtained prior to any work being executed. Ensure that the Texas Utility 1-800 phone call is made for proper marking of all utilities within the R.O. W. and inside the property of the Owner prior to starting all work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01040 - Coordination. 3. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. 4. Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 5. Other Technical Sections: a. Cutting and patching required to be performed incidental to Work of

the Section. b. Advance notification to trades responsible for Work of other

Sections c. Coordination of trades responsible for Work of other Sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit written request in advance of cutting, drilling, or alteration which affects: 1. Work of Owner or any separate Contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element

or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of Project equipment

elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 6. Damage to existing Work or utilities. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected Work. 3. Necessity for cutting, drilling, alteration, or excavation. 4. Effect on Work of Owner or any separate Contractor, or on structural or

01045 - 2

weatherproof integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed Work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration or excavation. b. Trades who will perform the Work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternative to cutting, drilling, patching, and excavation. 7. Written permission of separate Contractors whose Work is affected. 8. Date and time Work will be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Provide materials and procedures required for original installation. B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution under provision of

Section 01630. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Field Conditions: Check and verify Contract Documents and field conditions before

proceeding with Work. If there are any questions regarding these or other coordination questions, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining clarification from the A/E before proceeding with Work or related Work in question.

B. Execute cutting, drilling, and patching, including excavation and fill as required to

complete the Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and

electrical work. 6. Uncover Work to allow for A/E's and Owner Representative's observation of

Work which has been covered up prior to observation by A/E and Owner. 3.02 INSPECTION: A. Inspection: Carefully examine the premises to determine the extent of Work and the

condition under which it must be done, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching, and excavating and backfilling. No extra payments will be allowed for claims for additional Work that could have been

01045 - 3

determined or anticipated by such inspection. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.

B. Beginning of cutting, drilling, or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION: A. Preparation Prior to Cutting: Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to

assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of Work. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching Work, and maintain excavations free from water.

B. Protection: Provide barricades, coverings, fences, supports, and similar temporary

protections necessary to protect persons and property from injury or damage as a result of Work of this Section. Confine operations to required limits and take reasonable precautions to protect remainder of property from damage.

C. Dust Control: Control dust resulting from cutting and patching to prevent the

spread of dust to adjacent occupied areas and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the adjacent surrounding area. Use of water will be permitted as indicated. Provide drop cloths or other suitable barriers to prevent dust from traveling to adjacent areas. Seal off return air registers or other mechanical systems to prevent dust from entering such systems.

3.04 PERFORMANCE: A. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide

proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed,

moisture-resistant elements, sight-exposed surfaces, and to preserve Owner's warranties and bonds for Work of this Contract and related Work of other contracts.

C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not

allowed without prior written approval. D. Restore Work which has been cut or removed using new products in accordance

with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit and seal interior Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other

penetrations through surfaces. Fit and seal penetrations through exterior Work and slabs for pipes, conduits and other penetrations watertight.

F. At penetrations of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal

voids with fire stopping and sealant material, full thickness of the construction element to provide a smoke seal and penetration rating equivalent to adjacent rated construction.

01045 - 4

G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit as follows:

1. Floor: The complete surface unless otherwise shown or unless a matching patch in applied finishes can be made acceptable to A/E and Owner's Representative.

2. Openings: The entire unit including frame. H. Excavation: Refer to Section 02200. I. Damage: Restore accidental or careless damage to Work to remain in place to a

condition as good as or better than existed before Work was commenced and at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

01050 - 1

SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Field engineering services. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:


1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Provide and pay for field engineering services including survey and layout Work required to execute the Work and civil, structural or other professional engineering services specified, or required to execute the Work.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Qualifications of Registered Surveyor: Provide services of a Registered Surveyor licensed in Texas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION:

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work.

B. Verify all dimensions and compare to existing conditions prior to laying out the Work. Promptly notify the A/E of discrepancies discovered. Extra compensation will not be allowed because of differences between actual measurements and indicated dimensions.

3.02 SURVEY AND LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS:

A. Establish a minimum of 2 permanent bench marks on the Site, referenced to data

01050 - 2

established by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project record documents.

B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site work, and preserve all permanent reference points during construction.

1. Make no changes or relocations without prior Written Notice to A/E. 2. Report to A/E when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires

relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require surveyor to replace Project control points which may be lost or

destroyed. Establish replacements based on original survey control. 4. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey Work as it

progresses.

C. Establish adequate and clearly defined reference lines and levels required for execution of Work; locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means, controlling lines and levels required for the various trades.

D. From time to time verify layouts by the same methods.

E. Underground Obstructions:

1. Pipelines, existing underground installation and underground structures in

vicinity of Work are diagrammatically shown on Drawings according to best information available. Accuracy of information is not warranted.

2. Verify location of underground pipe lines, conduits and structures with Owner and by prospecting in advance of excavation.

3. Repair damage to existing utilities made during construction process as part of Work to satisfaction of Owner.

3.03 SURVEY:

A. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction.

END OF SECTION

01090 - 1

SECTION 01090 REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:

A. Includes requirements for referenced standards, specifications and codes.

B. Acronyms and source of referenced standards. 1.02 REFERENCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Materials, equipment and operations specified by reference to published standards and specifications of a technical, society, trade association, or other agency standard, shall comply with the requirements of the current edition of the listed document that is in effect on the issue date of the Specifications or Addendum page making reference thereto, unless otherwise specified. Make available at site, copies of referenced documents as Owner's Representative or A/E may request.

B. No provision of a reference standard, specification, manual, or code shall be effective

to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, the Contractor, the A/E and their consultants, their agents and employees from those duties and responsibilities set forth in the Contract Documents.

C. Acronyms for names of technical societies, associations, and agencies referenced in

the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as follows:

AA Aluminum Association 900 19th St., NW, Suite 300; Washington, DC 20006; 202/862-5100

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

1518 K Street, NW, Suite 503, Washington, DC 20005; 202/737-0202

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association

2700 River Rd., Suite 118; Des Plaines, IL 60018; 312/699-7310

AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.

1250 Eye Street, NW; Suite 500, Washington, DC 20005; 202/789-2900

ACI American Concrete Institute

P.O. Box 19150; Detroit, MI 48219; 313/532-2600

01090 - 2

ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories 1725 K Street, NW; Washington, DC 20006; 202/887-5872

ADC Air Diffusion Council

230 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 1200; Chicago, IL 60611; 312/372-9800

AGC Associated General Contractors of America

1957 E. Street, NW; Washington, DC 20006

AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, NW; Washington, DC 20006 202/626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.

One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100; Chicago, IL 60601; 312/670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

1133 15th Street, NW; Washington, DC 20005; 202/452-7100

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

30 West University Drive; Arlington Heights, IL 60004; 312/394-0150

ANSI American National Standards Institute

1430 Broadway; New York, NY 10018; 212/354-3300

APA American Plywood Association

P.O. Box 11700; Tacoma, WA 98411; 206/565-6600

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

1501 Wilson Blvd; Arlington, VA 22209; 703/524-8800

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating &

Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 1791 Tullie Circle, NE; Atlanta, GA 30329; 404/636-8400

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

345 East 47th Street; New York, NY 10017; 212/705-7722

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

1916 Race Street; Philadelphia, PA 19103; 215/299-5400

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

2310 S. Walter Reed Drive; Arlington, VA 22206;

01090 - 3

703/671-9100 AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association

P.O. Box 849; Stevensville, MD 21666; 301/643-4163

AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau

P.O. Box 5283; Springfield, VA 22150; 703/339-6660

AWS American Welding Society, Inc.

P.O. Box 351040; 550 Le Jeune Rd., NW; Miami, FL 33135; 305/443-9353

AWWA American Water Works Association

6666 West Quincy Avenue; Denver, CO 80235; 303/794-7711

BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association

335 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor; New York, NY 10017; 212/661-4261

BIA Brick Institute of America

11490 Commerce Park Drive, Suite 300; Reston, VA 22091; 703/620-0010

CE Corps of Engineers (U.S. Department of the Army)

Chief of Engineers - Referral; Washington, D.C. 20314; 202/272-0660

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

National Injury Information Clearinghouse 5401 Westbard Avenue; Bethesda, MD 20816; 800/638-2772

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

933 Plum Grove Road; Schaumburg, IL 60173; 312/517-1200

DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road; McLean, VA 22102; 703/556-3990

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association

3310 Harrison; Topeka, KS 66611; 913/266-7013

FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Organization

1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike; Norwood, MA 02062; 617/762-4300

FS Federal Specification (General Services Administration) Specifications Unit (WFSIS)

01090 - 4

7th and D Streets, SW; Washington, DC 20406; 202/472-2205 or 2140

GA Gypsum Association

810 First Street, NE, Suite 510; Washington, DC 20002; 202/289-5440

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

345 East 47th Street; New York, NY 10017; 212/705-7900

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

345 E. 47th Street; New York, NY 10017; 212/705-7926

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council

c/o ETL Testing Labs, P.O. Box 539; Industrial Park; Cortland, NY 13045; 607/753-6711

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America

Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400; Bedford, IN 47421; 812/275-4426

LPI Lightning Protection Institute

P.O. Box 1029; Woodstock, IL 60098; 815/337-0277

MIL Military Standardization Documents (U.S. Dept of Defense)

Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue; Philadelphia, PA 19120

ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (Division of NAAMM)

600 S. Federal St., Suite 400; Chicago, IL 60605; 312/922-6222

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry; 127 Park Street, NE; Vienna, VA 22180; 703/281-6613

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

600 S. Federal St., Suite 400; Chicago, IL 60605; 312/922-6222

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association

P.O. Box 781; Herndon, VA 22070; 703/435-4900

NEC National Electric Code (by NFPA) NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc.

185 Bridge Plaza, North; Fort Lee, NJ 07024; 201/944-3211

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L Street, NW, Suite 300; Washington, DC 20037; 202/457-8400

01090 - 5

NFPA National Fire Protection Association One Batterymarch Park; Quincy, MA 02269 617/770-3000

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

(formerly National Bureau of standards; U.S. Dept. of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234; 301/921-3405

NPA National Particleboard Association

18928 Premiere Court; Gaithersburg, MD 20879; 301/670-0604

NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association

1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW; Washington, DC 20005; 202/462-6272

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

6250 River Rd.; Rosemont, IL 60018; 312/318-6722

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

P.O. Box 1468; 3475 Plymouth Road; Ann Arbor, MI 48106; 313/769-8010

NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.

3166 Des Plains Ave., IL 60018; 312/635-7744

NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (now NWWDA) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (formerly NWMA)

1400 E. Touhy Avenue #G54; Park Ridge, IL 60018; 312/299-5200

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (U.S. Department of

Labor)Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402; 202/783-3238

PCA Portland Cement Association

5420 Old Orchard Road; Skokie, IL 60077; 312/966-6200

PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute

175 W. Jackson Blvd.; Chicago, IL 60604; 312/786-0300

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute (c/o Saul Baker)

1106 W. 77th St., South Dr.; Indianapolis, IN 46260; 317/251-6970

PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office; Washington, DC 20402; 202/783-3238

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute

01090 - 6

966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12B; Rockville, MC 20805; 301/340-8580

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (Grading Rules)

405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200; Novato, CA 94949; 415/382-0662

SDI Steel Deck Institute

P.O. Box 9506; Canton, OH 44711; 216/493-7886

SDI Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road; Cleveland, OH 44107; 216/899-0010

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

111 East Wacker Drive; Chicago, IL 60601; 312/644-6610

SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,

Inc.; P.O. Box 70; Merrifield, VA 22116; 703/790-9890

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules)

4709 Scenic Highway; Pensacola, FL 32504; 904/434-2611

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

4400 5th Avenue; Pittsburgh, PA 15213; 412/268-3327

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.

P.O. Box 326; Princeton, NJ 08540; 609/921-7050

TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

29 Bank St.; Stamford, CT 06901; 203/324-7533

UL Underwriter's Laboratories

333 Pfingsten Road; Northbrook, IL 60062; 312/272-8800

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules)

P.O. Box 23145; Portland, OR 97223; 503/639-0651

WWPA Western Wood Products Association

Yeon Building, 522 SW 5th Avenue; Portland, OR 97204; 503/224-3930

01090 - 7

1.03 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES:

A. The A/E has contacted authorities having jurisdiction for the listed Regulations and Codes where necessary to obtain information for preparation of the Contract Documents. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having bearing on Work. 1. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. 2. International Building Code 2000 Edition, (for all items not covered by Life

Safety Code). 3. National Fire Codes, NFPA (applicable to work). 4. Energy Conservation Design Standard for New State Buildings. 5. Standard Plumbing Code, Southern Building Code Congress International. 6. Building Service Piping, ASME/ANSI B 31.9. 7. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) Texas Department of Licensing and

Regulations, Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes. 8. American Disabilities Act, Part III, 28 CFR 36, July 26, 1991.

1.04 DEFINITIONS:

A. Require and Words of Similar Import: As required to complete the Work and as required by A/E, unless stated otherwise.

B. Perform: Contractor, at its expense, shall perform operations necessary to complete

Work, including furnishing of necessary labor, tools and equipment, and further including furnishing and installing of materials indicated, specified or required to complete such performance.

C. Provide: Contractor, at its expense, shall furnish and install Work complete in place

and ready for use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment and transportation. Definitions apply same to future, present and past tenses, except word "provide" may mean "contingent upon" where such is context.

D. Other Acceptable Manufacture, Equal, Acceptable Equal, Equivalent and Words of

Similar Import: It shall be understood such words are followed by expression "in opinion of A/E" unless stated otherwise.

E. Acceptable, Acceptance or Words of Similar Import: Acceptance or similar import

of A/E is intended unless stated otherwise.

F. At No Extra Cost to Owner, With No Extra Compensation to Contractor, at Contractor's Expense or Terms of Similar Import: Such terms shall be understood to mean that Contractor shall perform or provide specified operation of Work at no increase to Contract Sum stated in executed Contract.

G. NIC: Work of this Project which is not being performed or provided as part of

01090 - 8

Contract; term shall mean "Not In This Contract" or "Not a Part of the Work to be Performed or Provided by Contractor." "NIC" Work is indicated as aid to Contractor in scheduling amount of time and materials necessary for completion of Contract.

H. Indicated: The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to graphics, notes or schedules

on Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated," it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

I. Directed, Requested or Similar Wording: Where not otherwise explained, terms such

as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by Owner, A/E," "requested by Owner, A/E," and similar directions by Owner, A/E. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Owner, A/E's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision.

J. Approve: Where used in conjunction with Owner, A/E's response to submittals,

requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be held to limitations of Owner, A/E's responsibilities and duties specified in General Conditions. In no case will "approval" by Owner, A/E be interpreted as a release of Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents.

K. Project Site: The space available to Contractor for performance of the Work, either

exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other Work as part of the Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01160 - 1

SECTION 01160 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Bidding and Contract requirements apply to this work. Section includes procedures for the overall accomplishment of the Work. Where specified action is required by this Section, Contractor is responsible to perform or assign such requirement to Subcontractors and see that it is performed.

1.02 RELATED WORK:


1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01040 - Coordination. 3. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching. 4. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 5. Other Technical Sections.

1.03 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN TRADES:

A. Contractor shall require and be responsible for cooperation and coordination between various trades and subcontractors whose work is dependent upon one another. Schedule such work so as to prevent delays in dependent work and so that all related work will progress together. Fully inform each trade or subcontractor of the relation of its work to other work, and require each to make necessary provisions for the requirements of such other work. No additional compensation for extra work incurred through the lack of cooperation and coordination between various trades and subcontractors will be allowed.

1.04 PROTECTION:

A. Contractor shall assume responsibility for initiation and maintenance of protective requirements specified under temporary protections and controls in Section 01500. 1.05 REPAIR OF DAMAGE:

A. Damage: Restore accidental or careless damage to work to remain in place to a condition as good as or better than existed before work was commenced and at no cost to the Owner.

01160 - 2

1.06 USE OF STREETS:

A. Contractor shall conform to campus rules and/or regulations applicable to the use of streets and sidewalk areas.

1. Confine truck route egress and exit to Site indicated on Drawings. 2. Coordinate closing of streets, service drives and parking lots in accordance

with Section 01040, paragraph 1.08. 1.07 SECURITY:

A. Conform to requirements of public laws, ordinances and regulations and requirements of insurance carriers concerning security of Site while work is in progress as well as when it has been suspended.

1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Maintain project record documents at Site. Refer to Section 01720 for requirements. 1.09 CONSTRUCTION LOADING:

A. General: Concrete slabs on grade and suspended floors have not been designed for heavy loading.

B. Slabs On Grade: Do not subject slabs on grade to excessive loading by shoring,

storage of materials or operation of construction equipment unless adequately protected by planking. Maintenance of slabs in good condition is the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall remove all damaged areas of such slabs and replace them with new work at no cost to Owner.

1.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Existing Utilities: Schedule shut downs if needed in order to minimize inconvenience to Owner. Notify Owner's Representative in writing one week in advance of any anticipated shutdowns. Schedule shutdown at a time mutually agreeable to Owner and Contractor.

B. Existing Valves and Switchgear: Owner will be responsible for opening and closing

all valves and switches on all utility services. This will be done by Utilities Physical Plant personnel without cost except when overtime work is required.

C. Damaged Utilities and Services: When existing utilities are damaged, the contractor

shall make repairs under supervision of Owner’s Representative personnel. If repairs are to utilities shown on survey, or Contract Documents, all costs or repairs incurred by Owner will be borne by Contractor.

01160 - 3

D. No additional compensation will be made to Contractor for reasons of premium time, after hours, overtime or for inefficiency of operation.

E. Parking: Restricted to areas indicated for Contractor's use. Contractor shall make

arrangements and pay for any additional parking required off Project Site.

F. Deliveries and Removals: All deliveries of construction material, equipment, supplies, and similar operations, and removals shall be performed only in areas designated and approved by Owner's Representative.

G. Circulation: Confine construction operations to designated areas avoiding any

interruption of vehicular circulation to existing facilities. Should these requirements become unavoidable, submit a request to Owner's Representative in writing at least two weeks prior to anticipated interruption, stating predicted time, location and duration of interruption.

H. Construction Scheduling: The Work shall be conducted in such a way as to cause a

minimum of interference with the use of adjacent existing facilities during regular school and/or work hours.

I. Noise Control: The Contractor shall execute the Work in this Contract as quietly as

practical to avoid unnecessary disturbances.

1. Any complaints duly registered by Owner of unacceptable noise levels shall be cause for use of special precautions and methods of operation by Contractor to reduce noises to acceptable levels at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. The Owner shall be sole judge of tolerability of noise levels.

J. Dust Control: Control all dust, to Owner's satisfaction, in working area and involved portions of Site including access roads or drives.

PART 2 MATERIALS: NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION: NOT USED END OF SECTION

01200 - 1

SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specifications apply to this work.


A. Requirements for the arrangement, distribution of notices, and maintenance of records for the pre-construction meeting, progress meetings, and pre-installation meetings.

1.03 GENERAL:

A. Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers representatives attending the meetings/conferences of this section shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

B. Comply with the following meeting requirements after execution of the Contract.

1. Arrangements: Arrange for a convenient, comfortable room in which to

conduct the progress meetings, furnished as necessary to accommodate the people involved and to accomplish the purpose of the meeting. Owner will provide the room for the pre-construction meeting.

2. Notices: Distribute written notices to all concerned at least 1 week in advance of the meeting date.

3. Records: Keep notes during each meeting and distribute them in the form of minutes of the meeting to all concerned within 7 days after the adjournment of the meeting.

4. Schedule Updating: Immediately following each progress meeting, where revisions to the progress schedule have been made or recognized, revise the progress schedule. Reissue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

1.03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING:

A. Chairman: The meeting will be presided over by the Owner's Representative.

B. Attendance: The following persons will be expected to attend: 1. Owner's Representative.

City of Laredo Utilities Department.

01200 - 2

2. Architect/Engineer's Construction Administrator. 3. Architect/Engineer's Consultant for Mechanical, Electrical and Structural

Engineering as required. 4. Contractor's General Superintendent and Project Manager. 5. Major Subcontractors including those for mechanical, plumbing and

electrical work.

C. Agenda: Subjects shall include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Distribution of submittals. Refer to Section 01300. 2. Sequence of critical work. 3. Relation and coordination of Contractor. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Processing of Change Orders. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Construction Documents. 7. Handling of materials to permit inspection. 8. Procedure for maintaining Record Documents. 9. Use of the premises; access to the Site, office and storage areas, and Owner's

requirements. 10. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 11. Safety and first aid procedure. 12. Security procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures. 14. Additional subjects as requested by the Owner, the Architect/Engineer or the

Contractor. 15. List of major subcontractors and supplies.

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS:

A. Chairman: Contractor's Project Manager or Project Superintendent shall preside over the meeting.

B. Attendance: The following persons will be expected to attend:

1. Owner's Representative. 2. Architect/Engineer's Construction Administrator. 3. Architect/Engineer's Consultants for mechanical, electrical and structural

engineering until excused from attendance. 4. Contractor's General Superintendent, Project Superintendent and Project

Manager. 5. Subcontractors who have work in progress. 6. Subcontractor who will start work within the next month. 7. Others as requested by Owner, Architect/Engineer, or Contractor.

01200 - 3

C. Agenda: The Contractor will provide a written agenda including but not necessarily limited to the following items:

1. Present a brief written narrative of construction progress since the last

monthly meeting containing: a. General description of work performed. b. Expectation of meeting scheduled dates. c. Description of current or anticipated delaying factors or problems, if

any. 2. Review the updated Progress Schedule and present a written schedule

analysis. 3. Review the Submittal Schedule/Log. 4. Review the Revision Log. 5. Review of Requests for Information. 6. Review of Record ("As Built") Drawings. 7. Review/approval of the Pay Request. 8. General discussion: Other outstanding/current business.

D. Number of Meetings: A minimum of one progress meeting shall be held each month.

Other weekly or biweekly progress meetings shall be held as determined by the Owner and shall cover those subjects as required by the Owner.

1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS:

A. Convene a pre-installation meeting at the Project field office prior to commencing any work.

B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, work of Section.

C. Notify Architect ten (7) days in advance of meeting date.

D. Contractor shall prepare agenda, preside at meeting, record minutes, and distribute

copies within four (4) working days after meeting to participants, with three (3) copies furnished to the Architect and one (1) copy furnished to the Owner.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and

coordination with related work. Review submittals for all work to be installed.

F. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspection to insure that the work called for by this contract conforms to the contract specifications and requirements. The Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to the Owner's Representative.

1.06 PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE:

01200 - 4

A. Refer to Roofing Section for requirements. 1.07 LOCKSET HARDWARE/KEY CONFERENCE:

A key conference shall be conducted after approval of hardware submittal prior to the ordering of lock hardware. The General Contractor shall, in conjunction with the Project Manager, A/E and User Coordinator, establish a date for the keying conference to be held. A key conference is required to review the function of the locks and to insure that all security requirements of the Using Agency will be met.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



01300 - 1

SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the

Specifications apply to this work. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Administrative submittal requirements, including but not limited to: 1. List of proposed subcontractors. 2. List of materials. 3. Contract price breakdown. 4. Progress schedule. 1.03 RELATED WORK: A. Coordinate the work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly

execute the Work, and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections, including:

1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01310 - Schedules, Reports and Payments. 3. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Colors. 4. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. 5. Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 6. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 7. Division 15 and 16 Sections: Additional submittal requirements for mechanical,

plumbing and electrical work. 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. General: Immediately after the development and acceptance of the fully developed

progress schedule, prepare a complete schedule of work-related submittals. Submit this schedule within 10 days of the date required for establishment of progress schedule. Correlate this submittal schedule with the listing of principal subcontractors, as required by the Special Provisions, and with the "list of materials" as specified and elsewhere in Contract Documents.

B. Form: Prepare the schedule in chronological order of submittals. Show category of the

submittal, name of Subcontractor, a generic description of work covered, related section numbers, activity or event number on progress schedule, the scheduled date for the first submission, resubmittal, and the final release or approval by Architect/Engineer. Submittals of written data shall be on 8-1/2 x 11 inch size paper, they shall be typed and they shall clearly state the name of the project, the subject of the submittal and its date.

01300 - 2

C. Delivery: Submittals shall be sent to the Architect/Engineer's office. The required date shall be considered met if the submittal is postmarked with such date.

D. Approval: When approval is required, resubmittals shall be made when necessary in the

manner described for the original submission, unless specified otherwise, until it is received.

1.05 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS: A. General: Not later than 15 days after Award of Contract, submit the names of

subcontractors and material suppliers proposed for work tabulated by and complete for each portion of the work in duplicate. Performance or non-performance of any subcontractor or material supplier will not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for work as called for under the Contract Documents.

B. Submit list of materials within 30 days after issuance of Notice to Proceed in accordance

with General Conditions, Article V, paragraph 5.3.2. 1.06 LIST OF PROPOSED MATERIALS: A. Materials List: Submit in duplicate a list of the following types of materials proposed for

installation: 1. Material not specified (follow substitution requirements specified in Section

01630). 2. Material selected from a Specification naming more than one manufacturer or

supplier. 3. Material selected to conform to a reference specification when no manufacturer

has been named. B. It will be assumed that unlisted materials will be furnished as specified when only one

manufacturer has been specified or that the Architect/Engineer's selection will govern when more than one manufacturer has been named or when reference specifications have been used.

C. The list shall be tabulated by, and be complete for, each Specification Section and portion

of the Work. Include name of manufacturer of each material. For materials specified by reference standards, also include the following with the listing of each such product:

1. Address of manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalogue designation. 4. Manufacturer's data, including performance and test data and referenced standards. 1.07 CONTRACT PRICE BREAKDOWN: A. General:

1. Submit Contract Price Breakdown to Owner and Architect at least 20 days prior to submitting first Application for Payment.

01300 - 3

2. Upon request of Architect, furnish additional data to support values given that will

substantiate their correctness. 3. Approved Contract Price Breakdown will be used as basis for reviewing

Contractor's Applications for Payment. B. Form and Content: 1. Submit typewritten Schedule. a. Use Table of Contents of Project Manual as basis of format for listing

costs of Work. b. List installed value of component parts of Work in sufficient detail to

serve as basis for computing values for progress payments. 2. Line item costs shall not include General Contractor fee/overhead and profit; but,

shall reflect the direct cost for labor and materials to General Contractor. Separate items into labor amounts and material amounts for each item.

3. For items on which payment will be requested for stored materials, break down value into:

a. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. Total installed value. 4. Labor Costs: Include estimated installation costs including labor, applicable taxes,

insurance, fringe benefits, erection equipment and tools. 5. Materials Costs: Include estimated material and manufactured equipment costs

including delivery, taxes and insurance. 6. Itemize separate line item cost for each of the following General Contractor cost

items: a. Bonds. b. Field supervision and layout. c. Temporary facilities and controls. d. General Contractor overhead and profit or "fee." 7. Combined total of all costs listed in Schedule shall equal Contract Sum. C. Review and Resubmittal: 1. After initial review by Owner and Architect, revise and resubmit if required. 2. Revise and resubmit along with next Application for Payment when a Change

Order is issued. List each Change Order as a new line item. 1.08 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Submission: Prepare and submit in triplicate, a progress schedule and bar graph or if

specified, a Critical Path Method Schedule as specified in Section 01310 Schedules, Reports and Payments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01340 - 1

SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND COLORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



A. Submittal requirements, including but not limited to:

1. Shop drawings, product data, samples and colors. 2. Submittal procedures. 3. Review procedures. 4. Mockups and field samples.

1.03 RELATED WORK:

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work, and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections, including:

1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01040 - Coordination. 3. Section 01300 - Submittals. 4. Section 01310 - Schedules, Reports and Payments. 5. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. 6. Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 7. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 8. Other Technical Sections: Additional submittal requirements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS, GENERAL:

A. In addition to the requirements outlined under Article V, paragraph 5.14 of the General Conditions, Contractor shall comply with the following duties and responsibilities.

B. The Contractor shall submit to the A/E for review all shop drawings, product data,

samples and other submittals for all items required in the Technical Sections of the Specifications and for all items proposed for use in the Work. The Contractor will also send one (1) complete set of review copies of shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals for all items proposed for use in the Work to Owner,

01340 - 2

marked "For Review Only". Do not combine submittals for specified work with requests for substitutions. Submit requests for substitutions. See Section 01630 for requirements.

C. The Contractor shall review and designate (stamp) its approval and submit, with

reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence, all shop drawings, product data and samples required.

D. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples far enough in advance to allow

ample time for A/E's review, re-submittal if required, and fabrication without creating any delay in the Work, or the work of any other Contractor or subcontractor.

1. Make architectural submittals a minimum of 30 days prior to needed return

date. 2. Make structural, mechanical and electrical submittals a minimum of 45 days

prior to needed return date. 3. Allow more review time for requests or substitutions. 4. Shop drawings will be discussed at the Pre-Construction Conference on an

individual project basis regarding the number of shop drawings to be submitted for review by the A/E and Owner. See General Conditions, Article V, paragraph 5.14.4 for requirements.

5. The A/E, after review and approval of submittals, will mail or deliver one (1) approved copy to the Owner's Project Inspector, and one (1) copy to the Owner.

6. For submittals that are rejected or require resubmittal to the A/E for any reason, the A/E is requested to provide two (2) copies of the "letter of transmittal" only to the Owner, i.e., one (1) copy to the Project Inspector and one (1) copy to the Owner.

E. Submittal Content Requirements:

1. Shop drawings shall be completely detailed and dimensioned with types,

sizes, and gauges of materials noted. Where shop coat of paint is required on materials, brand name, and chemical content shall be noted on the drawings.

2. Shop drawings shall be neatly, accurately, and legibly drawn, noted and referenced.

3. Each item contained in the submittal shall be clearly referenced and noted establishing the item's location in the finished work.

4. Member and item designations shall be the same as those used on the A/E's drawings, except that, where the A/E's has used the same designation for more than one member or item, the Contractor may add a suffix to the designation to differentiate between these members.

5. Where published standard exist (such as ACI Standard 315-65 reinforcing steel), these shall be followed in the preparation of shop drawings. Where no such standards are published by the industry or trade concerned, the shop

01340 - 3

drawings shall be prepared in a suitable form acceptable to the A/E.

F. Submittal Format Requirements:

1. Submittal Preparation: Mark each submittal with a permanent label or title block, as appropriate, for identification with the following information on the label or title block for proper processing and recording of action taken. a. Title of submittal and date submitted. b. Sheet number and number of sheets included (as applicable).

Number drawings consecutively. c. Project Name, Project Number, and location of Project. d. Name of Architect and Architect's Project Number. e. Name of Contractor, subcontractor, fabricator supplier, and

manufacturer, as appropriate. f. Name of drawing and scale (as applicable). g. Name and date of each revision. h. Cross reference to A/E's Drawings and Specification Sections, as

appropriate. i. Provide a space on the label or adjacent to title block for the

Contractor's review and approval markings, and appropriate space for the Architect's or Engineer's "Action" stamp.

j. Name of each item on each sheet submitted and indicate its location in the Project Work.

2. Submittal Numbering System: To expedite review of shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals, all submittals shall be assigned a submittal number clearly visible on all transmittal forms and on each copy of each submittal adjacent to Contractor's review stamp. Numbering system shall track Specifications format. In the example 03-001.0 the number represents the following: a. First Two Numbers: Specification Division; Division 3 in example. b. Third Through Fifth Numbers: Numerical log of submittals within

each Division; Submittal number 1 in example. c. Last Number: Initial or re-submittal of each submittal; .0 for initial

submittal, .1 for first re-submittal, and so forth. 3. Transmittal Form: Provide a letter of transmittal with each submittal, in

duplicate, accurately describing the complete contents of the submittal, including the following: a. Project name. b. Date. c. To: d. From: e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer and supplier. f. References. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description of number of sheets, type of data,

01340 - 4

equipment and product types, finishes, submittal number, and similar data.

i. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. j. Signature of transmitter. k. Record relevant information and requests for data on the transmittal

form. On the transmittal form, or on a separate sheet attached to the form, record deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any, including minor variations and limitations.

4. Submit Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical items specified in each individual Section at the same time. Partial submittals will not be considered.

5. Bind each of the Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical submittals into a complete brochure; loose sheets will not be accepted. Each complete brochure shall contain a Table of Contents showing the order in which the items are arranged in the brochure and shall have extended index tabs for each item. Arrange items in the same order in each brochure. Where manufacturer's literature contains information on more than one product, clearly mark the item being submitted, using the symbol or designation used to identify the item on the Drawings or in the Specifications.

6. Group only like or related items together in a single submittal. Do not combine submittals for specified work with requests for substitutions. Submit requests for substitutions as specified in Section 01630.

G. Contractor Duties and Responsibilities:

1. Coordinate requirements for submission of each shop drawing, product data

and sample as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the Work in accordance with the Construction Progress Schedule and Submittal Schedule.

2. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to submission to Architect. By submitting shop drawings, product data, and samples, Contractor represents that it has verified field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers and similar data, and has coordinated each submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by A/E's review of submittals. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned to sender without Architect's or Engineer's review "action".

3. Contractor shall certify by stamped, signed, and dated notation on each submittal, that "Submittal is in compliance with requirements of Contract Documents without deviation." Submittals without Contractors stamp and submittals which, in A/E's or Owner's opinion, are incomplete, contain numerous errors, have not been checked, or have been checked only superficially, will be returned without disposition. Delays resulting therefrom shall be Contractor's responsibility.

4. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the

01340 - 5

requirements of the Contract Documents by A/E's review of shop drawings, product data, and samples unless Contractor has specifically informed the A/E in writing of such deviation at time of submission and A/E has given written acceptance to the specific deviation.

5. Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings, product data or samples, to revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals.

6. Contractor shall give prompt written notice to A/E of inability to comply with exceptions noted on the returned submittals or if unsatisfactory results are anticipated. Document specific reasons for inability to comply or specific unsatisfactory results that are anticipated. Propose substitution to comply with intent of the Contract Documents and produce satisfactory results in accordance with the substitution requirements of Section 01630.

7. No portion of the Work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product data or sample shall be commenced until submittal has been reviewed with "No Exceptions Taken" status by A/E, except as otherwise provided in this Section.

8. All portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.

H. Submittal Quantity: Unless greater quantity is otherwise required, provide and transmit to the office of the A/E, at the address given in the Contract Documents, the quantity of shop drawings, and product data required in General Conditions, Article V, paragraph 5.14.4. Submit minimum of three samples of materials requiring choice of color, texture or finish. Large job site samples shall be limited to one for each approval submittal. Refer to Section 01630 for additional requirements.

I. Reproduction and Distribution of Submittals After A/E's Review: Provide and

distribute blueline prints of reviewed shop drawing reproducible transparencies as required to provide 2 copies for Owner and 1 copy for Job Site file (both "No Exceptions Taken" status only), and copies necessary for Contractor operations. Distribute sets of product data to provide 2 copies for Owner and 1 copy for Job site file (both "No Exceptions Taken" status only) and others as necessary for Contractor operations. Retain Job Site mock-ups and samples until removal is approved by A/E and Owner's Representative.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES:

A. Shop Drawings: Comply with "Submittals, General" and the following:

1. Definition: The term "shop drawings" refers to original drawings prepared by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, fabricator or distributor illustrating a portion of the Work including fabrication drawings, manufacturing drawings, erection drawings, setting drawings, patterns, coordination drawings, schedules, design mix formulas, Contractor's engineering calculations, and layout drawings including ceiling layouts if varied from the Contract

01340 - 6

Documents. Do not submit Contract Drawings for shop drawings. 2. Format: Prepare drawings on minimum 8-1/2" x 11" to maximum 30" x 42"

sheets. Draw plan and section details at a scale of 1" = 1' - 0", details shall be drawn at a scale of 3" = 1' - 0" or larger scale. In addition to "Submittals, General" requirements, each drawing shall be cross-referenced to A/E's Drawings.

3. Content: Drawings shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. The size thickness of members. b. The method of anchoring and securing parts together. c. The quantity and location of each item. d. Other pertinent data necessary to show the work to be done, where,

and how it is to be done. e. Materials and finishes. f. How item fits to abutting work and requirements for related

construction. g. Required connections.

h. Overall size and weight. i. Clearances and tolerances. j. Verify field conditions prior to fabrication. k. Coordinate Shop Drawings and data with requirements. l. Refer to Section 01040 - Coordination for other requirements.

B. Product Data:

1. Definition: Manufacturer's standard product specifications, installation

instructions, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, printed performance and operational range diagrams, mill reports, operating and maintenance manuals, color charts, data sheets, brochures, drawings and diagrams, and other standard illustrative and descriptive data to clearly identify pertinent data, models and materials, uses, limitations, actual dimensions and clearances required, and technical performance data including wiring diagrams and controls.

2. Mark out information not applicable to this Project and supplement standard product data to show compliance with requirements.

C. Samples:

1. Definition: Samples include:

a. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated work. b. Small cuts or containers of materials. c. Complete units of repetitively-used materials. d. Swatches showing full range of color, texture and pattern. e. Color range sets. f. Units of work to be used for independent inspection and testing. g. Units of work to be used as a standard to judge materials and

01340 - 7

workmanship. 2. Provide samples for items where specified and for items requiring a choice of

color, texture or finish. Samples shall illustrate the materials and workmanship and establish standards by which to judge the completed work. Refer to Section 01630 for additional requirements.

3. Typical office samples shall be approximately 12" square of 12" long unless otherwise noted and shall clearly illustrate the applicable function, corners, joints, related parts, attachment devices, specified finish and full range of colors. Full size approved samples may be incorporated into the Work.

1.06 FIELD MOCK-UPS AND FIELD SAMPLES:

A. The Contractor shall erect and maintain mock-ups and field samples as required by the various sections of the specifications. Mock-ups and field samples are required for, but not limited to the following:

1. Concrete sidewalk finishes. 2. Exterior wall complete.

B. Field samples and job site mock-ups shall be erected at the Project Site at a mutually agreed location. Contractor shall request approval for location on which to construct mock-up of field sample prior to proceeding. Each field sample or mock-up shall be complete and illustrate the range of finish and workmanship required in the completed Work and will be used by A/E, upon approval, as a standard to judge subsequent work.

C. Where several mock-ups of alternate construction techniques or finishes are required

and prepared, each shall be labeled for clear identification indicating base construction finish material, special techniques used and where important for duplication of effect line pressures, grit classification, lengths of exposure, surface preparation, undercoats, strength of reagents, etc.

C. Contractor shall request review of mock-up or field sample upon completion prior to

proceeding with actual construction work. E. Contractor shall protect mock-up or field samples from damage, dirt and

discoloration after A/E's approval. Retain on the job as a standard reference for materials, workmanship and appearance until removal is authorized. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up or field sample until so authorized.

1.07 COLOR SCHEDULES:

A. After receipt of all samples, A/E will present to the Owner a proposed comprehensive color schedule for review and approval.

01340 - 8

1. Once approved, the colorboard will be sent to Owner, Thereafter, the colorboard will be kept at the site for reference. A copy of the color finish schedule compiled after the colors are approved must be provided to the Owner.

2. The Contractor must insure that required submittals for all items requiring

color selection are accomplished in a timely manner. The A/E cannot prepare the colorboard for approval by the Owner until all items requiring color selection have been submitted.

B. The approved color schedule will then be released to the Contractor for ordering

materials.

C. No color selection will be released until all colors are approved in the comprehensive color schedule. Any "early" selections requested, and acted upon by the Contractor, shall be at its own risk and understanding that material of color differing from the approved color schedule will be rejected.

D. If the Contractor is unable to submit all color selections/samples within fifteen (15)

days after "Notice to Proceed", the A/E may proceed with preparation of the color schedule using the color selections of a specified product. The Contractor shall be required to match the selected colors at no additional cost to the Owner of the specified product selected by the A/E.

1.08 ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S ACTION:

A. Upon receipt of submittals requiring review, the A/E will review submittals and return them to the Contractor with results of the review indicated as follows: 1. REVIEWED; NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN: Submittal has been reviewed for

the limited purpose of checking for conformance information given and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents and no exceptions are taken; Contractor may proceed with work represented in submittal, provided no deviation to Contract Documents.

2. REVIEWED; EXCEPTIONS NOTED: Submittal has been reviewed as stated above and certain exceptions are noted. Contractor may proceed with work represented in submittal, unless otherwise noted. Revise submittal, incorporating exceptions noted, and resubmit to A/E until "Reviewed; No Exceptions Taken" status is given.

3. REVIEWED; REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Submittal has been reviewed as stated in paragraph 1 above, Contractor may not proceed with work represented in submittal, and submittal is not acceptable for one of the following reasons: a. Not enough information is provided to make a determination. b. Submittal contains too many errors or omissions to make a

determination.

01340 - 9

c. Information provided does not conform with the information given in the Contract Documents.

4. REJECTED; SUBMIT SPECIFIC ITEM: Submittal has been reviewed as stated in paragraph 1 above, work represented in submittal has not been accepted in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01600; submit specified item.

1.10 REQUIRED SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:

A. General:

1. In addition to the requirements outlined in the General Conditions, Special Conditions, Division 1 and in the Technical Sections of the Specifications, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings, product data, samples, color samples, warranties, and other pertinent data as briefly scheduled herein.

2. Refer to each individual Section of the Specifications for specific requirements of each submittal item.

3. Where requirements are not specifically indicated, provide sufficient data as required to incorporate each item into the work.

4. All subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers shall provide a warranty of materials and workmanship of not less than one year duration, and as otherwise specified.

B. Submittal Schedule Legend: The following abbreviations are used in remarks column

of the Submittal Schedule:

1. SD: Shop Drawings 2. M: Manufacturer's Data 3. C: Color Selection Required 4. S: Physical Samples 5. R: Additional Replacement Materials 6. MO: Maintenance and Operating Manuals 7. IO: Instruction of Owner's Personnel 8. G1, G5, Etc: Guarantee with number of years duration 9. TR: Test Reports 10. CR: Certifications

C. Submittal Schedule:

Division 0 - Bidding and Contract Requirements

List of Subcontractors within 30 days after notification of Contract

Award List of Materials within 60 days after issuance of Notice to Proceed Construction Progress Schedule within 3 weeks after issuance of Notice to Proceed

01340 - 10

General Contractor's and Maintenance Warranty G1

Division 1 - General Requirements

Construction Progress with Schedule of Values within 3 weeks and each month there after Contract Warranty and Guarantee additions noted herein Guarantees additions noted herein Project Sign SD within 30 days Maintenance MO 4 sets prior to Final Acceptance and payment

All items requiring Color Selection within 60 days Soil, Concrete Mix Designs M, S

Division 2 - Site Work

Select Structural Fill Borrow Material TR, S, G1 Compaction and Testing TR, Special Provisions Soil Treatment M, G5 Sidewalk Finish Sample S, G1 Concrete and Reinforcing Steel M, TR, SD, G1 Fountain-Pond and Systems M, TR, SD, G5, and G10

Division 3 - Concrete

Concrete Formwork SD Concrete Reinforcement & Assemblies M, TR, CR, SD, G1 Cast-in-Place Concrete M, TR, SD, CR, G1 Division 4 – Masonry (Not Used)

Division 5 – Metals Concrete masonry Units M, CR, C, S, SD, G1 Stone Veneer M, CR, C, S, SD, G1 Miscellaneous Metals M, CR, C, S, SD, G1 Division 6 - Wood and Plastic

Rough Carpentry M, CR, G1 Millwork C, SD, G1

Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

Fluid Applied Waterproofing M, S, CR, SD, G10

01340 - 11

Flexible Flashing M, S, CR, G1 Dampproofing M, G1 Building Insulation M, S, CR, G1 Standing Seam Roof System M. SD, S, CR, Flashing and Sheet Metal M, SD, S, CR, G2 Roof Accessories & Gutters, DS M, SD, G5 Joint Sealers M, SD, S, CR, C, G5 Division 8 - Doors and Windows

Metal Doors and Frames M, SD, CR, G1 High Pressure Laminate Doors M, SD, CR, G1 Aluminum Windows M, SD, S, TR, CR, C, G5 Aluminum Storefronts M, SD, S, TR, CR, C, G5 Finish Hardware Schedule M, SD, S, G1/5 Glass and Glazing M, SD, S, C, G1/5 (mirrors)

Division 9 - Finishes

Metal Suds M, S, CR, C, G1 Gypsum Board Systems M, S, CR, TR, G1 Porcelain Tile M, S, C, CR, R, G1 Ceiling Systems M, SD, S, R, CR, G1 Acoustical Wallboard M, SD, S, R, CR, G1 Painting M, SD, S, C, CR, R, G1

Division 10 - Specialties

Markerboards / Tackboards M, SD, S, C, G1/50 Toilet Partitions M, SD, S, C, CR, G1 Aluminum Flagpole M, SD, S, C, CR, G1 Metal Wall Louvers M, SD, S, CR, C, G1 Identifying Devices M, SD, S, C, G1 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets M, SD, C, G1 Toilet Accessories M, SD, C, CR, S, G1

Division 11 – Equipment (Not Used)

Electric Projection Screens Division 12 - Furnishings

Horizontal Blinds M, SD, S, C, G1 Division 13 - Special Construction

01340 - 12

Fire Alarm System M, SD, S, R, CR, G1 Pre-engineered Metal Building M, SD, S, R, CR, G1 Division 14 - Conveying Systems (Not Used)

Division 15 - Mechanical Refer to the various Division 15 Sections specific submittal requirements M, SD, S, C, MO, IO, G1

Division 16 - Electrical Refer to the various Division 16 Sections specific submittal requirements M, SD, S, C, MO, IO, G1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01410 - 1

SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. General requirements for Owner's testing laboratory services to perform quality control services and testing by as selected by Owner.

B. General requirements and responsibilities for Contractor's testing laboratory services

to perform specified services and testing (Concrete mix designs, required material certification testing, and similar specified testing).

C. Testing laboratory qualifications, procedures, limits of authority and testing

laboratory submittal requirements.

D. Testing, inspection, and certifications specified in other sections of Project Manual shall be paid by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be by agencies approved by the Owner.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OWNERS QUALITY CONTROL TESTING:

A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory and/or geotechnical engineering service to perform quality control tests and to transmit copies of test reports to Contractor. Sampling and testing that the Owner may require is specified in this Section and in the various technical Sections requiring quality control testing. Cooperate with Owner's testing laboratory personnel, provide access to the Work, to manufacturer's and fabricator's operations, furnish incidental labor and facilities, and samples for test and inspections, as specified.

1. Employment of testing laboratory to perform quality control tests is for

benefit of Owner in confirming that performance and quality of the Work is in conformance with the Contract Documents.

2. Employment of a testing laboratory by Owner in no way relieves Contractor's obligation to perform work in accordance with Contract Documents.

3. Owner's testing laboratory shall not be the same as Contractor's testing laboratory used for design and certification testing unless otherwise acceptable to the A/E and Owner.

4. Where the terms "Inspector" and "Laboratory" are used, they mean and refer to an officially designated and accredited inspector of the testing laboratory engaged by the Owner.

5. The inspecting agency shall make all inspections and perform all tests in accordance with the rules and regulations of the building code, local authorities, the Specifications of the ASTM and these Contract Documents.

01410 - 2

6. Commercial Testing Laboratories In general, all Contracts awarded by Owner will require that testing not performed by the Contractor (i.e., soils density tests) or by the A/E (i.e., spot checking of air flow by the Engineer) will be performed by a commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. The cost of such commercial testing will be paid directly by Owner.. Retesting will also be paid by the Owner, but will be reinvoiced at cost to the Contractor. The number of copies of test reports will be determined for each individual project but in general will include:

Two copies for the General Contractor; One copy for the A/E; One copy for the Owner One copy for the Project Inspector.

Employment of the testing laboratory is for the benefit of the Owner in confirming that performance and quality of the Work is in conformance with the Contract documents.

The engagement of a testing laboratory by the Owner in no way relieves the Contractor of its responsibility. In full compliance of the Contract, the Contractor remains liable for the quality of the materials, products/equipment installed, and satisfactory work performance.

B. Owner's quality control testing and sampling may include the following and other

services and testing to ensure Contract performance.

1. Compacted Fill and Backfill (Section 02200): Perform field density tests. 2. Footing Subgrades (Section 02200): Perform tests and visual comparisons of

footing subgrades to verify design bearing capacities. 3. Pavement sub-grade, base material and/or concrete/asphaltic concrete paving.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR'S LABORATORY SERVICES:

A. Contractor's Design and Certification Testing: Provides services of an independent testing laboratory or facility acceptable to the A/E and Owner to perform design and certification testing services.

1. Submit written description of testing laboratory giving qualifications of

personnel, laboratory facilities and equipment, and other information as may be requested by A/E.

2. Contractor's testing laboratory shall not be the same as Owner's testing laboratory used for quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the A/E and Owner.

B. Contractor's design testing and certification testing includes:

01410 - 3

1. Earthwork (Section 02200): Identify suitable soil material at borrow material

location, sampling soil material, and testing of soil material samples. 2. Performing certified welding procedure qualification and requalification

testing specified in Section 05400, 05500, 05520, 05720, and 05721. 3. Testing of above materials when mill certificates are unavailable. 4. Testing when source of material is changed after initial tests have been

performed. 5. Other testing required by other Sections of the Specifications.


A. Laboratory Qualifications and Procedures:

1. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," latest edition published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. Testing agencies shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" and ASTM E 543, "Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies."

2. Testing agencies shall each be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability insurance policy having a limit of liability not less than $500,000.00.

3. The inspection and testing services of the testing agency shall be under the direction of a Registered Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, charged with engineering managerial responsibility, and having at least five years engineering experience in inspection and testing of construction materials.

4. Inspecting personnel monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors.

5. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent tour of inspection. Include memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by this inspection.

6. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

7. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified requirements and if not specified, in accordance with applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials and other recognized authorities as approved.

8. Primary inspectors performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, "Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors." The inspector may be supported by assistant inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under the

01410 - 4

supervision of the inspector. Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified ASW Certified Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI). The work of assistant inspectors shall be regularly monitored by the inspector, generally on a daily basis.

B. Laboratory Duties: Cooperate with A/E and Contractor. Upon notice, provide

qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. In performing tests and inspections, Laboratory shall:

1. Comply with specified standards. Comply with building code requirements

for "Special Inspection" whether or not such inspections are specified herein. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.

If the material furnished and/or work performed fails to meet requirements of contract documents, laboratory inspector shall promptly notify both the Contractor and the A/E of such failure.

3. Promptly notify Owner's Representative, Contractor and A/E of observed irregularities or deficiencies in the Work.

4. A representative of the Owner's testing laboratory, who has reviewed and is familiar with the project and specifications, shall participate in all pre-construction conferences. It shall coordinate material testing and inspection requirements with the Contractor and its subcontractors consistent with the planned construction schedule. The laboratory representative shall attend, throughout the course of the project, such conferences as may be required or requested to address quality control issues.

5. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials, assemblies, specimens, and work performed, including design mixes, methods and techniques and report to the A/E the progress thereof.

C. Limits of Testing Laboratory Authority: Laboratory is not authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter, relax, or enlarge requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or reject any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor and subcontractors. 4. Laboratory technicians do not act as foremen, or perform other duties for

Contractor. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not, in any way, prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered.

5. The laboratory inspector is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirement of the Contract Documents or to approve or accept any portion of the work, except where such approval is specifically called for in the Specifications.

D. Contractor's Responsibilities:

1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to

01410 - 5

manufacturer's and fabricator's operations wherever work is in preparation or progress.

2. Secure and deliver to the laboratory without cost to Owner adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.

3. Furnish Incidental Labor and Facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the Project Site or at the source of

the product to be tested. c. To facilitate inspections and tests. Furnish such labor as is required

to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site.

d. For safe storage and curing of concrete test cylinders at project site and other test samples as required for field curing by ASTM C31.

4. Costs of tests, samples, and mock-ups of substitute material, where the substitution is requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the A/E to establish equality with specified items, shall be borne by the Contractor.

5. Costs of tests, samples, and mock-ups performed solely for the benefit or convenience of the Contractor.

6. Notify laboratory 24 hours in advance of construction operations to allow for laboratory to complete any required checks or tests and to make assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

7. Owner's testing laboratory will conduct additional tests at Contractor's expense when initial quality control testing indicates work is defective or does not conform to requirements. Materials and workmanship not meeting the required standards or performance obligations are to be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

8. Furnish concrete mix designs, in accordance with ACI 301, Section 3.9, made by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs by an independent testing laboratory are required, the laboratory shall be selected by the Contractor, approved by the A/E, and paid by the Contractor.

9. Obtain required inspections or approvals of the building official when required. All inspection requests and notifications required by the building code, are the responsibility of the Contractor.

10. Provide current welder certifications for each welder to be employed. 11. Furnish fabrication/erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance

with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6. 12. Prequalification of all welding procedures to be used in executing the work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Testing laboratory shall promptly submit written report of each and every

01410 - 6

test and inspection; 1 copy each to Architect, Engineer, and Contractor, and 2 copies each to Owner. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and Specification Section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and observation regarding compliance with Contract

Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect.

B. State in report all details of each inspection and test. Indicate compliance or

noncompliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Also state in report any and all unsatisfactory conditions.

C. In addition to furnishing a written report, notify the A/E and the Contractor verbally

of any uncorrected conditions or failures to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. At completion of each trade or branch of work requiring inspecting and testing,

submit a final certificate attesting to satisfactory completion of work and full compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Upon completion of building, testing laboratory shall furnish, to Owner and A/E,

statement (certified by Notary Public) that all required tests and inspections were made in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

1.06 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. The latest adopted edition of all standards references in this section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard, the Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.

PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIER DRILLING OPERATION (N/A)

01410 - 7

A. Provide services herein specified.

B. A representative of the soils testing laboratory shall make continuous inspections to

determine that proper bearing stratum is obtained and utilized for bearing and that shafts as are properly clean and dry before pouring concrete.

C. Soils testing laboratory shall furnish complete pier log showing the diameter, top and

bottom elevations of each pier, casing required or not required, bell size, actual penetration into bearing stratum, elevation of top of bearing stratum, and volume of concrete used.

D. Request probe holes when deemed necessary to confirm safe bearing capacity.

3.02 REINFORCING STEEL MECHANICAL SPLICES

A. Visually inspect and report on the completed condition of each mechanical splice of reinforcing steel.

B. Each mechanical splice shall be visually inspected to ensure compliance with the

I.C.B.O. Reports and the manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices.

C. Special emphasis shall be placed on inspection of the end preparation of each bar to

be spliced, as required by the I.C.B.O. Report.

D. Submit copies of manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices prior to observing mechanical splices.

E. Reports on each mechanical splice shall indicate location of the splice, size of bars

spliced, and acceptability or rejection of splice. Reasons for rejection shall be shown on each report.

3.03 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES

A. Inspect all concrete reinforcing steel prior to placing of concrete for compliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings. All instances of noncompliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Contractor for correction and then, if uncorrected, reported to the Architect.

B. Observe and Report on the Following:

1. Number and size of bars. 2. Bending and lengths of bars.

01410 - 8

3. Splicing. 4. Clearance to forms including chair heights. 5. Clearance between bars or spacing. 6. Rust, form oil, and other contamination. 7. Grade of steel. 8. Securing, tying, and chairing of bars. 9. Excessive congestion or reinforcing steel. 10. Installation of anchor bolts and placement of concrete around such bolts. 11. Fabrication of embedded metal assemblies, including visual inspection of all

welds. 12. Visually inspect studs and deformed bar anchors on embedded assemblies for

compliance with Contract Documents. Check number, spacing and weld quality. If, after welding, visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360 degree fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud or bar, such stud or bar shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15 degrees off perpendicular and then bent back into position. Anchors failing this test shall be replaced.

C. Provide a Registered Professional Engineer experienced in inspecting reinforcing

steel to inspect reinforcing steel. 3.04 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Receive and evaluate all proposed concrete mix designs submitted by the Contractor. If the mix designs comply with the Drawings and Specifications, the laboratory shall submit a letter to the Architect certifying compliance. Mix designs not complying with the Drawings and Specifications shall be returned by the laboratory as unacceptable.

B. Secure composite samples of concrete at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C

172.

C. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 31. Supervise the curing and protection provided (by others) for test specimens in the field, and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be carefully transported to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31.

D. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. Two specimens shall be tested at 28

days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for information.

E. Make one strength test (three cylinders) for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day.

F. Make one slump test for each set of cylinders following the procedural requirements

of ASTM C 243 and ASTM C 172. Make additional slump tests whenever the

01410 - 9

consistency of concrete appears to vary. Do not permit placement of concrete having a measured slump outside the limits given on the Drawings, except when approved by the A/E. Slump tests corresponding to samples from which strength tests are made shall be reported with the strength test results. Other slump tests need not be reported.

G. Determine total air content of air entrained normal-weight concrete sample for each

strength test in accordance with ASTM C 231.

H. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test.

I. The testing agency shall furnish and maintain a competent inspector at the mixing plant at the start of each day's mixing. The inspector shall examine concrete materials for compliance with Specifications and approved mix design, weighing and measuring devices, proportioning and mixing of materials, the water and cement content of each batch, the general operation of the plant and the transportation of concrete to the jobsite. The inspector shall verify that the amount of free surface moisture contained in the fine and coarse aggregate has been properly accounted for in the concrete mixing to achieve the required consistency and water cement ratio.

J. The testing laboratory shall monitor the addition of water to the concrete at the

jobsite and the length of time the concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. The inspector shall compare the mixture with the criteria on the approved mix design and report any significant deviation to the Architect, Contractor and concrete supplier. Do not permit the addition of water which will exceed the maximum water/cement ratio for the mix as given on the approved mix design.

K. Observe the placing of all concrete, except non-structural slabs-on-grade and

sitework. Observe and report on placing method, consolidation, cold joints, length of drop, and displacement of reinforcement. Report deficiencies to the Contractor immediately for corrective action. Inspections may be reduced to a periodic basis when all procedures have been deemed satisfactory by the laboratory.

L. The testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete

delivered (or poured), amount of water added and the time at which the cement and aggregate was dispensed into the truck, and the time at which the concrete was discharged from the truck.

M. Evaluation and Acceptance:

1. If the measured slump, or air content of air entrained concrete, falls outside

the specified limits, a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of the same sample. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be considered to have failed to meet the requirements of the specifications, and shall not be used in the structure.

01410 - 10

2. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results are equal to, or exceed specified strength and no individual test result (average of two cylinders) is below specified strength by more than 500 psi.

3. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 301, Chapter 18, have been met.

N. Concrete Test Reports:

1. Reports shall be made and distributed immediately after the respective tests or inspections are made.

2. Where reports indicate deviations from the Contract Documents, they shall also include a determination of the probable cause of the deviation and, where applicable, a recommendation for corrective action.

3. Whenever the testing laboratory recognizes a trend of decreasing quality in the concrete due to changing seasons, conditions of curing, or other cause; this shall be brought to the attention of the A/E, along with a recommendation for corrective action to be taken before the materials fall below the requirements of these Specifications.

O. Comply with ACI 311, "Guide for Concrete Inspection" and "ACI Manual of

Concrete Inspection" (SP-2). P. Inspect the application of curing compound and monitor all curing conditions to

assure compliance with specification requirements. Report curing deficiencies to the Contractor immediately and submit a written report to the A/E.

3.05 POST-TENSIONING OF CONCRETE

A. Verify certification of calibration of jacking equipment used in post-tensioning operations.

B. Observe and report on placement and anchorage of tendons immediately prior to

concreting.

C. Provide a Registered Professional Engineer experienced in post-tension operations to observe and report on the placement, post-tensioning and elongation measurement of each tendon.

D. The Contractor shall log and submit detailed reports of the stressing and elongation

of each tendon. The laboratory representative shall observe the recording of information by the Contractor and make such spot checks as are necessary to verify the accuracy of the post-tensioning reports.

E. Receive and review final stressing and elongation reports prepared by the Contractor.

01410 - 11

Compare the actual and required elongation of each tendon and the actual and required load on each tendon. Grant permission to cut the tails of tendons which are within specified tolerance, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, and submit reports of those which are not within specified tolerance along with recommended corrective action, to the Architect for further evaluation. Forward a copy of all stressing reports to the Architect for record.

F. Observe and report on grouting of tendons noted to be bonded.

3.06 MASONRY

A. Inspection:

1. Provide a qualified inspector to inspect all structural masonry work on a periodic basis. Masonry requiring inspection includes load bearing walls.. Inspect the work in progress at least once for each 5000 square feet of wall laid, but not less than once each day, to check compliance with the Contract Documents and applicable building code.

2. Inspect the following: a. Preparation of masonry prisms for testing. b. Placement of reinforcing c. Grout spaces (prior to grouting and prior to closing cleanouts, if any). d. Mortar mixing operations. e. Bedding of mortar for each type of unit and placing of units. f. Grouting operations. g. Condition of units before laying for excessive absorption.

3. Provide a report of each inspection.

B. Field Compressive Test for Mortar:

1. Secure composite samples of mortar at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 780.

2. Mold and cure three cube specimens in accordance with ASTM C 109 and ASTM C 780. Supervise the curing protection provided (by others) for test specimens in the field and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The specimens shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be carefully transported to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C 780.

3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 780. Two specimens shall be tested in 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at 7 days for information.

4. Make one strength test (three cubes) for each 5000 square feet of wall area. C. Field Compressive Tests for Grout:

1. Secure composite samples of grout at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C

01410 - 12

172. 2. Mold and cure three, 3" x 6", cylindrical specimens from each sample in

accordance with ASTM C 31. Supervise the curing protection provided (by others) for test specimens in the field and the transportation from the field to the laboratory. The test cylinders shall be shored in the field 24 hours and then be carefully transported to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31.3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one specimen shall be tested at 7 days for information.

3. Make one strength test (three cylinders) for each 10 cubic yards of grout poured but not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area.

D. Prism Tests:

1. Prism tests are required for lad bearing brick masonry only. 2. Make prism tests in advance of operations using materials under same

conditions, and with same bonding arrangement, as for structure. In building prisms, moisture content of unit at time of laying, consistency of mortar and width and thickness of mortar joints shall be same as used in the structure.

3. Cure and test prisms in accordance with applicable provisions ASTM E 447. Test five specimens of each type of masonry unit before delivering material to jobsite and submit results for approval. During construction, test three specimens of each type of masonry unit for each 5000 square feet of wall placed.

4. The standard age of test specimens is 28 days, but 7 day tests may be used, provided relation between 7 day and 28 day strengths is established by test for materials used.

5. Build brick prisms one brick width and length in plan and five bricks high, using full bed joints as specified. Compute ultimate compressive strength by dividing ultimate load by gross area of masonry units.

6. Build prisms on job using same materials and methods as for wall construction. Store prisms in a place where they will be undisturbed for 2 days and have approximately same curing conditions as wall construction. After 2 days, transport to laboratory in a manner which will not disturb mortar bond and then cure and test as set forth under ASTM E 447.

7. When the average strength of a set of prisms falls below the specified compressive strength (f'm), the masonry corresponding to the test shall be deemed unacceptable. In such case, notify the Architect and Contractor immediately.

E. Absorption Tests:

1. Perform a field of test of water absorption on three representative clay units,

at least once for each 5000 square feet of wall, before laying.

01410 - 13

3. The field test shall consist of drawing a 1 inch diameter circle with a wax pencil (the diameter of a quarter). Place 20 drops of water from a medicine dropper in rapid succession within the circle. If all o f the water is absorbed into the brick in less than 90 seconds, the units are too dry and should be prewetted.

3.07 METAL ROOF DECK

A. Field inspection shall consist of the following: 1. Checking types, gauges, and finishes for conformance with Contract

Documents and Shop Drawings. 2. Examination for proper erection of all metal deck, including fastenings at

supports and side laps, reinforcing of holes, and miscellaneous deck supports. 3. Certification of welders. 4. Visual inspection of at least 25 percent of all welds.

END OF SECTION

01415 - 1

SECTION 01415 FACILITIES FOR DISABLED

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide facilities for disabled.

1.02 RELATED WORK Section 02410 - Asphalt Pavement Section 02580 - Pavement Markings Section 02590 - Signage Section 08700 - Door Hardware. Section 08800 - Glazing. Section 10450 - Door Signage. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.

1.03 GOVERNING STANDARDS

A. Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes, Article 601b; State Purchasing and General Services Commission, Building and Property Services Division.

ANSI A117.1-1980. ADAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines) UFAS (Uniform Federal Accessibility Standard)

1.04 WORK BY CONTRACTOR

A. The general contractor will provide all parking and exterior signing necessary to comply with the current statutory requirements of accessibility to the handicapped for this facility. The general contractor shall be responsible for all corrective action required from the architect’s review worksheet as submitted by TAS.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Adjust door closers as directed by Owner to provide easy opening and slow closing, in accordance with governing standards. See Governing Standards. Mount mirrors, paper towel dispensers, lavatories and water coolers at heights indicated on drawings. Install room signage at locations indicated in specifications. Install grab bars and elevated water closets at rooms designated on plans.

END OF SECTION

01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. General requirements for utilities and services, construction aids, barriers and enclosures, security, access and parking, temporary controls, project signs, and field offices and sheds.

1.02 RELATED WORK:


1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01165 - NPDES, Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. 3. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 4. Section 01710 - Cleaning.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Contractor shall provide all construction facilities and temporary controls specified in this Section and as necessary for the proper and expeditious prosecution of the Work.

B. Contractor shall make or have made and pay all charges for all connections to and

distribution from existing services and sources of supply.

C. Requirements of service and utility authorities relating to the Work shall be ascertained by Contractor. Comply with all such requirements, including those relating to continued protection and maintenance until completion of Work.

D. Materials and construction for construction facilities and temporary controls may be

new or used, must be adequate in capacity for required usage, and must not create unsafe conditions. Comply with requirements of Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Construction facilities and temporary controls shall be maintained by Contractor in

usable condition at all times until completion of Work or their removal is authorized by A/E or Owner's Representative.

F. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of construction, by

storage or work requirements, to accommodate legitimate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the Site, and when directed by Owner's Representative.

01500 - 2

G. When any portions of permanent systems are in operating condition, that part of the system may be used for construction purposes provide that the Contractor:

1. Obtains Owner's approval. 2. Assumes full responsibility for the system used. 3. Pays all costs for operation, maintenance, cleaning, and restoration of the

system to as- new condition.

4. Operates the system under the supervision of the subcontractor responsible for system installation and ultimate performance.

5. Does not effect specified warranty.

H. Completely remove temporary services and facilities when their use is no longer required and at completion of Project, when directed by Owner's Representative.

I. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary services and facilities to new condition

for new work and to a condition as good as or better than existed prior to start of Work for existing construction, services, and facilities.

1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND SERVICES:

A. General: Arrange and pay for connections, materials and appurtenances required to provide temporary utilities and services.

B. Payment: Pay the cost of services used (gas, water, and electricity) monthly.

Utilities purchased by the Contractor for construction purposes are exempt from State and local sales tax as established by General Conditions. When charges are made to a Contractor for Owner-furnished utilities, it is requested to examine the charges promptly and either pay the amount or notify the Owner's Representative, if discrepancies are indicated. Final payment to the Contractor will not be processed until all utility bills are paid.

C. Temporary Electrical Service:

1. Contractor shall install all temporary electrical wiring, lamps, including meter pole and meter loop, for temporary lighting and power required to perform work of this Contract.

2. Install and maintain temporary electrical systems in accordance with the current addition of the National Electric Code. The Contractor must provide a meter pole and meter loop while AEP Electric furnishes the meter.

D. Temporary Water:

1. The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements, pay all initial and monthly fees for a temporary water meter to be installed at location approved by the Owner.

01500 - 3

E. Temporary Telephone Service: Provide and maintain telephone service with a minimum of one direct line instrument in the Contractor's field office and one direct line instrument in the Owner Representative's field office. Pay for costs of installation, maintenance and removal and service charges for local calls. Toll charges shall be paid by party who places the call, except toll calls made by Owner's and Architect's personnel related to project business shall be paid for by Contractor.

F. Temporary Toilets and Sanitation: Provide service, clean, and maintain sanitary

conveniences with proper enclosures, in conformance with requirements of local laws and ordinances governing such installations. Post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary, and do cleaning necessary to keep the building and the premises in a sanitary condition. From start of the Work, provide suitable temporary toilets and enclosures for the use of the workmen on the Job. Maintain same in a sanitary condition. Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Construction practices, including cutting and welding,

and fire protection during construction shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Federal, State, and Local authorities having jurisdiction. Provide prominently located multi-purpose type portable fire extinguishers, at least one in each wing on each floor.

1. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in Underwriter's

Laboratories listed safety containers. Storage shall not be permitted within the building.

2. Do not light fires of any kind in or about the premises. Prohibit the use of salamanders.

3. All tarpaulins that may be used for any purpose during the construction of the Work shall be made of material which is resistant to fire, water, and weather.

1.05 CONSTRUCTION AIDS:

A. Material and Personnel Hoists: The Contractor shall provide material hoists as required for normal use by all trades, without charge. The Contractor shall also provide a personnel hoist for the transportation of all workmen as required for normal use, without charge.

1. Employ qualified, skilled operators for the material and personnel hoists. 2. Provide all necessary guards, signals, safety devices, required for safe

operation, and suitable runways from hoists to roof level. 3. The construction and operation of the hoists shall conform to all applicable

requirements for the American Standard Safety Code for Building, the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, and shall be approved by the insurance underwriters.

01500 - 4

1.06 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES:

A. General: Construct temporary barricades, warning signs, hazard and warning lights, walks, passage-ways, and similar temporary barriers and enclosures that are necessary to protect persons and property from hazards or damage due to construction operations, and required by Owner, City, State or Federal laws, ordinances or codes.

B. Construction Fences: Contractor shall furnish and install min. 6’ chain link

construction fences and gates within the limits of construction, prior to beginning of work so as maintain area free of unauthorized personnel, which includes Project working area and storage locations allocated by the Owner to the Contractor. Keep adjacent property free from disturbance, dust, and noise as much as feasible.

C. Non-Movable Fences: Fencing and gates shall be minimum 6'-0" high, new material,

chain link fabric tightly stretched between line posts (1-5/8" O.D. galvanized iron) at not more than 10 foot centers (tree protective posts 8 foot centers). Posts in earthen areas shall be plumbed and aligned, and firmly anchored in the ground at least 24" deep. Corner and gate posts (2-3/4" O.D. galvanized iron) shall have line posts within 6' and braced using clamps at posts. Posts that are machine pounded must be cut off flush and level at top. Gates shall be substantially constructed of materials similar to fence, equipped with hinges of adequate size and strength for operation and to maintain gate level. Provide security chain and padlock at each gate with 2 keys furnished to Owner's Representative. Fence posts in permanently paved and sidewalk areas shall be set in 4" thick concrete bases, 24" square or 30" round.

D. Movable Fences: Fences that need to be moved frequently for access to the Site or to

be movable tree protection shall be 6' high posts, using 5" non-climb wire fabric, 12.5 gage galvanized wire, 2" wide x 4" high openings, attached to posts set in concrete within an old tire to prevent post bases from marring pavements and sidewalks.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Provide barricades, fences, and guards as necessary to

prevent damage to existing trees and shrubs indicated to remain including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Compaction of root area by equipment or material storage. 2. Trunk damage by moving equipment, material storage, nailing or bolting. 3. Strangling by tying ropes or guy wires to trunks or large branches. 4. Poisoning by pouring solvents, gas, paint and other toxic materials on or

around trees and roots. 5. Cutting roots by excavating, ditching and similar operations. 6. Damaging branches by improper pruning; notify Owner's Representative for

required pruning. 7. Drought from failure to water or by cutting or changing normal drainage

pattern past roots.

01500 - 5

8. Changes in soil pH factor by disposal of lime and other alkali based materials such as plaster, concrete, mortar and grout.

9. Machine excavating within the dripline of trees; conduct all excavating within dripline by hand. Do not cut roots 1-1/2" in diameter and over.

F. Tree Damage: When trees other than those indicated or approved for removal are

destroyed, killed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations, the Contract Sum will be reduced by the amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: D x D x 0.7854 x $50.00, where D is the diameter of the trunk measure 12" above grade.

G. Fence Maintenance and Removal: All fencing and gates shall be maintained deep

straight and level, having a neat and uniform appearance during the construction period and upon completion, before acceptance of the Work, shall be removed from the Site and post hole filled to original condition.

H. Temporary Enclosures and Protection:

1. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls for successive

areas of the building as work progresses, as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.

2. Temporary Partition and Ceiling Enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections

with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. Provide temporary doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks as

required for security. c. Provide removable portions of enclosures as necessary for work and

for handling of materials. 3. Protection of Installed Work: Provide protection for installed work so that it

will be without damage at time of acceptance by Owner. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills and soffits of openings. Protect finish floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy object, storage and similar construction operations. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, on lawn and landscaped areas. a. Concrete, cement, mortar, grout, sludge, plaster and similar materials

shall not be placed in or washed down storm and sanitary sewers, plumbing lines or fixtures.

4. Protect improvements on Owner's and adjoining properties.

I. Site: Unless otherwise specified or directed, carefully protect existing walks, lawns,

01500 - 6

other buildings, and other work on Site, whether specifically indicated on the Drawings or not. Damaged areas of curbs, walks and paving will not be permitted to be patched; remove entire section between expansion joints in which the damage occurs and replace with construction to match existing adjacent work.

J. The Contractor is responsible for injury to the Work and persons due to failure of

barrier and enclosure work to protect it; and wherever evidence is found of such injury, the Owner may order the work so injured to be immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor. All costs and expenses for such occurrences shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barrier and enclosure work, shall not cease until the Project has been completed and is accepted by Owner.

1.07 SECURITY:

A. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Coordinate with Owner's security program. Project security within limits of construction is Contractor's responsibility.

1.08 PARKING, ACCESS ROADS AND TRAFFIC:

A. Parking: Parking for workmen employed on the Site may be provided within construction limits or at a remote location if needed to the extent that space for that purpose may be available without interference with the activities related to performance of the Work.

1. Reserved Parking: Allocate two spaces convenient to offices for use of the

Owner and A/E.

B. Provide temporary roads as required to bring vehicles onto the Site. Restore new paving used for construction operations to new condition prior to acceptance of Work by Owner.

1. Restrict vehicles from doing unnecessary damage to the Site and any existing

paving. 2. Restore all improvements damaged by this Work to original condition, as

acceptable to Owner or other parties having jurisdiction.

C. Traffic Control: Prior to start of Work, examine construction vehicle routing, and

safeguards and procedures necessary to carry out the Work. In addition, be responsible for and observe the following:

01500 - 7

1. Be responsible for controlling construction traffic within and adjacent to the Site.

2. Provide all entrances, lifts and safeguards required or necessary to the progress of the Work, and effectively control such traffic to provide minimum hazard to the Work and all persons.

3. Route all construction equipment, trucks, and similar vehicles on existing public streets to and from the Site as approved by the Owner and City of Laredo – Webb County Traffic Department

4. Construct and maintain temporary walks for pedestrians. Keep streets adjacent to the Site open to vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

5. Maintain constant access for police, fire and ambulance service. 6. Provide and maintain for proper control of traffic and safety of all concerned:

a. All necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient lights, reflectors, and danger signals.

b. Warning and closure signs, directional, and detour signs. c. All traffic control devices furnished and installed in compliance with

the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices as prepared by the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation.

7. Provide on a 24 hour basis for all restricted and dangerous conditions existing on or adjacent to the Site: a. Illuminate barricades, danger signals, warning signs and obstructions

at night. b. Keep warning lights burning from sunset until sunrise.

1.09 TEMPORARY CONTROLS:

A. Cleaning During Construction: Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations for the entire Work. Provide a collection can at each area used for eating. Pick up garbage daily. Keep Project Site free of garbage, trash, vermin and rodent infestation. Contractor, by agreement, shall require each subcontractor to collect and deposit waste and rubbish caused by subcontractor operations at pre-designated location. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work. Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminates during finishing operations.

B. Traffic Control: Conduct construction operations and the removal of debris to ensure

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Noise Control: In and around occupied areas, minimize use of noise producing

equipment. Work with noise-producing is subject, at all times, to Owner's approval of entire procedure. Use only on a scheduled basis as agreed with Owner's Representative prior to start of Construction operations.

01500 - 8

D. Water Control: Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to Project, site of adjoining properties. Control fill, grade and ditch to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas. Direct drainage to proper runoff.

1. Provide, operate and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to

control surface and water. 2. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion or other

damage to any portion of site or to adjoining areas.

E. Pollution Control: 1. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of

soil, water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.

2. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages, and to remove contaminated soil or liquids. Excavate and dispose of contaminated earth off site and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.

3. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals or other such substances adjacent to streams or in sanitary or storm sewers.

4. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere.

F. Erosion Control:

1. Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation. a. Hold areas of bare soil exposed at one time to minimum. b. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes, and drains.

2. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which will erode.

3. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect any evidence of start of erosion, apply corrective measures as required to control erosion.

G. Dust Control: Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize

raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. Contractor to provide and utilize at least one water truck in working conditions for dust control.

1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS:

A. Provide one construction sign shown on Contract Drawings and as specified below. No other signs may be installed anywhere on the Site (except delivery route signs deemed necessary by Owner's Representative), including signs advertising the sale of

01500 - 9

salvage. 1. Face Size: 2- 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" high x 3/4" thick, located approximately 4'-

0" above grade. Sign will be 8’x8’ in size, 1 required, with professionally printed artistic rendering. Architect will provide contractor’s graphic supplier with e-mail file. Refer to architectural drawings for details.

2. Sign Faces: New 3/4" exterior grade medium density overlay plywood. 3. Location of Sign, and Layout: By the Architect. 4. Sign faces shall be painted a white background color. All lettering shall be

accomplished by a professional sign painter and shall be in Helvetica Medium style, upper and lower case, in black color and shall include, but not be limited to the following information: (1) Project and Owner’s Name. (2) Architect's Name. (3) General Contractor's Name.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS: A. Contractor shall provide its own field office and storage sheds on the premises,

maintain same, and remove same upon completion of the Work. 1. Provide weathertight construction office or job built construction shack min.

8 x 20 for Contractor with sufficient light, heating, air conditioning, ventilation, and insulated roof. General arrangement, construction, and equipment for office shall be reviewed with A/E and approved by Owner prior to starting construction. Provide adequate table, plan rack, desk chairs, file cabinets of sufficient capacity to accommodate a copy of submittals and correspondence concerning the Project, and non-pay telephone.

2. Provide and maintain suitable, substantial, weathertight storage facilities of acceptable appearance in which to store materials which would be damaged by the weather. Storage space shall be of sufficient size to hold all such materials required on Site at one time, and if the storage space is outside the building, it shall have floors raised at least 6" above the ground on heavy joists or sleepers. Provide fenced areas for storage of materials and workmen's parking of the sizes and of locations designated on the drawings. Should the Contractor require additional storage area beyond that indicated on the Site, contractor shall arrange for such storage facilities off-campus, at no additional cost to Owner. Contractor may use areas within the immediate construction area for storage only with the approval of the Owner's Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



A. General requirements for materials and equipment, manufacturer's instructions, transportation and handling, storage and protection, material and coordination.

1.03 RELATED WORK:


1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01040 - Coordination. 3. Section 01300 - Submittals: List of Materials. 4. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Colors. 5. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Material

Storage Facilities. 6. Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 7. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.

1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. In addition to General Conditions, Contractor shall use materials and equipment that are: 1. New, unless otherwise specified, and that are of good quality, free from faults

and defects, and in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Suitable for use and function intended. 3. Corresponding in quality to related materials in the absence of a complete

specification. 4. Of quality appearance where exposed to view. 5. Of one manufacturer or source for the same specific purpose, with uniform

appearance and physical properties. 6. Interchangeable and be the same, when required to be supplied in quantity.

01600 - 2

7. Free of name, trade mark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source(s) which is surface applied or affixed to any manufactured articles, materials, and items of equipment in any public area or similar locations within the Project. Any manufactured articles, materials, and items of equipment which bears evidence that an insignia, name, or trade mark has been removed shall not be used. Code required labels, such as Underwriters Laboratory labels, and other identification required by the Contract Documents is expected.

B. Product Color, Texture, and Pattern Selection: No work requiring A/E's review for

color, texture and pattern selection shall be fabricated, delivered or installed prior to review and selection.

1. Contractor shall select product of a named manufacturer that complies with

the specified requirements and submit the full range of colors, textures, patterns, including custom colors, textures and patterns for Architect's selection. All subsequently approved products of other manufacturers are approved contigent upon availability of equivalent colors, textures, and patterns available to A/E for selection.

2. When “match existing color” is indicated or specified, Contractor shall, in addition to material and construction requirements specified elsewhere, match existing color, texture, and pattern in every respect, as approved by A/E.

C. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same

generic kind, from a single source, for each item of work.

1. When specified products are available from only sources that do not or cannot produce an adequate quantity to complete Project requirements in a timely manner, consult with A/E for a determination of what product qualities are most important before proceeding. A/E will designate those qualities, such as visual, structural, durability, or compatibility, that are most important. When Architect's determination has been made, select products from those sources that produce products that possess the most important qualities, to fullest extent possible.

D. Compatibility of Options: Where product options are permitted, select products that are compatible with other products to be incorporated into the Work, including products previously selected product options.

1.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to installer, including one copy to A/E and one

01600 - 3

to Owner's Representative. Maintain one set of complete instructions at Job Site during installation and until completion.

B. Manufactured articles, materials, and items of equipment shall be handled, stored,

applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, adjusted, conditioned, and protected in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and specifications for the Project conditions indicated, within manufacturer's published limitations, and requirements specified.

C. Should any manufactured articles, materials, and items of equipment be found to be

damaged, deteriorated, or otherwise contrary to the requirements of the Contract Documents, remove and replace such damaged or deteriorated articles, materials, and items of equipment, no matter in what stage of completion and replace with new materials.

D. Should Project conditions or specified requirements be in conflict with

manufacturer's instructions request written clarification from A/E before proceeding. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

E. Keep a copy of material safety data sheets for all products used in the Work, at

Contractor's field house. 1.06 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING:

A. Arrange deliveries of materials and products in accordance with Construction Progress Schedule.

B. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged

condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry.

C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.

D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements of the

Contract Documents and approved submittals, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION:

A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products, including factory-finished items and similar work, in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. Comply with applicable laws,

01600 - 4

ordinances and regulations for protective storage of potentially dangerous materials.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent

mixing with foreign matter.

D. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection at all times. Periodically inspect to assure products are free from damage or deterioration, and are maintained under required conditions.

E. At end of each day's work, cover new work likely to be damaged. Provide substantial

coverings necessary to protect installed products from damage, traffic, and subsequent construction operations. Refer to Section 01500 for additional requirements, including removal of temporary protections.

F. Contractor shall provide inspection of subcontractor's material for compliance with

submittals on proper storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. General requirements for closeout procedures, beneficial occupancy, final completion, final cleanup, closeout submittals, and application for final payment.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS:


1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01300 - Submittals. 3. Section 01310 - Schedules, Reports and Payments. 4. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 5. Section 01710 - Cleaning. 6. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents. 7. Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance Data. 8. Section 01735 - Maintenance Instruction. 9. Section 01740 - Warranties. 10. Section 01750 - Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

1.04 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.

A. Instruction of Using Personnel

The Contractor will provide demonstrations, conduct training and familiarization sessions for Owner personnel on the mechanical and electrical systems in the facility prior to Final or Beneficial Occupancy Inspections. Arrangements for these instruction periods shall be made by the Owner’s Representative. Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be available and used during this training period.

B. Substantial Completion: Refer to General Conditions, for additional

requirements.

1. When Contractor considers the Work is sufficiently complete as defined in “Substantial Completion”, it shall submit to Architect a written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete for

01700 - 2

“Beneficial Occupancy” along with a list of items to be completed or corrected.

2. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Owner, Architect and Engineer, as appropriate, will make an inspection to determine the status of completion.

3. Should Building Official determine that Work is not sufficiently complete for “Beneficial Occupancy”, Building Official will promptly notify the Contractor and Owner’s Representative in writing, giving reasons therefore.

4. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written notice to the Architect.

5. Architect and Engineer, as appropriate, will re-inspect the Work. 6. When Owner, and Architect concur that the Work is sufficiently complete

as defined in “Substantial Completion”, the Architect will: a. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion,

accompanied by Contractor’s list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by the Architect, and Owner.

b. The Architect will submit the Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.

7. Failure to include any item in the “punch list” does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8. The Architect and Owner may review and amend the list of items to be completed or corrected and append the “punch list” of the Certificate of Substantial Completion at any time before Contractor’s final Notice of Completion.

C. Pre-Final Completion: Those in attendance at final inspection may include the

Architect, representatives of the Owner’s Construction Department, member from the Owner and Contractor. Failure to satisfactorily complete items will necessitate further re-inspections by the Architect and other persons above. Perform and submit following prior to Pre-Final Inspection.

1. Before requesting pre-final inspection, Contractor shall review the

Contract Documents and inspect the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall make a thorough survey of work of all trades and ascertain that all final adjustments have been made and that the Work has been completed. a. Test equipment and systems in the presence of the Owner’s

Representative and determined that equipment and systems are operational. Give necessary verbal instructions and demonstrations to maintenance forces for component parts of the building. Refer to Section 01735.

01700 - 3

b. Furnish an updated list of Subcontractors and material suppliers along with names of key personnel, addresses and telephone numbers.

c. Deliver all Maintenance and Operating Manuals as specified in Section 01730.

d. Performed clean-up as specified in Section 01710. e. Delivered packaged and labeled maintenance materials as required

by the various specification Sections to a location within three miles of the Project Site as designated by Owner’s Representative as specified in Section 01750.

f. Deliver labeled keys and special tools to designated representative of Owner and secure a receipt. Master keys, safe combinations and similar sensitive items shall be mailed or delivered directly to Manager of Construction from hardware supplier.

g. Submit “Record Documents” to NE as specified in Section 01720. 2. Upon receipt of notice of completion of Work and submittal of all

required items from Contractor, Architect and Owner’s Representatives will make a pre-final inspection to determine status of completion, and prepare a punchlist of items requiring completion or correction for use of the Contractor. If Architect/Engineer or Owner’s Representative do not concur in Contractor’s claim of completion, Contractor will be notified, and Contractor shall send a second notice at an appropriate time of completion including a list of corrections made.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to Section 01340 “Shop Drawings” for required administrative action and submittals which must precede or coincide with Contractor’s final payment application. Contractor shall deliver these submittals to Architect for transmittal to Owner, properly executed, in one package, prior to the request for final payment.

B. Substantial Completion Occupancy: Submit list of items remaining to be

completed or corrected and written notice of request for Substantial Completion.

C. Final Completion: Submit written request for Final Completion inspection and the following:

1. Certification that work is complete and Owner has full access and use of

completed work, Contract Documents have been reviewed, and systems and equipment have been tested and are operational.

2. Copy of list of items to be completed or corrected from Beneficial Occupancy and Pre-Final Inspection, with each item initialed and showing date completed.

3. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:

01700 - 4

a. Certificates of occupancy. b. Certificates of final inspection for plumbing, mechanical, fire

protection, electrical, and other systems required by governing authorities.

4. List of all subcontractors and material suppliers and product description. Provide name, address, and phone number: a. Product manufacturer. b. Installer (subcontractor). c. Local representative. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.

5. Clean-up: Refer to Section 01710 for requirements. 6. Deliver to Owner all special tools and keys in relation to project

equipment and devices. 7. Instruction Logs for Instruction of Owner’s Operating Personnel: Refer to

Section 01735 for requirements. 8. Warranties: Refer to Section 01740 for requirements. 9 Keys, Keying Schedule, and Change Over of Locks: Refer to Section

08710 for requirements. 10. Spare Parts and Maintenance Material: Refer to Section 10750 for

requirements. 11. Fully executed copies of following, in triplicate:

a. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment for Debts and Claims: On Owner provided document.

12. List of Contractor’s incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to Owner’s Certificate of Final Acceptance.

13. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 14. Final Application for Payment: Refer to Section General Conditions.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01710 - 1

SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the

Specifications apply to this work. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 01010 - Summary of Work. 2. Section 01300 - Submittals. 3. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 4. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. General: In addition to General Conditions, provide progress and final cleaning as

specified in this section. B. Progress Cleaning: Keep premises and public properties free from accumulations of

waste, debris and rubbish, caused by operations. Maintain Project in accord with State and local safety, health, and insurance standards.

C. Final Cleaning: At completion of Work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools,

equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and clean all exposed surfaces of building and Project Site, including crawl spaces; leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

D. Pre-Final Inspection: Prior to pre-final inspection, clean all surfaces and remove all

debris from project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS: A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not

damage surfaces. B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being

cleaned.

01710 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING: A. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean

interior and exterior exposed-to-view surfaces affected by Work of this Contract. B. Hazards Control: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove from

premises daily. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

C. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units have been operated without filters during construction.

D. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean paving areas, walks, drives and streets in the vicinity of the building; remove mud, rubbish, waste, stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Immediately clean any mud tracked out of the construction area by vehicles and equipment.

E. Keep the entire construction area clean and at least weekly conduct a general clean-up operation.

F. Keep grass/weeds cut at all times within the limits of construction; maximum time interval in growing season is two weeks.

G. Periodically inspect, tighten and realign construction/tree protection fencing. H. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on the Project Site. I. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in

storm or sanitary drains. J. Do not dispose of rubbish and wastes into streams or waterways. K. Do not dispose of excess concrete on the Project Site or campus. L. Wet down rubbish and waste to lay dust and prevent it from blowing. M. Provide on Site containers for collection of waste, debris and rubbish. Handle

materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights. Do not fence, block, cover, otherwise make inaccessible, or use Owner's waste containers located inside or outside construction limits.

N. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain. O. Just prior to painting and similar finishing operations, clean interior areas ready to

receive finish, and continue cleaning on an as needed basis until building is ready for beneficial occupancy.

P. Disposal: Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the Project Site and provide legal disposal at a Texas Department of Health (TDH) permitted solid waste facility. In hauling material from the Project Site, Contractor shall prevent debris from dropping from vehicles and littering the campus or area streets and roads. Contractor shall promptly remove any debris which falls from vehicles.

3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. Employ experienced workmen or professional cleaners and perform cleaning in

01710 - 3

accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations, using products approved by the manufacturer for material being cleaned.

B. Prior to final inspection and the Owner's acceptance of the Work, perform final

cleaning of all areas of the building and Project Site, performing all operations called for in the various Sections of Project Specifications. Final cleaning operations include, but are not limited to:

1. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials of any nature from site. Clean

paving areas in the vicinity of the building; remove stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep paved areas clean and rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

2. Broom cleaning of all exposed concrete floors. 3. Cleaning all stonework. 4. Cleaning all exposed unpainted metals. 5. Cleaning all architectural woodwork. 6. Cleaning all doors and polish hardware; removing excess paint and stains. 7. Cleaning all glass areas, exterior and interior. 8. Cleaning all storefront framing and doors, and glazed wall system members,

exterior and interior. 9. Cleaning all walls and floors. 10. Cleaning of resilient flooring, waxing by General Contractor’s supplier. 11. Cleaning all toilet partitions, fixtures, and accessories. 12. Cleaning all exposed surfaces of light fixtures, including removal of

construction dust, paint overspray, finger prints, and similar soiling from light fixture bodies, reflectors, and both sides of light fixture lenses.

13. Removing and disposing of all temporary protections. 14. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 15. Prior to final completion, inspect exposed interior and exterior surfaces and

work areas to verify that entire work is clean. C. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, films, and other foreign substances. D. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition; remove foreign

substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine. END OF SECTION

01720 - 1

SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the

Specifications apply to this work. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES: A. In addition to General Conditions, provide and maintain project record documents

specified in this Section. 1.03 RELATED WORK: A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.04 GENERAL: A. Maintain at the Site for the Owner one record copy of: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. A/E's field orders and other written instruction. 6. Approved shop drawings, product data, and samples. 7. Field test records. 8. Other records required throughout construction by Owner. B. Source of Record Documents: Arrange for documents to be sent to reproduction

company and pay costs of reproduction and delivery of prints and originals.

1. Drawings and Approved Drawing Modifications: Provide two complete full size set of hard copy drawings prints of Contract Drawings and two sets full size document prints of each approved Contract Change to Contract Drawings. Include three copies of scanned as-built documents in CD PDF format.

2. Specifications, Addenda, Contract Changes, A/E's Field Orders and Written Instructions, and Field Test Data: Provide one single side copy of each

01720 - 2

document on 8-1/2" x 11" three hole paper, collated, indexed, tabbed and bound in durable three ring loose-leaf binders.

3. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Refer to Section 01340 for requirements.

4. Referenced Standards and Other Documents: Obtain, when directed, or as necessary to properly execute the work, copies of literature, standards and other data referred to but not included in the Specifications.

C. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: 1. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from

documents used for construction. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for samples.

2. File documents and samples in accordance with Drawing Index and Specification Table of Contents.

3. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

4. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by A/E and Owner's Representative.

5. Record Prints will be reviewed periodically by the Owner and A/E. This will be a requirement for issuance of a Certificate for Payment.

1.05 RECORDING: A. Label each document and each sheet of the Record Drawing Set as constructed,

"Project Record Documents", in stamped or printed letters, also with company name of installing subcontractor and General Contractor, date, and name of responsible company representative.

B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Make entries within

24 hours after receipt of information. Do not conceal items required to be shown on Project Record Documents until recorded.

C. Utilize skilled draftspersons to make neat legible notations on Record Documents to

record actual construction as follows: 1. Location of underground utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced by an elevation and dimension to visible and accessible features of structure.

2. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced by elevation and dimension to visible and accessible features of structure.

3. Indicate field changes of dimension and detail, changes made by field order or Change Order, and details not on Contract Drawings.

4. In Specifications and Addenda, record manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually

01720 - 3

installed, approved changes made by Change Order, approved substitution, or other modification, and other matters not originally specified.

D. Entries: Clearly describe change by note and by graphic line, as required. Date all

entries. Call attention to entry by "cloud" around area or areas affected. In event of overlapping changes, use different color for each change.

E. Owner and A/E will review Record Set periodically. If documents are not being

maintained concurrently with construction progress, Owner may withhold progress payments until documents are made current.

1.06 SUBMITTAL: A. Prior to Pre-Final inspection and as a prerequisite to Final Payment, submit Record

Document drawings, and other installations as specified in Contract Specifications, to A/E for permanent Project File.

B. Documents shall be submitted at one time with transmittal letter containing date,

Project title, Contractor's name and address, itemized list of documents, and signature of Contractor. The Contractor's signature acknowledges that the documents have been reviewed and that they represent a true and accurate record of the work installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION

01730 - 1

SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


1.02 RELATED WORK:


1. Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 3. Section 01735 - Maintenance Instruction.

1.03 FORMAT:

A. Prepare prior to pre-final inspections two (2) sets of operating and maintenance data, each containing data bound in commercial quality 3-ring binders with plastic covers. Minimum size 2".

B. Cover: Identify each volume, front cover and spline, with type or printed title

"OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", name of Project, Project No., location, Contractor, date of Substantial Completion and Volume Number.

C. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of

Contents of this Project Specification. Include Tab for each section number, systems and equipment number.

D. The work covered by these manuals will not be accepted nor will the Final Inspection

and Acceptance be conducted until the Owner has received the manuals. The A/E will check for compliance with the specifications and furnish the approved copies to the Owner, who will make distribution. Payment will be withheld unless O&M Manuals submitted are in accordance with this specification.

1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME:

A. Arrange typewritten table of contents for each volume, in systematic order:

1. A list of each product required to be included with name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer.

01730 - 2

b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.

2. Identifying each product by product name and other identifying symbols.

B. Product Data:

1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product with product clearly identified.

2. Delete references to inapplicable information.

C. Drawings:

1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems and control and flow diagrams.

2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.

D. Written Text: As required to supplement product data for particular installation to

provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

E. Miscellaneous Data:

1. Furnish copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 2. Furnish proper procedures in event of failure and instances which might

affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

A. Architectural Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes:

1. Provide manufacturer's data giving full information on product: a. Catalog number, size and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for re-ordering special manufactured products.

2. Provide instructions for care and maintenance including:

a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.

b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product.

c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

B. Additional Requirements: Refer to respective Specification Sections.

01730 - 3

1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS:

A. Each Type of Equipment and System:

1. Provide description of unit and component parts including: a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Dimensional drawing.

2. Operating Procedures: Include the following. a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions.

3. Maintenance Procedures: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions.

4. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule including list of lubricants required.

5. Include manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Describe sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Include original manufacturer's parts list, price lists, illustrations, assembly

drawings and diagrams required for maintenance, predicted life of parts subject to wear and items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

8. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Coordinate drawings and color coded piping diagrams. 10. Schedule valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve.

B. Each Electric and Electronic System:

1. Provide description of system and component parts including:

a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

2. Panel board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications.

3. Include color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal

operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

5. Maintenance Procedures: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

6. Include manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.

01730 - 4

7. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

C. Include warning of detrimental maintenance practices.

D. Prepare and include additional data when need for such data becomes apparent during

instruction of Owner's personnel or as required under pertinent Specification Sections.

1.07 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit completed manuals to A/E for review and transmittal to Owner 30 days prior to Pre-Final Inspection.

B. Submittal of operating and maintenance manuals shall be prior to instruction of

Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



01735 - 1

SECTION 01735 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the

Specifications apply to this work. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Instruction requirements for Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment

and systems is specified in this Section. 1.03 RELATED WORK: A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 3. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit preliminary copy of "Instruction of Owner's Operating and Maintenance Personnel"

report for each system or item requiring instruction, on photocopy of form provided herein, at least 30 days prior to instruction date.

B. Submit fully completed forms upon completion of all instruction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Instruction shall be done by personnel trained and experienced in maintenance of described

products and operation of described equipment and systems, and familiar with requirements of this Section.

1.06 SCHEDULING: A. Do not perform instruction until systems and equipment have been inspected and approved. B. Complete all instruction prior to Pre-Final Completion. 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: A. Instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation and maintenance of systems and

equipment. Use Operation and Maintenance Data specified in Section 01730 as basis for instruction.

B. Furnish specialized tools required to operate and maintain systems and equipment for

01735 - 2

Owner's use. C. Provide level of instruction commensurate with system or item requiring instruction. Some

items may require multiple training sessions at different times due to Owner's 24 hours per day operation.

D. Explain contents and use of Operation and Maintenance Data. E. Explain operating sequences as follows: 1. Show location and operation of switches, valves and other such devices used to

start, stop and adjust systems. 2. Explain use of flow diagrams, operating sequence diagrams and other such devices. 3. Demonstrate operation through complete cycles and full range of operation through

all modes, including testing and adjusting relevant to operation. F. Explain use of control equipment, including temperature settings, switch modes, available

adjustments, reading of gauges, and functions that must be serviced by factory-authorized representatives.

G. Explain trouble-shooting procedures; demonstrate problems which commonly occur, and

their resolution, and note procedures which must be performed by factory authorized personnel.

H. Explain maintenance procedures and requirements, including items requiring periodic

maintenance. Demonstrate preventive maintenance procedures and recommended maintenance intervals. Demonstrate other maintenance procedures not part of periodic maintenance program. Identify maintenance materials to be used.


01735 - 3

INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S OPERATING PERSONNEL PROJECT: SYSTEM OR EQUIPMENT: PRELIMINARY INFORMATION: A. To be completed by Contractor: 1. Proposed dates of instruction: to 2. Representative performing instruction: 3. Number of hours required: B. To be completed by Owner: 1. Owner's personnel to be instructed: INSTRUCTION LOG: Date No. of Materials Instructor's Owner's Rep. Comments Hours Covered Initials Initials Total Hours: Date Instruction Completed: Owner's Representative: Instructor:

01740 - 1

SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



A. Provide preparation and submittal of warranties as specified in this Section.

B. The Contractor is responsible for implementation of all warranties, guarantees, bonds, maintenance contracts and shall perform all work required, in case of failure of Subcontractors; material suppliers and manufacturers; applicators and installers; to fulfill any and all provision of the warranties, guarantees, service and maintenance contracts and bonds.

C. General Contractor and installers shall sign warranties.

1.03 RELATED WORK:


1. General Conditions, Contract Warranty and Guarantee. 2. Section 01300 - Submittals. 3. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Colors:

Submittal schedule warranty requirements. 4. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 5. Individual Specification Sections: Special Project Warranties.

1.04 FORM OF WARRANTY SUBMITTALS:

A. Warranty Format: Assemble warranties executed by respective manufacturers, suppliers, subcontractors and Contractor as follows:

1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11". Punch sheets for 3-ring binder; fold larger sheets to fit

into durable binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with type or printed title "WARRANTIES". List

title of Project and name of Contractor. 3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, using table of contents of Project

Specification as format. 4. Procedures to be followed in case of failure.

01740 - 2

5. Quantity: Provide two (2) sets. B. Warranty Forms: Except as otherwise specified, Contractor shall execute in

duplicate on Contractor's letterhead, the Project Warranty for General Construction and special Warranties required by various Specification Sections, on the warranty forms which follow at end of this Section.

C. Warranty Effective Date:

1. For portions of work accepted by Owner prior to Final Completion: Date of

Beneficial Occupancy. 2. For portions of work accepted by Owner at Final Completion: Date of

Beneficial Occupancy or Final Completion whichever occurs sooner. 1.05 PREPARATION:

A. Obtain warranties and guarantees, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Substantial Completion or Final Completion is determined in accordance with General Conditions.

B. Verify that documents comply with requirements of Contract Documents, are in form

approved by Owner, contain full information, and are notarized. As a minimum, each warranty shall contain:

1. Name and location of Project. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Product or work item. 4. Scope of warranty. 5. Date of beginning and duration of correction period for warranty.

C. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal.

1.06 TIME OF SUBMITTALS:

A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

B. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to

Final Application for Payment. 1.07 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to Section 01340 for Schedule of Submittals.

01740 - 3

1.08 WARRANTY ADMINISTRATION

A representative of the Owner will be the Owner's point of contact for all warranty work. When disagreements develop between the Warranty Administrator and the Warrantor, the Architect will act for the User.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


NOT USED

END OF SECTION

01740 - 4

PROJECT WARRANTY FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION WHEREAS, (Contractor), Address Telephone ( ) has performed general construction work on the following project: For (Owner), Address , and, WHEREAS, Contractor has agreed to warrant said work to be new, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and that all Work is of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. NOW THEREFORE, Contractor hereby warrants said work in accordance with terms hereof, complying with terms of Contract with Owner dated , 20 , that: Contractor agrees to repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner all work that may prove defective in workmanship or materials together with all other work which may be damaged or displaced in so doing, except for abuse, modifications not executed by Contractor, insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. All repairs or replacements shall have a correction period for such work equal to the original correction period as herein stated, dated from the final acceptance of repairs or replacement. CORRECTION PERIOD FOR THE WORK: STARTING , TERMINATING ___________________________. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within a reasonable time after being notified in writing, we hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have defects repaired and made good at our expense, and will pay the costs and charges therefore immediately upon demand. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of , 200__, for Contractor by

(Signature) as its .

(Typed Name) (Position)

01740 - 5

SPECIAL WARRANTY FOR __________________ WHEREAS, (Contractor), Address Telephone ( ) has performed work on the following project: Address , For (Owner), Address , and, WHEREAS, Contractor has agreed to warrant said work to be new, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and that all Work is of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in accordance with the Contract Documents. NOW THEREFORE, Contractor hereby warrants said work in accordance with terms hereof, complying with terms of Contract with Owner dated , 20 , that: Contractor agrees to repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner all work that may prove defective in workmanship or materials together with all other work which may be damaged or displaced in so doing, except for abuse, modifications not executed by Contractor, insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. All repairs or replacements shall have a correction period for such work equal to the original correction period as herein stated, dated from the final acceptance of repairs or replacement. CORRECTION PERIOD FOR THE WORK: STARTING , TERMINATING ____________________________. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within a reasonable time after being notified in writing, we agree to hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have defects repaired and made good at our expense, and will pay costs and charges therefore immediately upon demand. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of , 20 _ or Contractor by

(Signature) as its .

(Typed Name) (Position) And has been countersigned in accordance with terms and conditions, for Installer by:

(Signature) (Typed Name) as its .

(Position) Name of Firm Address

01750 - 1

SECTION 01750 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements of the

Specifications apply to this work. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Requirements for spare parts and maintenance materials required by the Various

Specification Sections are specified in this Section. 1.03 RELATED WORK: A. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 3. Individual Specification Sections: Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.04 GENERAL: A. Assemble spare parts (flooring, ceiling, wall materials, and all finishes) and

maintenance materials as required in individual Specification Sections. Deliver in clean packaging identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, stock number, size, color, and other similar information identifying products. Identify building and location in building where item is used or with what it is used. Include name, address and telephone number of local supplier.

B. Deliver to Owner, prior to Pre-Final Completion, at a location as directed by Owner.

Include a letter of transmittal with delivery with a copy to A/E listing materials provided.


02000 - 1

SECTION 02000 NPDES - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. This project is subject to Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Construction Storm Water Discharge Regulations and Requirements. The Contractor will be required to execute a Notice of Intent and implement the Pollution Prevention Plan included in the Contract Documents and comply with all reporting and inspection requirements set forth in the NPDES regulation.

B. This Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan is prepared for the City of Laredo

Administration Building North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant for “Final NPDES General Permits for Storm Water Discharges from Construction.”

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 01710 - Final Cleanup

Section 02832 - Chain Link Fence with Filter Fabric

Section 02933 - Seeding

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. At least two (2) days prior to start of construction, the owner/operator must

submit Storm Water N.P.D.E.S. General Permit Notice of Intent (NOI) Form 351 0-6 (Attachment 4) by Certified Mail-Return Receipt Requested to:

Storm Water Notice of Intent (4203) 401 M. Street, S.W. Washington, D.C. 20460

NOTE: Where multiple operators have been selected at the time of the

initial NOI submittal, NOIs must be attached and submitted in the same envelope.

B. Post signed copy of NOI in prominent place for public viewing (i.e., alongside of building permit). A copy of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan is to be kept on construction site.

C. The owner/operator shall have the contractor and all appropriate subcontractors

sign and submit an NOI by Certified Mail - Return Receipt Requested to:

02000 - 2

Storm Water Notice of Intent (4203) 401 M. Street, S.W. Washington, D.C. 20460

NOTE: When an additional operator submits an NOI for a site with a pre-existing

NPDES permit, the NOI for the additional operator must indicate the number for the pre-existing NPDES permit.

D. The owner/operator contractor and all subcontractors must sign a Certification

Statement before conducting work identified in this Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). (Attachment Nos. 2 & 3).

E. Owner/Operator shall use “Responsible Party” Form to designate responsibility

for pollution prevention measures. (Attachment 6). F. Owner/Operator or general contractor shall designate qualified person(s) to

conduct inspections and fill out Inspection Form. (Attachment 7). G. Maintain plan (SWPPP) by posting changes (if any), copies of NOIs, NOTs, etc.,

in plan. File Inspection Forms in SWPPP and retain for period of three years. H. Owner/Operator, General Contractor and all appropriate subcontractors shall

initiate Notice of Termination (NOT) (copies in SWPPP) when their work has been completed and/or when the site has been stabilized, or where the operator of storm water discharges changes. (Attachment 5).

1.04 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Description: The proposed project being improvements to City of Laredo

Administration Building North Laredo Wastewater Treatment Plant which is located on the south side of Shiloh Dr. The scope of work involves constructing a new Administration Building and a parking lot.

B. Nature of Construction

Construction will involve clearing, excavation and embankment of the site including installation of new water and sanitary sewer lines. Potential sources of pollution that may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of storm water discharges from the construction site include: * Soil erosion due to clearing of the site for utility, drainage, and

pavement construction. * Oil, grease, fuel and hydraulic fluid contamination from construction

vehicle drippings. * Miscellaneous trash and litter from construction workers and material

wrappings.

02000 - 3

* Building material waste and construction debris. * Concrete truck washout material.

C. Area of Site and Disruption

The construction of the above referenced facility will disturb approximately 2 acres of the approximate 50 acre overall sewer treatment plant site during the periods as follows:

Approximate Start Date: August 2018 Completion Date: March 2019

D. Runoff Coefficient Estimated runoff coefficients for this facility, illustrating the change in the anticipated storm water runoff as a result of the construction on the subject property, are as follows:

RUNOFF COEFFICIENT

AREA (ACRES ±) BEFORE AFTER 2 0.40 0.80

E. Site Map A site map reflecting the topography of the site, drainage swale areas and proposed erosion and sedimentation controls is included in attached set of plans.

F. Receiving Waters

This development will discharge storm water runoff overland to an existing earthen swale system which will direct flow downstream into the Zacate Creek tributary and eventually discharging into the Rio Grande River.

1.05 SEQUENCING

Sequence of Major Activities The major activities which will disturb the soil during construction of the building, utilities, drainage, parking lot, sidewalks, etc. include:

* Implementation of this SWPPP * Clearing, demolition and excavating in the area of construction site * Preliminary grading of site * Construction of building foundation * Construction of parking lot * Construction of utilities and structural improvements * Backfilling and compaction around project site * Construction of walkways

02000 - 4

* Installation of an irrigation system * Final site grading and seeding

* Final site clean up

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION

A. Erosion and Sediment Controls 1.Stabilization Practices 1. On-site stabilization measures include the following:

* Soil disturbances shall be minimized by exposing only the

smallest practical area of land required for the construction activity and for the shortest practical period of time.

* Trenching and associated backfilling for utilities and/or storm drainage piping shall be coordinated to minimize to the extent practical the time the area is disturbed.

* Maximum practical use will be made of natural vegetation including grass, weeds, trees, shrubs, etc. by leaving these materials in place until construction necessitates clearing the minimum practical area for continuance of construction.

* The minimum practical area required for the installation and construction of the building, utilities, parking lot and sidewalks will be cleared of ground cover.

* Significantly disturbed areas shall be revegetated as necessary.

2. Structural Practices On-site storm water runoff from this development project will be discharged through silt fencing (geotextile fabric) prior to releasement to either a vegetated drainage channel or area grate inlet. Structural measures which will be used to control erosion and sedimentation include the following: * A silt fence will be erected along a line of uniform elevation

(usually perpendicular to the direction of flow) or as detailed on the Storm water Pollution Prevention Plan and Details,

* A controlled area on-site shall be designated as a rinse-out pit for

concrete trucks. B. Storm Water Management

Storm water management will include a concrete truck washout pit and silt fences. These features form the basis of the Pollution Prevention Plan. Storm water runoff from all areas on-site will exit the development through sheet flow across vegetated areas. Silt

02000 - 5

fences, coupled with other erosion control features, will slow the velocity of runoff thereby enhancing sedimentation and capture of contaminants that may accumulate in storm water runoff exiting this development.

C. Other Controls

* Vehicular traffic leaving the construction site will exit through the stabilized construction exit.

* Mud/dirt inadvertently tracked offsite and onto public streets shall be removed as soon as possible by hand or mechanical broom sweeping.

* Construction materials shall be stored within a designated storage area. Bulk materials such as sand, topsoil, etc. will be bordered on the down gradient sides with a silt fence.

* An area shall be designated as a construction equipment storage area. Construction equipment (except large slow moving equipment) not removed from the site at night shall be stored in the containment area.

* Excavation spoils temporarily stored onsite, pending offsite disposal in accordance with applicable regulations, shall be bordered on the down gradient side by a silt fence.

* The designated construction equipment storage area shall have a single entrance/exit and will be bordered on the down gradient sides by a silt fence.

* Clean sediment collected behind silt fences will be periodically collected and placed as fill material within the property. Contaminated sediments will be disposed off-site in accordance with applicable regulations.

* The use of temporary construction fuel storage tanks on-site will not be allowed for this project.

* Intentional release of vehicle or equipment fluid onto the ground is prohibited. Tainted soil resulting from accidental spills shall be removed and disposed of off-site in accordance with applicable regulations.

* Scheduled vehicle maintenance accomplished on-site shall be done within the vehicle storage area. * A controlled area on-site shall be designated as a rinse-out pit for concrete

trucks. Rinse-out pits shall be periodically drained and cleaned and waste shall be disposed off-site in accordance with applicable regulations. Rinse-out pits shall be surrounded by a berm or hay bales to prevent runoff of contaminated water.

* Construction waste materials, domestic garbage, etc. shall be periodically collected and disposed off-site in accordance with applicable regulations.

* Trash receptacles will be established at storage locations, in the vicinity of equipment storing and near the construction areas. Receptacles shall be emptied as required and disposed off-site in accordance with applicable regulations.

D. State and Local Controls

There are no known applicable state or local storm water pollution prevention control requirements for construction projects at this location. All activities during construction shall comply with state and/or local sanitary sewer, septic

02000 - 6

system and waste disposal regulations. Excavation spoils which will not be reused on this development project shall be disposed offsite at an approved location in accordance with applicable regulations.

3.02 REPAIR/RESTORATION

Structural controls shall be inspected as stipulated in this plan. Structural units shall be maintained to perform the function as intended. When a structure deteriorates to a condition so that its performance is less than intended, the structure shall be repaired or replaced to full function as specified. Particular attention should be paid to the sedimentation areas behind the rock berm outlets and silt fences. Sedimentation, including construction debris, tree trimming, trash, municipal type garbage, etc. will be removed and the structure restored to its original dimensions when the sediment has accumulated to six inches or more. Contaminated sediment removed from containment areas (vehicle maintenance, concrete wash out pits, etc.) shall be disposed of off-site in accordance with appropriate regulations. Attachment 6 lists the various major components of this pollution prevention plan and defines the responsible owner/operator for its function, maintenance and inspections. A Plan Implementation Checklist is included as Attachment 7.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspections Designated and qualified person(s) shall inspect Pollution Control Measures every seven days and within 24 hours after a storm event greater than 0.5 inches of rainfall. An inspection report that summarizes the scope of the inspection, names and qualifications of personnel conducting the inspection, date of the inspection, major observations and actions taken as a result of the inspection shall be recorded and maintained as part of Storm Water NPDES data for a period of three years after the date of the inspection.

As a minimum, the inspector shall observe: (1) significant disturbed areas for evidence of erosion, (2) storage areas for evidence of leakage from the exposed stored materials, (3) structural controls (silt fences, drainage swales, etc.) for evidence of failure or excess siltation (over 6 inches deep), (4) vehicle exit point for evidence of off-site sediment tracking and (5) vehicle storage areas for signs of leaking equipment or spills, and (6) concrete truck rinse-out pit for signs of potential failure. Deficiencies noted during the inspection will be corrected and documented within seven (7) calendar days following the inspection.

Attachment 6 lists the various major components of this pollution prevention plan and defines the responsible owner/operator for its function, maintenance and inspection. A Plan Implementation Checklist is included as Attachment 7.

B. Non-Storm Water Discharges

02000 - 7

Storm water discharges from this development may be intermittently mixed with non-storm discharges from fire hydrant flushing, water used to wash vehicles or control dust, potable water sources including water line flushing, irrigation drainage from watering vegetation, routine exterior building wash-down that does not use detergents, pavement wash waters where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless all spilled material has been removed) and where detergents are not used, air conditioning condensation, springs, uncontaminated ground water (including dewatering ground water filtration), and foundation or footing drains where flows are not excessive. The above non-storm water components would exit the site via the storm water drainage paths and would be subject to the same filtering and sedimentation provided by the vegetated drainage channels and structural controls used for storm water runoff. Other non-storm water discharges are not anticipated from the construction of this development.

3.04 SCHEDULES Attachments 1 – 7.

02070 - 1

SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. In accordance with pertinent provisions of this Section, if required, carefully demolish and remove from the site those items required to be so demolished and removed as in order to accomplish selective scope. The contractor(s) shall visit the site prior to bidding, familiarize themselves conditions and include items as required for a complete execution of this section. No extras will be allowed!

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 01045: Cutting and patching. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(No products are required in this Section) PART 3. EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. By careful study of the Contract Documents, determine the location and extent of selective demolition to be performed.

B. In company with the Architect, visit the site and verify the extent and location of

02070 - 2

selective demolition required. 1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition. 2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workmen also to identify items to

be removed and items to be left in place intact.

C. Prepare and follow an organized plan for demolition and removal of items. 1. Shut off, cap, and otherwise protect existing public utility lines in accordance

with the requirements of the public agency or utility having jurisdiction. 2. Completely remove items scheduled to be so demolished and removed, leaving

surfaces clean, solid, and ready to receive new materials specified elsewhere. 3. Burning: Permitted at designated areas on Owner’s property complying with all

city ordinances. Obtain written authorization to burn brush from the Texas Control Board. Contact the TACB Regional Office at Harlingen, Texas, for regulations and authorization. Phone 956-425-6010.

4. Texas Air Control Board (TACB) Regulation I (31 TAC Chapter III), Control of Air Pollution from Visible Emissions and Particulate Matter, Sept. 18, 1992, or latest revision. Coordinate with Owner’s representative. Burn piles should be located in areas of no structure is scheduled to be erected. In no circumstances should brush be burned in place. Contractor shall adequately monitor and control burning at all times.

5. Trees and shrubs which are intended to remain and which are damaged beyond repair, or removed, shall be replaced by the contractor at no cost to the Owner.

D. Demolished material shall be considered to be property of the Contractor and shall be

completely removed from the job site.

E. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site.

F. Trees and shrubs designated to remain shall be protected by temporary barricades

constructed around the drip line of the tree or the extent of vegetation mass. Do not disturb the root systems of any vegetation scheduled to remain. Any necessary grading at or near the drip-line shall be called to the attention of the Landscape Architect prior to such grading.

G. Topsoil shall be stripped from the top six inches of ground. Coordinate stockpile

locations as discussed above. 3.3 REPLACEMENTS

A. In the event of demolition of items not so scheduled to be demolished, promptly

replace such items to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

02110 - 1

SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING


A. Clear and grub the site as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. The contractor shall ensure that all permits and approval of cutting locations shall be obtained prior to any work being executed. Ensure that the Texas Utility 1-800 phone call is made for proper marking of all overhead and under ground utilities within the R.O. W. and inside the property of the Owner prior to starting all work.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily

limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS


3.2 PROTECTION

02110 - 2

A. Protect existing utilities indicated or made known.

B. Protect trees and shrubs, where indicated to remain, by providing a fence around the tree or shrub of sufficient distance away and of sufficient height so trees and shrubs will not be damaged in any way as part of this Work.

C. Protection of persons and property:

1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as part of this Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors,

and to other work being performed on or near the site.

E. Maintain access to the site at all times.

3.3 CLEARING

A. Clear out roots 1/2” in diameter and larger to a depth of at least 12” below the existing ground surface or subgrade of new graded surface, whichever is lower. Treat roots remaining in the soil with a weed killer approved by the Architect.

3.4 CONSERVATION OR TOPSOIL

A. After the area has been cleared of vegetation, strip the existing topsoil to the depth necessary to provide at least 6” depth of topsoil in areas shown on the Drawings to be turfed or planted, and to fill planters, without contamination with sub-soils.

B. Stockpile in an area clear of new construction.

C. Maintain the stockpile in a manner which will not obstruct

the natural flow of drainage. 1. Maintain stockpile free from debris and trash. 2. Keep the topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out.

3.5 DISPOSAL

A. General: 1. Remove brush, grass, roots, trash, and other material from clearing operations.

2. Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on the job site. 3. Burning is not allowed at the site

3.6 UTILITIES

A. Coordinate with utility companies and agencies as required.

02110 - 3

B. Where utility cutting, capping, or plugging is required, perform such work in accordance with requirements of the local utility companies, City of Laredo, or agency having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION

02200 - 1

SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Note: Refer to the attached soils investigation report for further site information and testing recommendations.

1.02 DESCRIPTION Of WORK:

A. Extent of earthwork is indicated on drawings.

B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, landscaping topsoil and pavements is included as part of this work.

C. Drainage fill course for support of building slabs is included as part of this work.

D. Backfilling of trenches within building line. is included as part of this work.

E. Site grading and filling to indicated elevations and contours.

F. Excavating and backfilling structure footings and foundations.

G. Topsoil distribution and finish grading.

H. Excavation for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Excavation and backfill required in

conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities, and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances is included as work of this section.

I. Definition: “Excavation” consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade

elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will engage soil testing and inspection

service for quality control testing during earthwork operations.

02200 - 2

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Test Reports-Excavating and Backfilling: Submit following reports directly to Owner’s Representative from the testing services, with copy to Contractor:

B. Test reports on borrow material.

C. Field density test reports.

D. One optimum moisture maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data is made available for convenience of Contractor. Soil investigation report is printed in Section 01015.

B. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by

Contractor at no cost to Owner.

C. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. Provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.

D. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted.

E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part

of this work and post with warning lights. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from

damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

F. Perform excavation within dripline of trees to remain by hand, and protect the

root system from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1” diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

02200 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS:

A. Definitions: Refer to the Geo-technical Report attached to this specifications.

1. Select Building Pad Fill: Shall be flexible base complying with Section 02200-3.05.

2. Primary Zone Backfill: For utility trenches, primary zone consists of the bedding to 12” above the top of pipe (or duct). Primary zone backfill shall possess a maximum plasticity index (PI) of 18 and a maximum liquid limit (LL) of 35. For water and sanitary sewer primary zone and bedding material shall be 0 PI sand or pea gravel, and storm sewer, primary zone and bedding material shall be well graded gravel with a maximum particle size of 1”. a. For other utilities, use select soil material meeting PI and LL limits

stated above. Material shall be free from trash, debris, rocks over 3/8 inch in any dimension, and shall contain no more than 25 percent by weight of clay, silt or organics. The contractor may be required to submit sample sieve analysis results from a reputable independent testing laboratory to verify compliance of backfill material.

3. Secondary zone backfill: For utility trenches, secondary zone consists of the area from 12” above the top of pipe to the top of subgrade. All secondary zone backfill shall possess a maximum plasticity index of 18 and a maximum liquid limit of 40.

4. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100% passing a 2” sieve and 100% retained on a 1/2” sieve.

5. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials with a PI greater than 5 and less than 18, free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2” in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Material from the project site that is free from rubbish, batts, lumber or other debris can be used if approved by the Owner’s Representative. This material shall also have a PI of greater than 5 and less than 18.

6. Option to backfill material: Sand with a P.I. of zero may be used in lieu of primary and/or secondary backfill material. If authorized is writing by the Engineer, no testing will be required on sand backfill with a P.I. of zero. On unpaved streets, the top 12 inches of secondary backfill shall be caliche compacted to a density comparable to adjacent areas. San must have moisture and compacted.

7. Topsoil: Provide new hauled in topsoil min. 4” through out site that is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones and

02200 - 4

larger than 1/2 inches in any dimension, and extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

a. Obtain topsoil from local source or from areas having similar soil

characteristics to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well drained sites where topsoil occur in depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes. Any new topsoil brought to the site shall conform to the specification for topsoil contained herein, so that the imported soil is consistent in appearance, texture and composition with the stockpiled, amended topsoil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION:

A. Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.

B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated

subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Owner’s Representative.

C. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

D. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for

authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Owner’s Representative.

E. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade

elevations, notify Owner’s Representative who will make an inspection of conditions.

F. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations,

carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Owner’s Representative.

G. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes

and authorities having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability or material excavated. 1. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until

completion of backfilling.

02200 - 5

H. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross braces, in good serviceable condition.

1. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local

codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period

excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.

I. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing

into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collection or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

J. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials in designated

laydown areas or other areas approved by the Owner’s Representatives, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not

store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess soil material on-site and waste materials off-site.

K. Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a

tolerance of plus or minus 0.10’, and extending a sufficient distance from footings, foundations, walls, beams and slabs to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.

1. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom

of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. In excavating for slabs, cut surface to required elevations within tolerance listed above, take care to leave subgrade surface undisturbed and free of ruts or soft spots.

L. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross—

sections, elevations and grades as shown.

02200 - 6

M. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required for

particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6” to 9” clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.

1. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches

for drainage and sanitary sewer piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations.

2. For pipes or conduit 5” or less in nominal size and for flat—bottomed multiple duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.

3. For pipes or conduit 6” or larger in nominal size and other mechanical/electrical work indicated to receive bedding, excavate to bedding depth indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to 6” below bottom of work to be supported.

N. Where elevations are not indicated on water-bearing utility lines, provide for the

following depths below finished grade.

Hot and chilled water mains 5’-0” Hot and chilled water services 3’-6” Domestic water 2’-6” Domestic hot water 2’-6”

1. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.

2. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18” of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.

3. Concrete is specified in Division 3. 4. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and

backfilling authorized by Owner’s Representative. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

3.02 COMPACTION:

A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification as indicated below.

B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the

following percentages of maximum density determined in accordance with Texas SDHPT Standard Test Method TEX-113-E.

02200 - 7

1. Subgrade for Building Slabs, Walkways, and Equipment Slabs, Ramps and Other Structures: After cutting to required grade, subgrade shall be scarified a minimum of 6 inches and compacted at 95% maximum density at a moisture content of ±3% of optimum.

2. Select Building Pad Fill: For top 12” under Building Slabs, Walkways, and Equipment Slabs, Steps, Sidewalks and Other Structures: Compact each layer at 95% maximum density at a moisture content of ±3% of optimum.

3. Backfill or Fill at Walkways, Steps, Equipment Slabs and Similar Use Areas: Compact each layer at 95% maximum density at a minimum moisture content of +/-3% optimum. Compact top 12 inches below subgrade to 95% maximum density at a minimum moisture content of +/-3% optimum.

4. Backfill at Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact each layer at 90% maximum density at a minimum moisture content of +/-3% optimum.

C. Backfill or Fill for Utility Trenches: There are three conditions for back fill

depending on pipe or conduit placement. Condition A: Use where pipe or conduit is laid under an area to be paved in this

project where pipe or conduit is laid.

Condition B: Use within street right—of—way but not under pavement, within 20’ of areas to be paved in this project.

Condition C: Use where pipe or conduit is laid outside of street right-of-way and

in unpaved areas 20’ or further from pavements.

A B __C___

PRIMARY ZONE % compaction (TEX—113—E) 95% 95% 95% Lift thickness/tamping 6” hand or 6” hand or 6” hand or method mechanical mechanical mechanical

SECONDARY ZONE % compaction (TEX-113-E) 95% 90% 90% Lift thickness/tamping 6” hand or 10” mecha- 10”mechanical Method mechanical nical or 6” or 6” hand or

hand or mechanical mechanical

FINAL 12” BELOW SUBGRADE % compaction 95% same as same as

6” hand or secondary secondary mechanical zone zone

02200 - 8

D. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to

permit compaction to specified density. 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit

compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.

3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL:

A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below.

1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material unless

otherwise indicated by top soil. 3. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory excavated or borrow

material. 4. Under steps, use base material. 5. Under building slabs, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material to 12

inches below slab, then select building pad fill for top 12 inches. 6. Under piping and conduit, use primary zone material; shape to fit bottom

90 degrees of cylinder. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the

following:

1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, foundation drainage and perimeter insulation.

2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities.

3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory

materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris.

C. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil

materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface.

02200 - 9

1. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under “Compaction” for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.

D. Placement and Compaction: In open areas, place fill materials in layers not more

than 8” in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4” in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Place select building pad fill in layers not more than 8” in loose depth. 1. In trenches, place backfill materials in layers not more than 10” in loose

depth for materials compacted by heavy mechanical means and not more than 8” in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification, do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping or conduit to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift.

3.04 GRADING:

A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing grades.

B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain

away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more

than 0.10’ above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross section,

with finish surface not more than 0.10’ above or below required subgrade elevation.

3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross section, with finish surface not more than 1/2” above or below required subgrade elevation.

C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of

voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2” when tested with a 10’ straightedge.

02200 - 10

D. Grading Surface of Crawl Spaces Beneath Buildings: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 feet.

E. Compaction: After grading, compact surfaces to the depth and indicated

percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. 3.05 SELECT FILL:

A. General: Select pad fill consists of placement of in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs, tennis courts, walks, jogging trail. Fill to be crushed stone or gravel aggregate to meet TxDOT 1993 SSCHSB, Item 247, Flexible Base, Type A, Type B, or Type C, grades 1 through 5.

1. Alternative granular soils as classified according to the United Soil

Classification Systems (USCS), may be considered satisfactory for use as select fill materials at this site: SM, SC, GM and GC and combinations of these soils. Select fill materials shall have a maximum liquid limit not exceeding 35, a plasticity index between 5 and 18, and a minimum particle size not exceeding 4 in. or one-half the loose lift thickness, whichever is smaller. However, if alternative materials are being considered for bidding purposes, the materials should be submitted to the Geotechnical Engineer for pre-approval at a minumum of 10 working days or more prior to the bid date. Failure to do so will be the responsibility of the contractor.

2. Soils classified as CH, CL, MH, ML, OH, OL and Pt under the USCS are not considered suitable for use as select fill materials at the site.

B. Placing: Select fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8” in thickness

and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by TxDOT, Tex-113-E, Compaction Test. The moisture content of the fill should be maintained within range of optimum moisture content to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D2922 (Nuclear

Method) as applicable. B. Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every

5000 sq. ft. of building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 5000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests.

02200 - 11

C. Paved Areas: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 800 square yards of paved area. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 800 sq. yds.

D. Utility Trench Backfill: Under paved area, make one field density test of backfill

for every 250 linear feet of trench per lift of backfill for the top 12” below subgrade.

E. If in opinion of Owner’s Representative, based on testing service reports and

inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction with failing test by contractor.

3.07 TOPSOIL

A. Overall site topsoil will be provided and placed to final grades by sitework contractor, min. 6” in depth through out. The landscape contractor shall be responsible for tilling and preparation of beds and “saucers” around trees.

B. Earthwork contractor is to provide hauled in topsoil that is fertile, friable, natural

loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2” in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

C. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics

to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes. Any new topsoil brought to the site shall conform to the specification for topsoil contained herein, so that the imported soil is consistent in appearance, texture, and composition with the stockpiled, amended topsoil.

3.08 MAINTENANCE:

A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 1. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to

specified tolerances.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re-shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction.

C. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during

general project warranty period, remove surface ( concrete walkways, or lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent

02200 - 12

work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible, at no cost to Owner.

3.09 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:

A. Removal to Designated Areas an Owner’s Property: Transport acceptable excess excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner’s property. Stockpile soil or spread as directed by Owner’s Representative.

1. Transport waste material, including unacceptable excavated material, trash

and debris to designated spoil areas on Owner’s property and dispose of as directed.

2. Removal from Owner’s Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner’s property in a legal manner, at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Remove excess excavated material not required for construction, trash, debris and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner’s property, in a legal manner, at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION 02200

02240-1

SECTION 02240 PAVING BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. All construction and materials shall meet or exceed the requirements of this section and any state highway department specification section referred to or noted on the reports which pertain to paving base course design, materials, preparation and/or execution. All materials shall be as indicated on reports and shall comply with applicable state highway specification regarding source, quality, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, and mix proportioning.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

Construction Drawings Specs Section 02110 SITE CLEARING Specs Section 02200 EARTHWORK

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CERTIFICATION

A. Submit materials certificate to on site independent testing laboratory which is signed by material producer and contractor, certifying that materials comply with,

or exceed the requirements herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. Perform base course construction in a manner that will drain surface properly at all times at same time prevent runoff from adjacent areas from draining onto base course construction.

3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. All existing topsoil and vegetation should be removed and wasted. The areas to be paved should then be graded to the required sub-grade elevations. The exposed sub-grade should be scarified and re-compacted to densities equal to at least ninety-five (95) percent of the maximum dry density obtained by the Standard Proctor compaction test (ASTM D698) or by Texas Highway Department procedure TEX -113-E. Suggested fill specifications are included in the appendix.

3.03 FLEXIBLE BASE

02240-2

A. Flexible base (caliche sand and gravel) should meet the requirements of the

current Texas Department of Highways Specifications (Item 248, Type B, Grade 2 or Type F, Grade 2). Base materials should be compacted to densities equivalent to ninety-five (95) percent of the maximum density obtained by the Modified Proctor compaction test (ASTM D-1557) or by THD procedure TEX 113-E. The base should receive a prime coat prior to the placement of the next pavement component.

3.04 ASPHALT STABILIZED BASE

A. Asphalt stabilized base should be a plant mix base based upon an approved mix design. The mix design and specifications should be based on Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation specifications and the Asphalt Institute recommendations and confirmed with laboratory mixing and testing. The base should be compacted to ninety-five (95) percent of the laboratory maximum density.

B. Soil Cement Stabilized Base: Construct to thickness and strength as indicated on

Drawings and in accordance with applicable state highway specifications. If not indicated on the Drawings, the minimum compressive strength shall be 500 p.s.i. (measured at 28 days).


A. An Independent Testing Laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, shall be retained to perform construction testing of in-place base courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and tolerance. Paving base course tolerances shall be verified (by rod and level readings on no more than twenty foot centers) to +0.05' of design elevation that allow for paving thicknesses as shown in the Drawings. Contractor shall provide instruments and a suitable benchmark.

B. The following tests shall be performed on each type of material used as base

course material:

1. Moisture and Density Relationship : ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557. 2. Mechanical Analysis: AASHTO T-88 3. Plasticity Index: ASTM D-4318-84 4. Base Material Thickness: Perform one test for each 20,000 square feet in

place base material area. 5. Base Material Compaction: Perform one test in each lift for each 2,000

square feet in-place base material area. 6. Test each source of base material for compliance with applicable state

highway specifications.

C. Field density tests for in-place materials shall be performed according to one of

02240-3

the following standards as part of construction testing requirements.

1. Sand-Cone Method: ASTM D 1556 2. Balloon Method: ASTM D 2167 3. Nuclear Method: ASTM D 2922, Method B (Direct Transmission)

D. Independent Testing Laboratory shall prepare test reports that indicate test

location, elevation data, and test results. Architect and Contractor shall be provided with copies of reports within 96 hours of the time the test was performed. In event that any test performed failed to meet these Specifications, Contractor shall be notified immediately by Independent Testing Laboratory. The owner reserves right to employ Independent Testing Laboratory and to direct any testing that is deemed by them to be necessary. Contractor shall provide free access to site for testing activities.

END OF SECTION

02281 - 1

SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL


A. Provide soil poisoning to control subterranean termites as specified herein and needed for a complete and proper treatment.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements; 3. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by

the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.



B. Qualifications of subcontractor:

1. Properly licensed to provide such services by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Not less than five years successful, experience in soil treatment for subterranean termites.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect two copies of a Warranty signed by an authorized representative of the installing subcontractor, and cosigned by the Contractor, agreeing: 1. To make an inspection of the Work once each year for a total period of five

years following Date of Substantial Completion for the purpose of detecting termite infestation;

2. If termite infestation is found during that five year period, to retreat in accordance with prevailing practices of the trade and within ten calendar days

02281 - 2

after such infestation is discovered; 3. To repair damage to the Work caused by subterranean termites during that five-

year period, to a maximum cost of $5,000; 4. To make such inspections, retreatment, and repairs at no additional cost to the

Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. To the extent approved by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, use working solutions containing any one of the following chemicals at the listed minimum concentration:

1. Permathrin (Dragnet Torpedo) 0.5% in water emulsion 4. Dieldrin: 0.5% in water emulsion 5. Dursban TC 1.0% in water emulsion

B. If combinations of toxicants are approved by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, provide toxicants having such approval and in the maximum strength so approved, at no additional cost to the Owner.



3.2 APPLICATION

A. Begin soil poisoning only after all preparation for slab placement is complete. B. Slabs on grade:

1. Apply toxicant as an overall treatment at the minimum rate of one gallon of toxicant to each 10 sq ft of area under slabs on grade within building lines.

C. Utility entrances:

1. Apply toxicant at the rate of two gallons of toxicant per five lin ft at critical locations such as where utilities pass through exterior walls and through floor slabs.

2. Extend treatment not less than 48” from wall into trench. D. Walls:

02281 - 3

1. Apply toxicant at the rate of two gallons of toxicant per five lin ft along both sides of all foundations walls, cross walls, and grade beams, after all nearby excavation has been completed.

2. Apply toxicant at the rate of one gallon of toxicant per five lin ft to voids in masonry walls.

E. Miscellaneous: Apply toxicant at the rate of two gallons of toxicant per five lin ft at

the following areas: 1. Immediately below expansion joints, control joints, and all areas where slab will

be penetrated by construction features. 2. Where exterior facings or veneers extend below grade level along the exterior

side of all foundation walls. 3. Where unit masonry foundation construction is used.

F. If soil is disturbed after treatment, retreat disturbed areas.

END OF SECTION

02410-1

SECTION 02410 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

REFER TO SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR FURTHER SITE PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS AS PREPARED BY HOWLAND ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY – DEDUCTIVE CHANGE ORDER PER BID SCHEDULE

A. All construction and materials shall meet or exceed the requirements of this section and any state highway department specifications referred to or noted on the drawings, and reports which pertain to asphaltic concrete paving design, materials, preparation, and/or execution of this product. All materials shall be as indicated on Drawings and reports shall comply with applicable state highway specification regarding source, quality, gradation, and mix design proportioning (Texas Highway Department Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Section 340 and 348). Ensure compliance with all ADA and TAS requirements for slopes and cross slopes through out including curb ramps and sidewalks.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Specs Section 02110 SITE CLEARING Specs Section 02200 EARTHWORK Specs Section 02240 PAVING BASE COURSE

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Mix: Before any asphaltic concrete paving is constructed, submit actual design mix to the Architect for review and/or approval. Design mix submittal shall follow the format as indicated in the Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2, Marshall Stability Method; and shall include the type/name of the mix, gradation analysis, asphalt cement grade used, Marshall Stability (lbs), flow, effective asphalt content (*percent), and direct references to the applicable highway department specifications sections for each material. Design shall be for a mixture listed in the most recent edition of roadway specifications of the state in which the project is to be constructed. In no case shall a mix design over three years old be submitted.

1.04 MATERIAL CERTIIIFICATE

A. Submit materials certificate to on site independent testing laboratory which is signed by material producer and contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed the requirements herein.

02410-2

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations:

1. Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F, and when temperature has been above 35 degrees F for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains excess moisture. Construct asphaltic concrete paving when atmospheric temperatures is above 40 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide asphaltic concrete mixture as recommended by local or state paving authorities to suit project conditions. use locally available materials and gradations which meet state highway specifications and exhibit satisfactory record on previous installation. Refer to recommendation on geo-technical report.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and correct breakdowns in a manner that will not delay or be detrimental to progress of paving operations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface immediately before

applying prime coat.

B. Proof roll prepared base material surface to check for areas requiring additional compaction and areas requiring removal and recompaction.

C. Do not begin paving work until deficient base material areas have been corrected

and are ready to receive paving.

3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Prime coat:

1.Apply bituminous prime to all base material surfaces where asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed. 2. Apply bituminous prime coast in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and applicable state highway specifications. 3. Apply at minimum rate of 0.25 gallon per square yard over compacted base

02410-3

material. Apply to penetrate and seal, but not floor surface. 4. Make necessary precautions to protect adjacent areas from overspray. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile.

B. Tack Coat:

1. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphaltic concrete base courses or portland cement and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphaltic concrete and pavement. 2. Apply tack coast to asphaltic base course or sand asphalt base course. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat on the surface of all such vases where asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat in accordance with APWA Section 2204 and applicable state highway specifications. Apply at minimum rate of 0.05 gallon per square yard of surface. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving.

3.03 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT

A. Place asphalt concrete mixture on completed and compacted subgrade surface,

spread and strike off. Spread mixture at following minimum temperatures:

B. When ambient temperature is between 40 degrees F and 50 degrees F: 285 degrees F. When ambient temperature is between 50 degrees F and 60 degrees F: 280 degrees F. When ambient temperature is higher than 60 degrees F: 275 degrees F.

C. Whenever possible, all pavement shall be spread by a finishing machine.

Inaccessible or irregular areas, pavement may be placed by hand methods. The hot mixture shall be spread uniformly to the required depth with hot shovels and rakes. After spreading, the hot mixture shall be carefully smoothed to remove all segregated coarse aggregate and rake marks. Rakes and lutes used for hand spreading shall be of the type designed for use on asphalt mixtures. Loads shall not be dumped faster than they can be properly spread. Workers shall not stand on the loose mixture while spreading.

3.04 PAVING MACHINE PLACEMENT:

A. Apply successive lifts of asphaltic concrete in transverse directions with

the surface course placed in the direction of surface-water flow. Place in typical strips not less than 10'-0" wide.

3.05 JOINTS:

A.. Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints

02410-4

to have same texture, density and smoothness as other sections of asphaltic concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.

3.05 ROLLING AND COMPACTION

A. The mixture, after being spread, shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling as soon

as it will bear the weight of the rollers without undue displacement. Mixture shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% theoretical maximum density. The number, weight, and types of rollers and sequences of rolling operations shall be such that the required density and surface are consistently attained while the mixture is in a workable condition.

Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas unaccessible to rollers.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately

following rolling of joists and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.

C. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is

hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.

D. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum density.

E. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and

defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness.

F. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it

has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.


A. An Independent Testing Laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, shall be

retained to perform construction testing of in-place asphaltic concrete courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness. Asphaltic surface and asphaltic base/binder courses shall be randomly cored at a minimum rate of one core for every 10,000 square feet of paving or as recommended by the testing lab. In no event shall less than three cores in light duty areas and three cores in heavy duty areas shall be obtained. Coring holes shall be immediately filled with full-depth asphalt or with concrete. Asphaltic Concrete pavement samples shall be tested for conformance with the mix design. The Asphaltic

02410-5

Concrete Surface Course shall conform to TXDOT Item 340, Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, Type D with a compaction to a minimum of 95% of the laboratory density as determined by TXDOT, Tex-206-F test method.

B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thicknesses shall not be less than thickness

specified on the drawings. Areas of deficient paving thickness shall receive a tack coat and a minimum 1" overlay; or shall be removed and replaced to the proper thickness, at the discretion of the Architect and Owner; until specified thickness of the course is met or exceeded at no additional expense to the Owner.

D. Surface Smoothness: Drop-off and Pick up Driveway to be min. 2” thick with all

parking areas at 1.5” min. (Refer to geo-technical report and civil drawings.) Testing shall be performed on the finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using 10'-0" straightened applied parallel with, and at right angles to centerline of paved area. The results of these tests shall be made available to the owner upon request. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding following tolerances for smoothness.

Base Course Surface: 1/4" Wearing Course Surface: 3/16"

Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminated ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner.

E. Compaction: Field density tests for in-place materials shall be performed by

examination of field cores in accordance with one of the following standards:

Rate of testing shall be one core per 10,000 square feet of pavement, with a minimum of 3 cores from heavy-duty areas and 3 cores from standard-duty areas. Cores shall be cut from areas representative of the project.

Areas of insufficient compaction shall be delineated, removed and replaced in compliance with the specifications at no expense to the owner.

END OF SECTION

02510-1

SECTION 02510 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOPS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY (Refer to Site Plan Improvements)

A. The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. Include all labor, material, equipment and services required to execute and complete all items of work in connection with furnishings and installing the pre-cast concrete wheel stops as shown on the drawings and herein specified.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for pre-cast concrete wheel stops in accordance with provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.

B. Drawings: Show elevations, sections, dimensions, reinforcing, details of

construction, method of anchorage, etc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Pre-cast concrete wheel stops shall be air entrained, reinforced 4000 psi concrete. Pre-cast concrete wheel stops shall be 84" overall length, 9" wide at base, 7" high and be cast with 4 #3 reinforcing rods.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Parking pre-cast concrete wheel stops shall be installed with 2 standard steel anchoring pins through preformed holes into blacktop pavement.

END OF SECTION

02520 - 1

SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FLAT WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY – REFER TO HOWLAND ENGINEERING CIVIL DRAWINGS.

A. Provide portland cement concrete paving where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:




B. Do not commence placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed and

approved by the Architect and all governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and until copies of the approved mix designs are at the job site and the batch plant.

C. Provide access for, and cooperate with, the inspector and testing laboratory described

in Section 01410 of these Specifications. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS

A. Provide wood or metal formwork, including adequate bracing, to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings within a vertical tolerance of 0.05 feet and an alignment tolerance of 1’, at any point.

B. Earth forms will not be permitted for paving.

2.2.1 REINFORCING

A. Comply with the following as minimums: 1. Bars: ASTM A6 15, grade 60, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using

deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Bending ACT 318.

B. Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI “Manual of Standard Practices.”

02520 - 2

C. Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects: 1. Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances; 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for the Work; 3. Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes.

2.3 CONCRETE

A. Comply with the following as minimums: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, type I or II, low alkali. 2. Aggregate, general:

a. ASTM C30, uniformly graded and clean; b. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage

3. Aggregate, coarse: Crushed rock or washed gravel with maximum size between 3/4” and 1-1/2”, and with minimum size number 4.

4. Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of hard and durable particles varying from fine to particles passing a 3/8” screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a 50 mesh screen.

5. Water: Clean and potable.

B. Use only such additives as are recommended in the mix design and approved by the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Provide concrete in the proportions established by the mix design required under

Section 01410 of these Specifications, and to the compressive strength shown on the Drawings.

D. Provide “Hunt TLF” curing agent manufactured by Hunt Process Co., Inc., at the

manufacturer’s recommended rate of application. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

PART 3- EXECUTION 3 1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 FINAL PREPARATION OF SUBGRADES

A. After preparation of sub-grade as specified in another Section of these Specifications, thoroughly scarify and sprinkle the entire area to be paved, and then compact to a

smooth, hard, even surface of 95% compaction to receive the aggregates.

02520 - 3

3.3 PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSE

A. Base (where required) 1. Spread the specified coarse aggregate to a thickness providing the compacted

thickness shown on the Drawings. 2. Compact to 95%.

B. Thickness tolerance: Provide the compacted thicknesses shown on the Drawings

within a tolerance of minus 0.0” to plus 0.5”.

C. Smoothness tolerance: Provide the lines and grades shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of 0.05 feet vertically and 1,, in alignment at any point.

D. Correct deviations by removing materials, replacing with new materials, and

reworking or re-compacting as required.

E. Use only the amount of moisture needed to achieve the specified compaction. 3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Upon completion of base course and formwork, install reinforcement as shown on the Drawings. 1. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other

materials which reduce bond or destroy bond with concrete. 2. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,

construction, and concrete placement operations. 3. Place reinforcement to obtain the required coverages for concrete protection.

B. Transit mix the concrete in accordance with provisions of ASTM C94.

1. With each load, provide ticket certifying to the materials and quantities and to compliance with the approved mix design.

2. On the transit-mix ticket, state the time water was first added to the mix. 3. At the batch plant, withhold 2-1/2 gal of water per cu yd of concrete. 4. Upon arrival at the job site, and as directed by the testing laboratory inspector,

add all or part of the withheld water before the concrete is discharged from the mixer.

5. Mix not less than five minutes after the withheld water has been added, and not less than one minute of that time immediately prior to discharge of the batch.

6. Unless otherwise directed, provide 15 minutes total mixing time per batch after first addition of water.

C. Do not use concrete that has stood over 30 minutes after leaving the mixer, or

concrete that is not placed within 60 minutes after water is introduced into the mix.

D. Conveying: 1. Place concrete in accordance with the following and pertinent recommendations

contained in ACT 304. 2. Deposit concrete continuously in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of

seams or planes of weakness within the section. 3. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as

specified herein.

02520 - 4

4. Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic.

5. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location so as to avoid segregation due to re-handling and flowing.

6. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation. 7. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and un-workable, or does not

meet required quality control limits, or has been contaminated by foreign materials.

8. Remove rejected concrete from the site.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation within the limits of construction joints until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

1. Bring surfaces to the correct level with a straight edge, and then strike off. 2. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from bumps and

hollows. 3. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the surfaces prior to

start of finishing operations.

F. Expansion joints: 1. Do not permit reinforcement to extend continuously through any expansion

joint. 2. Locate expansion joints where indicated, filled to full depth with expansion joint

material. 3. In curbs, locate 1/2” thick joint at the beginning and end of curves, and at 25’-0”

centers elsewhere. 4. In curbs and paving, hold down 1/2” and seal exposed joints with joint sealer.

G. Finishing:

1. Begin floating when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation.

2. During or after the first floating, check the planeness of surface with a ten foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.

3. Cut down high spots and fill low spots, and produce a surface level within 1/4” in two feet as determined by a two foot straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction.

4. Re-float the surface immediately to a uniform sandy texture. 5. While the surface is still plastic, provide a textured finish by drawing a fiber

bristle broom uniformly over the surface. a. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide the texturing in one

direction only. b. Provide “light,” “medium," or “coarse” texturing as directed by the

Architect. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury.

END OF SECTION

02580-1

SECTION 02580 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Spec 02410 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS – REFER TO SITE PLAN.

A. Coordinate all striping with architect. All new handicap spaces shall comply with the ADA Standards. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. The paint shall be a non-bleeding, quick-drying, alkyd petroleum base paint suitable for traffic-bearing surfaces and shall meet F TTP 85E and mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 3.02 APPLICATION

A. Apply two coats of paint at manufacturer's recommended rate without the addition of thinner, with a maximum of 125 square feet per gallon. Apply with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. At sidewalk curbs and crosswalks, use a straightedge to ensure a uniform, clean and straight stripe.

The following items are to be painted with the colors noted below: • Pedestrian Crosswalks: Yellow • Exterior Sidewalk Curbs and Guardposts: Yellow • Fire Lanes: Red or per local code with stenciled painted “fire lane – no parking”

at curb header at every 15’ on centers OR as directed by the Laredo Fire Dept • Lane Stripping and Parking Lot Light Pole Base: Yellow • Handicap concrete curb ramps and Symbols: Per local code - Light Blue • Parking Stall Striping: Yellow, unless otherwise noted on plans • Driveway Arrows: White

END OF SECTION

02590-1

SECTION 02590 SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide traffic control signs complying with U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration Manual "Uniform Traffic Control Devices", local codes, and as specified. See Drawings for type, location and quantity of signs required.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction Drawings and Manufacturer's Instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SIGNS

A. To be painted with reflective baked-enamel finish with the following colors:

B. "HANDICAPPED SYMBOL" Signs: (R7-Series) size per local codes, white legend on blue background and “Van Accessible” as per drawings

C. "STOP" Signs: as per drawings D. “Visitor Parking – 30 min. max.” as per drawings E. “Bus Parking” as per drawings Refer to plans for locations and quantities, coordinate with Owner's representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 Stop signs shall be placed at all non-signalized exits from parking lot. All signs not on grassed areas or protected by barrier curb shall be installed inside a 4" concrete filled pipe bollard. Pipe bollard must extend 3' above finish grade. Set posts vertical and plumb with bottom of sign at 5' above finish grade. Mount signs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

02665 - 1

SECTION 02665 WATER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Provide new water meter. Pay all associated fees as required.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this

section:

1. Division 2, Section 02200 “Earthwork”; for excavation and backfill required for water system and structures.

2. Division 2, Section 02810 “Irrigation System” for lawn irrigation system

supplied from water system. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. This work shall consist of the construction, complete in place of Water lines as specified herein, and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, materials and design shown on the plans.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit the following reports directly to Owner’s Representative from the testing services with copy to Contractor in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1, Section 01300 specification sections.

B. Product Data: For pipe and fittings, identification devices, test report on

backfilling, steel casing, valves, saddles, tapping sleeves, tapping valves, valve boxes and water meters.

C. Shop Drawings: For precast concrete valve pits, cast in place meter pits, ladder

(steel or polyethylene encased steel), including frames and covers. 1.04 PRODUCT CONDITIONS:

A. Existing Utilities: Before any trenching is started on distribution pipe installations, the Contractor shall contact all such agencies as the gas company, power company, or others, and determine exact locations of any of their underground conduits which are in the path of the new water line construction.

02665 - 2

B. Protection of existing utilities and property: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain service any and all utility lines of any nature encountered during construction of new water line.. Should any existing utility lines be unavoidably cut or damaged by Contractor’s equipment or workmen, the Contractor shall make immediate repairs using materials and workmanship to result in lines being permanently restored to original condition. Contractor shall make foregoing repair to existing utility lines at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Contractor will be expected to use extreme caution and in every way possible and

must keep unnecessary damages to paving at an absolute minimum. As covered elsewhere in specifications, the Contractor shall repair all paving, cut or damaged, to the satisfaction of the Owner or Engineer.

D. Contractor is to replace and restore as promptly as is possible all paving, or street

surfacing, of any nature, to its original condition as found.

E. Contractor must anticipate that possible unknown obstructions will be encountered requiring sudden offsetting, or change in grade of proposed line construction. For such changes in construction, it is recommended that 45o degree bends be used. Contractor should have a nominal supply of 45o degree bends on hand, or have knowledge where they may be obtained promptly, in order not to unduly delay construction.

F. Storage: Storage of PVC shall be in the shade or shall be covered with a suitable

cover. PVC pipe shall not be exposed to the sun longer than 24 hours while being laid. Precautions for valves during storage “Do Not Remove End Protectors unless necessary for inspection then reinstall for storage”.

G. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or

lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 . PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings Materials: Must meet the following minimum specifications A.W.W.A. standards and comply with the description provided.

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Main Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 305, with bell

end and elastomeric gasket, with plain end for ductile-iron fittings. This material may be used for the l2”o, 8” and 6”o and 4” diameter watermains.

2. Polyvinyl Choride (PVC) pipe: AWWA C900, DR21, with bell end and elastomeric gaskets with plain end for ductile iron fittings. This material maybe used for dia. and 3” dia. AND 2” diameter Water lines.

02665 - 3

3. Type “K” with 95/5 soulder soft copper tubing for service connections where indicated and size as shown on plans.

4. Ductile-Iron Main Pipe Fittings: Cement mortar lines; AWWA Cll0/A21.l0, ductile-iron, 250- psig (1725 kpa) minimum pressure rating; or AWWA C153 and AWWA Clll/A21.ll, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350-psig (2400 kpa) pressure rating. This material may be used for the 12”o, and 6”o water mains.

5. Ductile-Iron Mechanical Joint Fittings on Main Pipe: AWWA Cllo and AWWA Cll1/A21.ll, 350-psig (2400 kpa) minimum pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. This material may be used for the 12”o, and 6”o water mains.

6. Polyethylene Encasement on Main Pipe: AWWA C105, 8-mils (2mm) minimum thickness, tube or sheet. This material may be used for the 12”o, and 6”o watermains.

7. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Couplings and Fittings: AWWA C907, with ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal gaskets.

8. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic, Schedule 40, with solvent cement weld, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2466 on service pipe. This material may be used for 2-1/2” dia. Lines and smaller.

9. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Fittings: Schedule 40 Socket-Type, solvent cement joint, or elastomeric gasket joint.

2.02 VALVES A. GENERAL:

1. Valves (6” and less) shall may be gate valves suitable for the service as specified or as shown on the plans.

2. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (4” to 12”): Valves shall conform to the latest revision of AWWA Standard C-509 covering resilient seated gate valves.

3. The valves shall have mechanical joints ends and be non-rising stem, opening by turning stem left and provided with 2” square operating nut with an Arrow cast in the metal to indicate direction to open.

B. The disc shall be of cast iron completely encapsulated with urethane rubber or

rubber seat ring mechanically attached to an epoxy coated cast iron disc. The wedge encapsulated design with urethane rubber shall be permanently bonded to the cast iron wedge/disc to meet ASTM tests for rubber metal bond ASTM D429.

1. Stems for NRS assemblies shall be manufactured from high tensile

strength bronze rod stock. The NRS stem stuffing box shall be sealed with 0-rings to keep contaminants from entering inside the stem area. One above the thrust collar and one below or two above the thrust collar is acceptable. The 0-ring (or rings) above the thrust collar shall be replaceable with valve fully open and subjected to full rate working pressure.

02665 - 4

C. An anti-friction washer shall be located above the thrust collar to minimize operating torque. Stem nuts may be integrally cast with the disc or independent of the disc. Independent or loose stem nuts must be solid bronze. There shall be a smooth unobstructed waterway free of any obstruction.

D. The interior of both the body and the bonnet shall be coated with fusion bonded

epoxy. Valve exterior epoxy coating is furnished on all exterior bolting material, except MJ Bolts shall be furnished in stainless steel.

E. Each valve shall have maker’s name, pressure rating and year in which

manufactured cast on the body. Prior to shipment from factory, each valve shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure.

F. All Resilient Seat Gate Valves furnished shall have minimum 10 Year limited

Warranty.

G. All Valves to comply with the latest City Standard Technical Specs, Refer to City Section 108, 110, 114. Function to release small amounts of entrained air that may accumulate in pipeline.

1. The air/vacuum release valve shall be, pressure rating 200 psi, inlet pipe

connection 2” N.P.T., stainless steel bolts, (APCO-200 AB, ARI D-040 or approved equal).

H. Corporation Stops: Shall be bronze type, ANSI, AWWA C-800 Mueller Company

H-15008 or approved equal for 1” services. Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications Section 104.

I. Angle Meter Stops: Shall be bronze type, ANSI, AWWA C-BOO Mueller

Company H-14258 or approved equal for 1” meter. Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications Section 104.

J. Meter Boxes: Refer to latest City Specs. K. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes of cast iron, extension type, 6 inch diameter, with

boot, shall be provided for all valves installed with soil backfill. Box shall extend in each individual location flush with existing ground elevation, or pavement surface. Cast iron cover shall have the lettering “WATER”.

L. Saddles: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications

Section 104. 2.03 WATER METER

A. Water Meter: All water meters to be provided and installed by Laredo Water Utilities Department to be paid by contractor.

02665 - 5

2.04 FIRE HYDRANT: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications Section 112.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION:

A. Where rock, shale, or boulders are encountered i the trench, the same shall be removed to a depth of six (6”) inches below the grade line and the trench shall be refilled with good, sound earth, gravel, or granular material up to the original grade and tamped into place.

B. Laying Pipe: Pipe shall not be laid where the subgrade is in a condition

unsatisfactory to the Engineer. If subgrade is soft, spongy, or disintegrated, the material shall be removed until a firm, stable and uniform bearing is reached and the subgrade is brought back to grade with suitable materials thoroughly compacted in place. Embedment for the pipe or the pipe itself will NOT be laid in water. Pipe shall be snaked in trench as much as possible.

C. PVC Pipe Joints (Solvent Weld): Manufacturer’s recommendation shall be

followed. Under no circumstances will joints be subject to full hydrostatic pressure until after the joint has cured for 8 hours.

D. Installation: No tapping or threading of plastic pipe shall be permitted on pipe

with a wall thickness less than schedule 80.

1. The pipe fittings and couplings shall be at the same temperature when joints are made. before the solvent is applied, the joint shall be tested for dry fit. The dry fit should be rejected as faulty because of improperly sized pipe. Likewise, if the pipe is out-of-bound to the extent that force is required to place the fitting on the pipe, the pipe shall be rejected. Building up the joint for undersized pipe with multiple layers of solvent cement or “shaving” the end of the pipe shall not be permitted.

2. Using a non-synthetic brush, apply solvent cement in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendation. Cement should be applied lightly to the inside of the fitting and somewhat more generously to the outside of the pipe. After the solvent has been applied, the joint shall be made and given a quarter turn. Additional twisting accomplishes no useful purpose and may actually weaken the joint. If sufficient cement has been used, a small bead will form between the pipe and the shoulder of the fitting. It is recommended that this excess solvent be removed with a cloth as it serves no useful purpose and increases the drying time. After assembly, the joint shall not be moved until the cement weld has set up. The instructions of the manufacturer should be followed carefully in this regard.

02665 - 6

3. Tees for service lines or laterals must be assembled so that no strain is placed on the pipe during or after the backfill operation.

4. The plastic pipe must be handled with reasonable care so that it is not

crimped or damaged when placed in the trench.

5. Due to the high coefficient of thermal expansion, sufficient allowances should be provided for expansion and contraction. For this reason, it is recommended to backfill during the early morning hours - not during hot weather.

6. When the temperature of the pipe is 70 F, the pipe shall be laid with

enough “snake” in the pipeline to provide for one inch of contraction for each ten feet of pipeline. For each 10 F the temperature is above 70 degrees F, the allowance for contraction shall be increased one fourth inch per ten feet of pipeline. The “snaking” of the pipeline may be vertical in installations where the trench is narrow. In such installations, the trench may be over-excavated in an amount so that the required contraction may be provided.

7. All plastic pipe shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations

of the pipe manufacturer. Initial backfill shall be free of rocks and clods, and shall conform to detail shown on plans.

E. Trench Excavation: Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, all trenches shall

be excavated to a width not less than the internal diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches. The Contractor shall do all excavation of whatever substances encountered to depth specified.

1. Excavation shall not be carried below the required level. Excess

excavation below required level shall be backfilled at Contractor’s expense with earth, sand, or gravel, as directed by the Engineer, and thoroughly tamped. Unstable soil shall be removed and replaced with gravel which shall be thoroughly tamped. Engineer will determine the depth of removal and the replacement of unstable soil shall be the Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall furnish pumps to keep excavation free of water, and also any necessary sheeting, shoring or bracing to prevent cave-ins.

2. Banks of trenches shall be vertical, and bell or coupling holes shall be

accurately located under each pipe joint and excavated to size by hand. Pipe shall lay uniformly and be Supported on bottom of ditch along its entire length.

3. Temporary bridges or crossings shall be built by contractor where required

to maintain traffic.

02665 - 7

F. Pipe Laying: In general, entire pipeline shall be installed at a depth resulting in a

minimum “cover” of 48 inches. Where necessary due to other utilities conflicts, the pipeline shall be lower than 48” as required.

1. Proper barricades and flares shall be placed and maintained to assure

maximum traffic and pedestrian safety, or as directed by Architect/Engineer.

2. Ditching and pipe laying shall be uniformly in a straight line (taking “snaking” of pipe into account) and to uniform elevation unless otherwise specified on plans. Pipe, fittings, and valves shall be carefully handled to avoid damage, and while they are suspended over the trench, before lowering, they shall be inspected for any defects.

3. Before pipe is laid, all dirt shall be removed from inside; all lumps, blister, excess coal tar, dirt, oil and grease shall be removed from both the inside and the outside of the pipe.

4. After each joint is completed, Contractor may proceed with hand tamping of backfill to a point twelve inches (12”) above the pipe, as outlined in section entitled “Backfilling". All joints, however, must remain exposed until pipe has been subjected to hydrostatic test and approved by Engineer. After pipe is laid, care shall be taken to avoid entrance of dirt, water, or small animals by use of tight bulkheads in all openings.

G. Wet Connection: All wet connections shall be made by Contractor who will supply all labor, material, and equipment to perform the work.

1. Contractor shall plan his work concerning wet connections in such a way

that a minimum of inconvenience shall occur to existing water customers due to water service interruptions.

2. Before water service interruptions are made to any customers, Contractor

shall notify designated Officials, and cooperate with operating personnel in every way to minimize service interruptions due to wet connections.

3. It is also to be recognized that in certain locations other utility lines or

conduits will be obstructions in the normal path of proposed water lines. In such instances gravity line of all kinds hold priority as to grade over water pressure lines, gas lines, electric conduits. Where other obstruction conduits or combinations of conduits are encountered, Contractor is to analyze conditions carefully and then use best judgement in determining proper method of proceeding through obstructed area with water line construction.

H. Backfilling: Before pipes have been tested and approved, partial backfilling shall

be done with approved material free from large clods.

02665 - 8

1. Backfill material shall be placed evenly around and over pipe in 6 inch maximum layers. Each layer shall be thoroughly and carefully hand tamped until 7 inches of cover exists over pipe.

2. In areas outside of walkways, paving, streets or alleys, secondary backfill

including 12” below subgrade shall be placed in 10” lifts and mechanically compacted or in 6” lifts with hand compaction to 90% maximum density per TEX-113-E. Leave backfill mounded over trench until final grading to be completed.

3. Where trenching is done in (flooding/jetting not allowed) paved areas, or

other areas, and the controlling agency so requires, the backfilling and dirt settling shall be accelerated by addition of controlled moisture and mechanical tamping of final backfill dirt in 6 inch layers. Owner will furnish water from fire hydrants for such tamping in areas where fire hydrants are conveniently located, otherwise Contractor shall furnish water by other means and from other sources.

4. Water jetting method for backfilling is not permitted.

I. Location of Mains: Water lines and sanitary sewers shall be installed no closer to

each other than 9 feet. Where this cannot be achieved Refer to TCEQ Regulations for compliance. No physical connection shall be made between a drinking water supply, public or private, and the sewer or any appurtenance thereof shall be constructed so as to prevent any possibility of sewage entering the drinking water system.


A. Hydrostatic Tests: All pipelines constructed under this contract, before being accepted, shall be tested with a hydraulic test pressure of not less than 150 pounds per square inch, maintained over a continuous period of not less than four (4) hours or as shown on plans. Hydrostatic testing shall be performed in the presence of the City of Laredo Utilities Inspector.

B. The Contractor will be required to furnish adequate and satisfactory equipment

and supplies necessary to make such hydrostatic tests. Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications Section 116.

1. The cost of testing and finding the leaks and repairing the same and re-

testing, if necessary, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The water required to fill the lines will be furnished by the Contractor, without cost to the Owner.

C. Line Disinfection: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications

Section 118.

02665 - 9

1. The Contractor will furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the proper disinfection of the line and the cost of this operation shall be included in the bid price for the project.

D. Sterilization of Completed Line: The Contractor shall notify and coordinate this

work with the Laredo Water Utilities Department and Engineer. 3.03 OPERATION AND TESTING:

A. Underground: Valve operation shall be of the traveling—nut type, sealed, gasketed, and lubricated for underground service. It shall be capable of withstanding an overload input torque of 450 ft. lbs. at full—open or closed position without damage to the valve or valve operator. It shall be designed to resist submergence in water to 25’ head pressure. Operator nut (crossheads) shall be made of high-strength manganese bronze. Number of turns to operate valve shall vary with valve size and be approximately three times the pipe size in order to closely resemble conventional distribution valve practices more familiar to operation personnel.

1. Valve shall be easily operable by one man using standard valve key, even

under emergency line-break conditions as severe as those causing a valve torque requirement of as much as two times AWWA Class 150B. Operator shall produce full class 150B output torque requirement throughout entire travel with an input torque no greater than 100 foot pounds.

2. All valves shall open left, and be equipped with 2” AWWA operating nut. 3.04 PIPE RESTRAINTS

A. GENERAL: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications Section 104.

1. Thrust-blocks shall be installed whenever the pipeline changes direction, as at tees and bends; changes size, as at reducers (also some crosses and tees); stops, as at a dead end; or is expected to develop thrusts at valves.

2. Size and Type of Thrust-Blocks: The size and type of thrust-blocks depends on pressure, pipe size, kind of soil, and the type of fitting.

3. The illustrations on the pages 02665 – 16 & 17 show how the area of a thrust-block for resisting horizontal thrusts must increase as the pipe size increases for a given pressure. The illustrations show two sizes of 90°bends in place in a trench. Below each of these is showing the area of the thrust—block needed to resist the different pressures. The larger pipe size (even though at the same water pressure) requires a greater thrust—block area.

B. Comparison of Thrust-Block Areas:

02665 - 10

1. Thrusts in soft, unstable Soils: In soft, unstable soils, thrusts are resisted by running tie rods to solid foundations or by removing the soft material and replacing it with ballast of sufficient size and weight to resist thrusts.

C. Anchorage of Pipe and Slopes: Under pressure conditions, all valves (including those in

hydrant run-out) require anchorage against any thrust created when valve is closed.

1. Area of undisturbed soil should be adequate to withstand the thrust in whichever direction it will occur.

D. Construction Thrust Blocks: Thrust blocks are made of concrete, usually placed between

the fitting and the trench wall. It is important to place the concrete so that it extends to the undisturbed (freshly cut) trench wall-soft stuff will not hold.

1. The concrete mix used should be Class “B” concrete (2500 psi). 2. On the smaller size. of pipes, the construction of horizontal thrust blocks require

only the simplest forms where the concrete is mixed and placed fairly dry-thus making it easy to shape the block to a wedge with its widest part against soil trench wall.

3. Concrete should be kept behind the bell of fitting. Do not let it run over against the pipe or in the joint. Larger blocks require some form (i.e., construction at sides and top) to achieve the proper bearing with a minimum of concrete.

E. Installation at Hydrants: Each hydrant run out is normally equipped with a valve. The

valve may be located at the main, at the hydrant, or in between. Whatever location is used, each fitting (branch-tee, gate-valve and hydrant) should be separately supported.

F. Be sure to brace the hydrant firmly while the pipe connections are being made up and

until the final foundation has been poured and has set. Do not make the pipe support the hydrant.

Other stresses are sometimes caused by water from the drain in the base of the hydrant washing away the support from around and under the hydrant. Still another consideration in proper hydrant installation is the overturning force that is created when a flexible fire hose is used. When the hydrant is opened, this overturning force tends to cause excessive flexural stress in the lateral pipe from the main hydrant. All of these problems can be considerably minimized through the use of a concrete foundation. This type of hydrant foundation acts as a thrust—block and as an anchorage. It eliminates wash-outs from water waste drain. This concrete foundation can be poured around the base of the hydrant after it has been set in position. with the anchor rods set into the concrete, the block will serve as a thrust— block; as a hold—down, or anchorage; and as a foundation which eliminates wash-outs from the waste water discharged through the hydrant drain.

02665 - 11

NOTE THAT HYDRANT DRAIN MUST BE LEFT CLEAR WHEN POURING CONCRETE. Identification: Metallic—lined plastic underground warning tapes shall be polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black let “CAUTION: WATER LINE BURIED BELOW”. The Contractor is to call the Architect or Engineer for verification before backfill water line.

END OF SECTION

02730 - 1

SECTION 02730 SANITARY SEWERAGE


A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and other Division 1 specification section apply to this section. Provide all taps as required and pay for all fees as required.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This section includes Sanitary Sewerage System, piping, fittings, clean-outs, and manholes.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

C. Division 2, Section 02200 “Earthwork” for excavatic and backfill required for Sanitary Sewerage System.

D. Division 2, Section - 02720 “Storm Sewerage” for Storm Sewerage Systems. E. Division 3, Section - 03310 “Concrete Work” for Cast-In-Place Concrete

Manholes. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. This work shall consist of the construction, complete in place of Sewerage as specified herein, and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, materials and design shown on the plans.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit the following reports directly to Owner’s representative from the testing with copy to Contractor in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1, Section 01300 specification sections.

B. Product Data: Drainage Pipe Specialties.

C. Shop Drawings: For precast concrete sanitary manholes including frames and

covers. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Existing Utilities: Before any trenching is started on distribution pipe installations, the Contractor shall contact all such agencies as the gas company, power company, or others, and determine exact locations of any of their underground conduits which are in the path of the new water line construction.

02730 - 2

B. Handling and storage: PVC pipe shall be delivered to the job site from the factory and stored at the job site in pelletized units or bundles to prevent unnecessary deflection prior to installation. Each pelletized unit shall be sized to limit the stacking of pipe to not more than 60 inch high.

1. Care shall be taken during the transporting of the pipe to insure that the

binding and tie down methods do not damage or deflect the pipe in any manner. Pipe bent, deflected, discolored or otherwise damaged during shipping will be rejected.

2. Pipe stored on the job site shall be covered with canvas or other opaque material to protect it from the sun’s rays. Air circulation shall be provided under the covering.

3. PVC pipe shall not be removed from the pallet and/or laid out along the ditch until the bedding material is in place and ready to receive the pipe.

4. Design (Gravity Lines): The minimum wall thickness for PVC gravity sewer pipe shall conform to DR-26. Maximum allowable ordinate as measured from the concave side of the pipe shall not exceed 1/16 inch per foot in length, but in no event shall the deviation from straight be more than 1/2 inch for any length of PVC.

5. Latitudes in workmanship and finished allowed by ASTM notwithstanding, all pipe shall have smooth exterior and interior surfaces, be first quality, be free from cracks, blisters and other imperfections and be true to theoretical shapes and forms throughout each length.

6. Marking of pipe shall be in conformance with paragraph 12 of ASTM D-3034, latest revision.

7. One brand of pipe only, shall be allowed on any single project. 8. Each pipe size, to be furnished on this project, shall be tested by the

manufacturer, in accordance with ASTM D-3034, latest revision. Results of these tests shall be submitted to the Engineer with each truckload, when delivered to the job site.

9. In addition, each pipe size and lot number, to be furnished on this project, shall be tested by an approved independent laboratory before installation of any PVC plastic pipe. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with standard method of test for “external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading”, ASTM Standard Specification of D-2412 and ash determination in accordance with ASTM 0-817. Results of these tests shall be presented to the Engineer in triplicate as each load is delivered to the job site. Cost of this testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings Materials: Must meet the following minimum specifications A.W.W.A. standards and comply with the description provided:

02730 - 3

1. Pipe (Gravity Line): Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) SDR 26, Class 160, ASTM 02241 latest revision. The pipe shall be made on PVC plastic, having a cell classification equal to or exceeding 12454-13 or 12454 C or 13364-13 with minimum tensile modules of 34.50 Mpg (5,000.00 PSI) as defined in ASTM Specification D-1784.

2. Pipe within of one year from date of manufacture shall be certified as meeting above properties.

3. PVC Pipe, to be installed for underground gravity sanitary sewer lines, shall have minimum pipe stiffness of 115 PSI for each diameter when measured at 5% vertical ring deflection and tested in accordance with ASTM 0-2412, latest revision.

B. Pipe (Force Main): Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) IPSSDR-26, Class 160 ASTM

D2241 with bell end and elastomeric gasket with plain ends for ductile iron fittings, or with plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings or as specified on plans; portion of force main to be used is C-900, class 200 PVC as shown on plans.

C. Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe couplings and gasketed fittings on C-900

pipe and SDR 26 Class 160 fitting on Class 160 pipe.

D. Identification: Metallic-lined plastic underground warning tapes shall be polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mile thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letter “CAUTION-SEWER FORCE MAIN BURIED BELOW”. Contractor to call City Inspector or Engineer for verification before backfill force main.

1. Marking of pipe shall be in conformance with paragraph 12A of ASTM D-

2241, Latest Revision.

E. Joints: Flexible gasketed joints for PVC sewer pipe shall be compression type conforming to ASTM D-2312. The gasket shall comply with ASTM F-477.

F. Fittings (Gravity Line.): The fittings shall be made for gravity lines only on PVC

plastic, having a cell classification equal to or exceeding 12454-B, 12454-C or 13343-C or approved equal as defined in ASTM specification 0-1784. Saddles will not be permitted. Fittings to be SDR 26 PVC heavy wall.

G. Sewage Air/Vacuum Valves (Force Main): Use Apco 403 or approved equal for

8” PVC Force Main. The valve body shall be cast iron or approved equal.

H. Clean-Outs: Clean-outs shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) SDR-26 ASTM D-3034 latest revision with cast iron ring and cover with lettering saying “clean out”, top of clean-out and cover to be encased concrete 12” x 12” minimum at top. Depths required in accordance with plans and profiles.

02730 - 4

I. Manhole: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specification 208.

J. Base Section: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specification 208.

K. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness; 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

L. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated. Top of cone to match grade rings.

M. Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9 inches total thickness and match 24-inch diameter frame and cover.

N. Gasket: ASTM C-443, Rubber Pre-Molded or “Ram-Nek”.

O. Manhole Ring and Cover Casting: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical

Specifications Sections 208, Drawing 208-1, 208-2, 208-3 and 208-4.

E. Testing: Refer to City of Laredo Standard Technical Specifications Sections 218 and 226.

F. Leakage: Low—pressure air test.

This test shall conform to the procedure described in ASTM C-828, ASTM C-924 or the other appropriate procedures. The maximum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 psi to 2.5 psi shall be computed by the following equation:

T = 0.0850 (D)(K)/(Q)

Where:

T =time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch in seconds K = 0.00049 D*L, but not less than 1.0 D = average inside diameter in inches L =length of line of same pipe size in feet Q =rate of loss, assume 0.0015 ft~/= per square foot of internal surface

TABLE

SIZE LENGTH T 8” 300 533 seconds

10” 300 833 seconds 12” 300 1199 seconds

G. Deflection: Mandrel test.

The test shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of five percent. The test is to use a mandrel with a diameter equal to 95% of the inside diameter of the pipe, the test

02730 - 5

shall be performed without mechanical pulling devices. All force mains shall be treated for pressure and leakage according to the following methods:

1. Pressure and Leakage:Hydrostatic testing (water).

Before testing, the pipeline must be backfilled sufficiently to prevent movement under pressure. The line should be filled slowly at the lowest point in the line. All air should be expelled from the pipeline during filling and again before making pressure tests. A minimum test pressure of 1.5 times the maximum design shall be applied to the tested line. The pressure test shall be held for a minimum of 4 hours. -The pressure drop during the test should not exceed 5 psi, also, the allowable leakage shall be based on the following formula:

L =ND/P L = allowable leakage (gal/hr) N = number of joints in the tested line (pipe and fittings) D = nominal diameter of pipe (in.) P = average test pressure (psi)

H. Pipe Jointing: Joints shall not be covered until approved by the Engineer.

1. After joints have been inspected and approved, a light shall be flashed between manholes or manhole locations, so that the Engineer may check alignment. If alignment is true and no pipes are misplaced, backfilling may be continued. A mandrel test will be required on all gravity sewer lines prior to acceptance, which test must meet the approval of the Engineer. (Maximum deflection of 5 between pipes).

I. Trench Construction: Standard trench width shall be a minimum of 12 inches on

each side of the pipe. Where an unstable trench wall, such as would require sheeting, stay bracing or a trench box to control laying conditions, is encountered, the trench width should be a minimum of S pipe diameters in order to obtain the required lateral support for the installed pipe per ASTM D-2321, (Paragraph 7.1.2), latest revision.

J. Installation of Manholes and Covers: Cast iron rings and covers shall be

imbedded in a full bed of mortar and have a full bearing with toe at the established grade, with lettering, “Sanitary Sewer.”

K. Base shall be concrete with flow channel built of concrete of 1/2 section of pipe.

Flow line shall be true and trowelled to a smooth, hard surface.

1. Drop manholes shall be constructed in accordance with plans. Pipe and specials for drop manholes shall be considered as a part of the manhole. All pipe extending through the manhole walls shall be tightly sealed in place with mortar.

2. Concrete for Sanitary Sewerage Construction: Concrete for sanitary sewerage

02730 - 6

construction shall be proportioned and mixed. The maximum size of gravel shall be 1-1/2 inch. Type I cement shall be used for all concrete below ground level.

L. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi.

M. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. N. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Sand. O. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, Crushed Gravel. P. Water: Potable.

Q. Mortar: Mortar for manholes shall consist of one (1) Type I Portland Cement to

three (3) parts clean sharp sand (damp and loose). (All measured by weight) with sufficient water to provide a workable mix. In order to achieve workability the Contractor may, the consent of the Engineer. Substitute natural pozzolan in quantities not to exceed twenty-five (25) percent of the cement content. 1. Water shall be clean and free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, or

organic materials.

R. Trees, Fence. and Incidentals: Where trees, plants, shrubbery, etc., are adjacent to the line of the work and are not to be removed or replaced, the Contractor shall protect such trees, plants, shrubbery, etc., by substantial wooden boxes and guards and shall not permit machinery, or employees to scrape, tear the limbs from or damage, or attach guy cables to them, and if in the opinion of the Engineer such trees, plants, shrubbery, etc., would be damaged by machinery etc., hand excavation may be required. Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to adjacent trees, plants, shrubbery, etc.

S. General: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain in service any and

all utility lines of any nature encountered during construction of the new sewerage improvements. Should any existing utility lines be unavoidably cut or damaged by Contractor’s equipment or work men, the Contractor shall make immediate repairs using materials and workmanship to result in lines being restored to original conditions, at no additional cost to this contract.

T. The Contractor shall repair all paving, cut or damaged, to the satisfaction of the

Architect and the Engineer. The Contractor shall replace and restore as promptly as is possible all paving or street surfacing of any nature to its original condition as found.

U. The Contractor shall continuously dispose of any and all excess materials behind the construction as it proceeds daily, and shall totally clean and dress installation area behind construction as it proceeds daily.

V. The Contractor shall avoid damage to grass, trees, shrubs, etc., in the path of/or

02730 - 7

immediately adjacent to the sewer line construction, in case trees and/or shrubs must be remove for construction purposes, then the Contractor shall preserve of replace them to the satisfaction of each property owner. Where lawn grass is removed for purposed of construction, the area shall be re-sodded by the Contractor to the satisfaction of each property owner. No extra pay item is allowed for carrying out any of the foregoing operations necessary to satisfy individual property owners.

W. Protecting Public Water Supply: Water lines and sanitary sewers shall be installed no closer to each other than nine (9) feet. Where this cannot be achieved, Refer to TCEQ Regulations for Compliance. No physical connections shall e made between a drinking water supply, public or private, and the sewer of any appurtenance. Any facilities for permitting discharge of drinking water into the sewer of any appurtenance there of shall be constructed so as to prevent any possibility of sewage entering the drinking water system.


02810 - 1

SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Provide meter, backflow preventer, and any other items as required and pay all associated fees for a complete automatic system.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes providing a new fully automatic irrigation system to include all valves, piping, sprinklers, specialties, accessories, controls, wiring, and other equipment necessary to irrigate properly the planting areas indicated on the drawings. Planting area shall mean all areas to be planted with trees, shrubs, grasses, groundcovers, sod, seed, or mulched. The irrigation system shall be designed by a Texas licensed irrigator approved by the Architect and Owner familiar with environmental conditions of the project area. Provide shop drawings of the irrigation system for approval of the Architect prior to installation. The irrigation system shall provide full coverage of all the areas to be seeded or sodded with Bermuda sod grass as well as bubblers at all trees and shall be a complete fully automated system. Include cost for all city permit, irrigation water, meter tap and demand fees (meter size as required), electrical power requirements, back flow preventer as approved by governing authority, all in accordance as required for complete automated irrigation system. Refer to additional notes on site plan for water source and use of purple colored piping.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section “Alternates”.

2. Division 2 Section “Portland Cement Concrete Paving”.

3. Division 2 Section “Water Systems

4. Division 2 Section “Earthwork”.

5. Division 2 Section “Landscape Work”.

02810 - 2

6. Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.

7. Division 16 Sections for electrical power materials and installations. 1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Supply Piping: Piping from water source to connection to irrigation system pressure piping. Piping is under same pressure as water supply. Piping in this category is not included in this Section.

B. Pressure Piping: Piping downstream from supply piping to and including control valves. Piping is under irrigation system pressure. Piping in this category is not included in this Section.

C. Circuit Piping: Piping downstream from control valves to irrigation system

sprinklers emitters, devices, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure (less than pressure piping) during flow.

D. Control Valve: Automatic (electrically operated) valve for control water flow to

irrigation system zone. 1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Location of Sprinklers and Devices: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards; however, do not diminish water coverage.

B Minimum Water Coverage: As per drawings but not less than:

1. Turf Areas: 100 percent 2. Other Planting Areas: 100 percent

C. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the

following minimum working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise.

1. Pressure Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 2. Circuit and Drain Piping: 100 psig (690 kPa).

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections.

B Product data including pressure rating, rated capacity, settings and electrical data

02810 - 3

of selected models for the following:

1. Valves, including general-duty, underground, and automatic control, and quick-coupler types, and valve boxes.

2. Sprinklers. 3. Wiring.

C. Maintenance data for inclusion in “Operating and Maintenance Manual” specified

in Division 1 Section “Project Closeout” for the following:

1. Automatic control valves. 2. Sprinklers. 3. Controllers.


A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water for prevention of backflow and backsiphonage.

B. Comply with requirements of authority with jurisdiction for irrigation systems.

C. Installer qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is a Texas-licensed

irrigator and who has completed irrigation systems similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for Project that have result in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. List three successful past projects.

D Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or other Marking: On equipment, specialties, and

accessories made to specified standards.

E. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in “National Electrical

Code,” Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

F. Product Options: Irrigation system piping, specialties, and accessories are based on specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Components with equal performance characteristics produced by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions, operation, and other characteristics do not change design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of product equality is on the Contractor.

02810 - 4

G. Substitutions: Substitutions will accepted for any / all brands (“or equals”)

including Rainbird, Hunter, Toro, Weathermatic, Hardie-Irritrol, etc. provided that the particular product is of equal quality, ie.: brass vs. plastic, stainless steel vs painted metal or plastic. Also the design criteria, i.e.: pressure ratings, gallons per minute delivery, precipitation rates, etc. The two most important items to be considered are: the electric valves and controller which should adhere to the following design criteria:

1. Electric Solenoid Valves: Valves shall be globe pattern, normally closed,

electric solenoid actuated, and diaphram-operated. The valve body and bonnet shall be red cast brass or bronze, stainless steel flow control stem, capable of 100 GPM with 4.8 PSI pressure loss or less.

2. Controllers: The controllers shall be housed in a lockable, weather resistant, stainless steel cabinet, pedestal mounted. The controller shall have large, heavy duty terminal screws and barriers on modular removable circuit boards for ease of station size increase and installation. Terminals shall allow up to 12 AWG wiring.

Refer to Division I Section “Product Substitutions”.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Verify that irrigation system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards.

B. Site Information: Report on subsurface condition investigations made during

design of the Project are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions (between soil borings). Owner assumes no responsibility for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Maintain uninterrupted water service to building during normal working hours. Arrange for temporary water shutoff with Owner.

B. Coordinate irrigation systems work with landscape work specified in Division 2

Section “Landscape Work”. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

02810 - 5

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1. Gate Valves for Underground Installation:

American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Waterous Co.

2. Valves for Aboveground and Pit Installation:

Grinned Supply Sales Co., Grinned Corp. Dimmer International, Ltd. Kitz Corp. of America Lunkenheimer Co. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. Nibco, Inc. Hammond Valve Div., Prairie Manufacturing Corp. Red-White Valve Corp. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

Walworth Co. Watts Regulator Co. Win. Powell Co.

3. Automatic Control Valves:

Buckner, Inc. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. Weather-matic Sprinkler Div., Telsco Industries

4. Control Valve Boxes:

Ametek by Plymouth Products Div., AMETEK Brooks Products, Inc., Polyplastics Div. Carson Industries, Inc. DFW/HPI by Hefco Plastics, Inc.

5. Quick Couplers:

Buckner, Inc. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.

02810 - 6

Weather-matic Sprinkler Div., Telsco Industries 6. Sprinklers:

Hunter Industries

7. Controllers:

Weather-matic Sprinklers Div., Telsco Industries 2.02 PIPES AND TUBES

Refer to Part 3 Article “Piping Applications” for identification of systems where pipe and tube materials specified below are used.

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Types L and M (Metric designations:

Types B and C), water tube, annealed and drawn tempers with plain ends.

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120, Schedule 40, 160 psig (1100 kPa) minimum pressure rating for 4-inch (200mm) and smaller sizes, with plain ends for pressure lines.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2241; PVC 1120, SDR 21, 200

psig (1380 kPa) minimum pressure rating, with plain ends for laterals and pressure lines above 4”.

D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2241; PVC 1120, SDR 26, 160

psig (1100 kPa) minimum pressure rating, with plain ends. 2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

Refer to Part 3 Article “Piping Applications” for identification of systems where pipe and tube fitting materials specified below are used.

A. Copper Tube Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought copper or cast-brass, solder-joint,

pressure type.

B. Copper Unions: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded or solder-joint, and threaded ends.

1. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1.

C. Cast-Bronze Flanges: ALLOW B16.24, Class 150, raised ground face, bolt holes

spot faced.

02810 - 7

D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings” ASTM D 1464, Schedule 80, threaded.

E. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 1467, Schedule 80,

socket-type. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for joining

materials not included in this Section.

A. Solvent Cement: ASTM F 656 primer and ASTM D 1564 solvent cement in color other than orange.

B Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloys Sn95 and E.

C. Gaskets and Fasteners for Metal and Metal-to-Plastic Flanged Joints: ASME B

16.21, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, flat, 1/8-inch thickness gaskets and ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Gaskets for Plastic Flanged Joints: Materials recommended by plastic pipe and

fittings manufacturer.

2.05 VALVES

General: Valves are for general-duty and underground applications. Refer to “Valve Applications” article for locations of various valve types specified in this Article. Refer to “Control Valves” Article for control valves and accessories and “Backflow Preventers” Article for backflow preventer valves.

A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves 3 Inches and Larger: AWWA C500, cast-iron double

disc, bronze disc and seat rings or AWWA C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body and bonnet, stem nut, 200 psig (1380 kPa) working pressure; and ends that fit NPSW dimension, PVC pipe. Include elastomeric gaskets.

B Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box with top section and cover with lettering “WATER”

bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.

1. Provide steel tee-handle shutoff rod with each valve box. 2. Include tee-handle, shutoff rod with one pointed end, stem 3. of length to operate valve, and end fitting valve operating nut.

C. Bronze, Nonrising Stem Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 1,

02810 - 8

solid wedge; nonrising, copper-silicon-alloy stem; Class 125, body and screw bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze, with threaded or solder-joint ends. Include polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)-impregnated packing, brass packing gland, and malleable-iron handwheel.

D. Quick-Couplers: Factory-fabricated, 2 piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap.

1. Provide 5 hose swivels with ASME B 1.207, 3/4- l1.5NH threads for

garden hose on outlet; and operating key to Owner for storage at site. 2. Quick-coupler valves shall be No. QB33LRC manufactured by Buckner,

Inc., or approved equal. 2.06 CONTROL VALVES

Description: Manufacturer’s standard control valves for circuits, of type and size indicated, as follows:

A. Automatic Control Valves: Contamination resistant remote control valve shall be

solenoid-actuated, diaphragm-operated, The valve shall use the reverse flow principle, equally pressurizing the top and bottom of the diaphragm assembly when deactivated. 1. The valve body, bonnet and all functional internal parts shall be of the

highest grade, non-corrosive material. The valve shall incorporate an armature lifting lever for manual operation via internal bleed. The diaphragm shall be one-piece molded thermoplastic elastomer (TPE).

2. The valve shall operate between 10 and 150 psi through a flow range of .15 to 200 gpm. Pressure loss shall be 3.2 psi. maximum at 90 gpm. The valve shall be Weathermatic 8200 CR Series or equal.

3. A plastic Ball Valve is to be installed in front of each electric valve, same size, located in the same valve box.

B Control Valve Boxes: Polyethylene (PE), acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (SBS),

12” x 25” size.

1. Manufactured by HPI (#D- 1500), DFW Plastics, Inc., Bedford, Tx. 76095 or approved equal.

C. Service Boxes for Key-Operated Valves: Cast-iron box with telescoping top

section of length required for depth of bury of valve. Include cover with lettering “WATER”, and bottom section with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter. 1. Include one valve key, 36 inches long with tee 2. handle and key end to fit valve

2.07 SPRINKLERS

02810 - 9

Description: Manufacturer’s standard sprinklers designed to provide uniform coverage over entire area of spray shown on Drawings, and listed in Schedule in drawings, at available water pressure, as follows:

A. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. Provide owner with 5

extra for storage on site.

1. Bubblers shall be Rainbow, Toro or Buckner Flood Bubbler, with 1 – 1.5 GPM flow rate or approved equal.

B. Pop-Up, Spray: The sprinkler shall be of the fixed spray type designed for

in ground installation. The sprinkler shall operate within a 20 - 50 PSI pressure range.

1. The body of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrosive heavy duty

cycolac. The sprinkler shall have a riser screen filter to prevent entry of foreign material to the nozzle. All parts shall be removable through the top of the sprinkler case. Sprinkler shall have a stainless steel retraction spring to ensure positive pop-down and shall have a conilip seal and cap configuration to provide improved sealing and reduced flushing action on the up and down stroke to clear away debris from the riser.

2. Spray nozzles shall be color-coded matched precipitation rate fixed spray at 5 set radiuses (5’, 8’, 10’, 12’, 15’) with an adjustment screw for fine adjustment up to 25%.

3. Provide Owner with 10 sprinkler bodies and 20 nozzles of each type used for storage on site.

3. The pop-up spray sprinkler shall be with brass nozzles and shall be manufactured Rainbird, Toro or Buckner Inc., or approved equal.

C. Pop-Up, Gear-Drive Rotary: The full and/or part circle priniders shall be gear

driven rotary. Part-circle nozzle shall be adjustable from a 30 to 360 arc. The sprinkler shall be full or part circle and part circle adjustments shall be made from the surface without raising the sprinkler out of its housing. When set, the arc shall be visibly indicated by an arrow pointer. the sprinkler shall have a removable nozzle for cleaning. The rotor shall have a 1” NPTY inlet, with 32mm BSPT available as an option, capable of the radii shown on the plan. On model GPS 103 the riser shall be stainless steel with a rubber cover. Check valves will be provided for each unit.

1. The gear drive sprinkler shall pop-up 3-1/2” ht. 2. The gear drive sprinkler shall have a 2-year full replacement warranty. 3. The gear drive sprinkler shall be Hunter I-25 Noz 15. 4. Provide owner with 10 extra sprinklers for storage on the site.

02810 - 10

2.08 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Controller shall be by Weathermatic, mounted in indoors, solid state in Mechanical Room 127, coordinate and pay electrical sub-contactor for power requirements.

B The controller shall have large heavy duty terminal screws and barriers on modular removable circuit boards for ease of installation and shall allow up to 12 AWG wiring (MIP only).

C. The controller shall be surge protected with spark gaps and induction coils

on both primary and secondary sides of the Central Processing Unit. The controller shall feature current-sensing overload protection with fuse and circuit breaker and shall cease irrigation in the event of overload but shall resume irrigating when the overload condition ceases.

D. All programming information shall be retained by non-volatile memory in

the event of a power failure.

E. The controller shall be capable of future upgrade to central computer control and communications through the addition of simple plug in modules.

2.09 CONCRETE BASES Refer to Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for concrete bases for controllers

and as follows:

A. Concrete: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).

B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the requirements of referenced Division 3 Section and as follows:

1. Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

PART 3 EXUCUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Investigate and determine available water supply pressure and flow characteristics.

3.02 EARTHWORK

02810 - 11

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section

“Earthwork”. 3.03 PAVING WORK

A. Cutting and patching of concrete paving is specified in Division 2 Section “Portland Cement Concrete Paving”.

B. Install piping in sleeves where crossing sidewalks, roadways, parking lots.

3.04 PIPING APPLICATIONS

Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fittings products listed below. Use pipe, tube fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. Piping in pits and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of joints indicated.

A. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to the following

applications.

B. Pressure Piping Underground:

1. 3 Inches and Smaller: ASTM D 2241, SCR 17, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe; ASTM D 2467, Schedule 40 PVC plastic, socket-type pipe fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

2. 4 Inches and Larger: ASTM D 2241, SDR 17, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe; ASTM D 1467, Schedule 40, PVC plastic, socket-type pipe fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

C. Circuit Piping:

1. All Sizes: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic

pipe; ASTM D 2467, Schedule 40 PVC plastic, socket- type pipe fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

D Swing Joints at Sprinklers and Quick Coupler Valves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule

80, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe with threaded ends.

1. Manufactured by Philips Industries Inc., Lasco Division, Anaheim, Calif 92806, or approved equal.

E. Sleeves: Class 160 PVC and shall be at least two times larger than the water line.

3.05 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

02810 - 12

A. Flanged Joints: Align flanges and install gaskets. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening. Use lubricant on bolt threads.

B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipes with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B

1.20.1, apply tape or joint compound, and apply wrench to valve ends into which pipes are being threaded.

C. Copper Tube and Fittings, Soldered Joints: Construction joints according to CDA No. 404/0 Products Handbook “Copper Tube Handbook”.

D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Gasketed Joints: Construct joints between

underground AWWA-type, cast-iron valves and NI’S PVC pipe; with elastomeric seals that fit pipe diameter and valve ends; and lubricant, according to ASTM D 3139.

E. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Construct joints

according to ASTM D 2672 and ASTM D 2855.

F. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for safe handling when joining plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements.

G. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are

compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. Refer to “Piping Systems-Common Requirements” Article for joining dissimilar metal piping.

3.06 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, and in other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system

operating pressure.

C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, space to permit valve servicing. D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Piping

Connections: Except as otherwise indicated make piping connections as specified below.

1. Install unions, in piping 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment having 2-inch or smaller threaded pipe

02810 - 13

connection. 2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at

final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.

3.07 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install copper tube and copper tube fittings, according to CDA No. 404/0 Products Handbook “Copper Tube Handbook”.

B. Install underground polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe according to ASTM D

2774. C. Lay piping on soft subbase, uniform without humps or depressions, remove all

rocks or sharp objects. Install in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C). Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 deg F (4 deg C) before testing, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

D. Minimum Cover: Provide following minimum cover over top of buried piping:

1. Pressure Piping: Depth of a minimum of 30 inches cover below finished

grade. Use concrete thrust blocks at all pipe joints that change direction. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches minimum cover. 3. Sleeves: 24 inches minimum cover. Turn up at each end a minimum of

12” above grade for ease of location. Contractor shall mark and note locations and depths of all irrigation sleeves on the site. In lieu of turning up at each end, sleeves may have buried a steel or iron plate of sufficient size to enable identification with a metal detector of commercial grade. Ends of all sleeves and pipe extensions shall be clearly marked with a 2x4 wood stake, extending 1 foot above and 2 feet below grade, painted green. This stake shall be clearly marked identifying item located below grade. Contractor shall not remove any of these stakes unless directed to do so by the owner.

E. Tunneling; Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be

disturbed, by tunneling, boring, or jacking. F. Install piping under sidewalks and paving in sleeves.

G. Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided at all tees, wyes, bends, and dead ends

when ring-type pipe is being installed and for all main lines under pressure.

H. Thrust blocks shall be 5-sack mix concrete, placed in the trench between undisturbed soil and the fitting. They shall be of sufficient size and placed so as to resist all thrusts developing at that point during operation of the system.

02810 - 14

3.08 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, following requirements apply:

1. Buried Valve 3 Inches and Larger: AWWA, gate valves, nonrising stem,

with stem nut and valve box. 2. Buried Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: Bronze-body, curb stop, with tee

head, service box and shutoff rod. 3. Pit and Aboveground Installation, Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS,

nonrising stem, gate valves. 4. Pit and Aboveground Installation, Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS,

nonrising stem gate valves. 3.09 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Valves: Install underground automatic control valves in valve boxes, in a level position, deep enough to allow for 3” box cover and valve stem. Follow manufacturers specifications and installation instructions.

B Curb Stops: Install underground curb stops in service boxes. 3.10 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Sprinklers: Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. See installation details.

1. Install lawn sprinklers at finished grade. 2. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 6 inches from

walls and 4 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Locate rotary heads mm 12” from paved areas. Position heads away from light

poles and other obstructions that may hinder proper coverage. 3.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as indicated.

B. Install free-standing controllers on concrete pads. Where dimensions are not

indicated, furnish bases not less than 24 inches by 24 inches by 18 inches thick, and not less than 6 inches greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller.

C. Install control wiring in same trench with piping.

02810 - 15

3.12 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect piping to sprinklers, devices, valves, control valves, specialties, and accessories.

B. Connect water supplies to irrigation systems. Include backflow preventers on

potable water supplies. Coordinate exact size and location with City Utility.

C. Electrical Connections: Connect to power source, controllers, and automatic control valves.

D. Minimum requirements for electrical installations are specified in Division 16.

E. Ground systems according to Division 16 Section “Grounding”.


A. Testing: Perform hydrostatic test of piping and valves before backfilling trenches. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work.

1. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa)

above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

2. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.14 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure

required for each sprinkler circuit.

C. Carefully adjust lawn sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade after completion of landscape work.

D. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves.

3.15 COMMISSIONING

A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer’s written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturers proceed as follows:

1. Verify that specialty valves and their accessories have been installed

02810 - 16

correctly and operate correctly. 2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete. 3. Check that sprinklers and devices are correct type. 4. Check that damaged sprinklers and devices have been replaced with new

materials. 5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type backflow preventers. 6. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 7. Adjust operating controls.

B Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is

completed, backfill is in place, and sprinklers are adjusted to final position. 3.16 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate to Architect or Owners representative that the system meets coverage requirements and that automatic controls function properly.

B. Demonstrate to Owner’s maintenance personnel operation, of equipment,

sprinklers, specialties, and accessories. Review scheduling, operating and maintenance information.

C. Provide 7 days’ written notice in advance of demonstration.

D. Provide 2 sets of “Record Drawings” reproducible drawings to owner. E. Provide One Year Warranty - All parts and labor. F. Provide Watering Schedule (1/2”/week, 3/4”/week, 1 “/week, 1 l/4”/week, 1

1/2”/week) to Owner’s maintenance personnel. i.e. 1” of water per week, typical The irrigation contractor shall include in his bid watering for a minimum of eight weeks or as may be required for entire seeded area to have grass grown. All grass must be in at 100% of full growth and coverage prior to accepting areas as intended by Owner. Provide mowing if required to ensure full even coverage.


02875 - 1

SECTION 02875 COMMERCIAL METAL FENCE & GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED The contractor shall provide all required labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the complete commercial quality welded prefinished 8’-0” high steel fence, 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” gate, and heavy duty 8’ x 28’ sliding motorized gate and motorized unit system defined for project. Refer to site plan for locations.

1.02 RELATED WORK Section 02200 - Earthwork Section 03300 - Concrete

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The manufacturer shall supply a total fence system of Montage® standard picket space, Ornamental Steel, Genesis™, design or approved equal. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels, posts, gates and hardware) required.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.05 REFERENCES ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials

using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to

Corrosive Environments. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally

Measured Color Coordinates. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid

Deformation (Impact). ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets.

1.06 SUBMITTAL The manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted prior to installation.

02875 - 2

1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft.

1.08 PRODUCT WARRANTY A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pickets, and posts) shall be warranted within specified limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 20 years from date of original purchase. Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping, blistering or corroding. B. Reimbursement for labor necessary to restore or replace components that have been found to be defective under the terms of manufactures warranty shall be guaranteed for five (5) years from date of original purchase.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 MANUFACTURER The 8’-0” high fence system shall conform to Montage® standard picket space Ornamental Steel, Genesis™, design, extended picket bottom rail treatment, 3-Rail style manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma or approved equals.

2.02 MATERIAL FENCE PANELS A. Steel material for fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

A653/A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized) coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft2 (184 g/m2), Coating Designation G-60.

B. Material for pickets shall be 3/4” square x 14 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.25”

x 0.92” x 14 Ga. Picket holes in the rail shall be spaced 4.334” o.c. for standard picket space . Fence posts shall be a minimum of 2-1/2” square x 14 Ga. Gate posts shall meet the minimum requirements of Table 1.

2.03 FABRICATION A. Pickets, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to

accept pickets. B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched holes in the rails and shall be aligned to standard

spacing using a specially calibrated alignment fixture. The aligned pickets and rails shall be joined at each picket-to-rail intersection by Ameristar’s proprietary fusion welding process, thus completing the rigid panel assembly (Note: The process produces a virtually seamless, spatter-free good-neighbor appearance, equally attractive from either side of the panel).

C. The manufactured panels and posts shall be subjected to an inline electrode position coating (E-

Coat) process consisting of a multi-stage pretreatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), followed by a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum cumulative coating thickness of epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mils (0.058 mm). The color shall be Bronze.

02875 - 3

The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2 (Note: The requirements in Table 2 meet or exceed the coating performance criteria of ASTM F2408).

D. The manufactured fence system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load,

and infill performance requirements for Residential weight fences under ASTM F2408. E. Gates shall be fabricated using welded ornamental panel material and gate ends having a 1-1/4”

square cross-sectional size. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All picket and rail intersections shall also be joined by welding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. 3.02 FENCE INSTALLATION Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus ½”. For installations that must be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade. Fence panels shall be attached to posts with brackets supplied by the manufacturer. The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern material requirements for the concrete footer. Provide 300 psi concrete footings per drawings but minimum to have a minimum of 12” dia. X 40” deep for 8’-0” high fence. 3.03 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1) Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2) Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3) Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the manufactures’ warranty. 3.04 GATE INSTALLATION Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’ gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.05 CLEANING The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts.

02875 - 4

Table 1 – Minimum Sizes for Montage Gate Post

Table 2 – Coating Performance Requirements

Table 3 – Montage - Post Spacing By Bracket Type

* Note: When using BB106 swivel brackets on either or both ends of a panel installation, care must be taken to ensure the spacing between post and adjoining pickets meets applicable codes. This will require trimming one or both ends of the panel.

Gate Leaf Gate Height

Up To & Including 4’ Over 4’, Up To & Including 6’

Up To & Including 4’ 2” x 16 Ga. 2” x 16 Ga.

Over 4’1”, Up To & Including 6’ 2” x 16 Ga. 2-1/2” x 16 Ga.

Over 6’1”, Up To & Including 8’ 2-1/2” x 16 Ga. 2-1/2” x 16 Ga.

Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements

Adhesion D3359 – Method B

Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654

Corrosion Resistance over 1,000 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball).

Weathering Resistance D822, D2244,

D523 (60° Method)

Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).

Span For CLASSIC, GENESIS, MAJESTIC, WARRIOR, CRESCENT, GEMINI 8’ Nominal (94” Rail)

Post Size 2” 2” 2” 2”

Bracket Type Montage Universal (BB102)

Montage Line Boulevard (BB104)

Montage Flat Mount

(BB105)

Montage Swivel (BB106)

Post Settings ± ½” O.C. 96-3/4” 96-3/4” 96-3/4” 96-3/4”

02876 - 1

SECTION 02876 METAL ROLLING MOTORIZED GATE / MOTOR OPERATOR

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of the 8’-0” high x 28’-0” long steel roll motorized gate and motorized unit system defined herein at project site per plans and specs. Note: Increase or decrease length as required by manufacturer for proper operation with motorized unit. Provide a new galv. “V” groove track in new concrete footing and secure to driveway surface (saw cut and remove asphalt and caliche base / discard) with steel plate integrated galv. steel imbeds - ½” Nelson studs 6” long, at 12” o. c. and set in 12”x12” concrete footing with reinforced rebars 4 - #4 horz. bars and #3 stirrups at 36” o.c. 1.02 RELATED WORK Section 02200 - Earthwork Section 03300 - Concrete 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The manufacturer shall supply a total roll gate system of Ameristar® PassPort II® Industrial Ornamental design series and Genesis style or approved equals. The system shall include all components i.e., pickets, rails, gate uprights, wheels, motorized unit, 10 remote control devices and complete hardware as required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified. 1.05 REFERENCES ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint. ASTM D822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials

using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to

Corrosive Environments. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally

Measured Color Coordinates.

02876 - 2

ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 1.06 SUBMITTAL The manufacturer’s submittal package shall be provided prior to installation. Provide shop drawings and product data, specs for approval. 1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damages occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.01 MANUFACTURER The steel roll gate system shall conform to Ameristar PassPort II Industrial Ornamental design series, Genesis style and 3-rail frame configuration manufactured by Ameristar Fence Products, Inc. in Tulsa, Oklahoma or approved equals. 2.02 MATERIAL A. Steel material for 8’-0” high x 28’-0” rolling gate components (i.e. pickets, rails, diagonals and uprights), shall be commercial steel with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi (344 MPa). B. Ornamental picket material shall be 8’-0” high, 1” square x 14 Ga. Tubing. Picket spacing shall be 4-3/4”. Material for top rails, uprights and diagonals rails shall be 2” square x 12 Ga. Material for the bottom rail shall be 2” x 4” x 11 Ga. Posts shall be a minimum of 4” square x 11 Ga. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Pickets/pales, rails, uprights and posts shall be precut to specified lengths. Diagonals shall be precut to specified lengths and angles. Frame materials shall be joined by welding. Pickets/pales shall be face welded to roll gate frame, except for Invincible or Gauntlet style gates over 18’ long. Invincible or Gauntlet style gates over 18’ long shall have pickets face-welded to 2” x 2” angle iron to form panels equal in length to the gate frame bay width.

02876 - 3

B. The manufactured roll gates and bolt-on panels (if applicable) shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pre-treatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be Bronze. The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 1. C. Completed gates shall be capable of supporting a 200 lb. load applied at midspan without permanent deformation. 2.04 MOTORIZED OPERATOR UNIT Equal to RAM Model No. 5100 (Commercial / Industrial) or as required by supplier/installer for application and door size and weight. Verify door weight, likely exceeding 1000 lbs, gate travel +21’ (confirm at site), overall gate length +28’ gate speed 12’/ft., Motor: 3/4 Hp, 120V, 4.5 Amps, 60 Hz with high speed ball bearings and retractable overload button. Include emergency foot pedal release. Heavy Duty Worm Gear, Lubricated in an oil bath for smooth and quiet operation Limit switches: Mechanical adjustment for accurate gate stop settings Cover: high impact resistant charcoal gray polyethylene Cover Dimension: H 25” x L 161/2”x W 18-1/2” verify at shop drawing phase Finish: Goldzinc plated to inhibit corrosion. Controllers required: 12 units min. Provide concrete footing and base as recommended by manufacturer. Provide complete shop drawings and submittal for review and approval. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION All new installation shall be layed out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans. Coordinate all electrical requirements for the motorized unit with job site electrical subcontractor. 3.02 INSTALLATION

02876 - 4

Gate posts shall be set in accordance with the spacings shown in the construction plans. The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern post base material requirements. 6” wheels shall be bolted to the gate (between the wheel plates welded near the ends of the gate bottom rail). The gate shall be set upright with the V-grooved wheels positioned over the pre-installed steel V-track that traverses the gate opening. Roller guides shall be affixed to the gate posts at a height even with the gate toprail to hold the gate in a vertical position. Gate stops shall be welded to the end of the gate or track so gate cannot pass rollers in either direction. 3.03 CLEANING The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. Table 1 – Coating Performance Requirements Quality Characteristics

ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements

Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape and knife test).

Corrosion Resistance

B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 1,000 hours (Scribed per D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using 0.625” ball).

Weathering Resistance

D822 D2244, D523 (60˚ Method)

Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color units).

02900 - 1

SECTION 02900

LANDSCAPE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes provisions for furnishing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for planting of trees, shrubs and grass; installation of miscellaneous landscape-related items; initial maintenance of landscape materials; and guarantee and replacement of plants and related items required to complete the work indicated by the drawings and specifications.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this

Section.

1. Division 1 Section “Alternates” 2. Division 2 Section “Site Clearing” 3. Division 2 Section “Earthwork” 4. Division 2 Section “Irrigation Systems” 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The work shall be installed by a single contractor that normally specializes in landscape work.

B. Source Quality Control: C. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by

governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. D. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable.

Submit written proof of non-availability to Architect, which shall consist of a list of names, locations, and contact person, all researched sources, together with a proposal for use of an equivalent material, for Architects approval. When submitting a proposal for a size substitution of a specified species, include unit prices for the originally specified material and the proposed substitution.

02900 - 2

E. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer’s certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

F. Trees, shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, genus,

species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock”. Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.

G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with securely attached

waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Inspection: The landscape architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of

growth or at size before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Plant and Material Certifications:

1. Certificates of Inspection as required by governmental authorities.

C. Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight , analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery , and while stored at site.

B. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, shade trees and shrubs, protect from mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. Do

02900 - 3

not bind or tie trees and shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or otherwise destroy their natural shape.

C. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. D. Plants designated “B&B” in the Plant List shall be balled and burlapped. They

shall be dug with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant from the transplanting operation. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or similar material and bound with twine, cord or wire mesh. Cure B&B plant material for minimum 60 days prior to final digging and moving to site.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.

B. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a

manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.

C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such

as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before planting.

D. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established

and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations.

1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall warranty all plant material for one year from date of substantial completion against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents beyond the Contractor’s control, such as freeze, fire, hail, wind, and theft.

B. The Contractor is responsible for and shall maintain all plant material during the

installation and maintenance periods, up to the date of substantial completion. Any plant that dies or exhibits unsatisfactory growth, as determined by the Landscape Architect, prior to the date of substantial completion shall be promptly replaced. This replacement shall not count as a warranty replacement.

02900 - 4

C. At the end of the warranty period, any warranted plant that is dead or exhibiting unsatisfactory growth, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall be removed from the site and replaced as soon as practical, or during the next planting season following the end of the warranty period. Plants which die at no fault of the Contractor may be replaced at a price mutually agreed upon with the Owner prior to the replacement. Replace plants which are in doubtful condition at the end of the warranty period. A list shall be compiled of the plant material; these plants will be inspected again after another growing season. Plants which are dead as determined by Owner shall be removed from project.

D. All replacements for which the Contractor is responsible shall be made with

plants of the same kind and size, and in the same manner as specified herein for the original work, and at no additional cost to the Owner. Only one replacement per tree, shrub, or plant will be required , except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with the specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL

A. Overall site topsoil will be provided and placed to final finish grades by sitework contractor. The landscape contractor shall be responsible for tilling and preparation of beds and “saucers” around trees per Section 02200 – 2.01.8.

B Landscaping contractor is to provide new bedding and tree “saucer” plant topsoil

that is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2” in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

C. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics

to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes. Any new topsoil brought to the site shall conform to the specification for topsoil contained herein, so that the imported soil is consistent in appearance, texture, and composition with the stockpiled, amended topsoil.

2.02 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Peat Moss: Raw Michigan peat, or approved equivalent, obtained from fresh water sites and in which the organic matter is incompletely decomposed plant residues containing a negligible amount of woody matter and shredded to resemble the texture of cultivated peat. Material shall contain:

1. Minimum of 85 percent of pure organic matter

02900 - 5

2. Maximum of 60 percent moisture by weight as received. B. Manure: Well rotted, fermented, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not

more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or ingredients harmful to plants. Manure shall be well-composted, so that it is not hot, and shall be low in salts. A source of this material is Garden-Ville, San Antonio, or an approved equivalent.

C. Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top

dressing of trees, shrubs, and plants. Mulch shall be Shredded Texas Bark Mix, as available from Garden-Ville, San Antonio, or an approved equivalent.

D. Gravel: Water-worn, hard, durable gravel, washed-free of loam, sand, clay, and

other foreign substances; size range of 3/4” maximum and 3/8” minimum. E. Tree Wrap: Kraft Tree Wrap or approved equivalent. F. Filtration/Separation Fabric: Warren’s Terra Bond Polyester Geotextile Fabric,

No. 1115, or approved equivalent. G. Tree Paint: Ortho Pruning Paint, or an approved equivalent. H. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood or treated

softwood, free of knots and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire not lighter than 12 gauge, with zinc-coated turnbuckles. Provide not less than ½” diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size, to protect tree trunks from damage by wires.

I. Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion type, film forming agent designed to permit

transpiration, but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer’s fully-identified containers and mix and use in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

J. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: water-soluble type.

2.03 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Quantity and Size: Plants shall exhibit a habit of growth that is normal for the species and shall be s sound, vigorous, and free from insects, disease, and injury. All plants shall meet or exceed the sizes specified in the Plant List. They shall be measured before pruning, with branches in normal position. Any necessary pruning shall be done at the time of planting, with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provide trees, shrubs and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with

02900 - 6

recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 “American Standard for NurseryStock”.

B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with

branching configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. 2. Container grown deciduous trees per plant list subject to specified

limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock.

C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous shrubs. 2. Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and

burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock.

D. Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or

listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown.

1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. 2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable, subject to specified

limitations for container grown stock. 2.04 GRASS MATERIALS

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. Seed common Bermuda grass at seeding rate of 2 pounds per 1000 s.f.

a) Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier. b) Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 1-step

process. Apply mulch at the minimum rate of 1500 lb per acre (16.5 kg per 100 sq. m) dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. OR

c) Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 2-step process. Apply first slurry application at the minimum rate of 500

02900 - 7

lb per acres (5.5 kg per 100 sq. m) dry weight but not less than the rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch at a rate of 1000 lb per acre (11 kg per 100 sq. m)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION GENERAL

A. Lay out individual trees and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Landscape Architect’s acceptance before start of planting work. Make adjustments as may be required by Architect. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, layout shrub masses on a triangular spacing.

B. Note that some material will be located in field by Architect, and some material

may be shifted in field to respond to changing project conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.

B. Mix specified soil amendments with topsoil at rates specified. Delay mixing if

planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. C. Soil Mix Proportions:

1. Per Cubic Yard of Planting Soil Mix:

1/3 Cubic Yard Topsoil 1/3 Cubic Yard Composted Manure 1/3 Peat Moss 1.1 Pounds of Bactolife 0.2 ounces of ContraSal 0.5 ounces of BioForce EX 2.7 Pounds of Cottonseed Meal 0.5 Pounds of Ironite 0.1 Pounds of Urea (45-0-0)

A. For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on

surface of topsoil and till thoroughly before planting.

02900 - 8

B. Apply Pre-Emergent Herbicide to all areas of new shrub planting where seeding does not occur. Apply at manufacturer’s recommended rate. Verify application areas with Architect before application.

3.03 PROCEDURES FOR PREPARATION AND PRE-PLANTING TREATMENT OF SOIL

A. Perform the operations as per the proportions noted above and according to the ultimate application, either lawn area or planting soil mix, in addition to the other procedures for planting in each area.

3.04 PREPARATION FOR PLANTING LAWNS

A. Moisten prepared lawn areas before hydro-mulching planting if soil is dry, Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create muddy soil condition.

B. Restore lawn areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise disturbed, after

fine grading and prior to planting. 3.05 PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS

A. Planting Beds: Remove any existing soil to subgrade indicated and replace with prepared soil mix as specified. Dispose of any excavated existing soil, do not mix with planting soil mix or use as backfill. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove sticks, stone greater than 1 ½ inches in any dimension, rubbish and other extraneous matter. Place new planting soil mix. Maintain a depth of soil mix of not less than 12 inches.

3.06 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHURBS

A. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. Minimum depths shall be measured from finished grade. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.

B. For balled and burlapped and container material, make excavations according to

the following minimum diameters and depths.

1. SMALL TREES ( 4” caliper or less) Pit Diameter: 2 feet greater than diameter of ball

Pit Depth: 10 inches deeper than depth of ball 2. LARGE SHURBS AND 20 GALLON CONTAINERS

Pit Diameter: 18 inches greater than diameter of ball or container

02900 - 9

Pit Depth: 8 inches than depth of ball or container 3. MEDIUM SHURBS AND 5 GALLONS CONTAINERS Pit Diameter: 15 inches greater than diameter of ball or container

Pit Depth: 8 inches deeper than depth of ball or container

C. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow it to percolate out before planting. Conditions permitting the retention of water in these excavations for more than 24 hours shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. Do not proceed with planting in excavations that retain water longer than 24 hours.

3.07 PLANTING TREES AND SHURBS

A. Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock layer of compacted planting soil mix, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at some elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill.

B. Set container-grown stock as specified for balled burlapped stock, except cut cans

on 2 sides with an approved can cutter and remove can. Reomce sides and bottoms of wooden boxes so as not to damage root balls.

C. Dish top of backfill allow for mulching. D. Mulch pits, trenches, and planted areas. Provide not less than 3 inches of mulch,

and work into to of backfill and finish level with adjacent finish grades. E. Apply anti- desiccant, using power spray, to provide an adequate film over trunks,

branches, stems, twigs, and foliage. F. If deciduous trees or shurbs are moved when in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant

at nursery before moving and spray again 2 weeks after planting. G. Strip trees: When trees are balled and burlapped for installation in the heat of

summer, it may become necessary to remove some of the leaves. Verify with Landscape Architect before removal of leaves from trees.

H. Pruning and Repair: Upon completion of the planting work, all new trees all

shrubs shall be pruned and injuries repaired. The amount of pruning will vary from plant to plant, and shall be limited to the absolute minimum necessary to remove dead or injured twigs or branches, to remove unwanted or unsafe

02900 - 10

branching, or to compensate for loss of root structure as a result of the transplanting operation. All pruning shall be done in a manner so as not to change the overall natural character, shape, or growth habit of the plant. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Do not cut tree leaders and remove only injured or dead branches form flowering trees, if any. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over ¾” in diameter and on bruises and scar on trunks, injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed. Wounds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water. Treated areas shall be coated with an approved tree paint.

I. Wrap tree trunks of 2 inches caliper and larger Start at ground and cover trunk to

height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping.

J. Guy and stake trees immediately after planting, as necessary.

3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. B. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants by watering, pruning, cultivating, and

weeding as required to promote healthy growth. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as necessary. Restore plant watering saucers. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged wrapping. Maintain Palm Trees in a upright and supported position.

C. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants until final acceptance, but in no case, less

than following period: 60 days after final acceptance ( not substantial completion of planting). Maintain lawns for not less than the period stated above, and longer as required to establish an acceptable landscape.

D. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other

operations such as rolling, regarding and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas.

3.09 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations,

operations by other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation

02900 - 11

and maintenance periods, but no less than final inspection. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscapes work as directed

3.10 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Landscape B. Architect will upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. C. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in portions as agreeable to

Landscape Architect, provided each portion of work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance.

D. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace

rejected work and contains specified maintenance until reinspected by Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site.

3.11 EXTENDED MAINTENANCE

A. At Beneficial Occupancy, Landscape Contractor may be required to provide a proposal to provide maintenance for the planting on an annual basis.


03100 - 1

SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK


A. Provide formwork in accordance with provisions of this Section for cast-in-place concrete shown on the Drawings or required by other Sections of these Specifications. 1. All formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained as minimum according to ACI Standards 347 “Guide to Form.”

B. Related work:


2. Section 02200: Earthwork. 3. Section 03200: Concrete reinforcement. 4. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to Proceed, submit manufacturers’ data and installation instructions for proprietary materials including form coatings, ties, and accessories, and manufactured form systems if used.



B. Design of formwork is the Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Standards: In addition to complying with pertinent regulations of governmental

agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent provisions of ACI 347. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Except for metal forms, use new materials. Materials may be re-used during progress of the Work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for

03100 - 2

each use, and capable of producing formwork of the required quality.

B. For footings and foundations, use Southern Yellow Pine (SYP) boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes, substantially constructed to shapes indicated and to support the required loads.

C. For studs, wales, and supports, use Standard grade or better SYP, dimensions as

required to support the loads but not less than 2” x 4”.

D. Wall forms: 1. Exposed concrete surfaces:

a. Use 3/4” minimum thickness plywood, grade B/B, class I or II, exterior, sanded both sides.

b. Seal edges and coat both faces with colorless coating which will not affect application of applied finishes.

E. Column forms, if required: 1. For square or rectangular columns, use 2” thick SYP planks or joists, surfaced

one side and two edges, or use metal forms. 2. For round columns, use metal forms or patented paper tube forms approved by

the Architect. 3. Construct column forms with tight joints and securely clamped together with

steel clamps. 2.2 FORM TIES

A. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together with combination steel ties and spreaders approved by the Architect. 1. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows, each tier plumb from top to bottom

and each row level. 2. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6” below the pour lines.

Tighten after concrete has set and before the next pour is made. 3. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide form ties of removable type with she

bolts equipped with permanent plugs and a system approved by the Architect for fixing the plugs in place.

B. Use only galvanized nails and fasteners for securing formwork in structures exposed

to weather or unconditioned spaces.

2.3 DESIGN OF FORMWORK

A. General: 1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support

vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure.

2. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose.

3. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.

4. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on the formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures,

03100 - 3

stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of the structure during construction.

5. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof.

6. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.

7. Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent objectionable deflection.

8. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities, and within the allowable tolerances.

9. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints, and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and prevent fins.

10. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads.

B. Post Tension Construction:

1. Formwork supporting post-tensioned floor construction, including shores, re-shores and back-shores, shall be designed to support any additional-loads produced by the stressing operation.

2.4 EARTH FORMS

A. Side forms for footings may be omitted, and concrete may be placed directly against excavation, only when requested by the Contractor and approved by the Architect.

B. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional concrete 1” on each side of

the minimum design profiles arid dimensions shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS


3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. General: 1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and

dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure.

2. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features as required.

B. Fabrication:

1. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

2. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.

03100 - 4

3. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.

4. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where so directed by the Architect.

C. Forms for exposed concrete: 1. Drill forms to suit ties being used, and to prevent leakage of cement paste

around tie holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.

2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back the joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections.

D. Corner treatment:

1. Unless shown otherwise, form chamfers with 3/4”x3/4” strips, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edges.

2. Extend terminal edges to required limit, and miter the chamfer strips at changes in direction.

E. Locate control joints as indicated on the Drawings and, where required but not shown

on the Drawings, as approved by the Architect.

F. Provisions for other trades: 1. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. 2. Verify size and location of openings, recesses, and chases with the trade

requiring such items. 3. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into the concrete.

G. Tolerances:

1. All tolerances for concrete formwork shall comform to ACI Standards 117, “Standards Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials”. Before concrete placement the contractor shall check lines and levels of erected formwork and make any corrections and adjustments as required to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. During concrete placement the contractor shall check formwork and supports to ensure that forms have not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances.

3.3 FORM COATINGS

A. Coat form contact surfaces with form coating compound before reinforcement is placed. 1. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to

come in contact with surfaces which will bond to fresh concrete. 2. Apply the form coating material in strict accordance with its manufacturer’s

recommendations.

C. Forwork coatings shall be a commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesions, nor impede curing with water or curing compounds. Provide a product that has a maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compaounds) of 350 mg/1 but not greater than permitted by local government agency having jurisdiction in the area where the project is located.

03100 - 5

3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. General: 1. Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to

permit form removal with complete safety. 2. Do not remove shoring until the member has acquired sufficient strength to

support its own weight, the load upon it, and the added load of construction. 3. Do not strip floor slabs in less than two days. 4. Do not strip vertical concrete in less than seven days.

B. Finished surfaces:

1. Exercise care in removing forms from finished concrete surfaces so that surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that corners are true, sharp, and unbroken.

2. Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull the form ties neatly. 3. Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or other metal to project from, or be

visible on, any concrete surface except where so shown on the Drawings. 4. Solidly pack form tie holes, rod holes, and similar holes in the concrete. For

packing, use the cement grout specified in Section 03300 of these Specifications, flushing the holes with water before packing, screeding off flush, and grinding to match adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

03200 -1

SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT


A. Provide concrete reinforcement where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


2. Section 03100: Concrete formwork. 3. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



the specified requirements; Mill Certificates. 3. Shop Drawings showing details of bars, anchors, and other items, if any,

provided under this Section. And in accordance with Act 315 Standards. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Comply with pertinent provisions of the following, except

as may be modified herein. 1. ACI 318; “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete”. 2. CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice.” 3. Concrete reinforcing steel Institute CRSI “Placing Reinforcing Bars”.



B. Delivery and storage: 1. Use necessary precautions to maintain identification after bundles are broken. 2. Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease, and

other bond-breaking coatings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

03200 -2

2.1 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Bars:

1. Provide deformed billet steel bars complying with ASTM A615, using grades shown on the Drawings.

2. Where grades are not shown on the Drawings, use grade 60.

B. Steel wire:

1. Comply with ASTM A82. 2. For tie wire, comply with Fed Spec QQ-W-461, annealed steel, black, 16 gage

minimum.

C. Welded wire fabric: 1. Provide welded steel, complying with ASTM A185.

D. Welding electrodes:

1. Comply with AWS A5.1, low hydrogen, E70 series.

E. Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place: 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless

otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Do not use wood, brick, or other non-complying material. 3. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where

base material will not support chair legs. 4. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact

with forms, provide supports with either hot-dip galvanized or plastic-protected legs.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions,

with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual. 2. In case of fabricating errors, do not straighten or rebend reinforcement in a

manner that will weaken or injure the material. 3. Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be acceptable.

a. Bar lengths, depths, and/or bends exceeding the specified fabrication tolerances;

b. Bends or kinks not shown on the Drawings; c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.



03200 -3

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with the specified standards for detail and method of placing

reinforcement and supports, except as may be modified herein. 2. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other

materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 3. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,

construction, and concrete placing operations. 4. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers,

and hangers, as required. 5. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverage’s for concrete protection. 6. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with the

specified tie wire. 7. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.

B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable, lapping adjoining pieces at

least one full mesh. C. Provide sufficient numbers of supports, and of strength to carry the reinforcement.

D. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2” beyond last leg of any continuous bar

support.

E. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

F. Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING AND COVERAGE

A. Reinforcing Steel Coverage Reinforcing steel coverage should conform to the requirements specified below. Cover specified shall be considered minimums that may require increasing where reinforcing steel intersects for different member types. Cover in structural members not specified below shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318-89 Section 7.7 unless specified otherwise on the drawings.

Foundation Members Grade Beams - 1 ½ top, 3” bottom, 2” sides Foundation Retaining Walls - 2” both faces Sump Walls, Pit Walls - 2” both faces Drilled Piers - 3” sides Interior Slab on Grade - 1” top cover for one layer of steel

- 1” top cover, 3” bottom cover for two layers of steel

03200 -4

Columns - 1 ½” (including column ties) Walls, Interior Walls - 1 ½” (including ties where used)

Increase cover for members permanently exposed to earth as specified in ACI 318-89 Section 7.7. The reinforcing steel detailer shall adjust reinforcing steel cage sized at intersecting structural members as required to allow clearance for intersecting reinforcing bar layers with minimum specified cover.

3.4 SPLICES

A. Lap splices: 1. Tie securely with the specified wire to prevent displacement of splices during

placement of concrete. B. Splice devices:

1. Obtain the Architect’s approval prior to using splice devices. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Splice in a manner developing at least 125% of the yielding strength of the bar.

C. Welding:

1. Perform in accordance with AWS D1.4-79.

D. Do not splice bars except at locations shown on the Drawings, except as otherwise specifically approved by the Architect.

3.5 TESTING

A. Samples: 1. Samples for physical tests of reinforcement will consist of at least two pieces,

each 18” long, of each size of reinforcement steel, selected by the testing agency from material at the building site or at the fabricator’s or supplier’s yard.

2. Material to be sampled at the building site shall have been delivered thereto at least 72 hours before it is needed.

B. Tests:

1. Where samples are taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, with the bundles identified as to heat number, and provided mill analyses accompany the report, then one tensile test and one bend test will be made from a specimen of each ten tons or fraction thereof of each size of reinforcement steel.

END OF SECTION

Cast-in-place Concrete 03 30 00 Page 1 of 18

SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:

1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs-on-grade. 3. Equipment pads and bases.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for concrete paving and walks. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,

admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Engineer.

C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete

reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), �ACI Detailing manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures.

D. Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished

concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually.

1. Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only. Designing

formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility.

E. Samples of materials as requested by Engineer, including names, sources, and descriptions, as follows:

1. Color finishes. 2. Normal weight aggregates. 3. Reglets. 4. Waterstops. 5. Vapor retarder/barrier.


F. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.

G. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material

certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."

B. Concrete Testing Service: Owner to engage an independent testing laboratoryacceptable to

Engineer to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

D. Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints, form tie

spacing, and proposed surface finish, texture, and color. Maintain sample panel exposed to view for duration of Project, after Architect's acceptance of visual qualities.

1. Demolish mockup and remove from site when directed by Architect.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of

Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" and the following:

1. At least 35 days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct a meeting to review detailed requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory concrete operations. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes. c. Agency responsible for field quality control. d. Ready-mix concrete producer. e. Concrete subcontractor. f. Primary admixture manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.


Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.

1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density

Overlaid Concrete Form," Class I. 2. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood,"

Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed

to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the

concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 40 for No. 3 bars, Grade 60 for No. 4 bars and larger, deformed.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.

D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, ACI approved precast concrete block

supports,spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base

material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms,

provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer of Record.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single

source for exposed concrete.

1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling.


2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce

concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Engineer.

C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.

1. Nominal maximum aggregate size: � inch. D. Water: Potable.

E. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride

ions.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Air-Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co. d. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc. e. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. Sika AER, Sika Corp.

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.



a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp. b. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. f. Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries. g. Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries. h. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.

H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.



a. Super P, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. f. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries. g. PSPL, Prokrete Industries. h. Sikament 300, Sika Corp.

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:


a. Q-Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. b. Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc. f. Accel-Set, Metalcrete Industries.

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.



a. PSI-R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co. d. Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc. e. Protard, Prokrete Industries. f. Plastiment, Sika Corporation.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Reglets: Where sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch-thick (26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick (22 gage)

with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

C. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and

other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints.

D. Rubber Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

a. The Burke Co. b. Progress Unlimited. c. Williams Products, Inc.

E. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following:

a. The Burke Co. b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Progress Unlimited. e. Schlegel Corp.


f. Vinylex Corp.

F. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.

G. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to

ASTM E 154, as follows:

1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 10 mils thick.

H. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the abrasive aggregate for a nonslip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

I. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,

complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

J. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

K. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound

complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.

1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 mg

per liter. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


a. A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan-Cote, The Burke Co. c. Conspec #1, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Day-Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp. f. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co. g. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc. h. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc. j. CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries. l. Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex. m. Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.

L. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.



a. Highseal, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Sealco - VOC, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Safe Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp. d. Aqua-Cure, Euclid Chemical Co. e. Dress & Seal WB, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc.


g. Vocomp-20, W.R. Meadows, Inc. h. Metcure, Metalcrete Industries. i. Stontop CS1, Stonhard, Inc.

M. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab

surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.



a. Aquafilm, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co. c. E-Con, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Confilm, Master Builders, Inc. e. Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries.

N. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.



a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only):

1. Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp. 2. Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co. 3. Weld-Crete, Larsen Products Corp. 4. Everweld, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. Herculox, Metalcrete Industries. 6. Ready Bond, Symons Corp.

b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:

1. Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co. 2. Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. 3. Day-Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp. 4. SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co. 5. Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co. 6. Hornweld, A.C. Horn, Inc. 7. Everbond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 8. Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc. 9. Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc. 10. Acrylpave, Metalcrete Industries. 11. Sonocrete, Sonneborn-Chemrex. 12. Stonlock LB2, Stonhard, Inc. 13. Strong Bond, Symons Corp.

O. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.

Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.



c. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co. d. Spec-Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.


e. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior. f. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co. g. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc. h. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc. j. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Metco Hi-Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries. l. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp. m. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc. n. R-600 Series, Symons Corp.

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.

2. Use of fly ash or calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless noted otherwise.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Engineer.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on

drawings and schedules:

1. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.58 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.46 maximum (air-entrained). For slabs on grade, grade beam, loading docks & ramps.

2. 2500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.67 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.54 maximum (air-entrained). For miscellaneous sidewalks and curbs not otherwise called out to have a higher strength.

D. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement

(W/C) ratios as follows:

1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.

E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:

1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 5 inches. 3. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than

8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete. 4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.

F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when

characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.


B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C).

C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50.

D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with

manufacturer's directions. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Job-Site Mixing: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of 1 cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd.

1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce

mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:

1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,

location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.


C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is

inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer

strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.

Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape.

3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.

1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and

concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support

reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Engineer.

D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full

mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS


A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between

walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.

C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.

D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.

E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form

continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

F. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact

between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1.n Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

G. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to

form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into

fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.

2. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.

3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays).

4. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall

flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions.

C. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings.

D. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve

required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating


compound before placing reinforcement.

B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with

in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions.

1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork

is not acceptable. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete," and as specified.

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24

inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by

hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.

E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within

limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.

2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or


chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.

3. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to

below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

4. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

5. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.

6. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 3/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to

view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have

received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form removal.

1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have

received smooth-formed finish treatment.

1. Combine one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.

2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.

E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES


A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated.

1. After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L) 13 (floor

levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other

finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.

1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready

for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces

to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar,

apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom.

E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and

ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

F. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms,

ramps, sloped walks, and where indicated.

1. After completing float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lb of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as specified.

2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip aggregate.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,


unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green

and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as

shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and

finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.

D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with

water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

E. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest

practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as

follows:

1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete.

G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,

supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.


H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.

1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover,

unless otherwise directed. 3.13 REMOVING FORMS

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural

elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.

C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical

supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

3.14 REUSING FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove

fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.

B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing

a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.

1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 3/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

2.n For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects

cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture


irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the

concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness

and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.

1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability.

Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure, using

specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.

G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Engineer. 3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as directed by Engineer.

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

o. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type

of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. p. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight

concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

q. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40


deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

r. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

s. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

f. For drilled piers, u.n.o., there shall be (1) set of compressive strength test for each 10 cu. Yds.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Engineer may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and

Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00

03345 - 1

SECTION 03345 CONCRETE FINISHING


A. Provide finishes on cast-in-place concrete as called for on the Drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper installation. Note: Flatwork will contain solid stain coloring admixtures as directed by architect and per plans. Provide samples for approval.

B. Related work:


2. Section 03300: Cast-in-place concrete. 1.2 SUBMITTALS







B. Except as may be modified herein or otherwise directed by the Architect, comply with

ACI 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and these Specifications, and determine the

03345 - 2

location, extent, and type of required concrete finishes. 2. As required for the Work, provide the following materials, or equals approved

in advance by the Architect.

B. Concrete materials: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 03300, except as may be modified herein.

C. Liquid bonding agent: “Weld-Crete,” manufactured by the Larsen Products

Corporation.

D. Curing and protection paper: 1. Approved products:

a. “Sisalkraft, Orange Label”; b. Equal products complying with ASTM C171.

2. Where concrete will be exposed and will be subjected to abrasion, such as floor slabs, use non-staining paper such as “Sisalkraft, Seekure 896,” or equal paper faced with polyethylene film.

E. Liquid curing agents:

1. Where application of specified finish materials will be inhibited by use of curing agents, cure the surface by water only; do not use chemical cure.

2. For curing other areas, use “Hunt TLF” manufactured by Hunt Process Company, Inc.

F. Floor sealer: Acceptable products:

1. “Superkote Special Clear Sealer” manufactured by Chem Company, Inc. 2. “Supershield” manufactured by James Darcey Company, Inc.

G. Slip-resistant abrasive aggregate:

1. Provide aluminum oxide, 14/36 grading. 2. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Carborundum Company; b. Norton Company; c. L. M. Scofield Company.

2.2 OTHER MATERIALS


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS


3.2 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES

A. General:

03345 - 3

1. After removal of forms, give the concrete surfaces one or more of the finishes specified below where so indicated on the Drawings.

2. Revise the finishes as needed to secure the approval of the Architect.

B. As -cast finish: 1. Rough form finish:

a. Leave surfaces with the texture imparted by forms, except patch tie holes and defects. b. Remove fins exceeding 1/4” in height. C. Rubbed finishes:

1. Provide these finishes only where specifically called for, and then only on a “smooth form finish” base as described above.

2. Smooth rubbed finish: a. Produce on newly hardened concrete no later than the day following form

removal. b. Wet the surfaces, and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until

uniform color and texture are produced. c. Do not use a cement grout other than the cement paste drawn from the

concrete itself by the rubbing process. 3. Grout cleaned finish:

a. Do not start cleaning operations until all contigucus surfaces to be cleaned are completed and accessible.

b. Do not permit cleaning as the work progresses. c. Mix one part portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient

water to produce a grout having the consistency of thick paint. d. Substitute white portland cement for part of the gray portland cement as

required to produce a color matching the color of surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch.

e. Wet the surface of the concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from the grout, and apply the grout uniformly with brushes or spray gun.

f. Immediately after applying the grout, scrub the surface vigorously with a cork float or stone to coat the surface and fill all air bubbles and holes.

g. While the grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working the surface with a rubber float, sack, or other means.

h. After the surface whites from drying (about 30 minutes at normal temperatures), rub vigorously with clean burlap.

i. Keep the surface damp for at least 36 hours after final rubbing.

D. Unspecified finish: If the finish of formed surfaces is not specifically called out elsewhere in the Contract Documents, provide the following finishes as applicable. 1. Rough form finish:

a. For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 2. Smooth form finish:

a. For all concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 3.3 FINISHING SLABS

A. Definition of finishing tolerances: 1. “Class A”: True plane within 1/8” in ten feet as determined by a ten foot

straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 2. “Class B”: True plane within 1/4” in ten feet as determined by a ten foot

03345 - 4

straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 3. “Class C”: True plane within 1/4” in two feet as determined by a two foot

straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction.

B. Scratched finish: After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class C tolerance, roughen the surface with stiff brushes or rakes before the final set.

C. Floated finish:

1. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do not work the concrete further until ready for floating.

2. Begin floating when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation.

3. During or after the first floating, check the planeness of the surface with a ten foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.

4. Cut down high spots and fill low spots, and produce a surface with a Class B tolerance throughout.

5. Refloat the slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture.

D. Troweled finish: 1. Provide a floated finish as described above, followed by a power troweling and

then a hand troweling. a. Produce initial surface relatively free from defects, but which still may

show some trowel marks. b. Provide hand troweling when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is

moved over the surface. c. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling.

2. Provide a finished surface essentially free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and in a plane of Class A tolerance. a. For concrete on metal deck, Class B plane tolerance is acceptable. b. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, use grinding or other

means as necessary and remove all defects of such magnitude as would show through the floor covering.

E. Broom finish:

1. Provide a floated finish as described above. 2. While the surface is still plastic, provide a textured finish by drawing a fiber

bristle broom uniformly over the surface. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide the texturing in one

direction only. 4. Provide “light,” “medium,” or “coarse” texturing as directed by the Architect or

otherwise called for on the Drawings.

. Exposed aggregate finish: 1. Provide a floated finish as described above. 2. While the surface is still plastic, embed an approved aggregate uniformly into

the surface by light tamping. 3. Provide complete coverage to the depth of a single stone. 4. Float the surface until the embedded stone is fully coated with mortar and the

surface has been brought to a true plane with Class B tolerance. 5. After the matrix has hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodgement of aggregate,

begin exposure. a. Allow copious quantities of water, without force, to flow over the surface

03345 - 5

of the concrete while the matrix encasing the aggregate is removed by brushing with a fine bristle brush.

b. Continue this operation until the aggregate is uniformly exposed but not dislodged.

6. An approved chemical retarder sprayed onto the freshly floated surface may be used to extend the working time for exposure of aggregate.

G. Unspecified finish: If the finish of slab surfaces is not specifically called for elsewhere

in the Contract Documents, provide the following finishes as applicable: 1. Scratched finish:

a. For surfaces scheduled to receive bond-applied cementitious applications. 2. Floated finish:

a. For surfaces intended to receive roofing. 3. Troweled finish:

a. For floors intended as walking surfaces; b. Floors scheduled to receive floor coverings or waterproof membrane; c. Parking areas.

4. Broom finish: a. Garage ramps.

5. Non-slip finish: a. Exterior platforms, steps, and landings; b. Interior and exterior pedestrian ramps.

3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot and cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Preservation of moisture:

1. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, apply one of the following procedures to concrete not in contact with forms, immediately after completion of placement and finishing: a. Ponding or continuous sprinkling; b. Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet; c. Application of sand kept continuously wet; d. Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150 degrees F) or mist

spray; e. Application of other moisture-retaining covering as approved by the

Architect; f. Application of the curing agent specified in Part 2 of this Section or

elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Where forms are exposed to the sun, minimize moisture loss by keeping the

forms wet until they can be removed safely. 3. Cure concrete by preserving moisture as specified above for at least seven days.

C. Temperature, wind, and humidity:

1. Cold weather: a. When the mean daily temperature outdoors is less than 40 degrees F,

maintain the temperature of the concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for the required curing period.

b. When necessary, provide proper and adequate heating system capable of maintaining the required heat without injury due to concentration of heat.

c. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours unless precautions

03345 - 6

are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide.

2. Hot weather: When necessary, provide wind breaks, fog spraying, shading, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material, applying as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations are completed for that Section of work.

3. Rate of temperature change: Keep the temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period as uniform as possible and not exceeding a change of 5 degrees F in any one hour period, or 50 degrees F in any 24 hour period.

D. Protection from mechanical injury:

1. During the curing period, protect the concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances such as heavy shock, load stresses, and excessive vibration.

2. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage from construction equipment, materials, and methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain and running water.

3. Do not load self-supporting structures in such a way as to overstress the concrete.

END OF SECTION

04220 - 1

SECTION 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT


A. Provide concrete unit masonry and water repellent coating where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Mock-ups:

1. At an area on the site where approved by the Architect, provide mock-up concrete unit masonry panels. a. Make each mock-up panel approximately 4’-0” high and 6’-0” long. b. Provide one mock-up panel for each combination of concrete masonry

unit, bond pattern, mortar color, and joint type used in the Work. c. The mock-up panels may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated

into the finished Work, when so approved in advance by the Architect. d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect’s approval.

2. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of other work of this Section.



B. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under the stacked units.

04220 - 2

C. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use. 1.5 WARRANTY

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect two copies of a written warranty signed by the Contractor, the water repellent coating application subcontractor, and the water repellent manufacturer, under which: 1. The three parties mutually agree to maintain the water repellent coated surface

free from the penetration of water for a. period of two years following Date of Substantial Completion; and

2. The water repellent coating manufacturer agrees to provide water repellent coating materials as required for that purpose for a period of five years following Date of Substantial Completion; and

3. These warranty services will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Provide lightweight hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units complying with ASTM C90, grade N, type I, in color “natural gray.”

B. Dimensions:

1. Provide units of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. 2. Where dimensions are not shown on the Drawings, provide units having

nominal face dimensions of 16” long by 8” high by the depth shown or otherwise required. Refer to drawings for cmu scored types and locations.

3. Normal weight, not exceed 40 lbs per 8x8x16 cmu. 4. Provide smooth gray and colored cmu of thickness as per drawings. Refer to

interior elevations for actual layouts. Scored wainscot, horizontal banding and graphics should be provided from manufacturer’s standard colors. Coordinate all layouts with architect at site.

D. Provide accessory shapes (bullnoses at all exposed edges and exterior corners) as

indicated or otherwise required. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Comply with the following as minimums. 1. Bars: ASTM A615, grade 40, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using

deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Bending: ACT 318. 3. Wire reinforcement: ASTM A82.

B. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with recommendations contained in CRSI

“Manual of Standard Practices.” 2.3 MORTAR

04220 - 3

A. Ingredients: 1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I. 2. Lime:

a. Provide hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, or quicklime complying with ASTM CS.

h. When quicklime is used, slake and then screen through a 16 mesh sieve. After slaking and screening, but before using, store and protect for not less than ten days.

3. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and complying with ASTM C144.

4. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect.

5. Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.

B. Mixing:

1. Provide mortar type as designated on the Drawings or otherwise directed by the Architect, and Engineer’s General Notes in accordance with ASTM C270.

2. Proportions: a. For type “M” mortar, provide one part portland cement to 1/4 part

hydrated lime and 3-3/4 parts sand by volume. b. For type “S” mortar, provide one part portland cement to 1/2 part hydrated

lime and 4-1/2 parts sand by volume. 3. Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less than three minutes, using only

sufficient water to produce a mortar which is spreadable and of a workable consistency.

4. Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity. a. On mortar boards, retemper only by adding water within a basin formed

with mortar, and by working the mortar into the water. b. Discard and do not use mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours following

initial mixing. 2.4 GROUT

A. Ingredients: 1 Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I.

2. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter.

3. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect.

4. Water: Provide water free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.

B. Mixing: 1. Provide “fine grout” or “coarse grout” as designated on the Drawings or

otherwise directed by the Architect, and in accordance with ASTM C476. 2. When the minimum grout compressive strength is required to be more than 2000

psi, provide laboratory design mix prepared as required for design mixes of concrete under Section 03300 of these Specifications.

3. Proportions: a. For “fine grout,” provide one part portland cement to 2-1/4 parts

minimum to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand, with sufficient water

04220 - 4

to achieve fluid consistency. b. For “coarse grout,” provide one part portland cement to 3 parts maximum

of damp loose sand to two parts coarse aggregate, with sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency.

4. “Fluid consistency” is interpreted as meaning as fluid as possible for pouring intimately in place without segregation.

C. Use “fine grout” where called for on the Drawings, where the grout space is less than

3” in its least dimension, and where otherwise directed by the Architect or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2.5 WATER REPELLENT COATING

A. At all exterior wall surfaces, provide “Rainguard HD” water repellent coating manufactured by Rainguard Products Company or equal clear water repellent coating approved in advance by the Architect.

PAPT 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS


3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.

B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in

ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F in the shade, with relative humidity less than 50%.

3. 3 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Do not commence installation of the work of this Section until horizontal and

vertical alignment of foundation is within 1” of plumb and the lines shown on. the Drawings.

2. Lay only dry masonry units. 3. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units. 4. Set units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced. 5. Clean the top surface of foundation free from dirt, debris, and laitance, and

expose the aggregate prior to start of installing first course. 6. Accurately fit the units to plumbing, ducts, openings, and other interfaces, neatly

patching all holes. 7. Keep the walls continually clean, preventing grout and mortar stains. If grout

does run over, clean immediately.

B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide running bond with vertical joints located at center of masonry units in the alternate course below.

04220 - 5

C. Do not use chipped or broken units. If such units are discovered in the finished wall, the Architect may require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Laying up:

1. Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints. 2. Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain a clear and unobstructed system

of flues. 3. Hold racking to an absolute minimum. 4. Provide cleanouts at the bottom of each cell of hollow units for removing mortar

droppings. Do not close the cleanouts until they have been inspected and approved by the Architect.

E. Reinforcement:

1. Provide reinforcement as shown on the Drawings, fully embedded in grout and not in mortar or mortar joints.

2. Provide required metal accessories to ensure adequate alignment of steel during grout filling operations.

F. Tooling:

1. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide joints of “concave” pattern

throughout. 3.4 GROUTING

A. Perform grouting in strict accordance with the provisions of the governing building code. 1. Solidly fill vertical cells containing reinforcement. 2. Consolidate grout at time of pour by puddling with a mechanical vibrator, filling

all cells of the masonry, and then reconsolidating later by puddling before the plasticity is lost.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Inspection and adjustment: 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, make a thorough inspection of

installed masonry and verify that units have been installed in accordance with the provisions of this Section.

2. Make necessary adjustments.

B. Clean surfaces of masonry as required for proper application of the specified finishes. 3.6 WATER REPELLENT COATING

A. Apply sufficient coats of the approved material to achieve a consistent. and uniform appearance, free from runs and sags, and with a uniformly resistive surface which will prevent penetration of water through the walls for the reguired period of warranty.

B. Twenty days after completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its

acceptance, demonstrate by running water test that the work of this Section will successfully repel water. 1. Notify the Architect at least 72 hours in advance, and conduct the test in the

Architect’s presence.

04220 - 6

2. By means of an outrigger or similar acceptable equipment, place the nozzle of a 3/4” garden hose at a point approximately l0’-0” away from the wall where approved by the Architect, aiming the nozzle so that water will strike the wall at a downward angle.

3. Run the water onto the wall at full available force for not less than two hours. 4. Upon completion of the test period, inspect the interior surfaces of the wall for

evidence of moisture penetration.

C. If evidence of moisture penetration is discovered, apply an additional coat of the approved water repellent to the exterior surface in areas directed by the Architect, repeating the application and testing at no additional cost to the Owner until no evidence of moisture penetration is found.

END OF SECTION

Reinforced Unit Masonry 04 23 00 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 04 23 00 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Requirements of Section "Unit Masonry" apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedules.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.


A. General: Refer to Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section.

B. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615,

except as otherwise indicated.

1. Provide Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Shop-fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated.

1. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1", whichever is greater.

2. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as

indicated, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as indicated.


3. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable

to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.

4. Provide not less than minimum lap indicated, or if not indicated, as required by governing

code.

5. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations.

6. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a

minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fire-proofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.

C. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated.

1. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non-reinforced masonry where they intersect.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Section "Unit Masonry" for general installation requirements of unit masonry.

B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements.

C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

E. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of members before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period:

1. 10 days for girders and beams. 2. 7 days for slabs. 3. 7 days for reinforced masonry soffits.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

A. GENERAL

1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).

2. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints.

B. WALLS

1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2-running bond with vertical joints in each

course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special-shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels,


bond beams and other special conditions.

2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and

grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells.

3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or

modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms.

3. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting

techniques subject to requirements which follow. C. LOW-LIFT GROUTING

1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of

maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 ft.

3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 4' height, or if bond beam occurs below 4' height stop pour at course below bond beam.

4. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour.

5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam.

D. HIGH-LIFT GROUTING

1. Do not use high-lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity dimension and area is 3" and 10 sq. in., respectively.

2. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be filled with

grout.

3. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell.

4. Construct masonry to full height of maximum height grout pour specified, prior to

placing grout.

5. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 4' and grout pour to a full height of wall, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Place before or after laying masonry

units, as required by job conditions. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry where shown and thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10'.

7. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending

into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of reinforcement bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends.


8. Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units are laid.

E. PREPARATION OF GROUT SPACES 1. Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar

droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures to resist grout pressures.

2. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.

3. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect.

4. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 4ft. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.

5. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. 6. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam

course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry.

7. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1-1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required.


04430-1

SECTION 04430 NATURAL STONE VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies requirements for construction of natural stone veneer.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Mortars and grouts:

Section MASONRY MORTARING,

Section MASONRY GROUTING.

B. Steel lintels and shelf angles: Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.

C. Cavity insulation: Section 07220, THERMAL INSULATION.

D. Flashing: Section 07600, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.

E. Sealants and sealant installation: Section 07900, JOINT SEALANTS.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND

SAMPLES.

B. Samples:

1. Stone Veneer, sample, Linestone White RL – split face random sizes (4”. 6” 8” by 8”,

12”, 16 inches,) showing full color range and texture of stone, bond, and proposed

mortar joints.

2. Anchors, and ties, one each and joint reinforcing 1200 mm (48 inches) long.

C. Certificates signed by stone source, including name and address of contractor, project

location, and the quantity, and date or dates of shipment of delivery to which certificate

applies; indicate that the stone veneer meets specification requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Anchors, ties, and reinforcement.

2. Reinforcing bars.

1.4 SAMPLE PANEL

A. Before starting masonry, lay up a sample panel as specified:

1. Use stone units from random pallets of units delivered on site.

2. Include reinforcing, ties, and anchors.

3. Provide a 1.2m x 1.8m (4 feet x 5 feet) panel.

04430-2

B. Use sample panels approved by Architect for standard of workmanship of new masonry

work.

C. Use sample panel to test cleaning methods.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant exterior masonry walls against moisture leaks and subject to terms of "Warranty

of Construction", FAR clause 52.246-21, except that warranty period to be five years.

1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to extent referenced.

Publications are referenced in text by the basic designation only. Comply with applicable

provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or

specified.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A82/A82M-07 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

A153/A153M-09 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

A951/A951M-11 Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement

C97/C97M-09 Absorption and Bulk Gravity of Dimension Stone

C99/C99M-09 Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone

C119-11 Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone

C170/C170M-09 Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone

C568/C568M-10 Limestone Dimension Stone

C615/C615M-11 Granite Dimension Stone

C616/C616M-10 Quartz-Based Dimension Stone

C880/C880M-09 Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone

C1242-12ae1 Selection, Design, and Installation of Dimension Stone

Attachment Systems

C1353-09 Abrasion Resistance of Dimension Stone Subjected to Foot

Traffic Using a Rotary Platform, Double-Head Abraser

C1515-11 Cleaning of Exterior Dimension Stone, Vertical and

Horizontal Surfaces, New or Existing

C1528-12b Selection of Dimension Stone

D1056-07 Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge Expanded Rubber

04430-3

D7089-06 Determination of the Effectiveness of Anti-Graffiti Coating

for Use on Concrete, Masonry, and Natural Stone Surfaces

by Pressure Washing

C. Masonry Industry Council:

All Weather Masonry Construction Manual, 2000

D. International Masonry Industry All Weather Council (IMIAC):

Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry

Construction

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a meeting on site, after submittals are received and approved but before any

work, to review drawings and specifications, submittals, schedule, manufacturer

instructions, site logistics and pertinent matters of coordination, temporary protection,

governing regulations, tests and inspections; participants to include Architect and all

parties whose work is effected or related to the work of this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE STONE PRODUCTS

A. Limestone Veneer: Meet ASTM C568, Classification: III High-Density.

1. Face Size: As indicated. Stone Veneer, Linestone White RL – split face random sizes

(4”. 6” 8” by 8”, 12”, 16 inches,) showing full color range and texture of stone, bond,

and proposed mortar joints, unit widths approx. 3.5”.

2. Color Range: finish, manufacturer/producer per preselected sample approved by the

Project Architect.

3. Source: Bricks and Tile International, 6423 McPherson Road, Laredo Texas 78041 –

Ricardo Garza, 956-722-5038.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made

from materials that comply paragraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82; with ASTM A153/153M,

Class B-2 coating.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway

through veneer but at least 16mm (5/8 inch) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires

are bent 90 degrees and extend 50 mm (2 inches) parallel to face of veneer.

04430-4

C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and

compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to

wood or metal studs, and as follows:

a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 445 N (100

lbf) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play

in excess of 1.3 mm (0.05 inch).

2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a

metal anchor section.

a. Anchor Section: Zinc-allow barrel section with flanged head with eye and

corrosion–resistant, self-drilling screw. Eye designed to receive wire tie and to

serve as head for drilling fastener into framing. Barrel length to suit sheathing

thickness, allowing screw to seat directly against framing with flanged head

covering hole in sheathing.

b. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 4.8

mm (0.188 inch) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

c. Acceptable Product: Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; No. 75 Pos-I-Tie.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07900.

B. Nailing Strips: Western softwood, preservative treated, sized to masonry joints.

C. Weep Holes: Leave-out of full head mortar joints.

D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not

degrade within the wall cavity.

1. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 250 mm (10 inches) wide, with dovetail shaped

notches 175 mm (7 inches) deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar

droppings.

E. Mortar: Refer to Section 04 05 13.

F. Expansion Joint Fillers: ASTM D1056 Class RE-11.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

04430-5

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry

work.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing; protect from disturbance.

C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until

building structure provides permanent bracing.

D. Scaffolding: Provide, erect, maintain, move, and finally remove scaffolding and staging

required for masonry installation. Construct and maintain scaffolding in compliance with

applicable ordinances, laws, rules and regulations. Scaffolding must be sufficiently

substantial to support workmen, and necessary materials and equipment. Provide

adequate guard rails for protection of property, workmen, and passerby.

E. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials

before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then

drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or

harsh materials or abrasives.

F. Coat stone with dampproofing to extent indicated below:

1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-

grade elevations.

2. Stone Extending Below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below

grade.

3. Allow dampproofing to cure before setting dampproofed stone. Do not damage or

remove dampproofing while handling and setting stone.

3.3 COURSING

A. Place masonry to lines and level indicated.

B. Arrange and trim stones for adequate fit in a random range pattern with course heights as

indicated, random lengths, uniform joint widths with offset between vertical joints as

indicated.

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar horizontal, vertical, and collar joints, properly jointed

with other work. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar

joints is not permitted.

04430-6

B. Fully bond intersections, and external and internal corners.

C. Do not shift, or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment

must be made, remove mortar and replace.

D. Remove excess mortar on surface and in cavities.

E. Perform job site saw cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take

care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Alignment of Columns: Maximum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) from true line.

B. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 0.8 mm (1/32 inch) maximum.

C. Variation from Plane of Wall: 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 3 m (10 feet) and 12 mm (1/2 inch) in 6

m (20 feet) or more.

D. Variation from Plumb: 6 mm (1/4 inch) per story non-cumulative, 12 mm (1/2 inch) in

two stories or more.

E. Variation from Level Coursing: 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 1 m (3 feet); 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 3 m

(10 feet); 6 mm (1/4 inch) maximum.

F. Variation of Joint Thickness: 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 1 m (3 feet).

G. Maximum variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: Plus or minus 6 mm (1/4

inch).

3.6 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES

A. Attach wall ties to wall studs (or other solid and secure framing members) for veneer

construction at maximum 400 mm (16 inches) oc vertically and 400 mm (16 inches) oc

horizontally. Place at maximum 200 mm (8 inches) oc (or every third course) each way

around perimeter of openings, within 300 mm (12 inches) of openings.

B. Anchor stone veneer to unit masonry with metal veneer anchors as follows:

1. Secure wire anchors by inserting pintles into eyes of masonry wall reinforcement

projecting from horizontal mortar joints.

2. Embed anchors in veneer mortar joints to within 25 mm (1 inch) of face.

3.7 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Extend flashings to exterior face of veneer, turn up a minimum of 200 mm (8 inches) and

seal onto face of sheathing over stud framed back-up.

B. Lap end joints minimum 150 mm (6 inches) and seal watertight per manufacturer’s

recommendation.

C. Use flashing manufacturer’s recommended adhesive and termination sealant.

04430-7

D. Create end dams at end of window heads, and other vertical elements to channel water to

nearest weep hole away from windows and other items which might allow water to travel

vertically.

3.8 LINTELS (AS MAY BE REQUIRED)

A. Install loose steel lintels as scheduled or shown. Leave space at end of lintels to expand.

3.9 WEEPS AND VENTS

A. Install weep holes in veneer at 600 mm (24 inches) on center horizontally above through-

wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls.

3.10 CONTROL/EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Size control joints in accordance with Section 07920 for sealant performance, but in no

case larger than adjacent mortar joints.

B. Provide expansion joints as indicated.

3.11 BUILT-IN WORK

A. As work progresses, build-in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames,

wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built in the work supplied

by other Sections.

B. Build-in items plumb and level.

C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with

mortar.

D. Do not build-in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Cooperate with other

Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or

strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.13 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and smears.

B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

C. Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent

materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Leave surfaces

thoroughly clean and free of all mortar and other soiling.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

E. Comply with ASTM C1515// and D7089.

04430-8

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by

construction activities.

B. Provide protection without damaging completed work.

C. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar.

END

Structural Steel 05 12 00 Page 1 of 8

SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required.

1. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

"Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. 2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. 3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor bolt

installation in masonry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products.

Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards).

1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and

physical properties. 2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.

a. Include Direct Tension Indicators if used.

3. Structural steel primer paint. 4. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

C. Shop drawings prepared under supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, including complete

details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate

welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other

anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.

D. Test reports conducted on shop- and field-bolted and welded connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.

E. Certified copies of each survey conducted by a licensed Land Surveyor, showing elevations and


locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive structural steel and final elevations and locations for major members. Indicate discrepancies between actual installation and contract documents.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following

sentence:

1) "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."

2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary." 3. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the

Research Council on Structural Connections. 4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling

and Bars for Structural Use."

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements.

1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS

qualification tests. 2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility.


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to

members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.


A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes.


B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

D. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501.

1. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium-strength carbon steel.

G. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold-finished carbon

steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications.

H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.

I. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts.

1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. 2. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for

exposed connections.

J. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows:

1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with

ASTM A 325.

a. Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either mechanically deposited complying with ASTM B 695, Class 50, or hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 153.

2. Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A 490.

K. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, type as required.

1. Use at Contractor's option.

L. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code.

M. Structural Steel Primer Paint: GPA-313

N. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded,

natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

O. Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed factory-packaged ferrous aggregate grouting

compound.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. 100 Non-Shrink Grout (Metallic); Conspec, Inc. b. Firmix; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Vibra-Foil; W. R. Grace.


d. Ferrogrout; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Embeco 885; Master Builders. f. Protalico; Protex Industries, Inc. g. Kemox G; Sika Corporation. h. Ferrolith G; Sonneborn/Rexnord.

P. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining product

containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621.


incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. 100 Non-Shrink Grout (Non-Metallic); Conspec, Inc. b. Supreme Grout; Cormix, Inc. c. Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior. d. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. g. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows. h. Propak; Protex Industries, Inc. i. Set Non-Shrink; Set Products, Inc. j. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery

sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of

finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.

C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.

1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except where

unfinished bolts are indicated. 2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary framing

members to primary members (including purlins, girts, and other framing members taking only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection.

D. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with

AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

F. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of axes without

warp.

G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear


connectors. Weld shear connectors in field, spaced as shown, to beams and girders in composite construction. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

H. Steel Wall Framing: Select members that are true and straight for fabrication of steel wall framing.

Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing.

I. Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld steel bar stops to frames, except where shown removable. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

J. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing

and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings.

K. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

L. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or enlarge holes

by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

M. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf angles when part of structural steel frame; locate at vertical brick expansion joints as indicated on drawings.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.

1. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. 2. Do not paint surfaces scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 3. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change

color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:

1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning."

C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

D. Painting: Provide a one-coat, shop-applied paint system complying with Steel Structures Painting

Council (SSPC) Paint System Guide No. 7.00. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.

1. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.


B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar

conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work.

1. Promptly notify Engineer whenever design of members and connections for any portion of

structure are not clearly indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION

A. Surveys: Employ a licensed land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Engineer.

B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.

C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to

effectively complete work.

D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges

or other adjusting devices. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.

4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

F. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.

G. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of

structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

H. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.

I. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds,

and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.


J. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

K. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.

L. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel is included in Division 9 under painting work.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.

B. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted

connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.

C. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests, state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.

D. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or

produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.

E. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment.

F. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work.

G. Shop-Bolted Connections: Inspect or test in accordance with AISC specifications.

1. Verify that gaps of installed Direct Tension Indicators are less than gaps specified in ASTM

F 959, Table 2.

H. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows:

1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Perform tests of welds as follows. Inspection procedures listed are to be used at

Contractor's option.

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level

"2-2T." d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

I. Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications.

1 For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F 959. Verify that gaps


are less than gaps specified in Table 2.

J. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows:

2 Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.

3 Perform visual inspection of all welds. 4 Perform tests of welds as follows:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not acceptable. c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level

"2-2T." d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.


Steel Deck 05 31 00 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes steel deck units for floor and roof applications.

B. Header Duct used in conjunction with cellular metal floor deck is specified in Division 16; it is not work of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each

type of decking and accessories.

a. Provide test data for mechanical fasteners used in lieu of welding for fastening deck to supporting structures.

2. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions

requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel

Structural Members." 2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof

Decks."

B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS.

1. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Owner will bear expense of

removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work.

C. Underwriters' Label: Provide metal floor deck units listed in Underwriters' Laboratories "Fire

Resistance Directory", with each deck unit bearing the UL label and marking for specific system detailed.


1. Provide cellular floor deck units listed in UL "Electrical Construction Materials Directory" with each cellular metal floor deck unit bearing UL labels and marking. Provide units that will permit use of standard header ducts and outlets for electrical distribution systems.

D. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck units that have been evaluated by Factory Mutual System and

are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for "Class I" fire-rated construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Bowman Metal Deck Div., Cyclops Corp. 2. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 3. Epic Metals Corp. 4. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc. 5. H. H. Robertson Co. 6. Roll Form Products, Inc. 7. Roof Deck, Inc. 8. United Steel Deck, Inc. 9. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp. 10. Wheeling Corrugating Co.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 611, grade as required to comply with SDI specifications.

B. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, grade as required to comply with SDI

specifications.

C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.

D. Shear Connectors: Headed stud type, ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold-finished carbon steel, with dimensions complying with AISC specifications.

E. Shear Connectors: Strap type, ASTM A 570, Grade D, hot-rolled carbon steel.

F. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized.

G. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60.

H. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in

accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.

I. Paint: Manufacturer's baked-on, rust-inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces that have been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated.

J. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

K. Acoustic Sound Barrier Closures: Manufacturer's standard mineral fiber closures.


2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped, or nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated.

B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specifications and

Commentary for Steel Roof Deck."

C. Acoustical Roof Deck Units:

1. Single-pan units: Single-pan fluted units with vertical webs perforated with approximate 5/32-inch-diameter holes staggered 3/8-inch o.c. Provide mineral fiber acoustical insulation strips of profile to fit void space between vertical ribs.

2. Multiple-pan cellular units: Composite units consisting of upper fluted section combined with lower flat plate section having interlocking side laps and approximate 5/32-inch perforations staggered on 3/8-inch centers under cells formed by upper unit. Provide mineral fiber acoustical insulation strips of profile to fit void space of each cell.

D. Non-Composite Steel Form Deck: Provide fluted sections of metal deck as permanent forms for

reinforced concrete slabs.

E. Cellular Metal Floor Deck Units:

1. Fabricate flat-bottom units with top fluted section cells combined on a lower flat plate, of metal thickness, depth, and width of unit, number of cells per unit, and width of cells as indicated.

2. Fabricate double-cell units with top fluted section cells combined with matching fluted bottom section, of metal thickness, depth, and width of units, number of cells per unit, and width of cells as indicated.

3. Provide sufficient welds, forming sheets into cellular floor deck units to develop full horizontal shear strength at plane where steel sheets are joined.

F. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate deck units with integral embossing or raised pattern to

furnish mechanical bond with concrete slabs. Fabricate open-beam deck units with fluted section having interlocking side laps.

G. Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting floor deck units of not less than

same thickness as decking. Form to match contour of deck units and approximately 6 inches wide.

H. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for cell raceways and openings between

decking and other construction, of not less than 0.045-inch min. (18 gage) sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking.

I. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071-inch min. (14 gage) galvanized sheet steel

with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field by others.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,

shop drawings, and as specified herein.

B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.

C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of

abutting units.

D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection.

E. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry.

F. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members.

G. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured.

H. Fastening Deck Units (U.N.O. on plans):

1. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by nominal 5/8- inch puddle welds or

elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12 inches o.c. with a minimum of two welds per unit at each support.

2. Tack weld or use self-tapping No. 8 or larger machine screws at 4 feet o.c. for fastening end closures.

3. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 1/2-inch-diameter puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12 inches at every support, and at closer spacing where indicated. In addition, secure deck to each supporting member in ribs where side laps occur.

4. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

a. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer.

5. Mechanical fasteners, either powder-actuated or pneumatically driven, may be used in lieu

of welding. Locate mechanical fasteners and install in accordance with deck manufacturer's instructions.

6. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports, at intervals not exceeding 36 inches o.c., using self-tapping No. 8 or larger machine screws.

7. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. psf at eave overhang and 30 lbs. psf for other roof areas U.N.O. on plans.

a. Keep the interiors of cells that will be used as raceways free of welds having sharp

points or edges.

I. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.

J. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as

required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown.

K. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL-approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes of lower element where floor deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting fixtures.

1. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units may be used

instead of hanger slots. 2. Locate slots or clips at not more than 14 inches o.c. in both directions, not over 9 inches


from walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices.

L. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units, except where taped joints are required.

M. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface.

Space welds not more than 12 inches o.c. with at least one weld at each corner.

N. Shear Connectors: Weld shear connectors to supports through decking units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not weld shear connectors through two layers (lapped ends) of decking units. Weld only on clean, dry deck surfaces.

O. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking

and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation.

1. Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option, wherever

their use will ensure complete closure. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

P. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds,

and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members.

1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

Q. In areas where shop-painted surfaces are to be exposed, apply touch-up paint to blend into adjacent surfaces.

R. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, abraded areas, and rust spots,

as required after erection and before proceeding with field painting, is included in Division 9 under "Painting."


Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Types of cold-formed metal framing units include the following:

1. Load-bearing punched channel studs. 2. C-shaped load-bearing steel studs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product data and installation instructions for each item of cold-formed metal framing and

accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Component Design: Calculate structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units that have been approved by governing authorities that have jurisdiction.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project

site with installers of other work including door and window frames and mechanical and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work.

1. Coordinate with provisions of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:


1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Marino Industries, Inc. 5. Superior Steel Studs, Inc. 6. USG Industries 7. United States Steel 8. Wheeling Corrugating Co.

2.2 METAL FRAMING

A. System Components: Manufacturers' standard load-bearing steel studs and joists of type, size, shape, and gage as indicated. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard, steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.

B. Materials and Finishes:

1. For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality

steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. 2. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for

minimum G 60 coating.

a. Finish of installation accessories to match that of main framing components, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with

corrosion-resistant plated finish. 4. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud

manufacturer. 5. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair

in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into assemblies before erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line, and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated units to prevent damage or distortion.

B. Fabricate units in jig templates to hold members in proper alignment and position and to assure

consistent component placement.

C. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.

D. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.

E. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate units to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb,

level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written

instructions and recommendations.

B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power-driven fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.

C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw

fastening at both inside and outside flanges.

D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of

stiffeners to supporting structure.

F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported.

G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud at each jamb of frame except

where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated.

H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with

components of stud system.

I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 54 inches o.c. Weld at each intersection.

J. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical junctures) to produce

flush, even, true-to-line joints.

1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies should not exceed 1/16 inch.


Metal Fabrications 05 55 00 Page 1 of 17

SECTION 05 55 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following metal fabrications:

1. Rough hardware. 2. Loose steel lintels. 3. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:

a. Suspended toilet partitions. b. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections.

4. Pipe bollards.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components. 2. Division 5 Section "Handrails and Railings" for the following:

a. Ornamental metal handrails and railing systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 894 and E 935.

B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following metal fabrications to

withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication.

1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied at any point nonconcurrently, vertically downward, or horizontally.

b. Uniform load of 100 lbf per linear ft. applied nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally.

c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point nonconcurrently, vertically


downward or horizontally.

b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally.

c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to one sq. ft. at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails balusters, or other elements composing the infill area.

a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform horizontal loads

on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and

grout.

C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.

1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design loadings,

include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation.

D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect.

E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified

under "Quality Assurance" article.

F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by

same firm that fabricated them.

C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", and D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

D. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that


indicated for this Project. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee

dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:

1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.

2. Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786.

D. Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36.

E. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510.

F. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:

1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as indicated below:

a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.

b. Grade B, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading.

2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53.

G. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade, as


follows:

1. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows:

a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.

2. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570, grade as follows:

a. Grade 30, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading.

H. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as follows:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366.

I. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Quality as follows:

1. Structural Quality: ASTM A 446; Grade A, unless another grade required for design loading,

and G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated.

J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:

1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. 3. Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight, type,

and grade required by structural loads.

K. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.

L. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510.

M. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron,

ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.

O. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal

alloy to be welded. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Bar Stock: ASTM A 276, Type 302 or 304.

B. Plate: ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304. 2.3 ALUMINUM

A. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloys as follows:

1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-T1 for grating cross bars.

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632, alloys as follows:

1. 6061-T6 for platforms.


2. 6061-T4 for treads.

C. Aluminum Rivets: ASTM B 316, alloy 6053-T4 or 6061-T6.

D. Aluminum Sheet for Expanded Aluminum Grating: ASTM B 209, alloy 5052-H32.

E. Fasteners for Aluminum Gratings: Use fasteners made of same basic metal as fastened metal except use galvanized fasteners complying with ASTM A 153 for exterior aluminum units, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with metals joined.

2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy duty loading applications of type specified in this section.

B. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD- C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section.

C. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled

expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only.

D. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic

controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.

E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in

the Work include but are not limited to the following:

F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Nonshrink Metallic Grouts:

a. "Metox RM"; Chem-Masters Corp. b. "Hi Mod Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Embeco 885 and 636"; Master Builders. d. "Ferrolith G Redi-Mix and G-NC"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord

Chemical Products, Inc. e. "Stoncrete MG1"; Stonhard, Inc.

2. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:

a. "Bonsal Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. "Diamond-Crete Grout"; Concrete Service Materials Co. c. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Kemset"; Chem-Masters Corp. e. "Crystex"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders. g. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc. h. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. i. "Stoncrete NM1"; Stonhard, Inc. j. "Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp. k. "Vibropruf #11"; Lambert Corp.


3. Interior Anchoring Cement:

a. "Bonsal Anchor Cement"; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. "Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.

4. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement:

a. "Super Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.

C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.

E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.

F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.

G. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII

(anchors, expansion, [nondrilling]), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required.

I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.

2.6 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel,

with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no

asbestos fibers.

D. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645. 2.7 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 section "Concrete Work" for normal weight, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi, 440 lb cement per cu. ft. minimum, and W/C ratio of 0.65 maximum, unless higher strengths indicated.


B. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged material containing fused aluminum oxide

grits or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate; rust-proof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp

edges.

C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C).

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form

bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.

G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and

space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware,

screws, and similar items.

L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep


holes where water may accumulate.

2.9 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 sections.

B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for

heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.10 STEEL LADDERS

A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.

B. Siderails: Continuous steel flat bars, 1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inches, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches

apart.

C. Bar Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameter, spaced 12 inches o.c.

D. Bar Rungs: Square steel bars, 3/4 inch, spaced 12 inches o.c.

E. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

F. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5'-0" o.c. by means of welded or bolted steel brackets.

1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of

ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches. 2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other

secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access.

G. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide

granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.

2.11 SHIP'S LADDERS

A. Provide ship's ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open type construction with structural steel channel or steel plate stringers, pipe handrails, and open steel grating treads, unless otherwise indicated. Provide all necessary brackets and fittings for installation.

B. Galvanize ladders, including, brackets and fasteners; in the following locations:

1. Exterior locations.

2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.12 LADDER SAFETY CAGES

A. General: Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3; assemble by welding or riveting.


B. Primary Hoops: Steel bars, 5/16 inch x 4 inches, for top, bottom, and for cages longer than 20 feet, intermediate hoops spaced not more than 20'-0" o.c.

C. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: Steel bars, 5/16 inch x 2 inches hoops spaced not more than 4'-0"

o.c. between primary hoops.

D. Vertical Bars: Steel bars, 5/16 inch x 2 inches, secured to each hoop, spaced approximately 9 inches o.c.

E. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction as indicated.

F. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including fasteners, in the following locations:


2. Interior locations, where indicated. 2.13 NOSINGS

A. Fabricate curb nosings from structural steel shapes as indicated, of all welded construction with mitered corners and continuously welded joints. Provide anchors welded to nosings for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each curb end, 6 inches from corners and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanize nosings in the following locations:


2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.14 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.

2.15 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8 inches

bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. 2.16 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.

B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other

construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units


to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry.

Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.

b. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 1/4 inch x 8 inches long.

C. Fabricate support for suspended toilet partitions as follows:

1. Beams: Continuous steel shapes of size required to limit deflection to L/360 between

hangers, but use not less than C 8 x 11.5 channels or another shape with equivalent structural properties.

2. Hangers: Steel rods, 1/2 inch in diameter, spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. Thread rods to receive anchor and stop nuts. Fit hangers with wedge shape washers for full bearing on sloping flanges of support beam.

3. Braces and Angles: Steel angles of size required for rigid support of beam and for secure anchorage.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:


2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.17 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

B. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations:


2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.18 SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf and relieving angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4 inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support shelf/relieving angles from back-up

masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated expansion joints in cavity wall exterior wythe.

C. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed on exterior concrete framing.

D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to

cast-in-place concrete. 2.19 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS

A. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.


B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at

fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around.

C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:

1. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings. 2. By radius bends of radius indicated. 3. By mitering at elbow bends. 4. By bending. 5. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.

E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place or by use of

prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less.

G. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of

open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated, or if not indicated, use 4 inches high x 1/8 inch steel plate welded to, and centered between, each railing post.

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work.

1. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel pipe not less than 6 inches long

and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve.

c. Provide friction fit, removable covers designed to keep sleeves clean and hold top

edge of sleeve 1/2 inch below finished surface of concrete.

2. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel pipe whose inside diameter is sized for a close fit with posts and to limit deflection of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than 1/12 of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist accidental dislodgement.

I. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support

structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.

J. For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish, galvanize

fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

K. For interior steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

L. For interior steel railings formed from steel pipe with black finish, provide nongalvanized ferrous


metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.

2.20 CAST TREADS AND THRESHOLDS

A. Fabricate units of material, sizes, and configurations indicated. If not indicated, provide cast-iron units with integral abrasive finish. Furnish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or conditions.

1. Cast units with an integral abrasive grit consisting of aluminum oxide, silicone carbide, or a

combination of both.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. American Abrasive Metals Co. 2. American Mason Safety Tread Co. 3. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 4. Armstrong Products, Inc. 5. Safe-T-Metal Co., Inc. 6. Wooster Products Inc.

D. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard

with the manufacturer.

E. Drill for mechanical anchors with countersunk holes located not more than 4 inches from ends and not more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by the manufacturer.

1. Provide 2 rows of holes for units over 5 inches wide, with 2 holes aligned at ends and

staggered intermediate holes.

F. Apply black asphaltic coating to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast-iron units set into concrete.

G. Provide a plain surface texture, except where fluted or cross- hatched surfaces are indicated.

2.21 STEEL FRAMED STAIRS

A. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Join pieces together by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, columns, railings, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure.

1. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for

Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual" for class of stair designated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated:

d. Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated. e. Architectural class where indicated.

2. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs to accommodate slopes to drain in finished

traffic surfaces.

B. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a combination thereof,


as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt or weld headers to strings, newels, and framing members to strings and headers; fabricate and join so that bolts, if used, do not appear on finish surfaces.

1. Where masonry walls support steel stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for

erection of steel stair components before installation of masonry.

C. Metal Pan Risers, Subtreads, and Subplatforms: Shape metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration shown. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated, but not less than that required, to support total design loading.

1. Form metal pans of galvanized steel sheet, where indicated. 2. Directly weld risers and subtreads to stringers; locate welds on side of metal pans to be

concealed by concrete fill. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers by means of brackets made of steel angles or bars.

Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting or bolting.

a. At Contractor's option, provide prefabricated stair assemblies with prefilled treads consisting of prepoured reinforced concrete fill, with non-slip aggregate finish, in welded sheet metal pan, attached to installed stringers using manufacturer's standard connection detail.

1) Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Speedstair by

American Stair Corp., Inc.

4.. Provide subplatforms of configuration and construction indicated; if not indicated, of same metal as risers and subtreads, in thicknesses required to support design loading. Attach subplatform to platform framing members with welds.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with smooth soffits.

D. Steel Floor Plate Treads and Platforms: Provide raised pattern steel floor plate in pattern indicated

or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard patterns.

1. Form treads of 1/4 inch thick raised pattern steel floor plate with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and treads to brackets.

2. Fabricate platforms of raised pattern steel floor plate of thickness indicated. Provide nosing matching that on treads at all landings. Secure to platform framing members with welds.

E. Floor Grating Treads and Platforms: Provide patterns, spacing, and bar sizes indicated; fabricate

to comply with NAAMM "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

1. Finish: Shop prime paint.

F. Fabricate grating treads with steel plate nosing on one edge and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.

G. Fabricate grating platforms, with nosing matching that on grating treads, at all landings. Provide

toe plates at open-sided edges of grating platform. Secure grating to platform frame with welds.

H. Stair Railings and Handrails: Comply with applicable requirements specified elsewhere in this section for steel pipe railings and handrails, and as follows:

1. Fabricate newels of steel tubing and provide newel caps of gray-iron castings, as shown. 2. Railings may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated

fittings. 3. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.


2.22 WHEEL GUARDS

A. Provide wheel guards of 3/4 inch thick, hollow core, gray-iron castings, of size and shape indicated. Provide holes for countersunk anchor bolts and grouting.

2.23 PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4 inch minimum thickness steel base plate.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 inch thick steel plate welded to

bottom of sleeve. 2.24 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.25 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made

of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum

requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning:

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish

or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.26 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. As Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).

C. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural: clear film thicker than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

B. Center nosings on tread widths with noses flush with riser faces and tread surfaces.

C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water

and concrete entry. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of

miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete

masonry or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer.

3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.


B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing

members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use metallic nonshrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use

nonmetallic nonshrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS FOR TOILET PARTITIONS

A. Anchor supports securely to, and rigidly brace from, overhead building structure. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS

A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete.

After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.

2. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.

a Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement. b Cover anchorage joint with a round steel flange attached to post as follows:

1) Welded to post after placement of anchoring material.

2) By set screws.

c. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8 inch build-up, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior, or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

3. Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by

conditions, welded to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. 4. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and

anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. 5. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to

structural steel members, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into concrete.

Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing.

B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:

1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

2. Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either

concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 4. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 5. For wood stud partitions, use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate


with stud installations for accurate location of backing members. 6. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or

concealed anchors using self- tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.

C. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at intervals

not to exceed 40 feet. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches of posts.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CAST TREADS AND THRESHOLDS

A. Install cast treads and thresholds with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" to provide a watertight installation.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF WHEEL GUARDS

A. Anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Fill cores solidly with air- entrained concrete having a 28-day minimum compressive strength at 3,000 psi.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" of these specifications.

C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing

repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


06100 - 1

SECTION 06100 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Types of work in this Section include carpentry for the following:

B. Rough framing, blocking, ground, or nailers as detailed or required in the Contract Documents.

C. All lumber shall be fire treated unless for finish.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Refer to other specification Sections for descriptions of items which require installation of wood blocking, grounds, and supports. These Sections may include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Wooden Doors Finish Hardware Flashing and Sheet Metal Toilet and Bath Accessories Architectural Woodwork

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and which is generally not exposed.

1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide only fire-retardant treated wood which is recognized by the National Evaluation Service Committee of the International Conference of Building Officials and which is identical to the product described in a current report on file with that committee with respect to fire performance, hygroscopicty, corrosion testing, and wood strength properties.

06100 - 2

1. 6 SUBMITTALS

A. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer’s instructions for handling storing, installation and finishing or treated material.

B. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.

C. For water-borne treatment include statement that moisture content of treated

materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.

D. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements.

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.

B. For lumber and plywood pressure-treated with waterborne chemicals, shim

between each course to provide air circulation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work.

PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 “American Softwood Lumber Standard” and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee’s (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference

with lumber grades and species include the following:

NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.

06100 - 3

SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WWPA - Western Wood Product Association.

C. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection

agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade. species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows:

B. Provide the following grade and species:

C. No. 2 grade, Southern Yellow Pine.

D. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide

lumber of 15 percent maximum moisture content and of the following species and grade:

E. Southern Pine No. 2 Boards per SPIB rules, Construction Boards.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.

B Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in roof

areas, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A153).

2.4 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.

06100 - 4

B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPBLP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed

members in contact with masonry or concrete. Wood framing members less than 18” above grade. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.

2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

3. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Pressure-impregnate lumber with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated below; identify “FRTW” lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Exterior: Treat wood blocking and plywood sheathing used as a substrate for

heat-welding grade flashing and as blocking in exterior walls and roof assemblies. Provide each piece clearly stamped with manufacturer’s name and fire-retardant designation. No generic substitutions are permitted on this item.

E. A treatment to comply with the requirements is Dricon NCX. Interior Type A:

Treat concealed wood used for interior applications. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to

line and cut and fitted.

C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as ‘shown and as required by recognized standards.

D Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for

finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight

06100 - 5

connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill

3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS

A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and

nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.

C. Treated wood insulation stops, the same thickness as the insulation, shall be

mechanically fastened at the edges of the deck and around all projections and extensions through the steel deck. Stops shall be 5-1/2 inches wide or not less than 1 inch wider than the flanges being nailed to them.

END OF SECTION

06300 - 1

SECTION 06300 WOOD TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide complete labor, materials, and incidentals as called out in plans. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Wood Preservative Treatment:

1. Treat wood, including lumber and plywood, shown or scheduled as "Treated" or specified herein to be treated, to comply with the applicable requirements of the American Wood Preserves Institute (AWPI).

2. Pressure treat (Wolmanize) the following items with water-borne

preservatives for above ground use, complying with AWPI LP-2.

3. Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.

4. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed

members in contact with masonry or concrete, in place below grade, or in any exterior wall application.

5. Kiln-dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment

with water-borne preservatives. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A.. Install as per manufactures recommendations and as per details in drawings.

06400 - 1

SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK


A. Provide architectural woodwork where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage,

and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 3. Samples of the proposed materials; 4. Evidence satisfactory to the Architect that the work of this Section will be

fabricated by a member of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Codes and standards:

1. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with “Quality Standards” of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for the grade or grades specified.


A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide architectural woodwork in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the Drawings, and in the standards and finishes described below.

06400 - 2

B. Casework for painted solid wood doors, cabinets, and plywood shelving and main unit finish, interior and exterior surfaces: 1. AWl quality grade, (At all locations as per floor plans, interior elevations and

sections) a. Exposed surfaces: Paint grade solid doors, cabinets, frames or equal

approved in advance by the Architect. b. Paint grade flush overlay, unless otherwise detailed. c. Laminate grade for exposed surfaces: provide laminate cladding

complying with the following requirements for type of surface and grade. d. Horizontal surfaces other than tops: GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal

thickness), or PF-42 (0.042-inch nominal thickness). e. Postformed surfaces: PF-42 (0.042-inch nominal thickness). f. Vertical surfaces: GP-28 (0.028-inch nominal thickness). g. Edges: GP-28 (0.028-inch nominal thickness).

C. Countertops:

1. Types and sizes: a. Shop fabricate pre-moulded countertops and splashes to the types and

dimensions shown on the Drawings. Verify all dimensions at site prior to fabrication.

b. Where splashes are called for, provide 4” high pre-moulded coved splash and no-drip leading edge.

c. Cover ¾” thick B/C plywood with Wilsonart (premium grade allowed) or Formica (premium grade allowed) laminated plastic, or equal approved in advance by the Architect, in colors and patterns selected by the Architect from premium or standard colors and patterns of the approved manufacturer.

D. Hardware:

1. Refer to hardware schedule as attached below: 2. Hardware standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9 “American National

Standard for Cabinet Hardware” for items indicated by refernce to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard.

3. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies

with ANSI / BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. 4. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies

with product class requirements of ANSI / BHMA A156.9.

5. Provide the cabinet manufacturer’s standard finish hardware to match existing Except as otherwise approved in advance by the Architect, install all finish hardware of this Section in the shop.

06400 - 3

6. Hardware Schedule: Item Description Mfg. No. Location

Pivot hinges Wrought steel Stanley 341 All case work doors Casework pulls Wrought 4” wire pull Stanley 4484 One ea. Casewk dr. & drwr Cabinet catches H.D. magnetic min. Stanley SP46 One each casework door 7 lb. pull US28 Adj. Shelf Stnds. Wrought steel Knape/Vogt Use BHMA B84001 (inside cabinets) BHMA B84071 shelf rests (4 / shelf) Drawer slides Self-closing, side Knape / Vogt 2 each drawer Mount, ball-bearing, 1600 series Full extension 100-lb load rating Wire Cages Elfa or equal Per interior elevations at all ADA locations for pull outs Grommets Brushed chrome for Doug Mockett Where wiring conduit or Exposed; piping is indicated to enter contractor’s casework for equipment Option for semi- Exposed Adj. Shelf Chrome brass Knape/Vogt 346 4 per shelf Supports (inside pin-type Open bookcase) 2.2 OTHER MATERIALS




3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Contractor shall shall take necessary field measurements and be responsible to assure

proper dimensions for the work to fit installation of this Section.

06400 - 4

3.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the referenced standards.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the referenced standards, anchoring all items firmly into position for long life under hard use.

3.5 COMPLIANCE

A. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection under the Quality Certification Program of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.

B. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply

with the specified requirements, immediately remove the non-complying items and immediately replace them with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner, and promptly reimburse the Owner for all costs associated with the inspections.

END OF SECTION

07110 - 1

SECTION 07110 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING


A. Provide membrane waterproofing where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


2. Section 01421: Roofing inspection services. 1.2 SUBMITTALS







B. Use a subcontractor currently approved in writing by the manufacturer of the

approved waterproofing.

C. Cooperate as required. in performance of the specified testing and inspecting. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERSLAB WATERPROOFING

07110 - 2

A. Six (6) mil polyethylene vapor barrier for slab on grade. Membrane shall be applied under all slabs and beams of enclosed spaces and tennis courts. Membrane shall be overlapped a minimum of 12” and tapped with waterproof tape. Tape all penetrations and torn or damaged areas.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Prior to start of installation, meet with the architect, and reach agreement on procedures to be followed.

B. Except as may be modified with the advance approval of the Architect, install the

work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

07210 - 1

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION & FIRE SAFING


A. Provide building insulation where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:




B. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post a certificate of

insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.


A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide the following building insulation where shown on the Drawings or otherwise needed to achieve the degree of insulation required under pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Blanket Insulation: 1. Type A: 9-1/2” thick: Glass fiber or mineral slag fiber, ASTM C 665, Type I and

ASTM E136. Resistivity at 75 degree > 3.14.with value of R-30 for all the suspended ceiling attic areas. Insulation is for sound control.

2. Type B: 3-1/2” thick: Glass fiber or mineral slag fiber, ASTM C 665, Type I and

ASTM E136. Resistivity at 75 degree > 3.14.with value of R-13 for all interior stud wall areas.

3. Type C: 5-1/2” thick: Glass fiber or mineral slag fiber, ASTM C 665, Type I and

07210 - 2

ASTM E136. Resistivity at 75 degree > 3.14.with value of R-19 for all exterior stud wall areas.

4. Type D: 2.0” thick: Extruded polystyrene, rigid, ASTM C 578, minimum R-13, 10

psi, compressive strength at all exterior walls with furring channels applied over min. ½” thick to exterior Thermax Insulation Board as manufactured by Celotex Corp. or equal. All butt joints to be covered with metallic tape and asphaltic mastic and Tyvek wall paper wrap.

5. Type E Two Layer Liner Barrier Insulation Assembly system: See Section 07216

Metal Building Insulation. Coordinate all work with Pre-engineered Metal Building supplier for compliance with new 2015 Energy Code. Submittals required for review and approval.

6. Through penetration firestop systems:

a. Silicone foam: Two-component, silicone based liquid elastomeric that when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.

b. Silicone sealant: Moisture-curing, single component, silicone based, neutral curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below:

Grade for vertical surfaces: Non-sag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

7. Acceptable products and manufacturers:

a. Foams: Dow Corning Fire stop Foam 2001, Dow Corning Corp. Pensil 200 Foam, general Electric Co. b. Elastomeric sealants: Dow corning Firestop Sealant 2000, dow Corning Corp. Dow Corning Firestop sealant SL 2003, Dow Corning Corp. Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, General Electric Co. Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc. Fyre-Sil S/L Tremco, Inc.

2.2 OTHER MATERIALS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

SURFACE CONDITIONS


B. Remove, or protect against, projections in construction framing which may damage or

prevent proper insulation.

07210 - 3

INSTALLATION

A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position.

END OF SECTION

07216 - 1

SECTION 07216 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING BLANKET INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide insulation system for pre-engineered metal buildings – new construction and existing construction.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 13310 - Fabricated Engineered Structures. 2. Division 14 - Fire Suppression 3. Division 14 - Plumbing; Rough-in utilities. 4. Division 15 - HVAC; Rough-in utilities. 5. Division 16 - Electrical; Rough-in utilities.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the following specifications as applicable to the specific product or end use:

1. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM C991 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation

for Metal Buildings. b. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor

Retarders for Thermal Insulation. c. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. d. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of

Materials in Sheet Form (Procedure A). 2. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA):

a. NAIMA 202-96(R) (Rev. 2000) STANDARD For Flexible Fiberglass Insulation to be Laminated for Use in Metal Buildings

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

a. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. High 'R' or Long Tab banded system; total thickness = 11.5"; R-36; R-5 thermal block, 3.5" unfaced insulation layer over purlins, 8" faced layer in between purlins; EHP – VR-R PLUS Vapor retarder facing on interior layer of insulation with 2-12" long tabs with double faced tape; 1” steel banding across bottom of purlins at 2' o.c. max spacing.

B. The installed roof systems shall provide a continuous vapor barrier in compliance with 2015 IECC requirements.

07216 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data for each of the following including: 1. Roof installation instructions 2. Product data sheet 3. Design considerations guide 4. Recycle content certification for fiberglass insulation products – minimum 50%

recycled content for all fiberglass insulation materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings that indicate the following: 1. Liner fabric layout 2. Insulation Layout and cut list 3. Customer and project information


A. Installer Qualifications: Companies shall be familiar with the installation practices associated with banded liner systems.


A. Store products indoors or in a dry, covered area.

B. Do not open products until ready to use.

C. Protect products from potential construction site damage.

D. Use care when opening products as pallets may shift during shipment.

E. Banding has sharp edges. Wear cut proof gloves when handling.

F. Wear safety glasses when unpacking materials.


A. For best results, do not install this system outside of the temperature, humidity, ventilation and environmental limits recommended by the manufacturer. Products should be kept covered and dry at temperatures less than 100°F prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. High-R Banded System by Therm-All Inc., 4884 Duncanville, Rd., Suite B, Dallas, Tx 75236 Ben Holmes, District Manager, Therm-All Inc., Cell: (210) 380-9787, Fax: (214) 630-6868, [email protected]

B. Owens Corning Insulating Systems, LLC, Toledo, OH 43659; www.owenscorning.com.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.owenscorning.com/

07216 - 3

2.2 MATERIALS

A. The OptiLiner® System or approved equal consists of the following materials: 1. Unfaced light density fiberglass metal building insulation in the one of the

following product categories: a. Owens Corning Certified R Metal Building Insulation

1) Complies with ASTM C991 Type 1. 2) Complies with NAIMA 202-96-REV 2000. 3) Flame Spread Index <25 and Smoke Developed Index <50 when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. 4) Certified by SCS Global Services to contain a minimum of 65%

recycled glass content, 18% pre-consumer and 47% post-consumer. 5) Thermal Resistance: Available R-Values = R10, R11, R13, R16, R19,

R25 or R30. 6) Unfaced. 7) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®. 8) GREENGUARD Gold Certified.

b. Owens Corning MBI Plus Metal Building Insulation 1) Flame Spread Index <25 and Smoke Developed Index <50 when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. 2) Certified by SCS Global Services to contain a minimum of 65%

recycled glass content, 18% pre-consumer and 47% post-consumer. 3) Thermal Resistance: Available R-Values = R10, R11, R13, R16, R19,

R25 or R30. 4) Unfaced. 5) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®. 6) GREENGUARD Gold Certified.

c. Owens Corning Metal Building Utility Blanket 1) Flame Spread Index <25 and Smoke Developed Index <50 when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. 2) Certified by SCS Global Services to contain a minimum of 65%

recycled glass content, 18% pre-consumer and 47% post-consumer. 3) Thermal Resistance: Available R-Values = R7. 4) Unfaced. 5) GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®. 6) GREENGUARD Gold Certified.

2. Fabric liner facing/vapor barrier composed of woven high-density polyethylene coated on both sides with polyethylene. Complies with the following: a. ASTM C1136, Types I through Type VI

1) Type I-IV exception for dimensional stability (value is < 2.0%.) b. Perm rating: ≤ 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 Procedure

A. c. Flame Spread Index < 25 and Smoke Developed Index < 50 when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 84. d. Color:

1) White 2) Black

3. Vapor barrier adhesive. Complies with the following: a. Application temperature 10°F to 110° F

07216 - 4

4. Double sided vapor barrier tape. Complies with the following: a. Width 0.75” b. Rubber based and free film

5. Patch tape. Complies with the following: a. Adhesive added to one side b. Installation temperature from 10°F to 110°F c. 3" width

6. Metal Banding/Straps. Complies with the following: a. Coated steel b. 1.0" wide c. Structural Steel Grade 50 per ASTM C 653 d. Exposed color to match vapor barrier

1) White 2) Black

e. Backing – gray 7. Thermal breaks

a. Closed cell polyethylene foam tape for wall applications. Complies with the following: 1) 0.125" thick to 0.375" thick 2) 3.0" wide

b. Thermal spacer blocks. Complies with the following: 1) Extruded or expanded polystyrene 2) Minimum width 3.0" 3) Thickness 0.5" – 1.0"

8. Light gage steel fasteners a. Zinc plated cold forged steel b. Head color to match vapor barrier

1) White 2) Black

c. Contain rubber sealing washer 9. Heavy gage steel fasteners

a. Zinc plated cold forged steel b. Head color to match vapor barrier

1) White 2) Black

c. Contain rubber sealing washer 10. Insulation Hangars

a. Insul-hold insulation hangars

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. Verify structure, bracing, and concealed building systems have been tested and inspected.

07216 - 5

B. Provide written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install liner system in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Purlin and girt attachment surfaces should be clean and dry prior to attaching two-faced tape or sealing adhesive.

C. Installed fiberglass insulation should fit snugly against purlin and girt walls in the cavity space. Avoid gaps, voids and any excess compression.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt from vapor barrier fabric using a soft cloth with soap and water or non-abrasive household cleaner. Solvent-based cleaners and abrasive pads should be avoided.

3.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. Installation contractor must have a site-specific safety plan and comply with all OSHA applicable local rules and regulations when installing this system.

B. Workers must use OSHA required fall protection when installing the banded liner system at heights (see OSHA regulations at 29 CFR 1926, Subpart M).

C. Banding has sharp edges and cut proof gloves should be worn when handling.

3.5 APPENDIX

A. Refer to the Owens Corning publications listed below for product information, including uses, descriptions, physical properties, performance, specification compliance and application recommendations. Copies of these documents can be found at www.owenscorning.com. 1. OptiLiner® Banded Liner System Product Data Sheet – Owens Corning

Publication 10011681 2. OptiLiner® Roof Installation Instructions – Owens Corning Publication 10011267

END OF SECTION

07220 - 1

SECTION 07220 THERMACAL NON-VENTED COMPOSITION BASE ROOF INSULATION

1. General

1.01. WORK INCLUDES A. The work shall consist of covering all areas shown on the drawings with 4”

thick fastener type composite plywood and rigid board insulation base roof decking.

1.02. RELATED WORK A. Specified elsewhere:

Section 07410 Metal roofing or other roofing system over the composite plywood and rigid board insulation base insulation.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Description of system: 1. The insulated sheathing shall be a preassembled panel consisting of one layer of 3/4” oriented strand board top surface (FSC or standard) bonded to 3-1/4” min. thick isocyanurate foam for a total of 4” to be secured to metal decking per structural drawings and metal trusses.

2. The Long Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) R-Value of the non-vented roof insulation shall be no less than R-25. 3. Wood panel edges shall be rabbetted to allow the foam edges to fit together while providing clearance between the wood sheathing on adjoining panels. 4. Foam sides and ends shall have a machined tongue and groove profile to reduce heat loss at the joints. B. Performance Requirements: 1. The foam insulation shall have a Flame Spread Rating of 40-60.

1.04. QUALITITY ASSURANCE A. The composite base insulation shall be classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. as a shingle decking accessory for use with any Class A, B or C asphalt glass mat or asphalt organic shingles. Each bundle of insulation panels shall bear an UL label. If applicable FSC Chain-of-Custody procedures will apply.

1.05. SUBMITTALS

A. The following will be submitted to the architect for approval: Copies of the manufacturer’s product information and installation instructions. A sample with the edge profile specified.

B. The composite base insulation must be classified under UL as a roof covering accessory (TGDY) per ANSI/UL 790 (ASTM E180) and as a Building Unit (TIAR) per UL 1256 for Construction No. 120 and No. 123.

1.06. DELIVERY AND STORAGE

07220 - 2

A. The composite base insulation shall be protected in the transit by plastic covers and by truck tarps. When material is stored at the jobsite, a reasonably lever, drained storage area shall be provided. The insulation shall rest on firm blocking and shall be covered with tarps.

1.07. SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Erection of the composite base insulation shall be coordinated with the roofing subcontractor so the roofing is applied as soon as possible after insulation is in place.

2. PRODUCT 2.01. Products shown below are acceptable provided they meet the requirements of this specification: A. ThermaCal® Non-Ventilated Roof Insulation Panels by GAF Cornell, Tele: (800)766-3411 (800)522-9224, Fax: 877-271-6588

www.cornellcorporation.com and gaf.com B. ThermaCal® Fasteners as required per the appropriate fastener pattern. 3. EXECUTION 3.01. PREPARATION

A. The structural ¾’ roof OSB or plywood deck shall be installed over the metal deck shown in the plans shall be smooth and level and free of water or debris before the nail base insulation is installed. Apply vapor retarder if required. Provide a vapor/air retarder.

3.02. SUBSTRATE INSTALLATION A. Installation shall follow the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Fasten with ThermaCal® Fasteners to the supporting roof deck shown in the plans.

C. Protect composition base insulation work from exposure to moisture damage and deterioration, primarily by prompt installation of the roofing, sheet metal and waterproofing work.

End of Section

http://www.cornellcorporation.com/

07240 - 1

SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM (EFIS)

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY (Approved substitution Omega Corp.)

A. Section Includes: 1. TeifsAIRTIGHT Wall System or Approved Equal: Exterior wall cladding of an

air/weather barrier, adhesive bed, rigid insulation, base coat with reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 2. Section 03300 - Concrete 3. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Steel Framing 4. Section 07270 - Air Barriers 5. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Perimeter flashings 6. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants


Equal to TeifsAIRTIGHT WALL SYSTEM is an Exterior Insulation and Finish System, Class PB with an air/weather barrier, adhesive bed (TeifsBASE), rigid insulation (TeifsBOARD), base coat (TeifsBase) with reinforcing mesh (TeifsMESH), and finish coat (TeifsFLEX), or approved equals.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Individual materials and the assembly of materials to provide: 1. Secure bond to structure and substrate. 2. Allowance for thermal movement caused by changing environment

conditions. 3. Continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 4. Weather tightness, resistance to wind, suction, and seismic loads identified by

code. B. Physical Properties:

1. Accelerated Weathering (5500 hours) - ASTM G 23: No deterioration or color change.

2. Moisture Resistance - ASTM D 2247: No deleterious effects after 14-day exposure.

3. Abrasion Resistance - ASTM D 968: 500 liters of sand, no deleterious effects.

4. Water Vapor Transmission - ASTM E 96: Permeable to water vapor.

07240 - 2

5. Salt Spray Resistance - ASTM B 117: 300 hours, no deleterious effects. 6. Water Penetration - ASTM E 331: No water occurred on the inner face of the

specimen when tested to 12.0 psf. C. Fire Performance:

1. Flame Spread - ASTM E 84: Flame spread index 5, smoke development 5. 2. One Hour Fire Rrating – ASTM E 119. 3. BOCA Radiant Heat Exposure Test: Pass, no ignition . 4. UBC 26-9 Multi-Story Fire Test: Pass.

D. Structural Performance of the Assembly: 1. Freeze Thaw Stability: 60 cycles, no cracking, checking or splitting. 2. Wind Load Resistance - ASTM E 330: No delamination at 1.4-kPa (29-psf)

for negative and 3.4-kPa (71-psf) for positive loads. 3. Resistance to Impact - EIMA 101.86:

Reinforcing Test Result Impact Range Mesh (in.-lb.) Classification (in.-lb.) TeifsMESH 40 Standard 25-49 TeifsMESH 6 52 Standard plus 50-89 TeifsMESH 12 104 High 90-150 TeifsMAT 15 240 Ultra-High >150 TeifsMAT 20 248 Ultra-High >150

4. Adhesive Strength - ASTM C 297: Minimum of 13 psi (failed within the insulation thickness, not the adhesive).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria and limitations.

B. Samples: Submit two samples, 300-mm x 300-mm (12-inch x 12-inch) in size illustrating coating color and texture range for selection.

C. Manufacturer’s Application Guide for TeifsFLEX Wall System: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, jointing requirements, and other details.

D. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports verifying performance requirements as requested by owner/architect

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:

1. System Manufacturer: TEIFS or approved equal.

07240 - 3

2. Materials shall be third-party certified by the Teifs’ Manufacturers Verification Program to ensure that the manufactured materials are the same composition as tested materials.

3. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section approved by EIFS system manufacturer.

4. Insulation Board Manufacturer: Shall subscribe to the Teifs Third party Certification and Quality Assurance Program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Insulation board shall be separated from the interior of the building by a

minimum 15 minute thermal barrier. 2. Insulation board thickness and use shall be in accordance with the applicable

building codes. C. Mock-Up:

1. Construct mock-up, 1.22-m x 1.22-m (4-ft. x 4-ft.), to represent: a. Substrate, insulation board, finish, color, and surface texture. b. Method of attachment and joints.

2. Mock-up shall be maintained at the job site.


A. Materials shall be applied when ambient temperature is 5 0C (40 0F) and rising. B. Do not install materials in inclement weather without adequate protection.

1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Teifs materials shall be delivered to the job site in original, unopened

containers with labels intact. Unsatisfactory materials shall not be used. B. Storage: Store Teifs materials in a cool, dry location, out of sunlight and protected

from weather and other damage, at a minimum temperature of 5 °C (40 °F). C. Protect adhesives and finish materials from freezing.

1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Follow Teifs Maintenance Guide and Teifs APPLICATION GUIDE for repair and maintenance instructions.

1.09 WARRANTY A. Limited Materials Warranty: Furnish written Limited Warranty on materials from

Teifs for a period of 5 years, commencing on date of Substantial Completion. B. Limited Labor Warranty: Furnish written Limited Warranty against defects in

workmanship from the Licensed Teifs Applicator, for a period of 5 years, commencing on date of Substantial Completion.

07240 - 4

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Acceptable Manufacturer: Equal to Teifs WALL SYSTEMS, 220 Burleson, San Antonio, Texas, 78202, 1-800-358-4785, www.teifs.com or approved equal - Omega Corp. Note: The architect will have the option of selecting up to four (4) colors from the Sherwin Williams available interior / exterior color wheel to be selected at the submittal phase. Samples and a small scale 10’x10’ mock up (including “V” groves) will be required at the site for approval. The architect will have the right to request additional samples until the approval of colors is completed. A minimum of four (4) colors will be used at the exterior façade per the proposed diagonal pattern. No extras will be allowed!

2.02 MATERIALS A. Cement: Portland Cement Type I- II, ASTM C 150, white or gray, fresh, no lumps. B. Air/Weather Barrier

1. TeifsWEATHERSEAL: A non-cementitious, 100% acrylic trowelable air/weather barrier at CMU or drywall construction.

C. Insulation Board Adhesive: Used to adhere the insulation board to the substrate. 1. TeifsBASE. - 100% acrylic-based compound formulated for field mixing with

Portland cement 1:1 by weight: D. Insulation Board: TeifsBOARD. TeifsBOARD should meet Teifs specifications and

shall be molded expanded polystyrene (EPS), conforming to ASTM C 578, Type I aged, in minimum sheet sizes of 24-inches x 48-inches, with thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Minimum Thickness: 25.4-mm (1 inch) or per wall sections and details. 2. Thickness Tolerance: 0.8-mm (1/32-inch) maximum. 3. Board Size: Maximum 1200 x 2400 mm (24 x 48 inches). 4. Board Size Tolerance: 1.5-mm (1/16-inch) from square and dimension. 5. Minimum Density: 0.95 pcf.;

E. Teifs Base Coats: 1. TeifsBASE - 100% acrylic-based compound formulated for field mixing with

Portland cement 1:1 by weight: F. Waterproof Base Coat/Adhesive – Polymer-Based compound mixed with Portland

cement for sills and parapets: TeifsBASE STAYDRY. G. Teifs Reinforcing Mesh - Balanced alkali-resistant treated, open-weave glass fiber

fabric, compatible with system materials, conforming to ASTM D 578 and the following weight requirements (see Section 1.04 C. 3. for impact resistance):

1. TeifsMESH: Standard Weight Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 4.8 oz./yd2.

2. TeifsMESH 6: Standard Extra Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 6.0 oz./yd2.

http://www.teifs.com/

07240 - 5

3. TeifsMESH 12: Intermediate Weight Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 12.0 oz./yd2.

4. TeifsMAT 15: Heavy Weight Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 15 oz./yd2.

5. TeifsMAT 20: Heavy Weight Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 20 oz./yd2.

6. TeifsBAKRAP: Strip Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 4.8 oz./yd2 for special shapes, backwrapping and detail work.

7. TeifsKORNERRAP: Reinforcing Fabric, not less than 8.0 oz./yd2 for corners.

H. Finish Coat: 100% acrylic-based, factory mixed, integral color and texture. Coating

Color, Finish and Texture: as selected by architect and to match adjacent Webb County Agricultural Building.

1. Standard Finish: 100% water-based acrylic, resin-based, factory mixed, integral homogenous coloring and texture, by Teifs WALL SYSTEMS. a. TeifsFLEX CUARZO: Variable textured pattern. b. TeifsFLEX TEJAS: Creamy sand texture using marble aggregate. c. TeifsFLEX TEJAS FINE: Light sand texture using marble aggregate. d. TeifsFLEX FREEDOM: Allows for almost any ornamental trowel texture. e. TEIFSFLEX PIEDRA GRANDE: Produces a stucco - like sand texture.

2. Primer: Water-based, pigmented, 100% acrylic, TeifsPRIMER.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Window, Door, Openings, and Joint Flashing Tape: A 40 mil SBS modified

rubberized asphalt membrane with a polyester top surface. B. Flashing Tape Primer: Water-based, flashing tape primer. C. Sealant Backer Rod: Closed cell extruded polyethylene foam rod sized to

joint configuration. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape,

recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Sealant: Dow Corning 790, 791, 795, GE SilPruf LM, Pecora 890, Pecora

Dynatrol II with compatible primers and bond breaker. F. Airseals: Designed and supplied by others.

PART 3: GENERAL 3.01 SUMMARY A. General:

1. Verify that surfaces and wall openings are ready to receive work.

07240 - 6

2. Correct unsatisfactory conditions prior to installation. 3. Architect or General Contractor shall insure that all needed flashings and other

water proofing details have been installed correctly. 4. Follow Teifs Check List Prior to Installation located in Teifs APPLICATION

GUIDE for TeifsAIRTIGHT WALL SYSTEM. B. Substrates

1. Unit Masonry 2. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and sound, free of foreign

substances that will impair bond or successful installation. Insure that the substrate is not frozen.

3. Verify substrate surface is flat and free of surface irregularities: Maximum 6-mm (1/4 inch) measured within any 1.22-m (4-foot) radius.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Report discrepancies materially different from Contract Documents to architect

prior to commencement of installation. B. Protect adjacent work areas from moisture, deterioration, and soiling resulting from

system installation. Provide temporary coverings and other measures to protect other work.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. General:

1. Install TeifsAIRTIGHT WALL SYSTEM products according to TeifsAIRTIGHT APPLICATION GUIDE and TeifsAIRTIGHT DETAILS.

2. Install Flashing according to Teifs WINDOW FLASHING TECHNICAL BULLETIN and TeifsFLEX DETAILS.

3. Install third-party system components to product manufacturers’ written instructions.

4. Sealant: Apply at system perimeter and prepared joints to requirements of Section 07900, manufacturer’s written instructions and according to Teifs Sealant Application Guide.

B. Air/Weather Barrier 1. Apply Flashing Tape/Airseals at rough openings, at framing edges across

expansion joints and at changes in substrate material per TeifsAIRTIGHT Detail Drawings.

2. TeifsWEATHERSEAL Apply TeifsWEATHERSEAL to the entire surface of the substrate and over the edge of the starter track at least 2-in. with a stainless steel trowel to a minimum thickness of 0.8-mm (1/32-inch). If applying over sheathing at any point, reinforcing fabric must be used on sheathing joints.

07240 - 7

C. Insulation: 1. Apply TeifsBAKRAP at all terminations (windows, doors, etc.). 2. Mixing:

a. TeifsBASE: Mix with Type I or II Portland Cement 1:1 ratio by weight. A small amount of potable water may be added. Set aside for 10 minutes and re-mix, adding a small amount of water to improve workability. This is critical in obtaining pot life.

3. Apply Teifs Base Coat to the backside of the Insulation Board using a 3/8 inch notched trowel.

4. Immediately install TeifsBOARD to the CMU: a. Do not allow the Teifs Base Coat mixture to form a skin on the Insulation

Board before installation. b. Slide Insulation Board gently into position. Apply firm pressure over the

entire board surface to ensure uniform contact. c. Install in a running bond pattern beginning at the base of the wall and make

sure the corners are straight and plumb and all inside and outside corners shall be interlocked.

d. “L” shaped pieces of Insulation Board shall be used at corners of openings. 5. Joints between Insulation Board shall be tight with no gaps. If gaps occur at

intersections of Insulation Board, slivers of insulation shall be used to fill gaps. 6. Allow the adhesively applied Insulation Board to cure a minimum of overnight

until dry before proceeding, this will depend on temperature and humidity. 7. Once Insulation Board is in place and adhesive has cured, the surface shall be

rasped smooth so that all irregularities are removed.

8. Install aesthetic joints at this time, ensuring that 3/4 inch of Insulation Board is left at the base of the joint.

D. Teifs Base Coat/Reinforcing Mesh:

1. Mixing: a. TeifsBASE: Mix with Type I or II Portland Cement 1:1 ratio by weight. A

small amount of potable water may be added. Set aside for 10 minutes and re-mix.

2. Increased impact resistance: Use TeifsMAT 15 or 20 which shall be applied prior to TeifsMESH, APPLY THIS MATERIAL AT LOW SECTIONS OF WALLS WHERE PROTRUDING FORMS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED. SEE EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND WALL SECTIONS.

a. Apply Base Coat to areas specified to receive TeifsMat 15 or 20 and embed mesh using a “T” stroke.

b. The TeifsMAT shall be butted together and not overlapped, as this will result in a ridge in the lamina.

07240 - 8

c. Allow the TeifsMAT/BASe coat lamina to cure a minimum of 24 hours.

3. Apply TeifsMESH to the entire wall surface overlapping any joints 2-1/2 inches and 4 inches at corners according to instructions below and in TeifsFLEX APPLICATION GUIDE. All outside corners shall have two layers of TeifsMESH or TeifsKORNERAP.

4. TeifsMESH a. Apply Base Coat to the Insulation Board using a stainless steel trowel to a

uniform thickness of approximately 1.6-mm (1/16-inch).

b. Embed TeifsMESH for standard impact resistance. The reinforcing mesh shall be embedded such that the color of the reinforcing mesh is not visible. Take care to avoid cutting or creating wrinkles in the mesh.

c. The edges of the Insulation Board shall be edge wrapped with Teifs Base Coat and TeifsBAKRAP.d. Once the reinforcing mesh is installed, there should be no area where insulation board is visible.

e. Smooth any rough edges and apply more TeifsBASE to ensure that the mesh color is not visible.

f. Allow the reinforced base coat to cure for a minimum of 24 hours. g. Smooth any rough edges and apply more TeifsBASE to ensure that the mesh

color is not visible. h. Allow the reinforced base coat to cure.

E. Finish Coating Do not apply TeifsFLEX Finish in any moving joint to receive sealant. Certain static joint applications utilizing fillet bead caulking may be applied to the Finish Coat. See the TeifsAIRTIGHT Details for examples. TeifsFLEX Finishes may also be installed over concrete, masonry and unpainted brown coat stucco. Contact TEIFS for application details. 1. Mix Teifs Finish Coat thoroughly until a workable consistency is achieved. Do

not overmix as this may cause air entrapment. A small amount of water may be added to improve workability. Always add the same amount of water to each pail to ensure consistent color and texture.

2. Avoid applying Finish in direct sunlight. 3. Apply the Teifs Finish Coat over the Base Coat/Reinforcing Mesh lamina using

a stainless steel trowel. CUARZO and PIEDRA GRANDE finish shall be installed and leveled to a uniform thickness no greater than the largest aggregate. TEJAS, TEJAS FINE, and PIEDRA GRANDE Finish shall be applied at a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 times the aggregate size.

4. Texture is achieved by a uniform trowel motion to match the approved sample. All finishes should be installed continuously, maintaining a wet edge to prevent cold joints.

07240 - 9

F. Sealant: 1. Apply sealant at system perimeter and prepared joints to requirements of

Section 07900 and manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Allow Base Coat to cure at least 2 days before applying sealant. 3. Use bond breaker tape for joints too shallow to receive backer rod.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair or replace defective materials to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive

crazing, cracking, and other areas where bond to the substrate has failed.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Remove temporary covers and barriers protecting adjacent construction after installation. B. Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged.

END OF SECTION

07410-1

SECTION 07410 PRE-FINISHED PREFORMED STANDING SEAM ROOFING

PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General & Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 Approved Manufacturers: MBCI

Varco-Pruden Building System Mid-West American ECI Building Components

2.02 ROOF PANEL SYSTEM, WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS

(Roof panels are to be pre-finished color - equal to PPG's Duranar System)

A. Equal to MBCI’s DOUBLE-LOK 24 – Mechanically Seamed Roof Syst. white pre-finished color roof panels for ¼”/12” slope as selected by Architect. Provide shop drawings with all trims.

B. Equal to MBCI’s Artisan Series L12 pre-finished (All Soffit and

Lobby Ceiling Panels) Prefinished colors as selected by Architect. Provide shop drawings with all trims.

C. Equal to MBCI’s Designer Series Flat – 12” 24 gauge (Exterior Wall

Panels) Prefinished colors as selected by Architect – Provide shop drawings with all trims.

D. Equal to MBCI’s LokSeam Series – 12” 24 gauge (Roof Canopies).

Prefinished colors as selected by Architect – Provide shop drawings with all trims.

E. Equal to MBCI’s LokSeam Series – 16” 24 gauge (High Sloped Roof ).

Custom Prefinished color as selected by Architect – Provide shop drawings with all trims.

F. Provide pre-finished metal fascias, gutters, eaves, trims, downspouts

as required per drawings, or as called out and needed. No extras will be allowed.

07410-2

C. Panel material as specified shall be: 24-gage aluminum-zinc alloy seated steel coated both sides with a layer of aluminum-zinc alloy (approximately 55% aluminum 45% zinc) applied by the continuous hot-dip method. Nominal aim is .6 ounce of aluminum-zinc alloy per square foot of coated sheet (total both sides). Triple-spot minimum .55 ounce per square foot as determined by the triple spot test per ASTM Specifications A-792.

D. Panels of maximum possible lengths shall be used to minimize end laps.

Panels shall be factory pre-punched at panel end to match pre-punched holes in the eave structural member. Panel end splices shall be factory pre-punched and pre-notched. Panel end splices shall allow the roof panels to expand and contract with roof panel temperature changes, with a floating splice connection.

E. Ridge assembly shall be designed to allow roof panels to move lengthwise

with expansion/contraction as the roof panel temperature changes parts shall be factory pre-punched for correct field assembly.

The soffit, ceiling, trims finish as specified shall be one of the following: As supplied by MBCI’s color selector – Signature 200 or 300 Aluminum-zinc alloy coated with PPG's Duranar System - Duranar Fluorcarbon coatings with 70% Polyvinylidene Flouride Resin equal to Kynar 500.

2.03 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. All components of the roof paneling system shall be designed in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices. Roof panels shall be designed in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design of Light Gage Cold Formed Steel Structural Members", latest edition. Roof paneling system shall be designed to support specified design live loads. The roof panel shall not be considered to be a safe work platform until a completely secured to the structural system. Therefore, walk-boards or other safety equipment, as required by safety standards shall be provided by the erecting contractor to provide safety during panel installation.

2.04 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The manufacturer of the metal building shall coordinate with all other suppliers and sub-contractors for a smooth transition period. The general contractor is to verify the weight of unit at the time of complete review of submittal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

07410-3

3.01 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. All panels shall be positioned and aligned by matching the pre-punched holes in the panel end with the pre-punched holes in the eave structural member and by aligning the panel with the panel clip. Panel-to-panel connections shall be made with a positive, file formed double lock standing seam, rolled 360 degrees by a special seaming device.

B. All side lap sealant shall be factory applied. Panel end laps shall be at

least 6", sealed with sealants and fastened together by clamping plates, forming a free floating splice not connected to roof secondary structurals.

3.02 FASTENERS

A. All connections of panels to structural members, except at eave, shall be made with clips with movable tabs that are seamed into the standing seam sidelaps. Insulation board, bearing plates and panel clips shall be fastened to structural members with scrubolts, as per manufacturer's erection drawings, using factory pre-punched holes in structural members.

3.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Location of standard accessories shall be as shown on erection drawings as furnished by the manufacturer. Material used in flashing and transition parts, and furnished as standard by the supplier, may or may not match the roof panel materials. Parts shall be compatible and shall not cause a corrosive condition. Copper and lead materials shall not be used with zinc or aluminum coated panels.

3.04 PROVISIONS FOR EXPANSION/CONTRACTION

A. Provisions for thermal expansion movement of the panel shall be accomplished by the use of clips with movable tabs. The roof shall provide for thermal expansion/contraction without detrimental effect on the floor panel when there is a +100 temperature difference between the inside structural framework of the building and the temperature of the roof panels, thus allowing a full 2" of roof movement.

3.05 WARRANTIES

A. The roof system shall be covered by a 20 year manufacturer’s extended life warranty as well as a 20 year manufacturer’s roof weather tightness warranty and is required at close out. During construction the manufacturer will be required to check the installation while in progress a sufficient number of times to guarantee a problem free roof system. Upon completion of the roof installation the manufacturer of the roof system

07410-4

shall provide an inspection report to the Owner stating that the roof system was installed properly and that the inspection report deficiencies have been addressed and the 20 year warranty has been issued to the Owner. The cost for inspection of the roof during the installation shall be included as part of the price of the roof system to the General Contractor. Any fee for the 20 year warranty shall also be included in the base bid as no extras will be allowed upon acceptance of the awarded bid. The warranty shall also cover flashings, hips, ridges, gutters, valleys, curbs parapets and penetrations.

B. Special Weathertightness Warranty: On manufacturer’s standard form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, without monetary limitation within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer’s standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, including:

Fluoropolymer Two- Coat System:

a. Color fading in excess of 10 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of No.6 rating per ASTM D 4214. c. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking.

Modified Silicone-Polyester Two-Coat System:

d. Color fading in excess of 7 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244, for vertical applications.

e. Color fading in excess of 10 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244, for non-vertical applications.

f. Chalking in excess of No.7 rating per ASTM D 4214, for vertical applications.

g. Chalking in excess of No.6 rating per ASTM D 4214, for non-vertical applications.

h. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking.

END OF SECTION

07600 - 1

SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

B. Penetration sleeves in sheet metal assemblies.

C. Metal counter flashing.

D. Metal wall flashing where exposed to view.

E. Exposed metal copings and cap flashings.

F. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories, including:

G. Water diverters.

H. Fascia.

I. Valleys.

J. Miscellaneous sheet metal f lashings and trim. Built-in gutters. 1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Installation of integral masonry flashings is specified as masonry work in sections of Division 4.

B. Through wall flashing material is specified in another Division 7 section.

Waterproofing and underlayments are specified elsewhere in Division 7.

1.4 PERFORMANCES

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.

07600 - 2

B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of

FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the following wind zone:

C. Wind Zone 1: Wind pressures of 10 to 20 psf (0.48 to 0.96 kPa) 1.5 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (SMACNA), 4th Edition, 1988.

B. Standard Practice in Sheet Metal Work (SMACNA), 1929. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations.

B. Submit data sheets for metal goods, flashing cement, elastomeric sealant, backer

rod, and finish touch-up materials.

C. Submit copies of referenced SMACNA details showing modifications. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal, and accessory items:

D. Counter flashing and receivers.

E. Fascia.

F. All fasteners to anchor metalwork.

G. Submit detailed shop drawings to illustrate modifications to detailed flashing

assemblies and obtain written approval prior to fabrication.

H. Show layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale.


A. Subject to such approval by the Architect, dimensions and configurations of lashings may be adjusted, within acceptable limits, to allow more effective yield of material or to facilitate fabrication in sheet metal brakes, provided that such adjustments comply with the design intent as determined solely by the Architect.

07600 - 3


A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes.

B. Detail dimensions shown in the Contract Documents shall be considered

somewhat approximate. In the event that site conditions uncovered during the Work require minor modifications to, or alterations of, those dimensions to accomplish the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall make adjustments as required to comply. Refer uncertainties to Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS

A. Pre-finished Metal Flashings, Fascias, Counter-flashings: Pre-finished 24 gauge metal equal to Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 iron of best quality, complying with ASTM specification A792/A792M-AZ50, or AZ50 or AZ55, Grade 50. Colors to be selected from Architectural Series with a minimum to Signature 200, and 300, from MBCI or approved equal.

B. Open Valleys: 24 gauge, minimum pre-finished.

C. Flat Seam Flashing: 24 gauge, minimum pre-finished. D. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: 24 gauge, min. pre-finished.

E. Solder: For use with steel, provide solder containing no lead.

G. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as

recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

H. Threaded Nails: Minimum 1-1/2”, hot-dipped galvanized, with minimum 3/8”

head, for nailing concealed cleats to wood substrates, and sheet metal flanges built into membrane.

I. Hex-Head Sheet Metal Screws: l/2”-3/4” with neoprene washers, hot-dipped

galvanized, designed to fasten exposed face of cleats.

J. Hex-Head Wood Screws: 1-1/2”, with neoprene washers, hot-dipped galvanized, designed to fasten exposed face of cleats.

07600 - 4

K. TAPCON Masonry Anchors: Hex-head, with steel washer and neoprene washer, minimum 1-1/4” length, 1/4” diameter, with approved corrosion-resistant coating and with both recessed and cutting threads, for fastening support brackets to masonry or concrete. Expansion bolts, concrete nails, and other non-removable fasteners are not acceptable.

L. Bituminous Coating: Solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur

and asbestos, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

M. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.

N. Elastomeric Sealant: Sealant “2D” complying with requirements for joint sealants

as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealers.”

O. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper.

P. Reglets: Stainless steel units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated, noncorrosive.

Q. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, cleats, straps, anchoring devices and

similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.

R. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, non-asbestos-containing material S. Seam Sealant Tape: Self-adhesive, butyl-based sealant tape as manufactured by

Polyken for concealed use for sealing seams and expansion joints associated with sheet metal roofing and flashing.

2.2 FABRICATED UNITS

A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

Do not nail metal components directly to substrate or solder over nail heads. Where metal components are indicated to be joined prior to soldering, flat lock the pieces of metal together. Cut, notch, miter, and provide tabs as necessary to

07600 - 5

properly join and interlock individual components for soldering. Spot-braze units to be soldered except where riveting is permitted or indicated. When riveting in the field, take care not to penetrate substrate waterproofing.

The edge of metal flanges to be built into or covered by roof membranes or strip-in plies shall be turned down or “kicked-down” slightly to prevent cut edge from wearing through roof membrane. The kick-down shall not exceed 1/4” wide or be more than a 15 degree brake.

Construct terminations and intersections as separate, fixed components independent from intersecting, continuous f lashings in such a manner as to absorb thermal movement of adjacent components without permitting stress to occur on joints of terminations and intersections.

B. Seams: Comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”, Plate 99

and 100 and other plates applicable to specific installations. Otherwise:

C. Standing Seams: Finish to match original seam height and configuration, but not less than 1” high.

D. Flat-Lock Seams: Finish not less than 3/4” wide.

E. Lap Seams, Where Soldered: Finish not less than 1” wide.

F. Lap Seams, Not Soldered: Overlap shall be not less than 4” unless otherwise

noted and hem exposed to view edge 1/2”. Fill lap continuously with self-adhesive sealant tape.

G. Provide expansion joint with coverplate within 18” from either side of corners,

terminations, and intersections to absorb movement.

H. Form sheet metal fabrications at corners with continuous wrap-around face. Do not solder separate lengths at corners. Cut, miter, and provide overlapping tabs for soldering.

I. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are indicated or

required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant in compliance with SMACNA standards.

J. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or

corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.

07600 - 6

L. Valley, Installations: Comply with applicable fabrication and assembly recommendations outlined in “Sheet Copper Applications,” except where more stringent requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents.

M. Underlayment: Apply building paper to waterproofed surfaces receiving metal

roofing, valleys linings. Lap plays two inches. Do not drive nails through waterproofing when installing slip sheet.

2.3 SOLDERING

A. Solder only fixed components such as corners, intersections, terminations, skirts, collars, and covers. Do not solder joints between adjacent straight runs of copings and flashings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Form soldered joints by applying flux to surface and lifting overlapping sheet to

apply between sheets to minimum 1/2” depth. Thoroughly sweat joint, drawing solder between sheets to minimum 1/2” depth and apply uniform surface bead without excess build-up.

C. Do not nail metal components to substrate or solder over nail heads. Where metal

components are indicated to be joined prior to soldering, rivet at regular intervals. Cut, notch, miter, and provide tabs as necessary to properly join and interlock individual components for soldering.

D. Immediately neutralize flux using cloth saturated with 10% solution of washing

soda and water, rinse with clean water, and wipe again using separate cloth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.” Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

B. Penetrations: Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory and penetrating

items in metal roof in accordance with construction details of Figures 11, 12, and 13, drawing number 55B, Standard Practice in Sheet Metal Work, 1929 Edition. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

C. Cleating: For size and spacing, see SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual.” Secure one end with two fasteners and fold the cleat over the fastener

07600 - 7

heads. Unless otherwise specified, use 2”-wide continuous cleats of the same material and thickness of metal being installed.

D. Provide and fasten cleats at intervals indicated in SMACNA “Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual,” except provide for attachment at not greater than 12” intervals. Fasten cleat with two nails at each interval, spaced approximately 1” apart. Bend the flange of the cleat down to cover the nailheads and drive flange snug over nailhead to prevent nails from working loose.

E. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated.

Where shown in concrete, furnish reglets to trades of concrete work for installation as work of Division 3 sections. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets to trades of masonry work, for installation as work of Division 4 sections.

F. Install counterf lashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal arrangement, or by

welding in place for anchorage and filling reglet with elastomeric sealant. 3.2 FLAT SEAM ASSEMBLIES

A. Surface Preparation: Place roofing felt and building paper over substrate.

B. Flat Seam Metal: Install sheet metal flat seam elements attached with concealed cleats as recommended in the latest edition of SMACNA, except seal all flat lock expansion seams with continuous sealant tape,’ in lieu of soldering joints.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.

B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and

protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction, to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of substantial completion.


07720 - 1

SECTION 07720 ROOF HATCH

I. PART ONE - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: Furnishing and installing factory fabricated roof hatches 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Bar Harbor Drive, West Conshocken, PA 19428-2959; (610) 832-9585, fax (610) 832-9555

1. ASTM A 36-93a: Standard Specification for Structural Steel 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s product data for all materials in this specification. B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, accessories, location, and dimensions. C. Samples: Manufacturer to provide upon request; sized to represent material adequately. D. Contract Closeout: Roof hatch manufacturer shall provide the manufacturer’s Warranty

prior to the contract closeout. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered in manufacturer’s original packaging. B. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area. The contractor shall thoroughly

inspect product upon receipt and report damaged material immediately to delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier’s freight bill of lading.

C. Remove protective wrapping immediately after installation. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Proposals for substitution products shall be accepted only from bidding contractors and

not less than (10) working days before bid due date. Contractor guarantees that proposed substitution shall meet the performance and quality standards of this specification.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof hatch(s). B. Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width. C. Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer’s installation

instructions. D. Coordinate installation with roof membrane and roof insulation manufacturer’s

instructions before starting. E. Observe all appropriate OSHA safety guidelines for this work. 1.07 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer’s standard warranty: Materials shall be free of defects in material and

workmanship for a period of five years from the date of purchase. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no

07720 - 2

charge. Electrical motors, special finishes, and other special equipment (if applicable) shall be warranted separately by the manufacturers of those products.

II. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. The BILCO Company, P.O. Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-203-934-6363, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web: www.bilco.com 2.02 ROOF HATCH A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans metal roof hatch Type S, size width: 3'0"

(914mm) x length: 3'0" (914mm). Length denotes hinge side. The roof hatch shall be single leaf. The roof hatch shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer.

B. Performance characteristics: 1. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf (195kg/m2) with

a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span or a maximum design pressure of + or - 70 psf (342kg/m2) with a factor of safety of 2.

2. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.

3. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 4. Entire hatch shall be weathertight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb. C. Cover: Shall be select: 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel with a 3” (76mm)

beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb.

D. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1” (25.4mm) thickness, fully covered and protected by a metal liner 22 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel.

E. Curb: Shall be 12” (305mm) in height and of: 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel. The curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2” (89mm) flange with 7/16” (11.1mm) holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, that features the Bil-Clip® flashing system, including stamped tabs, 6” (153mm) on center, to be bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place.

F. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1” (25.4mm) thickness on outside of curb. G. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer shall provide compression spring operators

enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe through bolted to the curb assembly.

H. Hardware 1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided 2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles 3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with interior and exterior padlock hasps. 4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component bolted to the curb assembly.

07720 - 3

5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position with a rigid hold open arm equipped with a 1” (25.4mm) diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing.

6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. Springs shall have an electrocoated acrylic finish for corrosion resistance.

7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing welded to the underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space.

I. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. J. Models S-20 (galvanized steel cover and curb) shall be Miami-Dade Product Control

approved, NOA # 10-0113.01 (Exp. 12/2/14) meeting large and small missile impact requirements.

III. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that roof hatch installation will not disrupt other trades. Verify that the

substrate is dry, clean, and free of foreign matter. Report and correct defects prior to any installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Submit product design drawings for review and approval to the architect or specifier

before fabrication. B. The installer shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer’s roof hatch

details for accuracy to fit the application prior to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the roof hatch Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. The installer shall furnish mechanical fasteners consistent with the roof requirements.


07900 - 1

SECTION 07900 SEALANTS AND CAULKING


A. Throughout the Work, seal and caulk joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and passage of air.

B. This section includes joints sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated

below. a. Provide Type A at control and expansion joints between plaster and masonry. b. Provide Type B at control and expansion joints in masonry. c. Provide Type C at control joints between different materials listed above. d. Provide Type D at perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames

of doors and windows.

2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Provide Type F at control, expansion, isolation joints in cast-inplace concrete

slabs.

3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below:

a. Provide Type G at control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Provide Type H at perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and windows

b. Provide Type I at perimeter joints of Restroom fixtures.

4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Provide Type J at control and expansion joints in cast in place concrete slabs.

C. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS





07900 - 2

C. Samples: Upon request of the Architect, submit Samples of each sealant, each backing material, each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to be used.





B. Do not retain at the job site material which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by its manufacturer.

1.5.1 FIELD CONSTRUCTED MOCK-UPS: A. Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastromeric sealants as follows to verify

selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW MODULUS SEALANT A. Low Modulus Sealant: Tensile strength of 45 psi or less at 100 percent elongation

when tested after 14 days at 77 deg F (20 deg C) and 50 percent relative humidity per ASTM D 412.

B. Medium Modulus Sealant: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 psi at

100 percent elongation when tested after 14 days at 77 deg F (20 deg C) and 50 percent relative humidity per ASTM D 412.

2.2 ELASTROMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastromeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing elastromeric sealants that comply with ASTM C920.

2.2 SEALANTS

A. Provide the following sealants, or equals approved in advance by the Architect, where called for on the Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and proper installation. 1. Sealant Type A, B, and C:

a. Low Modulus Silicone –Joint movement range of plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent.

07900 - 3

“790”, Dow –Corning “Rodorsil” 5C”, Rhone Poulenc “Sonolastic Omniseal”, Sonneborne Building Products Div.

2. Sealant Type D:

a. Medium Modulus Silicone: Joint movement range of plus 50 percent to minus 50 percent.

“791” Dow Corning. “795” Dow Corning. “895” Pecora corp. “Rhodorsil 5C”, Rhone Poulec.

3. Sealant Type E, F,and J:

a. Self leveling Urethane Sealants – Class 25 “Sikaflex 2c SL”, Sika Corp. “Sonolastic SL-2”, Sonneborn Building Products Division. “NR-201 Urexpan” Pecora Corp. “Sonolastic SL-1”, Sonneborn Building Products Division.

4. Sealant Type G and H: a. Non-sag Urethane Sealants – Class 25 “Dymeric”, Tremco “Sonolastic NP-2”, Sonneborne Building Products Division. “Dynatrol 2”, Pecoa Corp. “Duallthane”, Meadows W.R.

5. Sealant Type I a. High Modulus Silicone – Sanitary

“786”, Dow Corning.

B. For other services, provide products especially formulated for the proposed use and approved in advance by the Architect.

C. Colors:

1. Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the Architect from standard colors normally available from the specified manufacturer.

2. Should such standard color not be available from an approved substitute manufacturer except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. In concealed installations, and in partially or fully exposed installations where so approved by the Architect, use standard gray or black sealant.

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used.

07900 - 4

2.4 JOINT BACKUP MATERIALS

A. Use only those backup materials which are non-absorbent, non-staining, and specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used.

B. Close-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in

unruptured state. Proprietary, reticulated, close cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms / cc per ASTM C 1083.

2.5 MASKING TAPE

A. For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and which is removable without damage to substrate.

2.6 BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for

preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.7 OTHER MATERIALS




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces: 1. Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free

from dust 2. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so

required. 3. To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing. 4. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting

or wire brushing. 5. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.

B. Steel surfaces: 1. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant:

a. Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond. b. If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape

07900 - 5

the metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust. c. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white

rags only. 2. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent which

leaves no residue.

C. Aluminum surfaces: 1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant:

a. Remove temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil, and grease. b. When masking tape is used for protective cover, remove the tape just prior

to applying the sealant. 2. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for

that purpose by the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and which are non—staining.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL

A. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock.

B. Installation tool:

1. For installation of backup material, provide a blunt-surfaced tool of wood or plastic, having shoulders designed to ride on the adjacent finished surface and a protrusion of the required dimensions to assure uniform depth of backup material below the sealant.

2. Do not, under any circumstance, use a screwdriver or similar tool for this purpose.

3. Using the approved tool, smoothly and uniformly place the backup material to the depth indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, compressing the backup material 25% to 50% and securing a positive fit.

3.4 PRIMING

A. Use only the primer approved by the Architect for the particular installation, applying in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the Architect.

3.5 BOND-BREAKER INSTALLATION

A. Provide an approved bond breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, and where directed by the Architect, adhering strictly to the manufacturers’ installation recommendations.

3.6 APPLICATION

A. Equipment:

1. Apply sealant under pressure with power-actuated hand gun or manually-operated hand gun, or by other appropriate means.

2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints as designed.

B. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant on

adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.

07900 - 6

C. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer’ s recommendations,

thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth. D. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such

profiles are not shown on the Drawings. 1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface. 2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically so recommended in writing by the

manufacturer of the sealant. E. Cleaning up:

1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. 2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses, using

solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used. 3. Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove from the job site

all debris, empty containers, and surplus material derived from this portion of the Work.

END OF SECTION

08100 - 1

SECTION 08100 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Provide metal doors, and door frames, where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS



the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing details of each frame type, elevations of door designs,

details of openings, and details of construction, installation, and anchorage; 4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by



A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Unless specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, provide all products of this

Section from a single manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Hot rolled steel sheets and strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickeled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and A 568.

B. Cold rolled steel sheets: commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A

08100 - 2

336 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized steel sheets: Zinc coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality,

complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Supports and anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 ga. galvanized sheet steel.

E. Inserts, bolts and fasteners: Manufacture’s standard units, except hot dip galvanized

items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.

F. Shop applied paint: rust inhibitive primer either air-drying or baking, suitable as a

base for specified finish paints. 2.2 METAL DOORS

A. Type and design: 1. Comply with pertinent recommendations of the Hollow Metal Manufacturers’

Association and Steel door Institute “Recommended Specifications: Steel Doors and Frames” and as herein specified.

2. Provide full flush design, fabricated from metal complying with ASTM A40, hot-dip galvanized and prime painted, with a tightly hemmed vertical seam on lock and hinge edges, with top flush channel and beveled lock edge, in the dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, reinforced for the finish hardware being provided under Section 08710 of these Specifications.

3. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Grade III ( Extra Heavy Duty 1-3/4” – 16 gauge) Seamless Hollow Steel for interior doors; Grade III (Extra-Heavy duty – 16 gauge), galvanized steel for exterior and mechanical rooms. Prep all exterior doors for piano hinges.

4. Provide sightproof visionary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 ga. cold rolled steel set into 20 ga. steel frame, complete with aluminum screen.

B. Acceptable products:

1. As manufactured by 2. Equal products of Curries Mfg. Inc., Deansteel MFG. Co., Republic Builders

Prod. Corp., Steelcraft Mfg. Co., Univeral Building Specialties, Amweld, and Ceco, or other manufacturer approved in advance by the Architect.

C. At the factory, pre-clean and shop prime each door for finish painting which will be

performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications. 2.3 METAL FRAMES

A. Acceptable products: See Paragraph 1.3-B above.

B. Type and design: 1. Provide frames in the dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, non-

labeled or labeled as indicated on the Drawings, in 16 gage for interior frames

08100 - 3

and 16 gage for exterior frames, hot dip galvanized properly reinforced for the finish hardware being provided under Section 08710 of these Specifications.

2. Where so indicated, the Contractor may, at his option, provide either all welded or knock down construction.

3. Except where otherwise indicated, provide all-welded construction, with all joints ground to a smooth finish.

4. Drill stops and provide 3 rubber silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers and heads of double-swing frames.

C. At the factory, pre-clean and shop prime each frame for finish painting which will be

performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications.

D. Secure templates from the finish hardware supplier, and accurately install, or make provision for, all finish hardware at the factory.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Placing frames: 1. Where practicable, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and

ceilings. 2. Set frames accurately into position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. 3. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders,

leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 4. At in-place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with

machine screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide ‘Z” fillers at each screw location.

5. When installed in prepared openings in concrete construction, provide sealant between frame and concrete in accordance with provisions of Section 07900 of these Specifications.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Final adjustments: 1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just

prior to final inspection. 2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. 3. Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified

requirements.

B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat, and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

END OF SECTION

08210 - 1

SECTION 08210 HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATE - WOOD DOORS

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on drawings and in schedules.

B. Types of doors required include the following:

1. Solid core flush wood doors with plastic laminate faces.

C. Factory Preparation for hardware (pre-machining) for wood doors is included in

this section.

D. Louvers for wood doors, including furnishing and installation, are specified under this section.


A. NWMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWMA Wood Flush requirements of ANSI/NWMA l.S. 1 Series. For manufacturers not participating in NWMA Hallmark Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted for marking of individual doors.

B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in

quality of appearance and construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1.04 REFERENCES:

A. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated:

1. ANSI/NWMA 1.S. 1, “Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors”

published by National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA).

08210 - 2

A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer’s product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door.

B. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers (if

any) and similar components.

C. Include certifications as may be required to show compliance with specifications.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings and other pertinent data.

E. Samples: Submit samples for the following:

1. Plastic Laminate Faced Doors: Submit samples for each color, finish and pattern required.

F. Specific Product Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer’s standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWl.

1. The warranty shall also include reinstallation that may be required due to

repair or replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of

substantial completion.

3. Solid Core Flush Interior Doors: Life of installation.

4. Solid Core Flush Exterior Doors: Five years.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with the “Onsite Core” recommendations of NWMA pamphlet “Care and Finishing of Wood Doors” and with manufacturer’s instructions, and as otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturer’s standard method. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

08210 - 3

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited too, the following:

VT Industries, Inc. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Buell Boor Manufacturer, Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:

A. General: Provide wood doors complying with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kinds and types of doors indicated and as specified.

B. Exposed Surfaces: Provide kind shown or scheduled and as further specified.

Provide same exposed surface material on both faces of each door, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Metal Louvers: Size, type and profile shown and fabricated from the following:

1. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish 20-gage,

galvanized and factory prime for paint finish. Complying with NAAMM AA-C22A31, Class II.

2.03 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Transom and Side Panels: Wherever transom panels or side panels of wood are shown in same framing and systems as wood doors, provide panels which match quality and appearance of associated wood doors, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces and finish as specified for associated doors.

B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors and panels as shown.

Comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kinds (s) of doors required.

1. Light Openings: Factory cut openings. Trim openings for non-fire-rated doors with solid wood moldings.>

2. Metal Louvers: Factory cut openings. When standard service of door

manufacturer, factory install metal louvers in prepared openings; otherwise install only flush wood beads in prepared openings.

C. Solid Core Doors with Plastic Laminate Faces:

08210 - 4

1. Plastic Laminate Grade: GP-50 (0.050” nominal thickness).

2. Plastic Laminate Color, Finish and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard products.

a. Grade: Custom.

b. Core Construction: PC (Particleboard core).

c. Core Construction: SHC (Standard hollow core).

2.04 SHOP PRIMING:

A. Before delivery of doors to project site, shop-prime as follows:

1. Paint Finish: Prime exposed portion of wood doors shown or scheduled for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division - 9 “Painting” sections of these specifications.

2. Transparent Finish: Prime doors shown or scheduled for transparent finish with stain (if require) and other required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in Division - 9 “Painting” sections of these specifications.

2.05 PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE:

A. Pre-fit and pre-machine wood door with plastic laminate edges at factory.

B. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWl for pre-fitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware schedules and doorframe shop drawings and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware.

C. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify

dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION:

A. Installer must examine door frames and verify that frame are correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely

08210 - 5

installation of wood doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.

B. Hardware: For installation see Division - 8 “Builders Hardware” section of these

specifications.

C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as shown.

D. Job Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each

edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

E. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8” in 2” at lock and hinge edges.

F. Pre-fit Doors: Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge.

G. Clearance: For non-rated doors provide clearances of 1/8” at jambs and heads;

1/8” at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2” from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4” clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely, as directed by Architect.

B. Protection and Complete Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for

protection of installed wood doors from damage of deterioration until acceptance of work.


08420 - 1

SECTION 08420 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM & WINDOWS

PART I. - GENERAL 1.01 Descriptions: A. Related work specified elsewhere: Glass and glazing

Caulking and sealants 1.02 Description of System: All system components to be designed for a 30 PSF wind load.

Manufacturer to notify architect if wind reinforcing, etc., is required. A. Refer to Door and Window Schedule, & Types Aluminum entrance doors and frames Aluminum sash and sidelights

Miscellaneous items required for complete installation Aluminum fixed frame windows 1.02 Definitions: some products and execution are specified in section by reference to published

specifications or standards of the following: A. The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Aluminum Association (AA). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications:

B. Acceptable manufacturers: products of the following manufacturers, similar to those specified herein, will be acceptable for use on the project when approved by the architect. (Supporting technical literature, samples, drawings, performance data, and spec-data sheets must be submitted for comparison).

Kawneer Company, Inc. Vista Wall PPG Industries Horton Automatics

C. Source: Products for use on this project shall be of one manufacturer unless noted otherwise herein.

D. Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval in accordance with the

general conditions. Drawings shall include complete elevations of doors and frames, and sash; details and method of anchorage to opening; details of construction; finishes; method of assembling section; location and installation of hardware; size, shape and thickness of materials, joint and connections; styles and finishes shall be indicated.

08420 - 2

E. Samples: samples of finishes shall be submitted to the architect for approval. In the case

of special finishes the allowable commercial tolerances. All materials installed shall be identified as project and type of finish.

F. Guarantees:

G. Materials: The contractor shall furnish to the owner, through the architect, a one-year

written guarantee on all materials furnished by the storefront manufacturer to be free from defects due to faulty workmanship and/or materials. All defective material shall be repaired or replaced after proper notice immediately at no cost to owner, provided such defects are not resulting at any cost to owner, provided such defects are not resulting from abuse by the owner, damage caused by fire, tornado, hail, hurricane,, act of God, war, riot or civil commotion.

The contractor shall also guarantee that the installation including caulking shall be free from leaks for a period of not less than five years from date of acceptance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL:

A. Aluminum extrusions shall conform to the ASTM B221-69, Type 6063 T5 Aluminum Alloy.

B. Thickness: major portions of sections shall be .125 inch minimum thickness. Moldings,

trim and glass stops shall be .050 minimum thickness.

C. Finishes: exposed surface of aluminum members shall be architectural Class I color anodic coating conforming with Aluminum Association Standard AA-M12C22A42/44 aluminum mill finish. Aluminum Windows, Storefronts and Doors will have a Champagne or a Custom Color as selected by the Architect at submittal phase.

D. Door Type: Provide and install aluminum entrance doors 6’ x 8’pairs with top and side

lites equal to Kawneer Tuffline 350 per exterior door type elevations or approved with 1” insulated low “e” glass lites (equal to 1/4” Vistacool Pacifica color tint, ½” air spacer, ¼” clear tempered glass) with top, midlevel and bottom offset pivots, all items with pre-finish aluminum color as selected by architect with vertical removable center mullion, surface mounted “Von Duprin” Exit Devices, deadlock cylinder for active leaf to match keying requirements of new building by hardware supplier, weatherstripping, ADA approved aluminum off-set pivot thresholds. Refer to Door Schedule and Types.

E. Door and Window Framing: Kawneer or equal Tri-Fab II 451 Series 2" x 4-1/2" framing

system with 1” insulated low “e” glass (equal to 1/4” Vistacool Pacifica color tint, ½” air spacer, ¼” clear tempered glass -interior) for fixed framing units. All systems in compliance with new 2015 IECC per city adopted code. Provide design and proper anchoring details and devices to ensure wind loading design.

G It is the joint responsibility of the supplier, installer, and glazer and contractor to provide

the necessary reinforcement bracing, anchorage, etc. necessary to assure proper

08420 - 3

installation and operation of system. Provide internal steel sections inside mullion if required for proper wind load installation.

F. Frame sections: Aluminum sash, sills, and division bars shall be furnished in accordance

with the details indicated on the drawings.

G. Glazing: Glass and Glazing: Shall be in accordance with the Glass and Glazing Section 08800. Also, refer to window types and ensure compliance with IBC 2000. Provide special colors as per window types and glazing types. Refer to Architectural Drawings.

H. Caulking: Sealant shall be in accordance with the caulking and sealants section 07900, or

as recommended by glazing manufacturer.

1. Color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors by the architect. Color shall match existing storefront sections at main building.

PART 3. EXECUTION 3.01 Installation

A. Condition of surface: Installer shall inspect the substrates to which the work of this section adjoins. No work shall be installed until corrections to substrates have been performed by the trades involved.

B. Measurement: The installer shall be responsible for field checking all dimensions,

elevations and slopes on the connecting work affecting the work of this section to insure a proper fit and watertight construction.

C. Storefront installation:

1. Framing members: Install in accordance with manufacturers' approved shop

drawings in prepared opening. Members shall be level, plumb and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work.

2. Cutting and fitting: All materials shall be accurately cut and fitted, and rigidly

secured in place. All cut and machine ends and recesses shall be true, accurate and free of burrs or rough ends.

3. Caulking: All joints between storefront metal and opening substrates shall be

tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. D. Door Installation:

1. Doors shall be hung in accordance with manufacturer's approved shop drawings.

2. Hardware shall be properly installed and adjusted. Final adjustment shall be

made for proper and easy operation of the doors after glazing.

E. Cleaning and Protection:

F. Cleaning: After installation, glazing and framing members shall be cleaned, following procedure recommended by the manufacturer.

08420 - 4

G. Dissimilar Materials: In addition to the finish specified, aluminum surfaces that will

contact masonry, concrete, wood or steel shall be protected from contact by use of neoprene gaskets, where indicated, or a coat of bituminous paint to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Protection shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the architect. The contractor shall protect storefront from damage during construction activities and from contaminants such as grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid and cement. Damaged materials shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner. Extreme care should be taken so as not to damage frames and glazing. Contractor shall provide new sealant and glazing gaskets as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

H. Owner's Instructions:

1. Instructions: Owner's representative shall be give written and verbal instructions

as to the procedures required for keeping the work furnished herein maintained and adjusted.

2. Tools: Adjusting wrenches and small tools furnished with operating hardware

shall be turned over to Owner's representative, properly tagged and identified.

3. Control: The foregoing shall not relieve the contractor or any responsibilities under the guarantee specified herein before.

END OF SCETION

08710 - 1

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 – GENERAL (Owner and architect will select hardware supplier. – See Allowance 01020) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Complete replacement of existing hardware required and provide

new hardware at all areas all tied to existing great grand master keying system. Include required hardware for control access doors and preparation of frames for Owner’s selected card swipe system vendor. Coordinate and provide all preparation requirements with electrician, card swipe vendor, aluminum storefront supplier, door frame supplier and others as may be required. Electrical subcontractor is to provide all required security rough in conduits and rough in wall / frame boxes for wiring to be performed by others. No extra will be allowed for this omission. Obtain copy of hardware submittal with diagrams for conduit work.

A. Architect and Owner will select the hardware supplier and installer based on experience,

qualifications, and past experience.

B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, overhead and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hinges-Pivots. 2. Key control system. 3. Lock cylinders and keys. 4. Lock and latch sets. 5. Bolts, Coordinators. 6. Exit devices. 7. Push/pull units. 8. Closers Door Control, Electromagnetic Hold Open Devices. 9. Stops, Overhead holders. 10. Door trim units. 11. Protection plates. 12. Weatherstripping, Fire, Smoke Seals. 13. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. 14. Thresholds, Gasketing, Door Bottoms. 15. Misc.

08710 - 2

16. Electrified Hardware Items, Controls and Power Supplies. 17. Wiring Diagrams. 18. Padlocks at all gates.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet hardware. 2. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers integral with

hollow metal frames. 3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory pre-fitting and factory pre-

machining of doors for door hardware. 4. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" for aluminum entrance. Door cylinder for Storefront to be supplied by Finish Hardware supplier. 5. Division 8 Sections for Overhead, Accordion, Folding, Sliding, and gates. 6. Division 8 Section “ Package Doors” 7. Division 10 Section “ Accordion or Folding Partitions” if required.

Products furnished under this Section include:

1. Cylinders for locks on, Overhead type doors, Wire Mesh sliding doors, Accordion type doors, and Gates.

2. Final PERMANENT cores and keys to be installed by Finish Hardware Supplier.

D. References Specified in this section subject to compliance.

1. NFPA-80-1995 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows 2. NFPA-101-1994 - Life Safety Code 3. ADA - The Americans with Disabilities Act - Title III - Public

Accommodations 4. ANSI-A 117.1 - American National Standards Institute - Accessible and

Usable 5. Buildings and Facilities 6. ANSI-A 156.5 - American National Standards institute -Auxiliary Locks and

Associated Products 7. UFAS - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 8. UL - Underwriter’s Laboratories 9. WHI - Warnock Hersey International, Testing Services 10. State and Local Codes including Authority Having Jurisdiction 11. U.B.C.7-2-97 and UL10C

1.3 Hardware supplier responsibilities under the direction of the Architect and the Hardware &

Door Consultant to: A. Attend a minimum of TWO key meetings per project at the location selected by the

Owner. B. Provide an electronic visual key chart reflecting the entire keying system. C. Provide a pre-installation training meeting for the Hardware Installers and General

Contractor at the job site 1 week prior to installation.

08710 - 3

D. Tag all keys with permanent tags, assemble key cabinet and provide an electronic cross-reference index for all keys.

E. At the completion of all work, with the Installers, General Contractor and Manufacturers' representatives, Inspect and Supervise the adjustment of any piece of Hardware not operating or installed incorrectly and Certify in writing that all hardware has been installed per Manufacturers' requirements and or provide a written punch list directly to the Architect of all outstanding items not completed.

F. Provide a minimum of four hours of key control Instructions per project for owner personnel. G. Provide 2 additional copies of all master keys directly to the district H. Revisit the Site six months after acceptance by the Owner and Supervise the

adjustment of any Hardware not operating properly. Arrange for the replacement if adjustment is not possible to correct any non-functioning item and report in writing directly to the Architect the final status of all Hardware inspected.

1.4 SUBMITTALS: Supplier to Certify and submit documentation that all hardware supplied

complies with all Federal ADA, State TAS, Local IBC code and Fire Life Safety Code and requirements of doors being provided or provide a complete list of discrepancies and possible solutions.

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specification sections within two weeks of receipt of an executed purchase order and contract documents.

B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door

hardware, installation and mounting instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure

proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings

both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Degree of opening required for all doors with Closers. h. Door and frame handing, sizes and materials.

i. Keying information. j. Supplier Performance Responsibilities.

08710 - 4

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

3. Supply the approved schedule, templates for all Finish Hardware within two weeks of receipt of approved submittal for use by the Architect, General contractor, and effected suppliers for all other products.

4. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed electronic and paper copies of schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

4. Electronic Security Hardware: Coordinate installation of the electronic security with the Architect and provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related sub-contractor(s). Upon completion of the electronic security hardware installation, verify that all components are working properly and state in the required guarantee that this inspection has been performed.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete wiring diagrams for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens are specified. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval. Supply a copy with delivery of hardware to job site and another copy to owner at time of job completion.

6. Doors and Frames used in positive pressure opening assemblies shall meet U.B.C. 7-2-97 and UL10C in areas where this specification includes Gasketing for smoke door.

D. Samples as requested by the Architect for each type of exposed hardware unit in finish

indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples with submission of final hardware schedule.

1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain

undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.

E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the

installation and preparation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware for latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, flat goods from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized Architectural door hardware supplier, that has exact

knowledge and experience with the Owners current material hardware requirements and supplier performance requirements, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this

08710 - 5

Project and that employs an experienced hardware consultant who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, as requested at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation at the job site.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware scheduled or required for fire-rated openings that

complies with UL and NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Supplier to Tag each item and package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. All keyable devices not utilizing interchangeable cores shall be tagged with the appropriate door number in a concealed manner as well as the individual package to insure after installation if necessary the correct device is on the correct door. All interchangeable cores shall be stamped with the appropriate keying symbol for that core.

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by

hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number or correct item code to match set numbers or item code of approved hardware schedule.

C. Contractor to Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier

and hardware installer at the job site at delivery until each is satisfied that count of the delivery is correct.

D. Supplier to deliver packaged door hardware items promptly to place as directed by Contractor. Contractor to provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. Replace any hardware lost or misplaced at own expense to meet construction schedule.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Supplier to Furnish a complete set of As-Built Hardware Schedule, Installation instructions and specialized tools and maintenance instructions for all products supplied for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware at the Owner Key Control training. Final payment will not be released until this item has been completed fully.

08710 - 6

1.8.1 Warranty

All finish hardware shall be supplied with a Two- (2) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of the project except as follows: 1. All Closers to have a ten-(10) written year warranty 2. All Exit Devices to have a five-(5) written year warranty.

3. All Locksets to have a five-(5) written year warranty

PART 2 – PRODUCTS: 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Butts and Hinges:

a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Hinge Co. c. Select Hinge Co. d. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group

2. Pivots:

a. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group b. Hager Hinge Co. c. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.

3. Key Control System:

a. Key Control Systems, Inc. b. Telkee Inc. c. MMF Co.

4. Cylinders and Locks: - Interchangeable core

a. Falcon T series, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. No substitutions

allowed.

5. Bolts:

a. Glynn-Johnson Corp. b. Hager Hinge Co. c. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group

08710 - 7

6. Exit/Panic Devices:

a. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. No substitutions allowed.

7. Push/Pull Units:

a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).

8. Overhead Closers:

a. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group, “4040” b. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.

9. Smoke-Activated Closers:

a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. b. Dor-O-Matic, Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group c. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc. d. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. e. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group,

10. Floor Closers:

a. Dor-O-Matic. Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group b. Dorma Door Controls International. c. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.

11. Door Control Devices:

a. Glynn-Johnson Corp. Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group b. Hager Hinge Co. c. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group d. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).

12. Door Trim Units:

a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).

13. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:

a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group

08710 - 8

c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).

14. Sliding Pocket Door Sets:

a. Grant Hardware Co. b. P. C. Henderson Inc. c. L. E. Johnson Products, Inc. d. Hager Hinge Co. e. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group

15. Door Stripping and Seals:

a. Hager Hinge Co. b. National Guard Products, Inc. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. e. Zero International, Inc.

16. Thresholds:


37. Astragals:


18. Stops a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Ives Products Div.Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware group c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.

19. Miscellaneous Items: 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with

08710 - 9

ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally

prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws

except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed

except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means to fasten the hardware securely. Where through-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each through-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

2.3 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat head screws complying with the following requirements:

1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes or

self-drilling screws on continuous hinges. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood

screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

C. Hinges: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinges as follows: 5 Knuckle Heavy Duty

Full Mortise template type 4.5” x 4.5” Standard weight for all 1 ¾ “ doors up to and including 3’4” wide. For all doors over 3’4” wide provide Heavy weight 5” x 4.5” in quantities per section 2.4d. For all doors over 1 ¾” through 2” thick use 5” x 5” hinges. At labeled doors Steel or Stainless Steel bearing type shall be provided.

1. A. Reverse Hand Exterior Doors not a means of egress: Non-removable pins, non-

ferrous material. B1.-Part # BB1191 x NRP 32D Hager

B. Reverse Hand Exterior Doors that are a means of egress: Continuos hinge, non-ferrous material. B2.-Part #SL24HD x door height Clear Anodized, Select

08710 - 10

C. Reverse Hand Interior Corridor Doors with lockable device: Non-removable pins.

B3.-Part #1279 x NRP 26D Hager

2. All other Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. B4.-Part #1279 26D Hager

3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tips (HT) indicated.

4. Add Ball Bearing on all: Exterior non-means of Egress, doors with Closers,

Restrooms, Labeled and Sound Sealed, Doors. B5.-Part # BB added to above part numbers :Hager

D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 1 continuous or 3 mortise hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in

height with same rule for additional hinges. 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish temporary construction cores for all keyable devices for the construction period, and Supplier to remove and replace with permanent cores when directed.

1. Furnish final cores and keys for installation by Supplier.

B. Equip all lockable devices with Falcon Restricted keyway to be compatible with Owners

current GGMK system keyway cylinders / cores that comply with performance requirements for Grade 1 cylinders as listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.5 and that have been tested for pick and drill resistance requirements of UL 437 and are UL listed.

C. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated,

provide individual change keys for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.

1. Permanently inscribe each key that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol,

and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Provide concealed key control on all cores or cylinders.

B. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.

C. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system,

and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system or in quantities as directed by Owner at the key meeting for multi-use rooms.

08710 - 11

1. Furnish one extra blank for each lockable device. 2. Furnish 10 extra 0 bitted cores. 3. Furnish keys equal to 125% of all classrooms for Staff common use rooms.

2. Supplier to deliver all keys tagged with permanent key cabinet tags to Owner directly at Owner key control training.

2.5 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM by SUPPLIER

A. Provide a key cabinet including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of keyable devices required for the Project.

M2.-Part #201-8390-03 MMF

1. Provide complete electronic cross index system set up by supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. Index to include: door #, key symbol, bitting, tag #, owners door designation name or number, and # of keys provided

2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting. 3. Assembling key cabinet with permanent keys will be finish hardware supplier’s

responsibility and coordinated directly with Owner. 2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, BOLTS, ASTRAGALS and EXIT DEVICES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, anti-friction latchbolts as

recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide extra long strike lips for locks used on frames with applied wood casing

trim. 3. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold

construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt. 5. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and

lock units. 6. Provide standard strike plates for interior doors of residential units where wood

door frames are used.

B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and pre-assembled types

of locks and 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts.

C. Provide LOCK or LATCH with function as required per room use on all doors without

08710 - 12

push/pulls, exit devices, flush bolts or hospital latches, and all Time Out rooms. Privacy for all single user non-staff restrooms. Storeroom lock for all staff restrooms. Default to a keyable device if required function, Lock (Office, Classroom, Storeroom, and Entry) Passage or Privacy for any opening is in question. All classroom locks to be operated by a cylinder both sides. Lever design shall be Falcon Quantum Lever and have passed over 3 million cycle test. Provide test data for verification at submittal.

L1.-Part #T511 x IC 26D Falcon - Lock for single doors.

L2.-Part #D411 x IC 26D Falcon - Deadbolt L3.-Part #T301 26D Falcon - Privacy L4.-Part #T101 26D Falcon - Passage L5.-Part #HL6 x 2 3/4" BS 26D Glynn Johnson - Hospital Latch L6.-Part #C987 26D Falcon - Cylinder for Storefront. L7.-Part #C953 26D Falcon - Rim Cylinder L8.-Part #D441 x IC 26D Falcon - Staff Restroom Deadbolt L9.-Part #C955-2 Falcon - Padlock L10.-Part #T381 x IC 26D Falcon – Classroom Lock

D. Provide Classroom Deadbolts on all doors with push pulls, hospital latches, exterior mechanical, electrical, custodial type rooms. Provide single cylinder thumb turn Deadbolt for all staff restrooms and keyed differently than the Lock for the door.

E. 1. Provide FLUSH BOLTS AND OVERLAPPING ASTRAGAL on all inactive leafs of

pairs of doors without exit devices or push pulls sized to accommodate the door size. FB1.-Part #282D 26D Hager AST.-Part #835SP x door height Hager 2. Provide Coordinator and Carry Bars on all self-closing rated pairs with overlapping Astragals sized to fit the doors. Cor1- Part #297D USP Hager M4-Part #297C 26D Hager

3. On labeled pairs without exit devices, use a constant latching top bolt with an automatic bottom bolt. FB2.-Part #293D 26D Hager 1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or

stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height.

FB3-Part #282R 26D Hager F. Provide lockable EXIT DEVICES with lever trim on all Means of Egress Doors except “

Double Egress", Doors exiting from rooms of Assembly, Electrical Closets that contain more than 1200 amps per NEC code, with device Style, Rating and Width to be as per door requirements. Provide all required components to insure all labeling and code requirements are satisfied. Provide all shims where devices are required to span across glass lites. All devices shall be through bolted with Sex Bolts to the door and contain a sound deadening feature. E1-Rated Part #99L-F 26D Von Duprin

08710 - 13

1. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors, equipped with exit devices are to be furnished with keyed cylinder to keep the latch bolt retracted, when engaged.

E2-Non-Rated Part #CD99L 26D Von Duprin 2. Pairs of doors at locations with mullions to have mullions equipped with "keyed

cylinder" option. M1-Part #KR4954 (KR9954 at rated openings) SP28 Von Duprin

3. Rim exit devices to be used at all doors except Double Egress where Surface Vertical Rod devices shall be used, or fire rated pairs requiring a combination of Mortise and Vertical rod type as required by labeling authority. E3-Rated Part #9927L-F 26D Von Duprin Vertical Rod E4-Rated Part #9975L-F 26D Von Duprin Mortise

G. Rabbet Doors: Where rabbet door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbet front on lock

and latch units and bolts.

H. Cylinder Housing and Core for all Exit Devices trim and push bar, Mullions, Aluminum Storefront, Overhead, Accordion, Wire Partitions, Package Doors, Folding Doors as required by each specific door or hardware type.

I. Padlocks keyed to the building keying system for all perimeter Gates, Transformers, Roof Access Hatches, Floor Access Hatches,

2.7 PUSH/PULL or Hospital Latch with Additional Deadbolt: Provide on all non-rated, Entry Foyer

/ Atrium, multi-use restrooms, kitchen t/f serving, cafeteria/dining t/f serving, Locker Room Foyer and locker interior entrances doors. On rated doors provide Hospital Latches in lieu of push pulls unless doors are a means of egress. On all doors with either provide a classroom deadbolt.

P1/P2-Part #30S 4”x16” / 31E 4”x16” 32D Hager Push/Pull

A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation. 2.8 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES Provide Manual Closers with full covers on all fire rated, means of egress, all corridor

doors except classrooms unless labeled or if the project includes an Automatic Sprinkler System, interior storage rooms over 100 SF., doors with sound seals, and as indicated otherwise, and all exterior doors except into exterior Mechanical, Electrical, Storage Rooms.

A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, furnish "multi-sized" closers

with "barrier free delayed closing" option to meet "ADA" & “TAS”. Provide mounting brackets suitable for the style and swing of the door. On doors with Coordinators supply Closer Mounting Brackets to span the coordinator. On Aluminum storefront doors provide a Drop Mounting Plate to accommodate the narrow top rail. C1-Part #4041 (P4041 where required) AL LCN – Exterior C2-Part #1070 (P1070 where required) AL LCN - Interior

C5-Part #297M Black Hager Coordinator Mounting Bracket

08710 - 14

C6-Part #4040-18PA AL LCN Storefront Mounting Drop plate. B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for all doors required to

be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing where indicated.

C. Electro-Magnetic Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position under

normal usage and to release and close door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts.

Provide at all rated cross-corridor pairs, Cafeteria-Dinning to Serving-Tray line area, Interior Cafeteria, Gym Entrances Vending if rated as may apply.

EM1 Part #997 SA Rixson 1. Provide combination integral smoke detector device in combination door closers

and holders complying with UL 228. Provide at doors in lieu of EM1 that do not have a wall suitable for an Electromagnetic Holder device.

C3- Part #4040SE AL LCN

D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finished metal flush floor plates for floor closers except where thresholds are indicated and cover plate is specified to be an integral part of threshold. Finish floor plate to match hardware sets, unless otherwise indicated.

FP1- Part #274050 Rixson 2.9 DOOR TRIM, PROTECTION - UNITS

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths to match height of protection plates at Kitchen t/f serving and Custodial closets.

ET1- Part #182K x 8” 32D Hager ET2- Part #182K x 42” 32D Hager

C. Fabricate face protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side of door by height indicated on single doors and 1” on each leaf for pairs. Provide protection plates for all doors with closers a minimum of 8” and 36 “high at non-rated custodial closets and Kitchen t/f Serving.

KP1- Part #190S 8”x34” 32D Hager AP1- Part #190S 36”x34” 32D Hager

1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). 2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS:

A. General: Provide continuous Weatherstripping and thresholds on Exterior doors, all Mechanical and Electrical room doors. Provide light or sound seals on light or sound sensitive doors. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications. Size Weatherstripping and Seals to door size.

B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is

easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

08710 - 15

C. Weatherstripping at Jambs or Mullions and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert

and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semi-mortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient bumper material to accommodate the door sizes:

1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of

main walls and flanges. 2. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from

D. Intumescent Fire seals all 3 sides to accommodate door sizes for all labeled wood doors over 20 minute fire ratings to meet IBC 2000 + code requirements if Wood Door Specification does not require seals to be built into the edges of doors.

FS1- Part #723S x door size Char Hager E. Smoke seals as required by IBC on all 4 sides to accommodate door sizes for all 20

minute rated doors.

FS2- Part #736S x door size Char Hager Smoke Seal FS3- Part #756SV x door width AL Hager Door Bottom

2.11 THRESHOLDS and DOOR BOTTOM SWEEPS. All to meet ADA and TAS requirements.

Undercut on doors to be adjusted to work with applicable thresholds.

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile required at all Exterior, Mechanical, Electrical, Interior doors separating non-conditioned spaces and conditioned spaces.

B. Thresholds and Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient insert

and metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip:

1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of

main walls and flanges. 2. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's

standard color range, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges.

C. Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames, and as follows:

1. For in-swinging doors provide units with saddle threshold and exterior surface

mounted door bottom drip –sweep combination unit. TH1- Part #410S x door width AL Hager Threshold DB1- Part #770SV x door width AL Hager Door Bottom Sweep 2. For reverse handed doors provide units with bump rabbet type with replaceable

Weatherstripping insert in stop. TH2-Part #520SV x door width AL Hager 3. For all exterior doors provide a frame head drip four inches wider than the size of the

08710 - 16

door in extruded aluminum with natural Anodized finish. FD1-Part #810S x door width + 4” AL Hager 2.12 HARDWARE FINISHES: Plated US26d, US 32d , Painted or Anodized equal where Plated is

not available.

A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or locksets).

B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the

Architect's sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and

aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."

E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those

listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

2.14 DOOR STOPS

A. Provide Wall stops at all doors that can open without hitting an obstruction and where a wall exist within the width of the door at 180 degrees of open. Provide Overhead surface mounted stop on all other doors except exterior non-means of egress. At those locations provide Overhead stop with Hold Open feature. At exterior means of Egress provide a heavy-duty Floor stop projecting into the floor epoxy installed. This requirement is not in lieu of the closer requirements. S1-Part #236W 32D Hager Wall Stop: S2-Part #450S 26D Glynn Johnson Overhead Stop: S3-Part #450H 26D Glynn Johnson Overhead Stop Hold Open: S4-Part #269F US2C Hager Heavy Duty Floor Stop:

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:

A. Provide shims for all exits required to be mounted over lites in doors. B. Provide Silencers for all Hollow Metal Frames in quantities as required by Section 8100 C. Provide frame rain drips four inches wider than the applicable door for all frames exposed

directly to rain (no overhang on building) D. Provide Electromagnetic Hold Open surface mounted devices on fire rated, cross corridor

pairs, Cafeteria, Gym Entrances, Kitchen t/f serving, Vending, if project has a Fire alarm system.

08710 - 17

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Installers and General Contractor’s representative will attend a pre-installation training with the

Supplier at project site 1 week prior to installation of Finish Hardware.

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.

1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and

Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 3. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and Hardware submittal requirements. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic

sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."

F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

J. Remove all protective film prior to installation of mounting screws. Protect all finishes as

required during construction to maintain original finish.

K. All permanent cores to be installed under the direct supervision and presence of the Hardware supplier and the Owners maintenance personnel.

3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely

08710 - 18

and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, Installer shall return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean all hardware finishes and

return to new condition or replace prior to Owner’s occupancy.

C. Supplier shall Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes at project conclusion training.

D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial

Completion, representatives of the Contractor, Installer, Owner's Maintenance person, Finish Hardware Supplier and representative from Lock, Exit and Closer Manufacture, shall return to the project for the following work:

1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function

of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the

maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,

materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Supplier to prepare a written report for the Owner and Architect of current and

predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. PART 4 – JOB SPECIFIC DETAILS: 4.1 Means of Egress Doors: All doors openings that have an “EXIT” sign as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. 4.2 Type of Door serving specific areas: Exterior: As required per Floor Plan Interior: As required per Floor Plan


08800 - 1

SECTION 08800 GLAZING


A. Provide glazing and glazing accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturers’ specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements; 3. Manufacturers’ recommended installation procedures which, when approved by


C. Samples: Accompanying the above product data, submit:

1. Samples of each type of glass and gasket proposed to be used; 2. Samples, at least 12” long, of each type of sealant proposed to be used, installed

between samples of the material to be glazed, fully cured. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental

agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in: 1. Flat Glass Marketing Association:

a. “Glazing Sealing Systems Manual”; b. “Glazing Manual.”



B. During storage and handling of glass, provide cushions at edges to prevent impact

08800 - 2

damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS

A. General: 1. For all glass, provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or specified

herein. 2. Where type or thickness, or both, are not shown on the Drawings or specified

herein, provide type and thickness directed by the Architect.

B. Tempered Glass Mirror: 1. No. 1 quality, 1/4 (6mm) float/plate glass, selected for silvering; electrolytically

copper-plated by the galvanic process, guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. Edges are polished and protected by strips. Mirror conforming to GSA FSS DD-M 00411C

2. Frame: 8-8, type 304, heavy gauge stainless steel, ¾” x ¾” angle with satin finish. One piece roll formed construction form continuous integral stiffener on all sides.

3. No. 1 quality. ¼” tempered glass per schedule. 4. No. 1 quality 3/8” tempered glass per schedule.

2.2 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. Aluminum windows to be factory glazed.



B. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making

free from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. 1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond

of sealants. 2. Comply with manufacturers’ instructions for final wiping of surfaces

immediately prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturers’

recommendations. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation. 1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are

08800 - 3

scratched, abraded, or damaged in any other manner. 2. Do not remove labels from glass until so directed by the Architect. 3. Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction.

B. Locate setting blocks at sills one quarter of the width of the glass in from each end of

the glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. 1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass

from stops; except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided. a. Locate spacers no more than 24” apart, and no closer than 12” to a corner. b. Place spacers opposite one another. c. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4” or more.

C. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in

appearance.

D. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the joint use is approved in advance by the Architect.

E. Mask, or otherwise protect, surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants.

F. Miter-cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing streamers or ribbons, suitably attached to the framing and held free from glass. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons, or other items directly to the glass except as specifically directed by the Architect.

END OF SECTION

09110 - 1

SECTION 09110 METAL STUD SYSTEM

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide metal studs and accessories as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. Refer to the structural drawings schedule.

1.02 RELATED WORK:

A. Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

C. Notice to Proceed, submit:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this section. 2. Manufac turers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.

3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.

B. In addition to complying the pertinent codes and regulations of governmental

agencies having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in "specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" published by the Metal lath/Steel Framing Association.


09110 - 2

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL STUDS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Studs: ASTM A525 Non-load bearing rolled steel, galvanized, channel shape, 8, (7-1/2") 6, (5-1/2") 4, (3-1/2") , and 2, (1-1/2") wide 20 and 25 gauge thick, punched for utility access as called out on drawings. Over 12'-0" in height shall be 20 gauge. Horizontal metal stud bracing at 4’-0” o.c. vertically.

B. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs.

C. Furring and Bracing Members: 3/4" and 1-1/2" of same material and finish as

studs, thickness to suit purpose. Refer to wall sections, coordinate electrical duplex outlets and rigid board insulation between channels.

D. Fasteners: ASTM c646. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws.

E. Wood Blocking: Construction grade softwood moisture resistant treated. Meet or

exceed minimum requirements of Fed Spec AA-S-698 and Fed Spec QQ-S-775d, Class D, for the item and use intended.

F. Metal studs: At interior metal stud partitions, unless otherwise shown on the

Drawings, provide standard punched steel studs of the gages shown on the Drawings, either hot dip galvanized or factory pre-painted. Use only one type throughout the work, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specifically approved in advance by the Architect. At exterior metal stud walls, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide 20 gage standard punched steel "C" studs, either hot-dip galvanized or factory pre-painted.

G. Accessories: Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, tracks, clips, anchors, fastening devices, sound attenuation pencil rods and resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the steel studs used.

2.02 GROUT

A. Provide a good grade of commercial grout for leveling the floor runner member of steel stud partitions as required.


A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the

09110 - 3

Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Accurately lay out partition and wall lines from the dimensions shown on the drawings. Install metal studs and accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position. Align partition and wall assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 vertically.

B. Coordination: Space the studs as required for compliance with pertinent

regulations, to give proper support for the covering material, and as indicated on the drawings. Coordinate and provide required backing and other support for items to be mounted on the finished covering. Coordinate requirements for popes and other items designed to be housed within the partition and wall systems.

3.03 LEVELING

A. By use of the specified grout, or by other means approved by the Architect provide continuous solid bearing under floor runner members of steel stud partitions and walls. Level in a manner to provide uniform interface with ceilings and other overhead construction.

3.04 SOUND ATTENUATING PARTITIONS

A. At sound attenuating partitions, set floor runners in two 1/4" diameter continuous beads of sealant complying with provisions of Section 07900 of these specifications.

END OF SECTION

09260 - 1

SECTION 09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM


A. Provide gypsum drywall and accessories for ceilings where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS





C. Mock-ups:

1. At an area on the site where approved by the Architect, provide a mockup gypsum wallboard panel. a. Make the panel approximately 4’-0” square. b. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish used on the

Work. c. The mock-ups may be used as part of the Work, and may be included in

the finished Work, when so approved by the Architect. d. Revise as necessary to secure the Architect’s approval.

2. The mock-up panels, when approved by the Architect, will be used as datum points for comparison with the remainder of the work of this Section for the purpose of acceptance or rejection.

3. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the work of this Section.



09260 - 2


A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MSNUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel framing and furring: Clark Steel Framing Consolidated Systems, Inc. Dale Industries, Inc. Dietrich Industries, Inc. Marino Industries Corporation

Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 2. Gypsum Board and related Ceiling Systems: Domtar Gypsum Georgia-Pacific Corp. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. United States Gypsum Co.

2.1 GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. General: 1. Provide gypsum wallboard complying with ASTM C 36, in 48” widths and in

such lengths as will result in a minimum of joints.

B. Gypsum Wallboard Types: 1. Regular wallboard: Provide Type III, Grade X, Class 1, ASTM C 442, 5/8”

thick as shown on drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Gypsum Board.

2. Fire-retardant wallboard: Provide Type III, Grade X, Class 1, ASTM C 442, 5/8” thick as shown on drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Fire Shield Gypsum Board.

3. Water-resistant wallboard: Provide Type VII, Grade W or X as required, Class 2, ASTM C 630, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board.

4. Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Soffit Board: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Exterior Soffit Board.

5. Shaftliner Moisture Board: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond 1” Fire Shield Shaftliner Board.

6. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Fire Rated Board: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Hi Abuse Board.

7. High Impact Gypsum Board: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P

09260 - 3

Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Hi Impact Gypsum Board. 8. Flexible Gypsum Board: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396,

1/4” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond High Flex Gypsum Board.

9. Acoustically Enhanced (Sound) Gypsum Board: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond SoundBreak XP Gypsum Board.

10. Gypsum Sheathing: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Gypsum Sheathing.

11. Fire Resistance Rated Gypsum Sheathing: Provide Type X as required, Class 1, ASTM C 1396, 5/8” thick except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, by G-P Gypsum DensGlass Gold Bond Fire Shield Jumbo Gypsum Sheathing.

2.2 METAL TRIM

A. Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gage, complying with ASTM C 1047, B. Casing beads:

1. Provide channel-shapes with an exposed wing, and with a concealed wing not less than 7/8” wide.

2. The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to the metal, but shall

be suitable for joint treatment.

C. Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 7/8” wide and perforated for nailing and joint treatment, or with combination metal and paper wings bonded together, not less than 1-1/4” wide and suitable for joint treatment.

D. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings:

1. Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 3/4” wide. 2. Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing, and exposed wing edge folded

flat. 3. Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color.

2.3 JOINTING SYSTEM

A. Provide a jointing system, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as a system to be used together and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use on this Work.

B. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer.

C. Drying Type Joint Compounds for gypsum Board: factory packed vinyl based

products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.

D. Ready Mixed Formulation: Factory mixed product. E. Job Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at project site.

F. Taping compound formulated for embeddding tape and for first coat over fasteners

and face flanges of trim accessories.

09260 - 4

G. Topping compound: formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 2.4. FASTENING DEVICES

A. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on metal studs and metal channels, use flat head screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power driven tools, not less than 1” long, with self-tapping threads and self-drilling points.

B. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on metal mebers, use 1-1/4” type W bugle-

head screws, or use annular ring type nails complying with ASTM C 1002 and of the length required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel

members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS

A. In ceilings installed under this Section, provide access doors units where required for access to attic areas.

B. Types:

1. Unless otherwise, required, provide 24” x 24” metal access doors with concealed hinges to metal frame as per Section 08305.

2. For piercing fire rated surfaces,, provide access doors having the same fire rating as the surface being pierced.

3. For tile surfaces and toilet rooms, provide stainless steel access doors and frames, with satin finish.

4. For other installations, provide prime coated steel access doors and frames for finish painting to be performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications.

2.6 OTHER MATERIALS




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard in accordance with the Drawings and with the

separate boards in moderate contact but not forced into place. 2. At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges of the boards by the

09260 - 5

overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards. 3. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common

point except in vertical corners.

B. Ceilings: 1. Install the gypsum wallboard to ceilings with the long dimension of the

wallboard at right angles to the supporting members. 2. Wallboard may be installed with the long dimension parallel to supporting

members that are spaced 16” on centers when attachment members are provided at end joints.

C. Attaching:

1. Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled power screwdrivers, spacing the screws 12” on centers at ceilings and 16” on centers at vertical locations.

2. Where framing members are spaced 24” apart on vertical locations, space screws 12” on centers.

3. Attach double layers in accordance with the pertinent codes and the manufacturer’s recommendations as approved by the Architect.

E. Access doors:

1. By careful coordination with the Drawings and with the trades involved, install the specified access doors where required.

2. Anchor firmly into position, and align properly to achieve an installation flush with the finished surface.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. General: 1. Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly

against supporting framework. 2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed,

maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried.

3. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. 4. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional

drying time in poorly ventilated areas.

B. Embedding compounds: 1. Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. 2. Spread the compound not less than 3” wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape

in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape.

3. After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6” wide at joints, and feather edged.

4. Sandpaper between coats as required. 5. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.

C. Finishing compounds:

1. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads.

2. Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12” wide. 3. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking

09260 - 6

care to not scuff the paper surface of the wallboard. 3.4 CORNER TREATMENT

A. Internal corners: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly into the corner.

B. External corners: 1. Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the corner and securing with

the same type fasteners used for installing the wallboard. 2. Space the fasteners approximately 6” on centers, and drive through the

wallboard into the framing or furring member. 3. After the corner bead has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint

compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8” to 10” on each side of the corner.

3.5 OTHER METAL TRIM

A. General: 1. The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal

trim. 2. Carefully study the Drawings and the installation, and provide all metal trim

normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use in this Work.

3.6 CLEANING UP

A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto floor surfaces.

B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up

and remove from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section.

END OF SECTION

09300 -1

SECTION 09300 PORCELAIN WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY – (Refer to Section 01020 Allowance)

A. Provide ceramic tile where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturers’ specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements. 3. Samples of each type, class, and color of ceramic tile required, not less than 12”

square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing, and grouted as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Provide manufacturer’s Master Grade Certificate stating type and location of each tile

material in this Section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE See Section 01020 Allowances.

A. Wall / Floor tilework and base: Provide porcelain tile pattern per plan. Provide accent bands and field colors as shown and as selected by architect and approved by Owner per Owner’s standard selection. Provide samples for approval.

B. Provide standard accessory shapes, coves, bullnoses, trims, for all required applicable

conditions as required. All shapes shall be included and not included in the allowances.

09300 -2

Provide as required. Confirm shapes at site. No extras will be allowed. C. Include control joints for the tile layout per floor plan and floor pattern layout or as

discussed at the site with caulking required at joints not exceeding 15’ in each direction.

2.2 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation

B. Organic adhesive:

1. Provide a prepared organic material, ready to use with no further addition of liquid or powder, which cures or sets by evaporation.

2. Comply with ANSI A136.1, using type I where exposed to prolonged water presence and using type II at all other locations.

C. Special tile setting mortars will be considered by the Architect when complete

technical data is submitted in advance. 2.3 GROUT

A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” in colors selected by the Architect from standard colors available from the approved manufacturers.

B. Mastic grout:

1. Provide a commercially prepared grouting composition designed to be used directly from the container, not requiring damp curing, and with high flexibility and stain resistance.

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A108.1, ANSI A1O8.2, and the “Handbook for Ceramic

Tile Installation” of the Tile Council of America, except as otherwise directed by the Architect or specified herein.

2. Maintain minimum temperature limits and installation practices recommended

09300 -3

by materials manufacturers. 3. Do not install tile floors over membrane until the membrane has been tested and

accepted.

B. Limits of tile: 1. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of

pattern or joint alignment. Refer to drawings.

C. Joining pattern: 1. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed

by the Architect. 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor. 3. Layout tile work, and center the tile fields both directions in each space. 4. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. 5. Provide uniform joint widths.

D. Provide expansion and control joints where shown on the Drawings, and where

otherwise recommended by the “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” of the Tile Council of America, sealing in accordance with Section 07900 of these Specifications.

E. Cleaning:

1. Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the work of this Section in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used.

2. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

F. Provide tile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unbonded, and otherwise defective units.

G. Provide required protection of tile surfaces to prevent damage and wear prior to

acceptance of the Work by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

09510 - 1

SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM

PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Provide all labor, material and equipment required to accomplish all acoustical ceiling work indicated including, but not limited to, metal suspension system, acoustical ceiling panels and all trim and accessories indicated or required for a complete job.

PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS:

A. SS-S-118

B. Suspension Systems: ASTM C 635 for materials; ASTM C 636 installation.

C. Terminology and Performances: Current bulletin by AIMA "Performance Data, Architectural Acoustical Materials."

D. Fire Hazard: UL "Classified Building Materials Index." E. Fire Resistance: UL "Fire Resistance Index."

2.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit 3 samples, 12" square, of each exposed acoustical unit; and 3 samples, 24" long, of each exposed suspension member and molding.

B. Provide owner with maintenance stock of each type of exposed acoustical panel

or tile used in manufacturer's sealed packages, not less than 2% of the amount installed or one sealed original manufacturer's package.

2.03 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: ARMSTRONG, DALLAS, TX. CONWED INTERIOR PRODUCTS, ST. PAUL, MN. CELOTEX, DENVER, COLORADO JOHNS-MANVILLE, DALLAS, TX. OWENS-CORNING FIBERGLASS CORP., TOLEDO, OHIO U.S. GYPSUM, CHICAGO, ILL.

09510 - 2

2.04 REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SHEET.

A. Ceiling Tile Type 3: Lay-in Acoustical Panels: Required at all wet areas, equal to Fine Fissured Ceramaguard, by Armstrong, No. 607, Non-perforated, minaboard fissured 24" x 24", fire rated as required, NRC 0.10 and CAC 40 with aluminum suspended grid system.

B. Ceiling Tile Type 2: Lay-in Acoustical Panels: (Hallways) Required U.L. 1

hour rating as per reflective ceiling plan, Equal to White Armstrong Ultima Beveled Tegular No. 1911, minaboard fissured 24”x24” with fire rated grid size x 3/4" thick units, NRC 0.75, CAC 35. Ensure grid applies with beveled tiles.

C. Ceiling Tile Type 1: Lay-in Acoustical Panels: (Typ. Offices, storage etc…)

Mineral composition boards, white, minaboard fine fissured 24" x 24". White Armstrong Ultima Beveled Tegular No. 1911, or approved equal unless indicated otherwise, grid size x 3/4" thick units, Class A Flame Spread, NRC Range 0.75, CAC 35. Ensure grid applies with beveled tiles.

2.05 SUSPENDED SYSTEM

A. As required to support acoustical units, fixtures and other components as indicated, and including anchorages, hangers, runners, cross runners, splines, clips, moldings, fasteners and other members, devices and accessories. ASTM C 635-76 (Heavy, Intermediate, Light) Duty Structural Class. Fully exposed (Lay in) suspension system with white baked enamel finish.

B. Provide exposed grid suspension system for lay-in ceiling manufactured by

Armstrongs components from commercial quality cold-rolled steel, electro zinc coated, and prepainted. Factory finish exposed cap in low sheen satin white color.

C. Hanger Wire: Not less than 12 gage (0.106") galvanized steel.

D. Carrying Channels: Not less than 1-1/2" cold rolled steel, weighing 0.465 lobs

per linear foot, where required for indirect hung installation. Direct hung or indirect hung at contractor's option.

E. Edge moldings: Metal channel or angle type with single flange exposed, finish to

match exposed suspension member finish.

F. Layout: Balance ceiling borders on opposite sides, using more than half width acoustical units, 1/8" in 12'-0" level tolerance. Align joints and pattern for one-way pattern.

G. Suspension System: Secure to building structure with hangers spaced 4'-0" along

supported members.

09510 - 3

H. Edge Moldings: Secure to substrate with screw anchors space 16" o.c. set with concealed bead of acoustical sealant. Miter corner joints. Cope exposed flanges of intersecting suspension members for flush intersections.

PART 3. EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panels with hold-down clips in the areas indicated; spaced a recommended by panel manufacturer.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide tile certified by the Tile Association of America.

B. Provide a minimum of three boxes of each type for Owner’s future use with

proper tagging and complete ordering information.

END OF SECTION

09515-1

SECTION 09515 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work consists of furnishing all labor, materials, accessories and equipment necessary to cover all areas shown on the drawings and specified herein with tectum panels.

B. The Acoustical system shall be installed only by an approved acoustical

contractor. The acoustical contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete acoustical installation as shown in the drawings and as specified.

1.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Store this product in a dry place. Do not place in contact with the floors or walls. Wall panel packages must protected against marring, soil of damage during storage and installation. Cover the bottom of tiles with moisture proof materials and allow for circulation under cover to prevent condensation.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. TECTUM INTERIOR WALL PANELS 1. Panels at Mechanical Rooms shall be 2" thick, (nominal) and applied before all systems are in place. 2. The edges shall be beveled, concealed fasteners secured with concrete applied

fasteners. Finish shall be natural. 3. Widths shall be 4' with lengths of 10' or as required by height of structure.

Sealed tight against ceiling deck. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install units prior to any equipment or conduits being mounted. Panel systems shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Grid systems shall be true, straight and level with the border units of grid. Acoustical materials can be installed by various methods including screw or nail application or on a mechanical suspension (exposed grid application). Installation of the acoustical material shall not be made when the building is excessively cold and damp or hot and dry.

END OF SECTION

09900 - 1

SECTION 09900 PAINTING


A. Paint and finish exposed surfaces using the combination of materials listed on Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. A minimum of six colors will be used through out halls, and main spaces.

B. Related work:


2. Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory performed or installer performed under pertinent other Sections.

C. Work not included:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, and duct shafts.

2. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section except as may be so specified.

3. Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Do not paint over required labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.

5. Do not paint concrete which has been sandblasted.

D. Definitions: 1. “Paint,” as used herein, means coating systems materials including primers,

emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



the specified requirements.

C. Samples: 1. Following the selection of colors and glosses by the Architect, submit Samples

for the Architect’s review. a. Provide three Samples of each color and each gloss for each material on

which the finish is specified to be applied.

09900 - 2

b. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, make Samples approximately 8” x 10” in size.

c. If so directed by the Architect, submit Samples during progress of the Work in the form of actual application of the approved materials on actual surfaces to be painted.

2. Revise and resubmit each Sample as requested until the required gloss, color, and texture is achieved. Such Samples, when approved, will become standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting the work of this Section.

3. Do not commence finish painting until approved Samples are on file at the job site.



B. Paint coordination:

1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime

coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata.

3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used.

4. Provide barrier coats over noncompatible primers, or remove the primer and reprime as required.

5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coatings supplied under other Sections.



1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted

and the surrounding air temperatures are below 45 F, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturers’ printed instructions as approved by the Architect.

B. Weather conditions:

1. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturers’ printed instructions as approved by the Architect.

2. Applications may be continued during inclement weather only within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable for use during application and drying periods.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner an extra stock

09900 - 3

equaling 5 gallons of each color, type, and gloss of paint used in the Work, tightly sealing each container, and clearly labeling with contents and location where used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

Oil base exterior paint: 1. Benjamin Moore Moore's House Paint. 2. Devoe All Weather House Paint 100 Series. 3. Sherwin-Williams SWP Gloss Paint Series A 2. 4. Kelly-Moore 175 Body and Trim Gloss House Paint. 5. PPG Sun-Proof Exterior Gloss-Oil House & Trim Patin, 1 Line.

Exterior gloss enamel: 1. Benjamin Moore Impervo High Gloss Enamel. 2. Devoe Mirrolac Gloss Alkyd Enamel 7000 Series. 3. Sherwin-Williams Industrial Enamel Series B 54. 4. Kelly-Moore 1700 Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel. 5. PPG Gloss Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel, 54 Line.

Latex emulsion exterior paint: 1. Benjamin Moore MoorGard Latex House Paint. 2. Devoe Vinyl Acrylic Latex House Paint 1500 Series. 3. Sherwin-Williams A-100 Latex Flat House Paint. 4. Kelly-Moore 1240 Acry-Shield Acrylic Flat. 5. PPG Sun-Proof Latex House Paint, 72 Line.

Satin enamel: 1. Benjamin Moore Satin Impervo Enamel. 2. Devoe Velour Eggshell Enamel 2300 Series. 3. Sherwin-Williams Classic 99 Alkyd Satin Enamel. 4. Kelly-Moore 1622 Kel-Cote Eggshell Enamel. 5. PPG SatinHide Lo-Lustre Alkyd Enamel, 20 Line.

Latex base wall paint: 1. Benjamin Moore Regal Wall Satin. 2. Devoe Wondertone Latex Interior 3600 Series. 3. Sherwin-William Classic 99 Wall and Trim Interior Flat Latex Paint. 4. Kelly-Moore 550 Latex Wall Paint. 5. PPG WallHide Interior Flat Latex Paint. 80-xx Line.

Concrete block filler: 1. Benjamin Moore -- Moore's Block Filler.

09900 - 4

2. Devoe - BLOXFIL Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler #52901. 3. Sherwin-Williams -- PRO MAR Blox Filler B25 W 1. 4. Kelly-Moore 521 Acrylic Block Filler. 5. PPG SpeedHide Latex Interior/Exterior Block Filler, 6-7.

Galvanized iron primer: 1. Benjamin Moore IronClad Galvanized Metal Primer. 2. Devoe White Metal Primer 13201 Series. 3. Sherwin-Williams Galvite Paint White B50 W3. 4. Kelly-Moore 1722 Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer. 5. PPG Galvanized Steel Primer-White, 6-209.

B. Acceptable materials:

1. Equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance by the Architect, may be substituted in accordance with provisions of the Contract.

2. Where products are proposed other than those specified by name and number in the Painting Schedule, provide under the product data submittal required by Article 1.2 of this Section a new painting schedule compiled in the same format used for the Painting Schedule included in this Section.

C. Undercoats and thinners:

1. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat. 2. Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use only to

the recommended limits. 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of

a unified system of paint finish. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULES

A. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting.

B. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the Work, subject to the following. 1. Exterior work: A maximum of five different colors will be used, with variations

for trim, doors, miscellaneous work, and metal work. 2. Interior work: A maximum of 5 different pigmented colors will be used, with

variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots. 3. Dark tones: A maximum of 3 dark tones will be used as accent colors for

interior. 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT

A. For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the Architect.

B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually

compatible with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment.

09900 - 5

2.4 OTHER MATERIALS




3.2 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers’

recommendations as approved by the Architect. 2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers. 3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean

condition, free from foreign materials and residue.

B. Stirring: 1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. 2. Do not stir into the material any film which may form on the surface, but

remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint

manufacturers’ recommendations as approved by the Architect. 2. Remove removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to receive

paint finish; or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.

3. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items by using workmen who are skilled in the necessary trades.

4. Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint or surface treatment. 5. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity

and flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning. 6. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the

cleaning process will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces.

B. Preparation of metal surfaces: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease. 2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning, and then treat the

surface thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch. Remove etching solution completely before proceeding.

3. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint.

3.4 PAINT APPLICATION

09900 - 6

A. General:

1. Touchup shop-applied prime coats which have been damaged, and touchup bare areas prior to start of finish coats application.

2. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. a. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected

and approved. b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in

determining the number of coats applied. 3. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a

distance of five feet. 4. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the

exposed sides.

B. Drying: 1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as

recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions. 2. Consider oil base and oleo resinous solvent-type paint as dry for recoating when

the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

C. Brush applications:

1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other

surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

D. Spray application: 1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, confine spray

application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior.

2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats.

3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass.

E. For completed work, match the approved Samples as to texture, color, and coverage.

Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements.

F. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed mechanical items:

a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, unless items have are pre-finished or as directed.

b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black. c. Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply two coats of alkyd enamel.

2. Exposed pipe and duct insulation: a. Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation which has been sized or primed

under other Sections; apply two coats on such surfaces when unprepared. b. Match color of adjacent surfaces. c. Remove band before painting, and replace after painting.

3. Hardware:

09900 - 7

a. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the doorframe unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

4. Wet areas: a. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide to paints. b. For oil base paints, use 1% phenolmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol or

equals. c. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium

tetrachlorophenate or equals. 5. Interior: Use “stipple” finish where enamel is specified. 6. Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat resistant paint approved by the

Architect. 3.5 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Plaster: Latex Systems Flat Finish 1st Coat: S-W A-100 Flat Latex House & Trim, A6 Series 2nd Coat: s-W A-100 Flat Latex House & Trim, A6 Series (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat)

B. Primed Metal 1. Aliphatic Polyurethane Special Coating Semi-Gloss Finish 1st Coat: Surface Tolerant Organic Epoxy (4.0-6.0 dry mil per coat) 2nd Coat: Semi-gloss acrylic modified aliphatic polyurethane coating

(2.0-6.0 dry mil per coat) 3rd Coat: Semi-gloss acrylic modified aliphatic polyurethane coating (2.0-6.0 dry mil per coat)

C. Stained or Seal Concrete Floors: 1. 2 coats of Sherwin Williams additive “H&C Shark Grip or FLR’s

High Traction Stain” as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Masonry- (CMU - Concrete Block) 1. Latex Systems – (Normal Exposure)

Eg-Shel Finish 1st Coat : S – W ProMar Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25 (75-125 sq.ft./gal.) 2nd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series

3rd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) 2. Latex Systems – (Severe Exposure)

09900 - 8

Eg-Shel Finish 1st Coat : S – W Cati-Coat Epoxy Filler Sealer B42WA8/B42WA9

2nd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series 3rd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200

(4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat)

B. Metal – (Galvanized) 1. Latex Systems – (Walls, miscellaneous items)

1st Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series 2nd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series

(4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) 2. Dryfall Alkyd Systems – (Ceilings, Metal Decks)

Flat Finish 1st Coat: S – W DTM Acrylic Primer, B66W1

(8 mils wet, 3 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S – W Super Save-Lite dryfall Flat, B48W61

(6 mils wet, 3 mils dry)

C. Drywall – (Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board) 1. Latex Systems

EgShell Finish 1st Coat : S – W ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer, B28W200 (4 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series

3rd Coat: S – W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel B20W200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)

C. Stained or Sealed Concrete Floors

1. 2 coats of Sherwin Williams additive “H&C Shark Grip or FLR’s High Traction Stain” as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

10100 - 1

SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide markerboards and tackboards where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.02 SUBMITTALS



the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage,

and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by





A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS .

A. Markerboards: 1. Provide porcelain enamel marker boards in the dimensions and arrangements

shown on the Drawings, and with the following attributes. a. Factory-built units equal to “Claridge Vitrsteel,” for surface installation.

24 ga. porcelain enamel steel for dry markers, 7/16” particle board with .005 alum. Back Color: White, moisture retardant backer sheet. Extruded

10100 - 2

aluminum trim satin anodized finish frame finish. b. Refer to plans for quantities and unit sizes – full length and width with

combination units: 2x4 MB. Prepare shop drawings and color selector for approval by Owner and Architect.

B. Tackboards:

1. Provide tackboards in the dimensions and arrangements shown on the Drawings, and with the following attributes. a. Factory-built units equal to “Claridge Fabricork” vinyl Item No. 1380,

Color –T421 white, 1/16” thick with 3/8” Duracore, ½” total thickness, weight 1 lb./ft.” with cork surface. Extruded aluminum trim satin anodized finish frame finish.

b. Refer to plans for quantities and unit sizes. Full length and width with combination units 2x4 TB. Prepare shop drawings and color selector for approval by Owner and Architect.

C. Acceptable manufacturer:

1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.; 2. Other manufacturers approved in advance by the Architect include Nelson

Adams, American Chalkboard, Aywon, Best-Rite, Lemco, Marsh, Tri-adco, Walltalkers, Windel International - Weyel.

2.02 OTHER MATERIALS




3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

END OF SECTION

10170 - 1

SECTION 10170 TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Provide solid plastic core toilet compartments, and urinal screen dividers where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.02 SUBMITTALS



the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage,

and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Color and pattern charts showing colors and patterns available in the specified

products from the proposed manufacturer. 5. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by





A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS AND URINAL SCREENS

A. Design: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 1. Doors: Not less than 1" thick solid plastic with coat hooks, scratch and impact

resistance. 2. Partitions: Not less than 1" thick solid plastic scratch and impact resistance.

10170 - 2

3. Pilasters: Not less than 1" thick and overhead braces. 4. Urinal Screens: Not less than 1” thick, with continuous “U” shape or double

“T” wall mounting bracket or wall mounted “T” end stile. 5. Design: Floor mounted, solid plastic scratch and impact resistance, overhead

braced. 6. Finish: Colors selected by the architect from standard colors but reserves the

right to select options for maroon and gold – earth-tones per color scheme at not additional cost.

A.02 HARDWARE A. Compartments to be supplied with all hardware and fasteners for a complete installation.

Doors to be installed on 1/8” thick heavy extruded brite anodized type 6463T5 aluminum hinges which wrap around both the door and pilaster. Hinges to be fastened to door and pilaster with one-way head thru-bolts. Top hinges to have opposing nylon cams which are factory set at 30 degrees open for in-swing and closed for out swing. Top hinge to be reinforced with ¼” stainless steel rod. Stirke keeper and throw latch to be heavy extruded brite anodized type 6463T5 aluminum. Coat hook/ wall bumper to be heavy chrome plated Zamac and fastened with 5/8” one way head tamper-proof screws.

2.03 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Accurate Partitions, Bobrick, Bradley, All American Metal Corporation, American Sanitary Partition Corporation, AMPCO, Capitol Partitions, Inc., Comtec, Industies, Flush Metal Partition, General Partition, Knickerbocker Partition Corp., Metpar.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the

approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

C. Adjust doors, except doors to handicapped compartments, to remain at a uniformly

open position when unlocked. D. Touchup scratches and abrasions to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a

distance of five feet. END OF SECTION

10200 - 1

SECTION 10200 ARCHITECTURAL LOUVERS AND VENTS


A. Provide architectural louvers and vents where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. Refer to MEP drawings for locations and sizes.

B. Related work:


1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance

with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,

anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;

4. Samples of the proposed products, showing profiles, joining, and finish. 5. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when

approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.





10200 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL GRILLES

A. Provide metal grilles in the arrangements and dimensions shown on the Drawings,

and with the following attributes. 1. Provide louver blades and frame fabricated from ASTM B – 209, 5005

sheet or 6063-T5 or T-52 alloy complying with ASTM B221, with a minimum thickness of 0.080” in all sections.

2. Fabricate from extruded or roll-formed aluminum only; brake-shapes will not be acceptable.

3. Design the mullion members in such a manner that, when the louver blades are attached to the mullion, a projecting lip from the mullion will preclude the possibility of light leakage.

4. Provide acrylic or polyester finish in colors selected by the Architect from the standard colors of the approved manufacturer.

5. Louver Depth: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Louver Blade Angle: 45 degrees, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Performance Requirements: As per AMCA standard 500 .

2.02 LOUVER SCREENS

A. Fit aluminum louver screen frames with screening covering louver openings, 1/16” inch square mesh formed with 0.063” dia. aluminum wire.

2.03 ANCHORS AND INSERTS

A. Of type, size and material required for type of loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installation. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors.

B. Acceptable products: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc., Industrial Louvers, Inc., Arrow United

Industries, Airstream Products Div. Penn Ventilator, Co. Inc. 2. Equal products of other manufacturers when approved in advance by the

Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS


10200 - 3

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the approved Shop

Drawings and the recommendations of the manufacturers as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position in true alignment within a tolerance of one in 1000 vertically and horizontally.

END OF SECTION

10350 - 1

SECTION 10350 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLE

PART 1. - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: 1. Ground-Set, Fixed Cone Tapered Aluminum Flagpole. 1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01200. Product data and installation instructions for type of flagpole required. Provide shop drawings of flagpole and bases, showing general layout, joining, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting systems.

PART 2. - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

Aabec Pole Div. Morgan-Francis Co., American Flagpole Div. of Kearney -National Inc. Baartol Co. Inc., Concord Industries, Inc., EMC Div. Eder Manufacturing Corp.

A. Aluminum Flagpole: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241, alloy 6063-T, having a minimum wall thickness of 3/16" inch (0.1875 "), tensile strength not less than 30,000 psi, and a yield point of 25, 000 psi. Heat - treat and age - harden after fabrication.

B. Provide 1 - 50 foot cone-taperd aluminum flagpole. C. Shaft Finish: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the Aluminum

Association system for designating aluminum finishes. Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32), finished as follows:

Natural clear anodized finish complying with AA-A22A41, Class I (0.7 mil). D. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, 4” size. 1 - 20 - oz. copper

with 2.3 - karat gold leaf finish. E. Truck: Ball - bearing, non-fouling, revolving, double-track assembly of cast metal

finished to match pole shaft. F. Cleats: two 9-inch cast metal cleats with fasteners, finished to match pole shaft. G. Halyards: Provide one continuous halyard for each flagpole, as follows:

1. Polypropylene, braided, white. PART 3. – EXCECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install as per manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

10450 - 1

SECTION 10450 SIGNAGE AND CAST LETTERS


A. Provide identifying devices where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Room Identification, for interior and exterior use, 2. Cast Lettering per plans

B. Related work: Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily


1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of section 01340.

B. Product data, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance

with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation,

anchorage, and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;

4. Samples of the proposed products, showing profiles, joining, and finish. 5. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when




B. Certification by the manufacturer that its product design and construction

complies with Section 4.30 of the ADA Accessibility Guidelines must accompany bid.

10450 - 2

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AIND HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.

PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Spanjer, Chicago, Ill. 2. A.R.K. - Ramos, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 3. Metal Arts, Mandan, North Dakota 4. Southwell, San Antonio, Texas

2.02 TYPES

A. Provide cast methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thickness as indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790.

B. Aluminum frame shall be 1/8” thick with holes for mechanical fasteners and

aluminum backplate, of one piece or welded rigid fabrication. 2.03 ANCHORS AND INSERTS

A. Use nonferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized anchorages and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Furnish inserts for masonry applications.

2.04 PANEL SIGNAGE

A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Comply with ADA and TAS Standards. 1. Braille Characters: Grade 2; Raised 1/32”, placed below tactile characters. 2. Tactile Characters: Raised 1/32”, Upper case letters. 3. Typestyles: All caps; Sans Serif, width-to-height ratio of between 3:5 and

1:1 and a stoke-width-to-height ratio of 1:5 and 1:10. (Helvetica Medium or close match.) Once bid is awarded, vendor shall supply agency with typestyles available.

4. Character Height: 3/4” 5. Spacing: Spacing between vertical elements of the characters shall be 1/8”

mm. Spacing between characters and braille shall be 3/16” mm. 6. Dimension for Braille: Dot diameter - .059 in., Inter-dot spacing - .090 in.,

Horizontal separation between cells - .241 in., Vertical separation between

10450 - 3

cells - .395 in. 7. Raised 1/32”, Written description with accompanied braille placed directly

below the symbol. 8. Finish and contrast: Non-glare finish. White characters on a solid

background. Color to be approved by agency. 9. Assurance: A written assurance that all Braille is correct is required. Color

to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standards. Signs shall be secured with tamper proof screws.

10. Panel sizes = 8”x8” = 1 units, PER DOOR OPENING multi-colored with ½” round edges plus an extra 5 Units and new Directional Signs = 6 - 18”x18” multi-colored.

11. Signage text to be provided at submittal phase. 12. Exterior panels to be waterproof for tamperproof installation.

2.05 BUILDING CAST LETTERS

Cast Letters: Form individual letters by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of character and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.

• 8" high cast alum. letters with baked enamel finish, • Letter style: Regular Helvetica for exterior installation – Metal panel and

metal stud construction - installation at exterior facade. Prep work as required per shop drawings.

CITY OF LAREDO UTILITIES DEPARTMENT NORTH LAREDO WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

ADMINISTRATION CENTER



B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the

approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

END OF SECTION

10500 - 1

SECTION 10500 METAL LOCKERS AND BENCHES

PART 1. – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Lockers: Free standing standard double tier (athletic), triple tier and full length lockers, and ADA – TAS compliant lockers with sloped tops; and padlock hasps with metal supports as per plans. The contractor is to provide 4” and 18” CMU base as per details with tilework. Provide pedestal and folding-type wood benches. Refer to floor plans and interior elevations for quantities and details. Ensure compliance with all ADA – TAS requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturers installation instructions in accordance with Section 01300. Indicate locker type, size, configurations, installation details, layout of groups of lockers, accessories, color and finish, and numbering.

PART 2. – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER AND TYPE

A. Equal to Lyon Metal Product, Inc. double tier lockers with enlarged ADA

approved lockers as per plans, interior elevations and specifications. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Southwest Solutions Group

Matt M. Howell Direct: 214.442.9720 Mobile: 512-987-7577 Fax: 512.336.1358

Penco. Medart. Republic Storage Systems Company Interior Steel Company Wildcat Manufacturer Athletic Lockers 2.03 MATERIALS: A. Construction: 1. Sheet Steel: Mild cold-rolled sheet steel of the following minimum thickness: 2. Body and Shelf: 24 gauge

10500 - 2

3. Doors: 16 gauge, standard venting and athletic type open type for venting 4. Door Frames: 16 gauge 5. Hinges: 14 gauge 6. Base, top and trim: 18 gauge

B. Accessories: Provide each locker with one double prong ceiling hook, three single prong hooks and metal number plate.

C. Benches: Hardwood bench shall be clear hardwood tops, 9-1/2" wide by 1-1/4" in

thick, natural finish with two coats of sealer lacquer as manufactured by Lyon Metal Products or equal.

D. Proposed designated for ADA handicap compliance with folding bench being 22"

wide by 4'-0" long. Coordinate exact location with architect at field for ADA TAS approval. Submit shop drawings as required. Refer to accessories schedule in drawings.

E. Bench Pedestals: All locker benches shall be supported by two steel pedestal.

Overall height shall be 17-3/4". Each pedestal shall be attached to top by screws and shall be anchored to floor with drop-in expansion bolts. Color to be selected by Architect. Provide regular and ADA benches. Provide ADA bench per floor plan as to comply with sizes per standards. Provide shop drawings for layout.

F. Fabrication Types:

1. Locker Units: 2 tiered Type: 15”D x 12”W x 36”L, open venting for a total of 72" plus 4" base plus sloped top (open grilles for ventilation). Refer to plans and interior elevations for quantities.

G. ADA Locker Fabrication: Lockers Unit: 18 inches wide x 18 inches deep x 48"

inches tall, plus 18" base plus sloped top. Refer to plans and interior elevations. Comply with TAS-HC standards.

Componenets:

1. Bodies: 24 ga. steel framed and flanged with stiffener ribs; electrically spot welded.

2. Door Frame: 16 ga. steel formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body.

3. Doors: One piece 16 ga. steel with both vertical edges formed into channel shaped formation; top and bottom shall be flanged at 90 angle.

4. Hinges: Three for doors 42" and higher. Weld securely to unit body and rivet to unit door.

5. Provide locking handle for padlock. Locking device supplied by Owner. 6. Bases: CMU with rubber base as per drawings, covered with tilework. 7. Ends: 16 ga. finished end panels, filler panels, and sloped metal tops to close

off all openings.

10500 - 3

H. Provide ventilation openings at top and bottom of each locker. Provide number plates.

I. Finishes: Clean, degrease and neutralize metal: prime and finish with two coats of

baked enamel. Provide same color inside and outside of locker. Color as selected by Architect.

PART 3. - EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Take site dimensions affecting this work. Ensure that bases are properly sized and located. Install as per manufacturer’s recommendation.

END OF SECTION

10520 - 1

SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide fire extinguishers and cabinets where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data, submit:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance

with the specified requirements; 3. Dimensioned drawings as needed to depict the space required for these

items, and their interface with the work of other trades. 4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when





A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - GENERAL 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. J.L. Industries, Larsen’s Manufacturing, Co., Watrous Inc.

10520 - 2

2.01 CABINETS A. Where shown on the Drawings, provide factory pre-finished steel cabinets. B. Semi-recessed box partially recessed 4” in walls of shallow depth complying with

ADA and TAS standards. 1. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, ground

smooth. 2. Expose Trim: One piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge. 3. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with Fire Extinguisher lettering applied to

door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.

4. Application Process: Silk screen. 5. Break Glass Panel: Float glass, 1/8” thick, with inside latch and lock. 6. Hardware: Provide either cam-action latch or concealed door pull and friction

latch. Provide concealed type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. TYPE A: At each fire extinguisher cabinet, provide one multipurpose chemical fire extinguisher with UL rating of A,B;C, 10lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container per locations on plans.

B. TYPE B: At each fire extinguisher , provide one multi-purpose chemical fire

extinguisher with UL rating of A,B;C, 10lb nominal capacity, supported by wall mounted metal bracket per locations on plans.

C. TYPE C: At each fire extinguisher cabinet, provide one carbon dioxide chemical

fire extinguisher with UL rating of B;C, 10lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container in IDF-MDF / Data Rooms.

2.02 MOUNTING BRACKET

A. Provide fire extinguisher with wall mounting metal bracket as per plan locations.

B. Service, charge, and inspection tag each fire extinguisher not more than five calendar days prior to the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work as that Date is established by the Owner.



3.02 INSTALLATION


10520 - 3

B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures as approved by the Owner, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

C. Locate bracket mounted extinguishers where directed complying with all A.D.A. and

T.A.S. Standards.

END OF SECTION

10800 - 1

SECTION 10800 TOLIET ROOM ACCESSORIES


A. Provide toilet room accessories where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS



the specified requirements; 3. Manufacturers’ data clearly defining the required support and other details of

installation to enable proper interface with the work of other trades. 4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by




B. Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any

mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period. Warranty period: 15 years from date of substantial Completion.


A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to Construction Documents Schedule. NOTE: No substitutions.

10800 - 2

2.2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and fasteners:

1. Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a retaining force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted, and well suited for use with the supporting construction. Screws, bolts and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed.

2. Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide oval head fasteners with finish matching the accessory.

B. Provide stainless steel with satin finish complying with AISI Type 302/304, with

polish No. 4, 0.034 inch (22 gage) min, thickness.. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60. D. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B

456, Type SC 2. E. Mirror glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thickness, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, class

1, Quality q2, and silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.

2.3 SPECIALTIES

Refer to Construction Documents, Room Accessory Schedule, and Enlarged Floor Plans. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS


B. Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner’s representative.


A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

B. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, and in accordance with the manufacturer’ s recommendations.

C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lf, complying with ASTM F 446.

END OF SECTION

10810 - 1

SECTION 10810 METAL PLAQUE

PART 1. - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, materials, accessories and incidentals necessary for a complete installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01200. Product data and installation instructions for cast metal plaque. Shop drawings with layout furnished by Architect will be required for approval.

PART 2. - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL

A. Product of Southwell Company, San Antonio, Texas, Spanjer or A.R.K. Ramos or approved.

B. Tablets shall be cast from high quality bronze ingots. Casting shall be free of all

pits and gas holes and all letters shall be sharp and hand tooled. Border and faces of raised letters shall be satin finish and background shall be stippled finish and oxidized. Two protective coatings of clear lacquer shall be sprayed on completed tablet.

C. Quantity: One - tablet size shall be 24" x 36" each as designed by Architect.

D. Letter style: From standard selection

E. Tablets shall contain lettering of similar sign and design to that provided by

Architect. Submit rubbings for approval. Mount tablet where directed by architect.

F. Mounting: Flush against wall surface. PART 3. - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications per wall condition.

END OF SECTION

11132 - 1

SECTION 11132 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: This Section specifies recessed ceiling electrically operated front projection screens for per floor plan locations.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10340 - Common Work Results for Electrical: Power supply, conduit and

wiring. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Gain: Indication of screen’s luminance or brightness measured perpendicular to screen center and relative to magnesium carbonate block, which serves as standard for 1.0 gain. Higher numbers indicate greater brightness.

B. Viewing Angle: Horizontal angle from perpendicular center of screen at which gain or brightness decreases by 50%.

C. Format: Proportion of projection screen viewing area expressed as a ratio of height to width. 1. Square: 1.0 to 1.0 2. Cinemascope or Anamorphic Format: 1.0 to 2.35. 3. HDTV Format: 1.0 to 1.78. 4. Letterbox: 1.0 to 1.85. 5. NTSC or Video Format: 1.0 to 1.33. 6. Wide Format: 1.0 to 1.6.

1.04 REFERENCES A. International Code Council (ICC):

1. International Building Code. B. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE):

1. SMPTE RP 94-2000, Gain Determination of Front Projection Screens. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). D. Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed action submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and

Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s technical product data

sheet, for specified products. 1. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, fabrication and installation details.

11132 - 2

1. Include electric wiring diagrams. D. Samples: Submit 2 6 inches × 6 inches (152 × 152 mm) samples of screen finish

material. 1.06 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Assurance: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified

performance characteristics and physical properties. 2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials

comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements.

3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for products in accordance with Section 01740 - Closeout Submittals.

B. Include: 1. Manufacturer’s instructions detailing maintenance requirements. 2. Parts catalog that includes complete list of repair and replacement parts, with cuts

and identifying numbers. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Worker experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in

work similar to that required of this project. B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with International Building Code (IBC) City] of Laredo. C. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct preinstallation meeting to verify project

requirements and manufacturer’s instructions. Comply with Section 01200 - Project Meetings.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Storage and Protection:

1. Store electric projection screens in a dry, ventilated area, protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature less than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C).

B. Handling: Handle electrically operated projection screen materials with care in order to prevent damage.

C. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Separate waste materials for reuse in accordance with Section 01700 -

Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

11132 - 3

1.010 PROJECT AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Project Location: Perform electrically operated projection screen work when

temperatures are greater than 40 degrees F 4 degrees C. 1.011 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence With Other Work: Comply with projection screen manufacturer’s written recommendations for sequencing construction operations.

1.012 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard

warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

C. Warranty: Commencing on date of acceptance by Owner. 1.013 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Use standard product line parts produced by manufacturer of electrically operated projection screens.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ensure manufacturer has minimum 5 years experience manufacturing components similar to or exceeding project requirements.

B. Manufacturer: Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. or Approved equal. 1. Contact: P.O. Box 137, 3100 N. Detroit St., Warsaw, IN 46581-0137; Telephone:

(800) 622-3737, (574) 267-8101; Fax: (877) 325-4832, (574) 267-7804; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.da-lite.com.

2.02 PROJECTION SCREEN SYSTEMS A. Ceiling Recessed Electrically Operated Projection Screens.

1. Screen Operation: Electrically operated, UL and ULC listed, retractable, with 2 rigid metal rollers.

2. Motors: a. Quantity: Refer to Plans, coordinate electrical requirements as required. b. 120 V, 60 Hz, 3-wire with ground, with quick connect male plug-in connector

permanently lubricated, quick reversal type designed for mounting inside roller.

c. Amperage: 2.4 amps maximum. d. Include automatic thermal overload protection, integral gears, capacitor and

electric brake to prevent coasting. e. Include preset, adjustable limit switches to automatically stop fabric door and

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.da-lite.com/

11132 - 4

viewing surface in the UP and DOWN position. f. Housing: Inside metal roller.

3. Controls: a. Electric Screen Control Switch:

1) Wall mounted, 115 V, 60 Hz 3 position button control switch. b. Junction Box: Internally attached to the screen case.

4. Screen Mounting: Ceiling recessed, UL and plenum rated. a. Include mounting hardware and roller mounting brackets that adjust to allow

centering or offsetting of the screen within the case. 5. Screen Case: Designed to receive mounting hardware and sized to suit projection

screen. a. Extruded aluminum.

1) Case Bottom: Self-trimming with built-in flange and equipped with concealed-hinge automatic aluminum closure door for raising and lowering the viewing surface and concealed-hinge aluminum access panel.

2) End Caps: Heavy gage steel. 3) Steel Brackets: Adjustable. 4) Finish: White.

6. Screen Size: Viewing Area: H 84 inches × W 96 inches, per Floor Plan.

7. Acceptable Material: Advantage Deluxe Electrol Projection Screens. a. Non-Tensioned Screen Material:

1) Front projection, flame retardant, mildew resistant fiberglass, black backing without standard black borders, easily cleaned with mild soap and water solution.

2) Bottom of fabric to form a pocket holding a metal rod. 3) Seams: Seamless in all standard sizes].

b. Gain: To SMPTE RP 94-2000, 1.5. c. Viewing Angle: 50. d. Format: Video or NTSC - 1.0 to 1.33.

1) Material: Rolled, can be easily cleaned with mild soap and water solution. e. Acceptable Materials: Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc.:

1) High Contrast Matte White with GREENGUARD Certification #90068-1.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Screen Drop: Extra drop of 24” inches white fabric at top, not to 13 feet (4 m)

maximum total surface height including picture area.

11132 - 5

B. Single Low Voltage Control Internal. 1. Wireless Remote Control for LVC: Radio Frequency Remote with Frequency

Range Extender 3-button handheld remote control for UP, DOWN and STOP functions with single motor, low voltage control unit.

C. Video Projector Interface Control: External, DC controls and white rocker switch with cover plate for wall switch operation.

D. Serial Control Board: 1. SCB-100 RS-232: External and with NET-100 Ethernet-Serial Adapter.

E. Installation Hardware: Fasteners and other components of type, size and spacing recommended by manufacturer for complete, functional and secure installation of electric screen.

2.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01200 - Product Substitution Procedures.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS

A. Provide experienced and qualified technicians to install electrically operated projection screens.

3.02 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical

bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc., technical data sheets.

3.03 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable with electrically operated projection screen installation.

2. Ensure electrical power supply is installed to meet electric projection screen requirements in accordance with Electrical subcontractor. a. Verify type and location of power supply.

3. Inform Architect of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. 4. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate electric projection screen placement with other ceiling and wall mounted

components. 3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric projection screens in accordance with reviewed shop drawings at locations and heights indicated. 1. Verify locations with Architect prior to installation.

11132 - 6

B. Install screen housing and make electrical connections in conjunction with installation of suspended, gypsum board furr downs ceiling system.

C. Screen fabric to be permanently attached to roller. D. Securely install screens plumb and level to supporting substrate.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Have manufacturer’s technical representative schedule

site visits to review work as follows: 1. After delivery and storage of products. 2. When preparatory work for which work of this Section depends is complete, but

before installation begins. 3. 2 times during progress of work at 25% and 60% of completion. 4. Upon completion of work, after cleaning is carried out.

B. Testing and Inspection: Operate each screen 3 times to ensure viewing surfaces extend and retract through full range of motion. 1. Verify controls, limit switches, and other components function as designed and

meet project requirements. 2. Ensure viewing surface raising operation fully engages and lifts screen closure

door into closed position. 3. Adjust motors, controls and components to allow for smooth, unobstructed screen

operation. 3.07 FINAL CLEANING

A. Perform cleanup in accordance with Section 01740 - Cleaning. B. Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect electrically operated projection screens from damage during construction in

accordance with Section 01750 - Protecting Installed Construction. B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by electrically operated projection screen

work. 3.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Perform work during regular trade working hours satisfactory to Owner.

END OF SECTION

12520 - 1

SECTION 12520 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS


A. Provide horizontal louver blinds at all interior and exterior Window Types where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:


1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturers’ specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements. 3. Samples of the blades, showing all colors available in the products proposed to

be used. 4. Manufacturers’ recommended installation procedures which, when approved by





A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS All Int. & Ext. Window Types require Blinds

except for Lobby. A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide “Mark I Dustguard” blinds, or equal

products of Ohline or Levelor, using 1” wide spring-tempered virgin aluminum slats, and finished in color or colors selected by the Architect from standard colors of the approved manufacturer.

12520 - 2

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bali, Hunter Douglas.

2.2 OTHER MATERIALS


PART 3 - EXECUTION

SURFACE CONDITIONS


INSTALLATION

A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturers’

recommendations as approved by the Architect, anchoring all components firmly into position, plumb, level, and in proper operating condition.

B. Upon completion of the installation, put each operating component through at least

five complete cycles, adjusting as required to achieve optimum operation.

C. Touchup scratches and blemishes to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet.

END OF SECTION

Metal Building System 13 12 20 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 13 12 20 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. It is the intent of these documents to allow the General Contractor to utilize pre-engineered metal building components, i.e. straight-leg columns or tapered leg columns, beams, and purlins provided that all structural and architectural design limitations are met. All columns shown as round columns are to remain as round columns.

B. This Section includes single-story, rigid-frame-type pre-engineered metal buildings of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated, and secondary framing members for roof purlins at conventional steel framed buildings as shown on drawings.

1. Roof system consists of the manufacturer's standard standing-seam insulated roof. 2. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided

components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated and specified requirements.

A. Refer to Division 5 for steel panels.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure.

1. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in MBMA's "Design Practices Manual."

B. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxiliary and collateral loads, are indicated on

the drawings and shall be in compliance with Standard Building Codes.

1. Basic design loads include live load and wind load, in addition to the dead load. 2. Auxiliary loads include dynamic live loads such as those generated by cranes and

material handling equipment. 3. Collateral loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metal

building system such as plumbing and mechanical systems.

C. Structural Framing and Roof and Siding Panels: Design primary and secondary structural members and exterior covering materials for applicable loads and combinations of loads in accordance with the Metal Building Manufacturers Association's (MBMA) "Design Practices Manual."

1. Structural Steel: Comply with American Institute of Steel Construction's (AISC) "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" for design requirements and allowable stresses.


2. Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel Institute's (AISI)

"Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" and "Design of Light Gage Steel Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses.

3. Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's (AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" for welding procedures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Submittal Conference: The shop drawing submittal will be presented in a meeting held at

project site at a mutually acceptable time and attended by the General Contractor's representative, the metal building company Engineer, who is familiar with all building components, the Architect and Structural Engineer.

C. Product data consisting of: metal building system manufacturer's product information for

building components and accessories.

D. Shop drawings for metal building structural framing system, roofing, and other metal building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data.

1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Include details showing fabrication and assembly of the metal building system. Show anchor bolts settings and sidewall, end wall, and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections.

E. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts or chips showing

full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for metal roofing and siding panels with factory-applied finishes.

F. Installer certificates signed by metal building manufacturer written certification certifying that

the installer complies with requirements included under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Professional engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located, verifying that the structural framing and covering panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to erect the pre-engineered metal building who has specialized in the erection and installation of types of metal buildings systems similar to that required for this project and who is certified in writing by the metal building system manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer's products.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide pre-engineered metal buildings manufactured by a firm

experienced in manufacturing metal buildings systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system components, including

structural framing, wall and roof covering, and accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the


pre-engineered metal building system. Metal building systems having equal performance characteristics with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality is on the proposed.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Roofing and Siding Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing and siding panel manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal wall and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

1. Warranty period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall and roof panels is 20 years

after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal building systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following:

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide metal building

systems provided by one of the following:

1. MBCI. 2. Tri-City Steel Co. 3. American Steel Building Co., Inc. 4. Armco Steelox Building Systems. 5. Atlantic Building Systems. 6. Behlen Manufacturing Co. 7. Bigbee Steel Buildings, Inc. 8. Butler Manufacturing Co. 9. Ceco Buildings Division. 10. Chief Industries, Inc. 11. Dean Steel Buildings, Inc. 12. Garco Building Systems. 13. Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc. 14. Kirby Building Systems, Inc. 15. Mesco Metal Buildings Corp. 16. Package Steel Buildings Corp. 17. Pascoe Building Systems. 18. Southern Structures, Inc. 19. Space Master Buildings. 20. Star Buildings Division, H. H. Robertson Co. 21. United Structures of America. 22. Varco-Pruden Buildings. 23. Whirlwind Steel Buildings, Inc.

2.2 STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Rigid Frames: Fabricate from hot-rolled structural steel shapes. Provide factory-welded, shop-painted, built-up "I-beam"-shape frames consisting of tapered or parallel flange beams and parallel columns. Furnish frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill field-bolted assembly.


1. Provide length of span and spacing of frames indicated. Slight variations in length of

span and frame spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard.

2. Provide rigid frames at end walls where indicated. 3. Maximum and/or minimum dimensions of Rigid Frames are indicated on the drawings. 4. Maximum horizontal deflections of the Rigid Frames at the highest eave are as

indicated on the General Notes of the Structural drawings. 5. End wall columns: Provide factory welded, shop painted end wall columns not less than

14-ga. built-up shape or cold-formed sections. 6. Horizontal Wind Braces: Portal frames with straight leg columns. Refer to Structural

Drawings for location.

B. Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing members:

1. Roof Purlins, Sidewall and End wall Girts: "C"-or "Z"-shaped sections fabricated from 14

gage min. shop-painted roll-formed steel. 2. Eave Struts: Unequal flange "C"-shaped sections formed to provide adequate backup for both wall and roof panels. Fabricate from 14-gage (0.0598-inch) shop-painted roll-formed steel. 3. Flange and Sag Bracing: as designed by MFG. engineer.

4. Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold-formed galvanized steel sections.

C. Wind Bracing: Provide wind bracing without using steel rods U.N.O. on plans. Use vertical

straight leg columns where necessary.

D. Bolts: Provide shop-painted bolts except when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Provide zinc-plated or cadmium-plated bolts when structural framing components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels. Provide anchor bolts and setting templates for installation into foundation.

E. Shop Painting: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 for brush-off blast cleaning, And SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning.

1. Prime structural steel primary and secondary framing members with the manufacturer's

standard rust-inhibitive primer. 2.3 ROOFING PANELS

A. Face Sheets: Fabricate wall and roof panel face sheets to the profile or configuration indicated from 24-gauge, structural quality, Grade D, zinc-coated steel sheets. Finish shall be equal to MBCI's Galvalume Plus. All sheets shall have a uniform finish.

1. Clips: Provide 16-gage (0.0598-inch) panel clips. 2. Clips: height to be determined by manufacturer to accommodate insulation. 3. Cleats: Factory-calked, mechanically seamed cleats from 24-gage (0.0239-inch), Grade

C, zinc-coated steel sheets.

B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand loads.

1. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels.

2. Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application and galvanized or cadmium-plated fasteners for interior applications.

3. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools


to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer.

4. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing or siding sheets by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

C. Accessories: Provide the following sheet metal accessories factory-formed of the same material in the same finish as roof and wall panels:

1. Flashings. 2. Closers. 3. Fillers. 4. Metal expansion joints. 5. Ridge covers. 6. Fascias.

D. Closers shall be metal with finish to match roof.

E. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100 percent solids grey polyisobutylene compound sealing

tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape 7/8 inch wide and 3/16 inch thick.

F. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane.

2.4 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide coated steel sheet metal accessories with coated steel roofing panels.

B. Gutters: Form in 20' foot-long sections, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Size in accordance with SMACNA. Join sections with riveted and soldered or sealed joints. Furnish gutter supports spaced 48" on center, constructed of 18 gauge galvalume. C. Downspouts: Form in 10-foot-long sections, complete with elbows and offsets. Join sections

with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 5 feet on center in between. Finish to match wall panels.

D. Pigsnout or Downspout Elbow shall be of color & finish matching the gutter.


NLWWTPA 15050 June 2018 Laredo, TX Page 1 of 20

SECTION 15050

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work

herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any

departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect.

C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material,

fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all

equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work.

B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on

the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the

Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner.

D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or

items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown.

E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be

reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the


discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract.

F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to

furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades.

G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope".

H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and

placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others.

1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings.

B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every

transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval.

C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be

performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate

clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations.

1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION

A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to

visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings.

B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility

services, and determine requirements for connections.

C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated.


1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division.

B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to

Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems.

C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division.

1.06 PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS

A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities.

1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements.

B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect,

owner and contractor.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment,

pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage.

C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner.

1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration.

B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to

prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items.

C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise.

D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the

opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner.


1.10 APPLICABLE CODES

A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof.

B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all

charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required.

C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards:

1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association, ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.,

ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association, AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC.

D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city

building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences.

E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with

the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS

A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1.

B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive,

but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the

Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown.


D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested",

"Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.

E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests

for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean

supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe

operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean

"Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform.

J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated,

requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities.

K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified

is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding.

L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents

including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular


words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards.

1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only.

B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are

to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum.

C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the

Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints.

D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of

equipment, materials and methods.

E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail.

F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that

another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval.

G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification

states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval.

H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that

"OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein.


I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 16.

J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for

the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner.

K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will

automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in

accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the

Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions.

N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or

electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment.

1.13 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder:


1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description.

2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional

required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor.

4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated.

5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available.

6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings.

7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method.

8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted

is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".

B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals.

C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with

design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions.

D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal

does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents.

E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following

categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this

submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required

exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the


equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted.

3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

5. CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor’s stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings.

6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall

be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer.

G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer

for review.

H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items:

1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15. Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories.


20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. 33. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34. Coordination Drawings.

I. Refer to other Division 15 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide

samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer.

J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with

equipment submittal for all AHU’s, ACCU’s, and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor.

1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials.

Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube

removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items.


B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions.

C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary

coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors.

1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 15, indicate the following installed conditions:

1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations

of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair.

2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.

B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations.

C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on

the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times.

D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor

does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance.

E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for

all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points.

F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and

delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings.


G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows:

CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS

DATE:

(NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR)

BY:_______________________________

(SIGNATURE)

(NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR)

BY:_______________________________ (SIGNATURE)

1.16 OPERATING MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS

A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date.

B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed

schedule submitted.

C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.

D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items

outlined in Section of Division 15.


1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in “D ring type” binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow ¼” of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 15 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins.

B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to

the requirements specified in Division 15, include the following information for equipment items:

1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show

equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts.

6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the

Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with

listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required.

C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period.

1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts.

B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in

triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for


review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines.

C. Refer to other Division 15 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements.

1.20 FINAL COMPLETION

A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 15 for additional requirements.

B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final

acceptance.

C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance.

1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE

A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction

period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below.

B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order

for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties.

C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing,

adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less

than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance.

E. Refer to Sections in Division 15 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES

A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner’s risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney’s fees arising out of or resulting thereof.

B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for


maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner.

C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project.

D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant.

E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect’s written consent.

It is agreed that “MEP” hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner.

If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for “record purposes”, then an AutoCAD based compact disc (“CD”) will be prepared. The “CD” will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a “plot” format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration.

F. At the Architect/Owner’s request, Engineer will prepare one “CD” of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the “CD” to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the “CD” will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD”.

The “CD” will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The “CD” will be prepared in a “.dwg” format to permit the end user to revise the drawings.

G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The “CD” will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service.


A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer.

B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks.

C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms,

kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel.

D. Access Doors: shall be as follows:


1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for additional rough-in

requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details.


14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer.

15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated.

16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer.

17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed.

18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates

permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws.

b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings.

3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for

Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner.

7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of "Installer."

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and

materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled

to be removed.


E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

3.04 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER

A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the

Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final.

2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building.

3.05 DEMOLITION AND WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS

A. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to the existing piping, duct, equipment and other apparatus related to this phase of the work. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by his contractor, who shall produce drawings that shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be apart of this Contract.

B. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and

tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review.

C. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" shall be removed

including, associated pipe and duct pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment.

D. During the construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service.

Construction equipment, material tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted.

E. Certain work during the demolition phase of construction may require overtime or night time

shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing.


F. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner,

and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately.

G. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the working occupants of the building shall

not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area.

H. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage that might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Corporate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work.

I. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing pipe, duct, etc., and the reconnecting of

the existing equipment and plumbing fixtures as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, ventilation and plumbing services for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption.

J. All existing plumbing fixtures, pipe, duct, materials, equipment, controls and appurtenances

not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place.

K. Pipe, duct, equipment and controls serving mechanical, plumbing and owner's equipment, etc., which is to remain but which is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition.

L. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to

furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime.

M. Refer to Architectural "Demolition and/or Alteration" plans for actual location of walls, ceiling,

etc., being removed and/or remodeled.

END OF SECTION Mech/Elec. Equipment Coordination Sheet

Mark # Unit Type

Manufacturer’s Recomm. Fuse Size (MOCP)

Mark # Unit Type

Manufacturer’s Recomm. Fuse Size (MOCP)



SECTION 15051

STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Section 15950 – HVAC Controls. D. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect, Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by

the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Adjust electrical amp draw on motors to within 80% of rated amp draw. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with

manufacturers' instructions. H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

I. Adjust return air to 500 fpm at each air unit inlet. Replace drive packages as necessary to achieve

design airflows. J. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been

properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS


A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.

B. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative

who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season

within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with

Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and

shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional

data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Mechanical Division will secure the services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and

balancing. B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 15990. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations

and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15070 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section describes general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the structure.SG

B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of every description and of whatever substance encountered to the depth indicated, or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawing. Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material. Compact backfill material.

C. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section

of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings.

1.02 APPLICABE CODES

A. Local Codes and Ordinances

B. Texas Safety Standards

C. OSHA – Section 1926.650 1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS

A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of these provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION, ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET, THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653, OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS.

PART 2 – BEDDING MATERIAL 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect.

B. Use clean sand. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified

compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL


A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by Architect.

B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture

content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches (4”).

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION

A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner, and in conformance with safety codes.

B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling.

C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping.

3.02 LOCATION

A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on drawings

B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes.

C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements.

3.03 DEWATERING

A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation.

3.04 TIMING

A. Do not backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested, inspected and approved.

B. Coordinate with the work of others, and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING

A. Place bedding material under, around, and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8” in depth,

B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and to provide uniform support for the pipe. B. Cover pipe with bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12” depth before

adding other backfill. 3.06 BACKFILLING


A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade, or as shown on drawings.

B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12” in depth.

3.07 COMPACTION

A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95% of maximum density, taking care not to damage the pipe.

B. Compact all backfill under footings, slabs, and other structures to 95% of maximum density

or more, if required by the Architect. C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlements, or at least 85% of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING

A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface of grade.

B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to prevent pipe damage.

3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations.

B. Minimize number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls.

C. Support footings, foundations, and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible chance of damage, and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage.

D. Backfill under footings and bearing walls, using maximum compaction or concrete or

proportions as specified for footings.

E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services, foundations, cables, conduit lines or foundations. Repair any existing underground work accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.10 UNDER EXISTING SLAB INSTALLATION

A. When breaking out an existing floor slab, make a saw cut and remove concrete. When repouring concrete, compact the fill to the same specifications as the building fill. Re: Architectural/Structural. Make necessary saw cuts and patching as required.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15080 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 15010 – General Provisions

2. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods

3. Division 2 – Site Work

B. Description: This section described general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating excavation, backfill, and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings. The arbitrary line of demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5’ outside the building perimeters.

C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be

familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C. Secs. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto, and to WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET, THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653, OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS.

D. SPECIAL NOTE: All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section

of these specifications. The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work. The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications, determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect.

B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maximum aggregate size

passing a 2” sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction.

2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect.

B. Use granular material, free from large stones, boulders, and debris. Maintain moisture

content within range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size 4 inches.


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings. B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner and in conformance with safety codes.

C. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfill. D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders

are encountered, remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade, fill to required depth with granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping.

3.02 LOCATION

A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes. B. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements.

3.03 DE-WATERING

A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation.

3.04 TIMING

A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested, inspected, and approved.

B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench work in a timely manner.

3.05 BEDDING

A. Place bedding material under, around, and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8” in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods, taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe, and provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6” depth before adding other backfill. D. Cover water line with 18” bedding material before backfilling.

3.06 BACKFILLING

A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade, or as shown on the drawing.

B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12” in depth.


3.07 COMPACTION

A. Compact all bedding material to al least 95% of maximum density, taking care not to damage the pipe.

B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement or at least to 90% of maximum

density. 3.08 FINISHING

A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Restore all surface areas to original conditions, or improve as shown on the drawings. Replace all paving, base course, gravel surfacing, sub-base, topsoil or other existing finished surface as shown on drawings. C. Clean up and finish all construction areas to original condition or better.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15140

SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.

B. Sleeves and seals.

C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation.

B. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.

C. Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation.

D. Section 15330 - Fire Protection System.

E. Section 15410 - Plumbing System.

F. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping.

G. Section 15530 – Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.

B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

C. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.

B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One.

B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.


B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double

hanger.

D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over.

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple,

floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by

Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2” and smaller – Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3” through 8” – Type PS For multiple pipes – Type PSE - Custom K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer

cushions; Unistrut “Cush-A-Clamp” or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal.

L. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 15140-3.03.

M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.

N. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief “Pipe Titan” or equal.

2.02 HANGER RODS

A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded on both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

2.03 INSERTS

A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.04 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel.

B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing.


C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.

D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS

A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel. 2.06 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet

Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40.

C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed.

D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.

E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.

F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Rock wool fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed.

G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant.

H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,

consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.

C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material.

2.08 FINISH

A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts.


B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface.

D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt

with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work.

3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as follows:

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7’-0” 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-0" 7/8" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-0" 7/8" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8"


B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal

transition.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments.

J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions.

3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.

B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:

NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105

D. Piping 2” and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at

hangers/supports.

E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.

F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping.

3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide equipment bases of concrete.


B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.05 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with

lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on

sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials.

E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight.

3.06 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate.

C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe

or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15170

MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein.

B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section

as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE

A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.

B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

1. Painting 2. Automatic temperature controls. 3. Power control wiring to motors and equipment.

1.03 WARRANTY

Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on data of substantial completion against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances.

B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the

performance, fabrication procedures variations, and accessories.

C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data.

D. Refer to Division One for additional information.


A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers.

B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the

project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation.

C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible.

1. Baldur 2. Marathon 3. Siemens-Allis 4. General Electric 5. U.S. Motor

B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows:

1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. 2. CLASS F:

a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors.

C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used.

1. UP TO 1/2 HP: Provide permanent split, capacitor-start single phase with

inherent overload protection. 2. 3/4 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphone. 3. Provide two separate windings on 2-speed polyphone motors. 4. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's normal voltage, serving the

motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for poly-phase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 Hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-graspable ball bearings; with top mounted ale mite lubrication

fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows:

1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional hp. motors or polyphone

requiring minimum noise level. H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures as follows:

1. CONCEALED INDOOR: Open drip proof. 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Guarded. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type II. TEC. 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Type I. TEA.

I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and

signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table, when tested in accordance


with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B, including stray load loss measure.

NEMA Efficiency Motor Horsepower INDEX Letter Minimum Efficiency %

1800 RPM Synchronous Speed

7.5-10 F 89.5 15-20 E 91.0 25-30 E 92.4 40 D 93.0 50 C 93.0 60 C 93.6 75 C 94.1 100-125 B 94.5 150-200 B 95.0

1200 RPM Synchronous Speed

3-5 G 87.5 7.5 G 89.5 10 F 89.5 15 F 90.2 20 E 90.2 25-30 E 91.7 40-50 D 93.0 60 D 93.6 75 C 93.6 100-125 C 94.1 150-200 B 95.0

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and

printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans

or in the specifications. Contractors’ price shall include all items required as per manufacturers’ requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL: Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner.

B. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance.

C. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration

transmission within the building.

D. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15171

COMBINATION AND NON-COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Motor Controllers – Combination and Non-combination Motor Starters

B. Furnish and install a complete motor controller for the following item(s):

1. Constant volume air handling units 2. Chillers 3. Constant volume pumps 4. Constant volume supply and exhaust fans.


A. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15170 – Motors

C. Section 15240 – Sound and Vibration Control D. Section 15540 – HVAC Pumps

E. Section 15855 – Air Handling Unit F. Section 15950 – Controls G. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing H. Section 16075 – Electrical Identification

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer shall provide copies of the following documents: 1. Product data sheets on specified products. 2. Shop drawings for specified product. 3. Wiring Schematics for specified products. 4. Installation instructions.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Provide manufacture’s written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and

Motor Circuit Protection trip settings of combination controllers. 3. Provide manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Provide manufacture’s written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

1.05 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer must have minimum of 20 years of documented experience, specializing in combination and non-combination starters.

B. The starter assembly shall be UL listed under UL 508A


A. Accept starters on site in original packing. Inspect for damage.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping, or provide additional heavy canvas, or heavy plastic cover, to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully, in accordance of manufacturer’s written instruction, to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a five year warranty on the complete starter assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Enclosed FVNR combination single phase motor starter with electronic overload relay

B. Enclosed FVNR non-combination motor starters with electronic overload relay

C. Enclosed FVNR combination motor starters with electronic overload relay

D. Enclosed FVNR Two-Speed motor starters with electronic overload relay

2.02 REFERENCES

A. The starters referenced in this section are designed and manufactured to the following

standards unless otherwise noted: 1. ANSI/NFPA -70, National Electric Code 2. UL 508, and UL508A Industrial Control Equipment 3. NEMA ICS-2, 2000 4. IEC 60947-5, 60947-4, 60947-3

2.03 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide one of the following manufacturer's.

1. Cerus Industiral.


2. Square D. 3. Cutler Hammer. 4. ABB


A. Single Phase Starter: Starters for 115VAC single phase motors less than 1 HP shall be capable

of both manual and automatic operation. Refer to Section 2.03.1 for single phase starter requirements.

B. Magnetic Starters: Starters for 3-phase motors shall be magnetic starters. Refer to Section

2.03.2 for magnetic starter requirements. C. Combination Starters: Provide combination magnetic starters for all motors requiring branch

circuit protection or a line-of-sight disconnect. Refer to Section 2.03.3 for combination magnetic starter requirements.

2.04.1 ENCLOSED FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING (FVNR) SINGLE PHASE STARTER

A. Single Phase Motor Starter Control: The single phase motor starter shall consist of a manually operated quick-make toggle mechanism lockable in the “Off” position which shall also function as the motor disconnect. Additionally, the starter shall provide thermal overload protection, run status pilot light and fault pilot light. The starter must include the capability to operate in both manual and automatic control modes. In automatic mode, the starter shall have the capability to integrate with a building automation system by providing terminals for run input, run status output and fault output. All control terminals shall be integrated in the starter. At a minimum, each single phase starter shall include an interposing run relay and current sensing status output relay. Single phase motor starter shall be in a surface mount enclosure.

B. Approved manufacturer: Cerus Industrial, model BAS-1P or approved equal.

2.04.2 ENCLOSED FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING (FVNR) NON-COMBINATION STARTER

A. Magnetic Motor Starters shall be enclosed in a general purpose electrical enclosure with the

appropriate environmental rating. B. Starters shall consist of a horsepower rated magnetic contactor with a minimum of 1NO and

1NC auxiliary contacts and solid state electronic overload relay. Overload relay shall protect all three phases with a wide range current setting and trip class to allow field adjustment for specific motor FLA. Interchangeable heater elements are not acceptable. Overload relay shall provide phase failure, phase loss, locked rotor and stall protection.

C. Provide a manual reset pushbutton on the starter cover to restore normal operation after a trip

or fault condition.

D. Each starter shall include an installed 50VA control power transformer (CPT) with protected secondary. The CPT must accept the available line voltage and the control voltage shall not exceed 120V.

E. Installed accessories shall include Hand-Off-Auto operation switch with 22mm style operator

interfaces. Include LED pilot light indicators for Hand, Off, Auto, Run and Overload conditions. All pilot devices shall be water tight and dust tight.

F. When remotely controlled by an automation system, the starter shall include remote run

terminals which accept both a voltage input signal and a contact closure. The voltage run input shall accept both AC and DC signals including 24VAC, 120VAC, 24VDC and 48VDC to allow direct connection of the transistorized automation signal to the starter.


G. In applications where the motor is interlocked with a damper or valve, the actuator control must reside within the starter enclosure. The starter must provide a voltage output to operate the actuator to open the damper or valve without closing the motor circuit. The starter will only close the motor circuit and start the motor after it has received a contact closure from a limit or end switch confirming the damper or valve position.

H. The starter shall provide a provision for Fireman’s Override operation. When activated, the

starter run the motor in any mode (Hand, Off or Auto) regardless of other inputs or lack of inputs either manual or auto. The purpose of the Fireman’s Override input is to act as a smoke purge function. Fireman’s Override has priority over the Emergency Shutdown input.

I. If the starter is controlled by a fire alarm or life safety system, the starter shall include an

Emergency Shutdown input which will disable the starter from operating in either Hand or Auto mode regardless of other inputs either manual or auto.

J. Manufacturer shall provide and install tags with engraved white lettering to designate equipment

served

2.04.3 ENCLOSED FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING (FVNR) COMBINATION STARTER

A. Enclosed combination starters shall include all of the magnetic starter requirements in addition to a disconnecting method. Acceptable disconnects include: motor circuit protectors, UL 489 circuit breakers, or a fused disconnects. All disconnects shall include a lock-out mechanism when in the off position.

B. The Motor Circuit protector shall be a UL listed 508 current limiting manual motor starter with

magnetic trip elements only. The breaker shall carry a UL 508F rating (up to 100A frame size) which provides for coordinated short circuit rating for use with the motor contactor and provides a minimum interrupting rating of 30,000 AIC for the combination starter.

C. Fused disconnect shall be UL 98 suitable for service entrance protection. It shall accommodate

time delay J-style fuses. D. UL 489 breaker shall include thermal and magnetic trip mechanisms.

2.04.4 ENCLOSED STARTER OPTIONS Retain first paragraph below for over/under voltage protection as necessary. Retain second paragraph below for integral no motor load (belt-loss) protection as necessary. Retain either third or fourth paragraph below for integral energy monitoring as necessary.

A. Must provide over/under voltage and phase monitoring capability. Monitor shall be field adjustable for both over and under voltage levels and a delay time before returning to normal operation after a trip.

B. Starter must measure and display output current on the front cover. If necessary, install

digital or analog ammeter. C. The starter shall provide the capability to monitor and calculate power consumption

(kWh) of the motor load. Each starter shall display the calculated kW and kWh. Additionally, provide either a pulse output (kWh) or 4-20mA analog signal (kW) to the automation system to monitor the power consumption.

D. Starter must be capable of communicating over BACnet MS/TP. At a minimum, reported

points shall include starter mode, terminal input status, run/fault status, voltage, current, power factor, kW and kWh.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and printed installation instructions.

3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in

the specifications. Contractors’ price shall include all items required as per manufacturers’ requirements.

3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet or moisture damaged.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall mounted enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural steel channels bolted to the wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks of lightweight structural steel channels bolted to the floor.

B. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller. C. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. D. Install heater in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load

amperes after motors have been installed. E. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven

equipment. F. Comply with NECA 1. G. Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be

replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner.

H. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance.

I. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building.

J. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily

as determined by the Engineer.

3.05 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 “Electrical Identification”. 1. Label each enclosure with an engraved nameplate.

3.06 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Section 16123 "Wire and Cables".

B. All controls wiring shall be installed in conduit in compliance with Section 16136 “Raceways”.


C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

D. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.07 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Architect/Engineer before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 65 percent.

E. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

F. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.

End of Section


SECTION 15190

SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS




Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use.

1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Valves:

1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job.

2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of

each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion.

3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper

wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal.

4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or

trade grouped together.

B. Pipe Marking:

1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal.

2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor

grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton Nameplate Company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal.


3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows.

4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in

such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed.

5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards:

SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Chilled Water Green Chilled Water Supply

Chilled Water Return

Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer

Storm Drain Green Storm Drain

Domestic Water Green Domestic Water

Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply

Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return

Fire Protection Red Fire Protection

Automatic Red Fire Sprinkler Sprinkler

Gas Yellow Natural Gas

C. CEILING TACKS:

Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) LEM. b) Seton. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head. Color code as follows: 1. Yellow - HVAC equipment 2. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers 3. Green - Plumbing valves 4. Blue - Heating/cooling valves


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans

or in the specifications. Contractor’s price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements.

3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install

primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe.

3.04 Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15260

PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





B. Work specified elsewhere.

1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports.

C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances.


performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an

absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and


appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down.

2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for

each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation.

2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and

approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer.

2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the

facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding:

Flame Spread 25

Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as

listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings

do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville.

B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer.

C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and

shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer.

D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong.

E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Insul-Phen Insulation (Insul-Phen)

or PolyGuard (PolyPhen). F. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow “Trymer 2000 XP”.

G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products.

2.08 MATERIALS

A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies.


B. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint.

C. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or

preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing.

D. CHILLED WATER AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPE: Provide Phenolic rigid closed cell foam pipe insulation with an ASJ and all joints sealed. Piping located outdoors shall be Phenolic or Polyisocyanurate with metal jacket cover.

E. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts,

underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as domestic water piping. Where exposed to building occupant view pipes shall be insulated with phenolic foam insulation. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external blanket insulation.

F. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not

required when piping is exposed on roof.

G. REFRIGERANT PIPING: Refrigerant pipe insulation shall be model "AP-2000", fire rated for use in environmental air plenums. Apply manufacturers recommended finish and sealant for exterior applications.

H. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers “Strap-On” jacketing. Provide preformed fitting

covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations and

printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation.

3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans

or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in tunnels shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition

shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable.

3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded

over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket.

B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber

covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric.


C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed.

These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket.

3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION

A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the sleeve and the pipe. Do not use phenolic foam insulation in fire rated wall/floor penetrations. Provide UL rated fire rated pipe sleeves when penetrating fire rated assemblies.

B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire

barrier caulk and putty.

C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS

BASED ON FIBERGLASS

A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1½ inch

B. Interior domestic cold water pipe exposed to freezing temperatures: 1 inch

C. Condensate drain lines: ¾ inch D. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch

E. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1½ inch blanket wrap

Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1 inch thick rigid with

all service jackets F. Chilled Water Piping:

(1) Located outdoors: 2 inch (2) Located indoors:

(a) 4 inch and smaller: 1½ inch (b) Larger than 4 inch: 2 inch

G. Refrigerant Piping

(1) 1½“ and smaller 1½ inch (2) Larger than 1½ inch 1½ inch

4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION

THICKNESS

A. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15290 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Ductwork system insulation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods

B. Section 15170 - Motors and Motor Controllers

C. Section 15190 - System Identification and Pipe Marking 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.

B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150.

C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of 2009

International Energy Conservation Code. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA and NBFU Standards No. 90A and

90B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS



performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. Provide 8x11 sample of product along with submittal.


A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer’s stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed.

B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf, Certain-Teed, Johns-Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer.

B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Minnesota Mining, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer.

C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions.

B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on

the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements.

3.02 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION

A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center. On rectangular ducts over 24" wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers.

B. Seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic, Childers CP-30 or approved equal. Contractor may choose to seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of aluminum foil tape. Duct tape shall be UL listed 181 A-P/B-FX and UL 723. Shurtape No. AF-982 or approved equivalent.

C. All external duct insulation shall be Johns Manville Type 75 fiberglass duct wrap insulation with reinforced aluminum facing or approved equal.

D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts, return ducts, and supply air ducts that are not internally insulated. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. A minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned


spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. 2. A minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outside of the building.

3.03 DUCT LINER

A. Duct liner shall be kept clean and dry during transportation, storage and installation. Care should be taken to protect the liner from exposure to the elements or damage from mechanical abuse.

B. All portions of duct designed to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with liner as specified. The smooth, black, acrylic-coated surfaces with flexible glass cloth reinforcement shall face the airstream. All duct liner shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. The top pieces shall be supported by the sidepieces. Duct liner shall be installed following the guidelines in the NAIMA “Duct Liner Installation Standard”.

C. The duct liner shall be tested according to erosion test method in UL 181 and shall be guaranteed to withstand velocities in the duct system up to 5000 fpm without surface erosion.

D. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated with Permacote factory-applied or field-applied edge coating and shall be neatly butted without gaps. Shop or field cuts shall be liberally coated with Johns Manville SuperSeal® duct butter and Edge Treatment or approved adhesive.

E. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct.

F. When velocity exceeds 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec), use metal nosing on every leading edge. Nosing may be formed on duct or be channel or zee attached by screws, rivets or welds.

G. The liner shall further be secured with Graham welding pins and washers on not more than 18 inch centers both vertical and horizontal surfaces, and the pins and washers shall be pointed up with adhesive.

H. Duct liner shall be Johns Manville Linacoustic RC fiberglass duct liner with factory-applied edge coating or approved equal. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B, FHC 25/50 and Limited Combustibility and the air stream surface coating should contain an immobilized, EPA-registered, anti microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less than .70 as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type “A” mounting, and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 BTU•in/(hr•ft2•°F) at 75°F mean temperature.

I. Line supply and return ductwork at connection of HVAC unit to a point of 15 feet upstream and downstream of the equipment with Johns Manville, Linacoustic RC with an R-value of 5 or approved equal for thermal insulation and noise control. The liner shall meet the safety standards as indicated above with NRC not less than 0.75 as tested per ASTM C423 using a type “A” mounting and thermal conductivity no higher than 0.24 BTU•in/(hr•ft2•F) at 75°F mean temperature. Attach with full cover coat of cement, duct dimensions up to 16 inches, provide stick clips or screws and cap for dimension over 16 inches, space 16 inches o.c. maximum. Provide sheet metal liner cap over all leading edges of internal insulation exposed to air stream.


3.04 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS

A. Duct routed exposed shall be internally lined as specified.

B. Round duct routed exposed shall be double wall with solid inner liner and 1-1/2’’ thick layer of fiberglass insulation as manufactured by United McGill Company model no. Acousti-27 or approved equal.

3.05 EXPOSED DUCT LOCATED OUTDOORS

A. All Supply and Return ducts located outdoors shall be internally lined as specified and

also shall have a 2" thick, 6 lb. density rigid board external duct insulation, finished with Alumaguard Flexible weather-proofing jacket. Jacketing shall be 56 mils thick and zero permeance for water vapor, mold resistant, and 150psi puncture resistance. Outside air ducts located outside of the building shall not be insulated. However, outside air ducts shall be finished with Alumaguard Flexible weather-proofing jacket. Jacketing shall be 56 mils thick and zero permeance for water vapor, mold resistant, and 150psi puncture resistance.

3.06 AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION

A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed with

external duct wrap equivalent to the insulation specified.

B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 1½ inch thick external fiberglass duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation had been eliminated at no additional cost to the owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15410

PLUMBING PIPING AND VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe and pipe fittings.

B. Valves.

C. Sanitary sewer piping system.

D. Domestic water piping system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02222 - Excavating.

B. Section 02223 - Backfilling.

C. Section 02225 - Trenching.

D. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.

E. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.

F. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.

G. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.

H. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.

I. Section 15450 - Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI B31.1 - Power Piping.

B. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping.

C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

D. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

E. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

F. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. G. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.

H. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

I. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.


J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

K. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

L. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

M. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.

N. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

O. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120.

P. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).

Q. ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

R. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

S. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

T. ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and

Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems.

U. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

V. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings.

W. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

X. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

Y. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division One.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, Pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA



B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations.

C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9.

D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable.

E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification,

manufacturers name and country of origin. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years

documented experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction.

B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

installation of backflow prevention devices.

D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS


A. Furnish under provisions of Division One.

B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2729 schedule 40; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends.

Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, installed per the

requirements of ASTM D 2855. ***OR***

B. PVC pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: ASTM F 1336 PVC, drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished

by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM F 477 or F 913, elastomeric gaskets or solvent weld.

2.02 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW

GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to

be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, clear, medium bodied, for

sizes 3" and smaller and gray, heavy bodied, for sizes 4" and larger, mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application.

2.03 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to

be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.

2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING

A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 88, Type K, hard drawn. (3 inches and smaller) 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder.

****OR*****


B. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900 CLASS 150. (4 inches and Larger) 1. Fittings: Ductile or gray cast iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785 schedule 80. (3 inches and smaller)

1. Fittings: ASTM D 2467 PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2467, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.

2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K, soft annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy or ASTM

B 16.26 cast bronze for flared fittings. 2. Joints: Sweat solder or flared. Note: No joints will be permitted in pressure water

pipe below slab on grade. All such piping must be brought up above finished floor line a minimum of 12" before joining. Exception may be taken when pipe is fully enclosed in pressure rated sleeve and pre-approved by the Architect and Engineer.

2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder.

2.07 FLANGES AND UNIONS

A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 1. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.39, 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered ends. 3. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.5, 150 psig forged steel flanges; screwed neck, 1/16" thick

preformed neoprene gaskets.

B. Pipe size 2-1/2 inches and larger: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; weld neck, 1/16" thick preformed

neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16" thick preformed

neoprene gaskets.

C. Dielectric Connections: 1. Pipe size 2 inches and under: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,

copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2. Pipe size 2-1/2 inch and larger: flange, connection as above, with water impervious

isolation barrier. 2.08 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:


1. Nibco No. T-111 up to 2-1/2"; F-617-O 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Crane No. 428 up to 2-1/2"; 465-1/2 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-100 up to 2-1/2"; G-623 3" and over. c. Grinnell No. 3010 up to 2-1/2"; 6020A 3" and over.

B. Up to and including 2-1/2" Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside

screw, solid wedge threaded ends.

C. Over 3" Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged ends.

D. Provide bronze tee or cast iron square nut operator for all valves installed below ground.

1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be equipped with ASTM B62 solid red bronze tee

securely affixed to the valve stem. 2. Valves 3" and larger shall be equipped with a standard 2" square combination

nut/socket securely affixed to the valve stem. 3. Provide owner with two extended tee handle operating wrenches for each type of

valve head installed. 2.09 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-585-70-66 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Crane No. 9303-B b. Stockham Model S-216BR-1R-T c. Grinnell No. 3700-6

B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, stainless steel ball and

stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union.

C. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops.

2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-413-B up to 2-1/2"; F-918 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G931 3" and over. c. Grinnell No. 3300 up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over.

B. Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends.

C. Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.

Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation. 2.11 SPRING LOADED (SILENT) CHECK VALVES


A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. W-910 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Grinnell No. 402

B. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends.

2.12 SOLDER

A. 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver.

B. Lead free, antimony free, zinc-free.

C. Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division Two.

B. Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Install, clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe, and to cover all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chromium plated.

C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines,

unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients.

E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space.

F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment.


H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves

installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator.

I. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect.

J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of

cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration, which ever is the greater.

K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of

utility companies.

M. Gate valves installed below grade shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water' cast on top and set flush to finished paving or 2" above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions.

N. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting.

O. Excavate in accordance with Division Two.

P. Backfill in accordance with Division Two.

Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

R. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix

materials types.

S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

T. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled.

U. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air

plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure.

V. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformity to the manufacturers

published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to ASTM D 2321.

W. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the

requirements outlined in ASTM D 2855.

X. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter.

Y. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using standard or wide bodied no hub couplings for as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee for storm drainage piping. Support


vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors with using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in section 15140.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections.

B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections.

C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items, distinct parts of systems, or

vertical risers.

D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply line.

E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve. F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control)

services.

G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device.

H. Provide spring loaded, non-slam check valves on discharge of water pumps.

3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at minimum grade specified.

B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated,

polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue.

B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or

soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping

D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, in sufficient quantity to

obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems.


E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets.

F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings.

B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections,

confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required.

C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as

shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority.

D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility

service lines or those materials specified herein.

E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated.

3.08 RODDING SEWERS

A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation.

B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and

any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned.

3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector.

B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments,

equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing.


C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation.

D. All piping systems shall be tested with water and proved absolutely tight for a period of not

less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off.

E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a

like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks.

F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal

operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period.

G. Domestic Water:

1. Provide hydrostatic pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig, which ever is the greater, for 24 hours.

H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer:

1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10' above the lowest portions of the system being tested.

2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described, and the test repeated until, after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested.

3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible.

3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK

A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of


any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15430

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Floor drains.

B. Interceptors.

C. Cleanouts.

D. Backflow preventors.

E. Water hammer arrestors.

F. Thermostatic mixing valves.

G. Hose bibbs hydrants. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.

B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.

B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.

D. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.

E. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.

F. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.

G. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters.

H. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters I. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double

Check Valve Types. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE


A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data under provisions of Division One.

C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.

C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One.

B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLOOR DRAINS

A. Jay R. Smith

B. Watts

C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.

E. Floor Drains

1. Floor Drains: Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with seepage slots.


2. Provide Nickle bronze round tops in general areas. Provide square tops in tiled finished areas. Provide stainless steel square tops in shower/restroom areas with a tile finish.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CLEANOUTS

A. Zurn

B. Watts

C. Jay R. Smith

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.

E. Cleanouts 1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid

cover; 2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy

coated gasketted cover; 3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double

drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas;

4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover, and 6” round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw;

5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type., Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS

A. Woodford

B. Zurn

C. Jay R. Smith


E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS 1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated

where exposed to interior with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011;

2. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with rough chrome plated lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker;

3. Floor Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; chrome plated lockable recessed box, hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker;

2.04 RECESSED VALVE BOX

A. Manufacturers: 1. Oatey. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.


3. Sioux Chief 4. Guy Gray. 5. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass quarter turn ball

valves and water hammer arrestors on both hot and cold connections, socket for waste, slip in finishing cover;

6. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with quarter turn brass ball valve, slip in finishing cover;

2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKFLOW PREVENTORS

A. Watts B. Wilkins

C. Febco


E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks;

2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent;

2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Sioux Chief

B. Wilkins

C. Zurn


E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 1. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for

operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700 kPa) working pressure;

2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

A. Powers

B. Bradley

C. Leonard


E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves


1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve, with check valve, volume control shut-off valve on outlet, stem type thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet, mounted in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate cutting, forming of roof and/or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.

3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with

mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15440

PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this Section as

though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE


A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this

Section: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Drains and cleanouts.

B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

1. Piping systems. 2. Pipe valves, and fittings. 3. Plumbing systems testing.

1.03 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water.

1.04 SUBMITTALS



performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.

C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative.



A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers.

B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the

project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation.

C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.


A. PLUMBING FIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved

equal products manufacturers are as follows: a. Water closet, urinals, lavatories, bath tubs and showers: American

Standard, Kohler, Zurn. b. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay, Just and Moen. c. Mop sinks: Stern-Williams, Fiat, Acorn Terrazo d. Faucets: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, e. Faucets: Chicago, T&S Brass, Zurn f. Faucets: Moen, Delta Commercial, Speakman g. Shower valves: Leonard, Powers, Symmons, Chicago h. Shower Systems: Bradley, Acorn, Willoughby i. Flush Valves: Sloan “Royal” j. Flush Valves: Sloan “Regal Pro”, Zurn “AquaVantage” k. Drinking fountains: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws, Acorn Aqua. l. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Josam and Watts. m. Emergency Fixtures: Bradley, Chicago, Haws, Speakman and Encon

2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1.; Adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Mi-Fab.

3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN & URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Mi-Fab.

4. TRAPS, STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire, Chicago or Zurn.

B. CLEANOUTS:

1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city

building code.


2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn J. R. Smith, Josam and Watts. 3. TYPES:

a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover.

b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable assembly with round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material.

c. DRY WALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and counter sink bronze plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover.

d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts. e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs. f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4"

thick concrete pad. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect.

B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. All rough-in pipe openings, for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems

shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection.

D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture

rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold." Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible.

F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly

support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment.

G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout.

H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and

adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner.

I. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim, they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply.

J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.


K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and

escutcheons.

L. Hot and cold water hammer arrestors: The contractor shall install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture. Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement.

3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Division One.

B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of Division One.

B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division One.

B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES

A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings.

B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and

supplied with controls properly installed, to comply with requirements as directed by ADA Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with all state and local ADA Code requirements.

C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with

the fully molded, Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect.

D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space,

whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15450

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Water Heaters.

B. In-line circulator pumps. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.

B. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.

C. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.

D. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design.

B. ASME Section VIIID - Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes.

C. ANSI/NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include heat exchanger dimensions. size of tappings, and performance data. 2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting

points, tappings, and drains.

C. Product Data: 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and

connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent

construction. 3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with

pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.


1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.


A. Perform Work in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified.

C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 ANSI/NFPA 70 ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for water heaters.

B. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat

exchangers. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section Division One.

B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division One.

B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters, water storage tanks, and packaged water heating systems.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


B. Provide two sets of electric heater elements.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. BradfordWhite. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. A.O. Smith. b. Rheem.

B. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage.

C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with

minimum 2 inches glass fiber encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.

D. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature

range from 60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat.

E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density magnesium

anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS

A. Manufacturer: 1. Amtrol. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. Proflow. b. Armstrong. c. Taco.

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME

Code; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.

C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig.

2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

a. TACO. b. Armstrong c. Grundfos

B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure.

C. Impeller: Bronze.

D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.

E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.


F. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 UL requirements.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related work to achieve operating system.

C. Provide secondary drain pan and route secondary drain pipe to outside the building where possible. Where impossible to route to the exterior, route drain to the nearest floor drain.

D. Route TPR drain line to the exterior of the building and terminate 6 inches above grade. Do not tie TPR drain line to any other drain line. TPR drain shall run separate and independently. Where impossible to route to the exterior, route drain to the nearest receptor.

E. When water heater is indicated to be supported from the structure, the contractor shall support water heater with 1/8” galvanized plate, galvanized unistrut and all-thread rods from the structure.

F. Provide 18 inch high galvanized floor stand manufactured for supporting water heaters less than 80 gallons. Provide 8 inch housekeeping pad for units 80 gallons and larger.

3.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION

A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide steel pipe support for tanks, independent of building structural framing members.

C. Clean and flush tank after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made.

3.03 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit.

C. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

D. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check

valve and balancing valve on discharge. E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping

adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.

F. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15530

REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

Provide for the systems as shown. Submit shop drawings of piping systems showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories; drawing to be marked "Approved", and signed by a representative of the Application Engineering Department of the condensing unit manufacturer. Pipe sizes shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. Refer to piping schematic on drawings.

2.02 MATERIAL

A. PIPE: Copper ACR tubing.

B. FITTINGS: Wrought copper streamlined sweat fitting.

C. SOLDER: Sil-Fos, except on valves use solder recommended by valve manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

All accessories shall be UL listed and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 710.

A. On systems 7-1/2 tons and larger, each separate refrigerant circuit shall have a separate filter dryer. Each filter dryer shall have a replaceable core and a three valve bypass. The filter drier shall be full line size and installed in the refrigerant liquid line. The filter shall have a minimum 4-3/4 inches diameter shell with removable flange and gasket. Flange shall be tapped for 1/4 inch FPT access valve. Size filter-drier for maximum 2.0 psi pressure drop at evaporator operating temperature. Similar to Mueller Brass Company model Drymaster micro-guard refillable filter series SD-485 through SD19217 or Sporlan catch-all.

B. On systems less than 7-1/2 tons, the filter dryer shall be the sealed type sizes as above.

One drier per refrigerant circuit.

C. Liquid-Moisture Indicator shall be installed in liquid refrigerant line full line size similar to Mueller Brass Company model "Vuemaster" with soldered ends.

D. Thermostatic expansion valve shall have adjustable super heat and be as manufactured

by Sporlan.


2.04 EVACUATION

Evacuate moisture completely by applying a commercial vacuum pump for a minimum of 24 hours. Moisture indicator shall indicate a completely moisture-free condition at time of final inspection. The vacuum pump shall run until the system indicates a maximum of 35 degrees FDB. The system shall be flushed with the operating refrigerant and the vacuum pump connected and rerun to repeat the evacuation. Evaluation shall be performed under supervision of the Engineer.

2.05 FREON AND OIL

A. Contractor shall leave the refrigeration system with a full charge of freon and oil and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of freon and oil in the systems for a period of one year from date of acceptance.

B. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the guarantee period, the

Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system to a full charge of freon and oil at no cost to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment and piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans

or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer’s requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15671

AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

A. Air-cooled condensing unit shall be designed for use with split system having a remote direct-expansion (DX) cooling coil mounted in evaporator fan unit. Capacity shall be as called for on the drawings when matched to the appropriate evaporator coil.

B. Condensing unit shall consist of high-efficiency hermetic compressor, air-cooled

condenser with quiet fan, factory wired controls, R-410a refrigerant and refrigeration circuit and valves.

C. Cabinet shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel with bonding primer and baked-enamel

finish coat. The entire cabinet shall be protected from rust.

D. Compressor shall be protected from excessive current and temperatures and shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled crankcase heater to operate only when needed for protection of the compressor. Compressor shall be spring-mounted on rubber isolators. Compressor shall be located in compartment isolated from condenser fan and coil. Provide a high-capacity dryer in the system to remove moisture and dirt.

E. Condenser fan shall be directly connected to a weather-protected, quiet, high-efficiency

motor. Fan guard shall be provided and shall be protected from rust by PVC finish. Condenser coil shall be aluminum fin with copper tube.

F. Connections for refrigerant suction and liquid lines shall be extended outside the cabinet

and provided with service valves with gauge connections.

G. Power connections shall be made to the connectors located inside the electrical connection box.

H. Standard operating and safety controls shall include high-pressure switch, low pressure

switch, compressor overload service, and solid-state timed-off control.

I. Compressors shall be warranted by the manufacturer for five years. All other components shall be provided with a 1 year warranty.


2.02 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

A. Auxiliary equipment shall consist of refrigerant lines prepared for the unit involved. These lines shall be cleaned, dried, and pressurized at the factory.

B. Low ambient kit to allow operation at outside temperature below 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) shall

be provided.

C. Expansion valve shall be provided with the evaporator coil.

D. Thermostats shall be provided by the Controls (DDC) Contractor.

E. Provide polyethylene structural base designed for that service and intended to support the unit and eliminate vibration transmission.

F. Provide hard-start kit with unit. G. Provide guards for condenser coils.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Condensing unit shall be the make and model number shown on the drawings or acceptable equivalents by Lennox, Carrier, Daikin, or Trane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans

or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install the condensing unit on proper foundation as shown on the drawings, and in location that will not restrict the air entry or discharge from the unit.

B. Install refrigerant lines as recommended by the manufacturer, taking care not to lose the

refrigerant charge contained in the lines, or allow air to enter the lines or equipment. Locate the lines in such a way as to not obstruct access to the condensing unit or other equipment. Lines located under ground or under concrete shall be installed in a PVC pipe conduit for protection.

C. Provide electrical connections as required by the applicable codes. Provide control wiring

required. All power wiring and control wiring shall be in conduit and located so as not to obstruct access to the unit or other equipment.

3.04 TESTING

A. Operate the condensing unit and the system to assure that unit is operating properly and without excessive noise and vibration.

B. Read and record the power draw and the refrigeration suction and liquid pressures as

required by Balancing and Test, Section 15990.

END OF SECTION

NLWWTPA 15781 June 2018 Laredo, Tx PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 15781

ROOFTOP ELECTRIC HEATING AND COOLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFTOP UNIT

A. Rooftop unit shall be packaged and include electric cooling and electric heat with capacity and steps of cooling and heating as shown on the drawings.

B. Unit shall be factory-charged and tested, shall be UL-labeled and ARI-certified by

Standard 210 and 270, and shall be AGA-certified.

C. Unit casing shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel or heavy-gauge aluminum with protective coat of baked enamel. Weatherproof access panels shall be provided for access to all parts requiring service.

D. Compressor(s) shall be sealed or serviceable hermetic type and shall be resiliently

mounted to avoid vibration and noise. Compressor shall be provided with anti-slugging protection, crankcase heater, and time delay on recycling of the compressor. Two internal compressor motor thermal cutouts and a hot gas cutout shall protect the compressor in addition to high-pressure and low-pressure safeties. Standard controls shall permit operation down to 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) and compressor shall be locked out below this temperature.

E. Condenser fan(s) shall be direct-driven on the shaft of the slow-speed motor, which shall

be designed to operate exposed to the weather.

F. Condenser coils shall have a sub-cooling section.

G. Refrigerant circuit shall include filter dryer, moisture indicator, sight glass, and gauge ports.

H. Filter rack shall be provided for filters 2 in. thick and shall filter both outdoor air and return

air. See Section 15885 of these Specifications for type of filters and the number of filter changes to be furnished with the equipment.

I. Evaporator fan shall be quiet-type centrifugal blower, directly connected to an adjustable-

speed motor or belt driven with an adjustable-pitch pulley on the motor.


J. Electric heat section shall be installed in the unit and served by the same power source as the rest of the unit. Only one power feed shall be required for the unit.

2.02 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

A. Condenser coil guards shall be provided.

B. Roof mounting frame shall be provided for all units mounted on the floor. Frame shall be approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association. Provide all necessary flashing and counter-flashing.

C. Provide "power saver" dampers and controls to provide "free cooling" from 0 to 100%

outdoor air (OA) when the outside air humidity and temperature are acceptable. Provide OA, return air, and relief air dampers in a factory-provided enclosure. All air shall be filtered and bird screen shall be installed.

D. A solid state enthalpy changeover control shall determine the capability of the outside air

to provide free cooling. The control package shall include a differential enthalpy sensor in the return air duct to compare the enthalpy of the outside air and return air and use the air with the lowest enthalpy for free cooling or assisting the mechanical cooling. The cooling control sequence is as follows: 1. The changeover control determines if the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling. 2. The space thermostat determines if cooling is needed in the building. If so: 3. The actuator modulates the outdoor air and return air dampers to maintain the

desired mixed air temperature. 4. The second cooling stage of the space thermostat energizes the compressor to

assist the economizer if required. 5. If the outdoor air is not suitable for free cooling, the outdoor air damper remains in

the minimum ventilation position and the compressor is energized when space cooling is required.

E. Provide a warm-up thermostat to prevent the OA dampers from opening if the return air

temperature is below the set point (65 deg. F) (18 deg. C).

F. Provide necessary controls for operation of the compressor below the normal temperature of the compressor cutout. Operation shall be permitted down to temperature specified on drawings.

G. Provide factory-trained service person to check out the system, calibrate the controls, and

see that the RTU is operating properly. The service person making the settings shall make a written report to the engineer and the owner with all set points listed for future reference.

H. Rooftop units mounted on slabs or other fixed locations shall be provided with adapters

for end discharge and return to the unit.

I. Provide thermostat and other controls required to produce the control functions called for. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Roof top unit shall be the make and model number shown on the schedule on the drawings, or acceptable equivalents are Carrier, Lennox, Trane, or York.



A. Install the curb as required by the job conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer, and install proper flashing and counter-flashing. See details on the drawings.

B. Set the unit in place, taking care to protect the adjacent roofing, and connect the supply

and return ductwork.

C. Make electrical connections, taking care that these do not block access to any part of the equipment requiring service.

D. Have the factory service person check out the unit and make a written report. Place the

unit in service.

E. Connect full size condensate drain pipe to roof top unit and extend to nearest drain, pipe shall be schedule 40 galvanized with malleable iron fittings.

3.02 BALANCING AND TEST

A. Operate the roof top unit and check for proper supply air quantity, noise, and proper operation.

B. Report the airflow, static pressure, voltage and current draw of each item, refrigerant

pressure readings, etc., as required by Section 15990 of these Specifications. This system is not complete until these readings have been made, submitted to the engineer, and accepted.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15854

DX" FAN COIL UNIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS

Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on drawings. Carrier, Daikin, Trane or Carrier shall be considered as equal, if they comply with the specification and schedule. Special Note: Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for air handling units. Units shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by Architect/Engineer.

A. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor

horsepower shown on the drawings.

B. Units shall be factory fabricated, draw-thru type, and shall have fan section, cooling coil section, condensate drain pan, adjustable blower drive with motor on resilient mounted base, vee-belts with guard, filter section, and mixing box (if scheduled) assembled as integrated air handling units.

C. REQUIREMENTS:

1. Mill-galvanized steel, rigidly framed, braced, and reinforced; access panels each side of unit; minimum panel ga. - 18; minimum weight formed framing member 14 ga.

2. Fan section, cooling coil section, and outlet frame throats shall be internally insulated at the factory with 1" thick, 3/4 PCF density, Neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with water-proof adhesive, having fire-retardant characteristics in accordance with NFPA 90A.

3. Drain pan shall be not lighter than 14 ga.; extend completely under the coil section and be all-galvanized, foam insulated pan with drain connections.

4. When the fan coil unit is installed above an accessible ceiling, the unit shall incorporate a secondary drain pan. The secondary pan shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, 16 gauge minimum with cross breaking sloped towards a drain. The sides shall be a minimum 2" tall and the corners shall be soldered watertight. The top edge shall have a 1/4" hem to provide additional rigidity and the secondary pan shall be supported at a minimum of six points. The pan shall extend on all sides a minimum of 3" beyond the sides of the unit casing. Route the secondary drain piping to a conspicuous location or install a float switch at the


low point in the secondary pan. The secondary pan should be sloped a minimum of 1/8" per foot and supported so that the unit is not in contact with the bottom of the secondary pan.

5. The fan section, including wheels, shafts, bearings, drive, etc., shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly, and the shaft shall not pass through the first critical speed, while accelerating from rest to operating speed. Submittal data shall state the first critical shaft speed. Shaft bearings shall be of vacuum de-gassed steel, and shall be selected for 200,000 hours average life.

6. Coil shall be as hereinafter specified. 2.02 COILS

A. Cooling coils shall be cartridge type and, when mounted in air handling units, shall be removable from either end. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins and shall be designed for even distribution of air across the face of the coils; air shall not pass around coil frames: Coils shall have same end connection for DX or chilled water piping.

B. DX refrigerant coils shall be counter-flow refrigerant to air, shall have inlet and outlet

connections permanently marked shall have thermostatic expansion valves with adjustable super heat.

C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on

schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans

or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15860

POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Centrifugal roof ventilators.

B. Ceiling and inline ventilators. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods

B. Section 15170 – Motors and Motor Controllers

C. Section 15240 – Sound and Vibration Control

D. Section 15951 – Controls

E. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators."

B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components

shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70

"National Electrical Code."

F. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.

G. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:


2. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following:

a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated. b. Certified fan sound power ratings. c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. d. Materials gages and finishes, include color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. f. Full color paint samples.

3. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections.

4. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods", for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following: a. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. b. Ceiling suspension members. c. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. d. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. e. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

6. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed wiring and field- installed wiring.

7. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

8. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods".


A. Fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer’s instructions.

B. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,

with protective crating and covering. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS


A. ACME, Inc.

B. Loren Cook Company

C. Greenheck Fan Corporation

D. Substitutions under provisions of Division One. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. C. Provide factory baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Color shall be verified during the

submittal process. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Fan shall be a spun aluminum, centrifugal, roof mounted, direct driven or belt driven as indicated.

B. Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.

C. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure.

The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. The discharge baffle conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections.

The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in transit tested packaging.

D. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA standard 204-96, balance quality and vibration levels for fans.

E. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings.

F. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed.


G. Accessories: The following accessories are required.

1. Disconnect Switch: Provide nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit for all fans with fractional horsepower motors. Disconnects and starters shall be provided by Division 16 for fans with a motor horsepower of 1 and greater.

2. Bird Screens: Removable ½ inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb

base, factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in

curb base. 5. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, 12 inch high, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel; mitered

and welded corners; 2 inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built-in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2 inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer’s requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15881

AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Ceiling air diffusers. B. Wall registers and grilles.

C. Louvers.

D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules.


A. Section 15050 – Basic Materials and Methods

B. Section 15890 – Metal Ductwork

C. Section 15910 – Ductwork Accessories

D. Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ARI 650

"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with

ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".

3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".

4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A

"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air distribution devices including the following:

1. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location,

number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished;

indicating construction, finish, and mounting details.


3. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air

distribution devices, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air distribution devices in original cartons and protect from weather and construction

work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the installation of the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or nonconforming workmanship.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Titus Company

B. Metalaire Industries, Inc.

C. Nailor Industries

D. Krueger

E. Substitutions under provisions of Division One. 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard air devices when shown of size, shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper air distribution.

B. Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer’s current data.

C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870


Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.

D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system, and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems.

E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screw driver slot or a concealed lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device.

F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre-assembled with UL classified radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely assembled; one assembly per carton. Each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink wrap with installation instructions.

2.03 LOUVERS

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as

listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule.

C. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate.

D. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld

units or use stainless steel fasteners.

E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company 2. Greenheck Company 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Substitutions under provisions of Division One.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black.

3.02 See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices.

3.03 Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15885

AIR FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS





PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTERS

A. The filters shall be Camfill Farr 30/30 2 inch thick or approved equal.

B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: The following manufacturers are approved subject to specification compliance. 1. American Air Filter. 2. Airguard Industries, Inc. 3. Cambridge.

2.02 LOW VELOCITY FILTER SECTION

A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 24 inches X 24 inches X 2 inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be rated at 500 feet per minute.

B. Filtering media shall be formed of non-woven reinforced cotton fabric type filtering media

bonded to 96% open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the inclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Average efficiency shall be 25-30% on ASHRAE test standard 52-76. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.20 inches water gauge at 350 FPM face velocity.


A. Install differential pressure switch to activate "Filter Dirty" light when pressure difference across filters reaches 0.5 inch W.G. (adjustable). Locate "filter dirty" lights in mechanical rooms with identifying label

B. Install and relocate filters in the mechanical or the storage room in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Refer to Section 15050 for additional filter information.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15890

METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Low pressure ductwork.

B. Medium and high pressure ductwork.

C. Casings. D. Laboratory fume hood exhaust ductwork


Section 09900 - Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.

A. Section 15050 - Basic Material and Methods.

B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.

C. Section 15290 - Duct Insulation.

D. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories.

E. Section 15881 - Air Distribution Devices.

F. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firms with least 3 years of successful installation experience on

projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with latest SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 “Duct Construction”, for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, NFPA 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems”, and NFPA 96 Standard.

4. IECC 2009: Comply with 2009 International Energy Conservation Code. 1.04 GENERAL DESCRIPTION


A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, duct fabrication standards and product data under provisions of Division One.

B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to

start of work.

C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are to be used only for design intent. The contractor shall prepare sheet metal shop drawings, fully detailed and drawn to scale, indicating all structural conditions, all plumbing pipe and light fixture coordination, and all offsets and transitions as required to permit the duct to fit in the space allocated and built. All duct revisions required as a result of the contractor not preparing fully detailed shop drawings will be performed at no additional cost.

1.06 DEFINITIONS

A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain indicated clear size inside lining. Where offsets or transitions are required, the duct shall be the equivalent size based on constant friction rate.

B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: ½ inch WG positive or negative static

pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm, and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm.

C. Medium Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 3 inch WG positive or negative static

pressure and velocities less than 4,000 fpm, 4 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm, and 6 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm and;

D. High Pressure: 10 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm.


A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings, use sheet metal end caps on any lined duct exposed to the weather and use 3 mil vinyl wrap with duct tape on end pieces where stored inside.

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where

necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.


B. Sheet Metal.: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet

steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM

A167; Type 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.

D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209,

Alloy 3003, Temper H14. E. Ducts shall be constructed and sealed as per the latest SMACNA Duct Construction

Standards and as follows:

1. VAV systems - Supply ducts from Air handlers to VAV Boxes constructed to 3” S.P. and Seal Class A.

2. Ducts downstream of VAV boxes constructed to 2” S.P. and Seal Class A. 3. Constant Volume – Supply ducts constructed to 2” S.P. and Seal Class A. 4. Outside/Return/Exhaust ducts constructed to 2” S.P. and Seal Class A.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Non combustible and conforming to UL 181, Class 1 air duct materials.

B. Flexible Ducts: Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 1M or approved equal, corrosive resistant galvanized steel formed and mechanically locked to inner fabric with factory wrapped insulation blanket with aluminum vapor barrier and an R-6 thermal conductance. Flexible duct shall have reinforced metalized outer jacket comply with UL 181, Class 1 air duct. Equivalent manufactures are Thermaflex.

C. Sealants: Hard-Cast “iron grip” or approved equal, non-hardening, water resistant, fire

resistive and shall not be a solvent curing product. Sealants shall be compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic.

D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped

galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.

1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials.

2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials. 2.03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with latest SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table

of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by approved shop drawings. Obtain engineer’s approval prior to using round duct in lieu of rectangular duct.


C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible.

Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees.

E. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct sizes 6 inch smaller with crimp in

direction of airflow.

F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.04 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1½ times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Weld in place.

C. Transform duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence and 30 degrees

convergence.

D. Fabricate continuously welded medium and high pressure round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.

E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90

degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.05 CASINGS

A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and construct for operating pressures indicated.

B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8

inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.

C. Reinforce doorframes with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting

angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Provide clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 X 6 inch size.

D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back facing

and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cubic foot minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.


2.06 LABORATORY FUME HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. Construct of 18 gage type 304 stainless steel.

B. All welded construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of ductwork at beginning of installation.

B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and

controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.

C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities.

D. Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with four feet maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum, 4 feet

minimum, length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

G. The interior surface of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles,

or anything else may project into the ducts for any reason, except as specified to be so. All seams and joints shall be external.

H. All ductwork located exposed on roof shall be "crowned" to prevent water from ponding.

Ref: Insulation for additional requirements.

I. Where ducts pass through floors, provide structural angles for duct support. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable sheet metal escutcheons as closers.

J. All angles shall be carried around all four sides of the duct or group of ducts. Angles

shall overlap corners and be welded or riveted.

K. All ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Determine the minimum length of flexible duct needed for each connection. Excess flex causing tight bends and increased pressure drops are not acceptable. Do not exceed 6’-0” extended length.

B. Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA’s, “HVAC Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”.

C. Cut outer vapor barrier and insulation. Fold back insulation and outer vapor barrier to expose inner core. Using sheet metal snips, cut the inner core.

D. Connect the inner core to the tap or collar by pulling it a minimum of 1” over the collar.

E. Where collars are less than 1” in length, i.e. diffusers, connect a separate collar to the

existing collar and proceed as described in 3.02.C above. F. Wrap the core twice with UL181 Tape over the collar. Secure the connection by placing a

clamp over the tap or collar, UL listed Panduit clamps for collars with beads and Stainless Steel clamps for collars without beads are acceptable.

G. Roll the insulation and vapor barrier back over the collar or tap as described in 3.02.C

above and wrap twice with UL181 Tape.

H. Secure the outer vapor barrier with a clamp as described in 3.02.F above if desired.

I. For Medium to High Pressure applications, use duct sealer for 3.02.F and 3.02.G in lieu of UL181 Tape.

J. Flexible duct shall be hung with proper support to minimize sagging and snaking between

supports. Maximum of 4’-0” between supports. Hanger material will be a minimum of 1 1/2” wide.

K. Supports will be used before all vertical 90° bends to prevent sagging and ensure a 1.5

center line turn radius of flexible duct. 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIT CASINGS

A. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static

pressure holds door in closed position. 3.04 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Steel, Aluminum Medium and High Pressure Steel Supply Return and Relief Steel, Aluminum General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum


Restroom Exhaust Steel Exposed Outside Air Intake Stainless Steel On the Roof Fume Hood Exhaust Stainless Steel

3.05 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. All ductwork shall be properly suspended or supported from the building structure. Hangers shall be galvanized steel straps or hot-dipped galvanized rod with threads pointed after installation. Strap hanger shall be attached to the bottom of the ductwork, provide a minimum of two screws one at the bottom and one in the side of each strap on metal ductwork. The spacing, size and installation of hangers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the latest SMACNA edition.

B. All duct risers shall be supported by angles or channels secured to the sides of the ducts

at each floor with sheet metal screws or rivets. The floor supports may also be secured to ducts by rods, angles or flat bar to the duct joint or reinforcing. Structural steel supports for duct risers shall be provided under this Division.

3.06 DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS

A. Seal all non-welded duct joints and seams with duct sealant as indicated. “All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections in metallic and non-metallic ducts shall be constructed as per specified in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible and SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards or NAIMA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections shall be sealed in accordance with the International Energy Conservation Code.”

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Volume control dampers.

B. Round Duct Taps.

C. Fire dampers.

D. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

E. Back draft dampers.

F. Air turning devices.

G. Flexible duct connections.

H. Duct access doors.

I. Duct test holes. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15240 - Vibration Isolation.

B. Section 15890 - Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.

C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.

D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One.

B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300, for fire

dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.

B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either

direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches.

C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/2 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint, action flanged bushing, with set screw.

D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 24 inch.

E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x

72 inch.

1. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

2. On outside air, return air, and all other dampers required to be low leakage type, provide galvanized blades and frames, seven inches wide maximum, with replaceable vinyl, EPDM, silicone rubber seals on blade edges and stainless steel side seals. Provide blades in a double sheet corrugated type construction for extra strength. Provide hat channel shape frames for strength and blade linkage enclosure to keep linkage out of the air stream. Construction leakage not to exceed 1/2%, based on 2,000 fpm and 4 inch static pressure.

F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade

dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.

G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters. 2.02 ROUND DUCT TAPS

A. Taps to trunk duct for round flexible duct shall be spin-in fitting with locking quadrant butterfly damper, model no. FLD-B03 by Flexmaster or approved equal.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE

DAMPERS

A. Greenheck B. Louvers and Dampers Inc.

C. Ruskin.

D. Nailor Industries.


2.04 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Provide curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide

stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream.

C. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers per U.L. with 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel

frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.

D. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for

combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.05 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL555 and UL 555S, and as indicated.

B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft.

C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades,

oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft.

1. Operators shall be spring return electric type suitable to operate on 120 V AC, 60 cycle.

2. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled. D. See smoke dampers for details and accessories to be included 2.06 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated.

B. Normally Open Smoke Damper: Damper type, closing upon actuation of electro thermal link or close automatically when power is interrupted, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally.

C. Electro thermal Link: Fusible link which melts when subject to local heat of 165 degrees F

and from external electrical impulse; UL listed and labeled. D. Each smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with end

position indicators for remote indication of damper blade position. E. Furnish each smoke damper with a duct mounted smoke detector and sensing tube for

proper operation of smoke damper. Duct smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectronic type. Sensing tube shall run the entire width of the duct and comply with manufactures instructions. Smoke detector and sensing tube shall be furnished and factory installed by the damper manufacture.


2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent.

C. Louvers and Dampers Inc.

D. Ruskin.

E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.

2.08 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.

A. Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.

B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge

galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. Young Regulator.

B. Titus.

C. Tuttle and Bailey.

D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.10 AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. On duct sizes less than 12 x 12, multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or

aluminum construction, with worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator.

2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Metaledge.

B. Ventglass.

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated.


B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip.

2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent.

C. Ruskin.

D. Titus.

E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One.

2.14 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.

B. Review locations prior to fabrication.

C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick

fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. Insulation shall be replaceable without field cutting or patching.

D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks.

E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and

two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.

F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.15 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.

Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Balancing Dampers

1. Provide at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

2. All regulators mounted on externally insulated ductwork shall have 16 gauge elevated platforms at least 1/8 inch higher than the thickness of the insulation.


Damper shaft shall have Ventlock No. 607 bearing mounted on ductwork within elevated platform. If duct is inaccessible the operating handle shall be extended and the regulator installed on the face of the wall or ceiling. Where regulators are exposed in finished parts of the building, they shall be flush type, Ventlock No. 666. All regulators shall be manufactured by Ventlock, or approved equal.

3. All dampers in lined ductwork shall have bushing to prevent damper damage to liner.

C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire

rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's

representative.

E. Provide back draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

F. Provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated

with fans and motorized equipment. Provide at least one inch slack at all flexible duct connections.

G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,

automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated.

H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Conditions of the contract and general requirements in Division 1 apply to work specified in all section of Division 15.

B. All Division 15 specification sections, drawings, and general provisions of the

contract apply to work of this section, as do other documents referred to this section.

C. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions

apply to all work herein. D. Requirements for submittals, shop drawings, and substitutions, Division 1, Section

01300 and 01600, apply to work specified in all sections of Division 15. E. The basic Materials and Methods, Section 15050, are included as a part of this

Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. The publications listed below from a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE CONCIL (AABC)

(2002) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems

NATIONAL EVROMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

(1998) National Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems (1994) Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration

B. TAB shall be preformed in accordance with the requirements of the standard under

which the TAB Firm’s qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC or NEBB procedural standards, unless otherwise specifies herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB standard shall be considered mandatory. The provisions of the TAB Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc. Shall, as nearly as practical, be used to satisfy the Contract requirements. The TAB standard shall be used for all aspects of TAB, including qualifications, for the TAB Firm and Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB Standard, the manufacture’s recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the TAB standard TAB procedures shall be developed by the TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc. applicable to the contract


requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC or NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory.

C. The TAB contractor shall submit all questions regarding interpretations and

questions regarding these standards in writing or as required by documents to the A/E team who shall provide formal reply in ka reasonable time. Decisions of the A/E team shall be final.

1.03 DEFINITIONS AND SIMILAR TERMS

A. In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract TAB Standard primarily because the intent of this section is to use the industry standards specified, along with the additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent the corresponding AABC or NEBB where differences. CONTRACT TERM AABC TERM NEBB TERM TAB Standard National Standard Procedural Standards Testing and Balancing for Testing Adjusting Heating, Ventilating, and Environmental System Air Conditioning System TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor System Readiness Construction Phase Field Readiness Check Inspection Check & Preliminary Field Procedures

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an independent, impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB, and is not a part or subsidiary of any other project contractor or subcontractor, to include, but not limited to General Contractor, and Mechanical; Contractor. The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of qualified Professional Engineer employed as a full time employee of TAB firm.

B. The TAB agency shall be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications.

C. QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PERSONAL: Submit evidence to show that

the people who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personal be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer’s opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing.

D. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM

The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm losses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency’s applicable


Performance Guaranty, then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB firm for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any firm that has been the subject to disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems including TAB. All work specified in this section and in other related sections to be performed by the TAB firm shall be considered invalid if the TAB firm losses its certification prior to contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representative. The TAB firm shall have an occupied office within 100 miles of the project site.

E. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM PERSONAL:

1. A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer, licensed in the State the work is performed, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm.

2. The TAB Specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced

technician of the firm certified by NEBB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason the Specialist losses subject certification during this period, the Contractor shall immediately execute each certifying agency’s applicable Performance Guaranty, then immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval, at no additional cost to Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding the contract award shall not be eligible performed any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this section and other related sections to be performed by the TAB Specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist losses certification prior to the contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor, at no additional cost to the Project Owner, Architect, Engineer, or their designated representatives.

3. Personal used on the job site shall be either Professional Engineers or

technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of work for that specified project.

4. Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personal who actually

balanced the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) shall be required.

F. ACCEPTABLE TAB FIRMS SHALL INCLUDE:

1. Engineering Air Balance Company (210-736-9494)

2. PHI Service Agency (361-248-4861)

3. Testing Specialties (210-492-8885)

4. Aerodynamics Inspecting of Texas (956-351-5285)


1.05 SCOPE OF WORK A. The General (Prime) Contractor will contract with a professional TAB firm under

the provisions of paragraph 1.04 of this section. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging

the data on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices. The Contactor and the various subcontractors of the equipment installed shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor ad material required to eliminate deficiencies or poor performance.

D. The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and

tools required in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC systems, as described in these specifications or shown on accompanying drawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance, taking specified measurements, recording and reporting the results. The items requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing include the following (as applicable to contract drawings):

AIR SYSTEMS Air Handling Units Packaged Units Exhaust Fans Fume Hoods Diffusers, Registers, & Grilles Coils (Air Temperature) PLUMBING SYSTEMS Recirc Pumps Mixing Valves

1.06 SUBMITTALS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. The name of the selected AABC or NEBB certified firm shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within 30 days after contract award.

B. Within 30 days after the award of contract, the TAB firm shall submit for approval an

organizational chart and proof of current certification which shall identify all AABC or NEBB certified Supervisors or Specialist. The TAB firm shall submit a company resumes listing personal and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing. TAB firm will also provide information showing successful completion for three similar scope projects for which the firm is being contracted.

C. Within 30 days after the award of contract, the TAB firm will submit for approval the

name of the TAB Specialist and/or Professional Engineer, who will have direct supervision of all TAB related labor through completion of project.

D. Within 30 days after the award of contract the TAB firm shall submit TAB procedures

and agenda proposed to be used. E. Within 30 days after the award of contract, but prior to TAB field measurements, the

TAB firm shall submit sample report forms, sample report forms, which shall include minimum data required by either the AABC or NEBB National Standards.


F. Within 15 days of notification of approval of TAB firm and TAB Specialist by

engineer, TAB firm shall conduct a Design Review of contract drawings and submit a Design Review report.

G. Proposed date and time for execution of Systems Readiness Inspection shall be

submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection. A copy of the Systems Readiness Inspection Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard.

H. Proposed date and time to begin field measurements, making adjusting, ext., for the

TAB report, shall be submitted with the Systems Readiness Inspection Report. I. Six (6) copies of the completed TAB Report shall be submitted for approval no later

than 7 days after the execution of TAB. All copies of TAB Report shall be signed by the TAB Specialist and shall bear the seal of the Professional Society or National Association used as the TAB Standard.

J. Proposed date and time to begin TAB Completion Verification, shall be submitted

with the TAB Report. Six (6) copies of TAB Completion Verification Report shall be submitted no later than 7 days after execution of TAB verification.

K. Proposed date and time for execution of Opposite Season Inspection shall be

submitted no later than 7 days prior to inspection.

1.07 INSTRUMENTATION A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated. TAB firm

shall submit list of all instruments, to include gauges, thermometers, flow measuring hoods, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. The list will indicate name of equipment, function, model number, serial number, date of the last calibration, and date calibration is due. TAB firm shall submit copies of calibration certificates for all test instruments used showing all devices were properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. All instruments will be within one year of calibration for duration of the project. If duration of project exceeds the tenure of instrument calibration, then said instrument must be recalibrated, and copy of calibration certificate sent to Engineer, before the instrument is placed into continued use.

1.08 TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. It is the intent of this specification section to provide for a completely tested,

adjusted, and balanced (TAB) installation without overlaps or omissions between the installing contractor and the TAB contractor. The installing contractors are those who perform the installation of this work and make all preparations for the TAB contractor who performs the testing, adjusting, and balancing described herein.

B. The contactor Manager or General Contractor performing the General construction

work shall coordinate the work of the contractors performing the Mechanical, Electrical, Automatic Temperature Control, and TAB work to provide complete properly tested, adjusted, and balanced systems. The Construction Manager or General Manager shall require and provide a start-up report for each piece of equipment furnished.

C. The contractor performing the HVAC work shall coordinate all Mechanical work,

including Sheet Metal work and Automatic Temperature Controls, to provide a


complete, properly tested adjusted and balanced system throughout. He shall furnish progress reports regarding this phase of the work on a regular basis as directed. At such time as the systems are started up, the Contractor performing the Mechanical work shall provide TAB Contractor with documentation that the duct systems have been tested to the satisfaction of the Duct Leak Test Specifications. The Mechanical Contractor shall insure that all comments are installed and operating, and the major components such as fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, and the like are capable of producing the scheduled capacity requirements. The requirement does not relieve the Mechanical Contractor of any other requirements specified elsewhere. Should any of these components or systems not be capable of producing these requirements, he shall make corrections within the limits of his responsibility or as otherwise authorized and shall certify in writing that the systems are ready for final testing and balancing by the Tab contractor.

D. The contractor performing the Electrical work shall work coordinate all electrical

work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is electrically operable, including the check for proper rotation of equipment.

E. The Contractor performing the Automatic Temperature Controls work shall

coordinate all controls work to provide complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems throughout the project. He shall furnish progress reports on a regular basis as directed. He shall certify in writing when each system is operational from an Automatic Temperature Controls standpoint. This contractor shall also provide to TAB contractor all necessary submittal information, software, and/or personal complete, properly tested, adjusted and balanced mechanical systems.

F. The TAB contractor shall from the award of contract, begin preparation. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The drawing and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous

adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, provide access as requested by the TAB firm.

B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm

the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Construction Manager that such a condition exists.

C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and

dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance of new work as required by TAB firm, at no additional cost to owner.

D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced, to determine, whether or not

sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves, thermometers, gauges, pressure in the duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item.


E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts

to each air handling unit has individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the

testing, adjusting, and balancing period. G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified,

operate the systems at no expense for the Owner at the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period.

H. Project Contract completion schedules shall allow time for allowance to permit the

successful completion of TAB services to Owner’s final inspection and expectance. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor:

1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, window,

ceilings, installed and penetrations complete, to obtain project operating conditions.

2. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply, return, and

exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified.

b. Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air, return and relief shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation.

c. Supply return, exhaust and transfer grilles, registers and diffusers. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as

heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, ect., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air.

e. Fans (supply and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating ; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings.

f. Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes.

3. WATER CIRCLULATING SYSTEMS a. Position valves pertinent to system design and require operation to

permit full flow of water through system components. Operate hydronic systems under full flow conditions until circulating water is clean. Remove and clean strainers as required during this cycle of operation.

b. Record each existing pump motor amperage and voltage, for retrofit. Readings shall not exceed nameplate rating.

c. Verify, on new equipment, electrical starter overload heater elements to be of proper size and rating.

d. Ensure that water circulating systems shall be full of water and free of air; expansion tanks set for proper water level, and air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. Advise Owner of deficiencies.

e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements.

4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS


a. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats.

b. Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory pre-calibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable.

c. The temperature shall be regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Owner of deficiencies or malfunctions.

3.02 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM

A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract. The re-inspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete.

B. Upon completion of the installation and start –up of the mechanical equipment, to

check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Owner complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems.

C. Measurements and recorded readings of air, water and electricity that appear in the

TAB reports will be done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm.

D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which

the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to effect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings. At time of opposite season check-out, the Owner’s representative will be notified before readings and adjustments are made.

E. In fan systems, the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as

required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees with each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes.

F. The various existing water circulating systems shall be cleaned, filled, purged, of

air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing.

3.03 PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made the TAB will furnish the Owner the

following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer.

1. Summary of main supply, return and exhaust duct pilot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the

temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm.


3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan exhaust fan,

filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems included in the retrofit Work. These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available,

5. Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed.

6. The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used, final velocity reading obtained, temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items. The test results will be recorded on standard forms.

7. A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation. The final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner’s operating personal.

3.03 BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A. GENERAL

1. Place all equipment into full operation, and shall continue the operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during OFF-Peak cooling seasons Balancing Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that time.

2. The contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After the approval by the Architect, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system. All Work shall be done under the supervision of Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1% of scale and maintained in good working order.

3. Upon completion of the balancing and testing, the Balancing Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Architect for evaluation

4. The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c. Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature in each conditioned space

room or area. d. Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage

readings at each fan. B. AIR SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance

and test:

1. Check fan rotation. 2. Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4. Test and record motor full load amperes. 5. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 6. Test and adjust system for design cfm, return air and outside air (+2%).

Change out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8. Test and record leaving air temperature, db and wb 9. Adjust all zones to design cfm (+2%). 10. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5% of design.


C. WATER SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test:

1. Check pump operation 2. Check operation of all control valves. 3. Test water flow rate at all coils. Adjust balancing valves as required. 4. Test water flow rate at all pumps. Adjust balancing valves as required. 5. Record chilled water temperature entering and leaving chiller and each AHU. 6. Record pump suction and discharge pressures.

D. DX SYSTEMS:

1. Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and

record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2. Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3. Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of

operation or drawing schedule.

E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated and all thermostats and dampers, adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to approval of the Architect.

F. The Air Balance Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE:

A. The Contractor shall execute all work as hereinafter specified, as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide complete and functioning systems. All items of labor, material or equipment not required in detail by the specifications or drawings, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of all phases of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished as if called for in detail by the specifications or drawings.

1.02 LAWS AND ORDINANCES:

A. All work and materials shall conform to the requirements of the federal, state, and local laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the jobsite. The installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The Contractor at no increase in contract price shall make all modifications to the work, which may be required by an authority having legal jurisdiction over the work.

1.03 LICENSES, FEES AND PERMITS:

A. The Contractor shall have a Master Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. Additionally, and at all times while work is being performed, for every five or less craftsman working on the project site, at least one craftsman shall have a Journeyman Electrician license issued by or acceptable to the city in which the work is to be performed. A city electrical construction permit will be required for this project.

1.04 THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. The drawings and specifications shall be interpreted together, and any and all work included in either, though not in both, shall be part of the contracted work. The drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the project and existing job site conditions will permit. Any changes due to equipment supplied, conflict with the work of other trades or to make this work conform to the National Electrical Code shall be made by the Contractor at no increase in contract price.

1.05 SITE CONDITIONS:

A. Before submitting his bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and familiarize himself with all existing conditions and his bid shall be based on accepting conditions as they exist.

1.06 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:


A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such materials and equipment. Where two or more units of the same item are required, they shall be products of a single manufacturer. The Contractor shall unload and properly store all electrical materials and equipment delivered to the jobsite.

1.07 UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND SERVICE:

A. The Contractor shall make arrangements for connection with the electrical utility company that will serve the jobsite and shall comply with all the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility company. The Contractor shall examine the site, confer with the utility company and verify the requirements for connections prior to bidding the work. The Contractor shall verify with the utility company the exact location of service tie-in points, cable routes, etc. Failure of the Contractor to contact the utility company and obtain such information prior to bidding the work shall not be considered as a basis for additional compensation. Where outages to existing electrical service are required, the Contractor shall coordinate the timing and duration of such outages with Owner's representative.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a meter enclosure for the utility company

meter. The enclosure and installation shall be in accordance with utility company requirements.

1.08 SAFETY:

A. It shall be the responsibility of the electrical Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions required by local, state, and federal laws, including OSHA.

1.09 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submittals for Approval:

1. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 except as otherwise stated herein. 2. Within 30 calendar days after award of contract, the Contractor shall furnish

seven (7) sets of drawings and data as described herein for Engineer approval. No item of equipment or material shall be ordered or shipped to the job site until the Engineer has given written approval of the submittal data.

3. The submittal data shall be bound in a 3-ring binder with dividers. The binder shall include a cover and a table of contents with the contractors name as well as the name of the project. All data shall be divided by specification section.

4. The submittal data for each item shall include descriptive literature, performance data, shop drawings technical literature and any other necessary data to readily identify that the equipment will meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications.

5. One complete submittal of drawings and data shall be made for all required items. Partial or incomplete submittals will be returned without comment. All copies furnished shall be manufacturer’s original copies of good quality,


legible photocopies or blue line prints. Copies transmitted by facsimile machine are not acceptable.

6. Submittal documents shall be job specific. Where manufacturer’s standard drawings or catalog sheets are provided, they shall be marked to show specifically what is being furnished. Drawings shall be marked to show Owner’s name, plant location, project description and equipment designation.

7. Substitutions for specified products shall be in compliance with Paragraph 1.10.

8. The Contractor shall review all manufacturers’ submittals for completeness, accuracy and compliance with project specifications before submitting to Engineer.

9. The Engineer will review the complete submittal package and return five (5) sets to the Contractor with individual items marked in one of the following three forms:

Reviewed as submitted Reviewed with comments Disapproved

Items that are disapproved shall be corrected as required and shall be resubmitted to the Engineer for approval.

B. Approval of submittals, etc. shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor

from further responsibility, but rather as a means to coordinate the work and to aid in the proper selection and installation of the materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of the project.

C. Submittal of Record Data:

1. Record Data: Provide seven (7) sets of record data books containing

information listed below. The material shall be bound into appropriately sized 3 ring binders, organized with dividers and index sheets. The binders shall be appropriately labeled with the Owner’s name, project name and location. The data books shall include: a. Certified as-built shop drawings for all fabricated equipment. b. Approved product data for all items required in Paragraph 1.09A. c. Spare parts lists d. Test records.

2. Record Drawings: Provide one (1) set of project drawings marked neatly and

legibly in colored pencil to show any significant deviation between actual conditions and original design layout.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide seven (7) sets of manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data on equipment and components. The data shall be organized into loose-leaf binders with dividers and master index.

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS:


A. Requirements for Substitutions: It is the intention of the drawings and specifications to establish a definite standard when a particular manufacturer's product is mentioned. Written request for substitutions of equivalent products will be considered provided all the following conditions are met. Substitutions for specified products will not be permitted unless all of the following conditions are met:

1. Written request shall be received in the Engineer's office ten (10) days prior to

the day of bid opening. Requests after ten days prior to the day of bid opening will not be considered.

2. Request shall include complete technical data, i.e. product data sheets,

curve, ratings, etc.

3. Request shall include a complete written comparison of differences and similarities between the proposed and specified product. Provide a written comparison for each substitution being requested.

4. Space and clearance requirements are adequate for products mentioned. It is

the responsibility of the Contractor to verify space and clearance requirements for products proposed for substitution.

5. If modifications to the drawings and specifications are necessary for the

proper installation of a product proposed for substitution, the request shall explain such in detail, accompanied by drawings if necessary.

B. Approval: If the above has been complied with, and in the Engineer's opinion the

product proposed for substitution is equivalent to that mentioned, the product will be approved for substitution and all prospective bidders will be so notified.

1.11 PROTECTION:

A. All new work, equipment and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent damage or breakage, either in transit, storage, installation or testing. All openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All materials and equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters, cribbing of any apparatus above floor construction and covering of apparatus in incomplete buildings with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Temporary electric heaters shall be installed to keep apparatus dry. All rotating equipment and/or machinery shall be properly lubricated and rotated on a regular basis. All electrical materials and equipment damaged during handling, storage, and installation, until the Owner has accepted the project, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor with no increase in contract price.

1.12 COORDINATION:

A. The Contractor shall not hinder and/or delay any work being accomplished by other construction companies at or near the general construction site; nor shall


the Contractor impede normal operation of the Owner at any time except as otherwise indicated.

1.13 WORKMANSHIP:

A. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their particular trades. All installations shall be complete in both effectiveness and appearance whether finally enclosed or left exposed. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal or replacement of any item which, in his opinion, does not present a reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance, providing that same can be properly installed in an orderly way by usual methods for such work. All specialties and appurtenances shall be installed to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise specified.

1.14 EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS:

A. This Contractor shall make electrical connections to equipment installed by other trades. The mechanical contractor shall install all motor driven equipment and motors furnished under this contract.

1. The Contractor shall verify the electrical requirements of equipment and

appliances furnished by others with data provided by the successful vendor or vendors. The Contractor shall provide the proper sized circuits, circuit breakers, starters, disconnect switches, receptacles, etc. as required to connect this equipment. If changes are required to electrical systems shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall make these changes at no additional cost to Owner.

1.15 CUTTING AND REPAIRING:

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to eliminate cutting of the construction except as specified. Where it becomes necessary to cut through the construction to permit the installation of work or the repair of defective work, it shall be done by mechanics skilled in the trade of erecting the type of work involved. The Contractor without additional compensation shall pay the cost of cutting and repairing. No cutting shall be done to any structural members unless the Engineer grants specific permission, in writing.

1.16 SLEEVES, INSERTS, SUPPORTS, ANCHOR BOLTS, FLASHING AND

FOUNDATIONS:

A. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, supports, anchor bolts, flashing, counter flashing and foundations required for the proper installation of the proposed work.

1.17 CLEANING:

A. All debris resulting from the construction shall be removed from the project site daily. Upon completion of the project, unused materials and equipment shall be removed from the project site. All visible labels, dirt overspray, paint, grease, and


stains shall be removed from all electrical equipment. Labels indicating testing laboratory approval or giving parts numbers shall be left in place.

1.18 TESTING:

A. The Contractor shall test the entire wiring system for proper voltage level and balance, and for short circuits and grounds in accordance with established methods upon completion of work. The system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. This Contractor shall make all corrections to accomplish such.

1.19 INSPECTIONS:

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance to the Engineer or the Engineer's Inspector in making periodic and final inspections of the work. This assistance shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the furnishing of labor, tools, etc. to operate equipment and demonstrate its proper functioning. Also included shall be the removal of outlet, junction box and panel covers, etc. as necessary for the Engineer to inspect the work.

1.20 GUARANTEE:

A. Any defects from imperfect or improper materials or faults arising from improper workmanship that may appear within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of the system shall be amended and made good by the Contractor at his own cost. Any defects or faults shall be attended to within ten (10) days after receiving written notice from the Engineer. Failure to promptly attend to said defects or faults shall be sufficient cause for the Owner to correct the problem with the Owner's forces or the forces of others and invoice the Contractor for any and all charges, including management and overhead, related to correcting said problem.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16060 GROUNDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Section Includes:

1. Solid grounding of electrical systems, equipment, machine frames, enclosures, appliances and structures.

2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems.

3. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.

2. B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft.

3. B33 Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70 National Electrical Code

2. 78 Lightning Protection Code

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

1. 467 UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR APPROVAL:

A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010.


B. Product Data: Submit for grounding conductors, ground rods, clamps, connectors, wells and insulating materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS – RECORD DATA:

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above.

C. Test Reports


A. Items provided under this Section shall be listed or labeled by UL.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Provide components and installation as required by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, Article 250.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. Provide products in quantities, sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC or the design drawings, whichever requirements are more stringent.

B. Conductor Materials: Copper

C. Connector Materials: Copper or bronze, tin-plated where required for corrosion resistance.

2.02 CONDUCTORS:

A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, 600 volt TW, THW or THWN insulation. Size per NEC 250.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8 except that conductor sizes Nos. 12 and 10 AWG used in lighting and receptacle branch circuits may be solid conductor. All conductors shall have 600 volt, TW, THW or THWN insulation.

C. Grounding Grid Conductor: Medium hard drawn bare copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, No. 2/0 AWG or as otherwise indicated on the drawings.


D. Color Code: Insulation color shall be green, except that sizes No. 2 AWG and larger may be black with green colored tape spirally applied over all visible surfaces within enclosures.

2.03 WIRE CONNECTORS:

A. Terminal Lugs: Copper alloy, tin-plated, compression type, Burndy type, YA, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 6 through No. 1/0 AWG. Burndy type YGHA, NEMA 2 hole pad for sizes No. 2/0 AWG and larger.

B. Split Bolt Connectors: Burndy SERVIT, type KS

C. Taps and Splices:

1. Grounding Grid below Grade: Exothermic type (Cadweld) or compression type (Burndy Hyground).

2. Above Grade: Compression type.

2.04 CONDUIT CONNECTORS:

A. Conduit Clamps: Burndy type GAR or GD.

B. Grounding Bushings: 0-Z/GEDNEY

2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES:

A. Ground Rods: ¾ inch diameter, 10 feet long, copper clad steel with high strength sheath, molten welded to core.

B. Rod Connectors:

1. Exothermic type: Cadweld

2. Mechanical type: Burndy type GAR or GD

C. Test Wells: (Not Required)

2.06 INSULATING MATERIALS:

A. Tape: Scotch 33+ vinyl plastic.

B. Mastic Pads: Scotch EZ – Seal

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Provide grounding of systems, equipment and structures in accordance with NEC Article 250, the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and the design drawings.

B: Service Entrance:

1. Provide a main bonding jumper between the service neutral conductor, the service equipment ground bus and the service equipment enclosure.

2. Provide a grounding electrode conductor to connect the service neutral conductor to the main grounding electrode.

B. Building Steel and Piping:

1. Provide bonding jumper from the service neutral to the building steel and metallic piping systems.

E. Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide a green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuits and feeder conduits. Size conductor in accordance with NEC 250 unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

2. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to panelboard or switchgear ground bus and to all metallic raceways, outlet boxes, lighting fixtures, equipment enclosures, appliances and motor frames.

3. Where metallic raceways are installed, both the raceway and the internal equipment grounding conductor shall be utilized for equipment grounding.

F. Grounding Grid (applicable when indicated on drawings):

1. Excavate and backfill for main grounding grid conductor. Locate conductors at least 3 feet away from foundation. Conductor depth shall be 18 to 24 inches below finished grade.

2. Install ground rods vertically in undisturbed soil so that the top of the rod is 18 to 24 inches below finished grade, except that in test wells the top of rods shall be 6 to 8 inches below grade. Space rods a minimum of 10 feet apart.


3. Make underground cable to cable connections using either exothermic or compression type connections.

4. Provide test wells where indicated on the drawings. Install top of test well flush with finished grade or pavement. Use only bolted type rod connectors in test wells.

5. In addition to equipment grounding conductor connections, make connections from the grounding grid to the following items using green, insulated conductors:

a. Electrical equipment ground busses

b. Electrical equipment enclosures

c. Motor frames

d. Steel support frames for electrical equipment

e. Building steel frame

6. Grounding conductors stubbed up from below grade shall be enclosed in a 1 inch Schedule 40 PVC protective sleeve.

G. Conduit:

1. Provide grounding bushings where metallic conduits connect to non-metallic enclosures or stub-up into open-bottom, floor-mounted enclosures.

2. Provide conduit grounding clamps where metallic conduit stub-ups are connected to non-metallic underground conduits.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:


1. Equipment nameplates and labels 2. Warning and caution signs 3. Operational instruction signs 4. Identification labeling of conduits, cables

B. Related Sections:

1. Additional identification requirements are specified in other Sections of

Division 16.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

1. 29CFR1910.145 Specification for Accident Prevention Signs

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010.

B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product used on project.

C. Schedules: Nameplate engraving schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS:

A. Engraved Nameplates and Signs:


1. Material: 3 ply plastic laminate, matte-finish, 0.125 inch thickness, white with black center core except that material used for warning signs shall be red with white center core. Provide punched mounting holes for mechanical fasteners.

2. Size: Minimum size to be 1 inch by 2.5 inches, rectangular shape with square corners.

3. Engraving: Accurately align lettering and engrave into center core. Lettering shall be normal block style. Character size shall be 3/8 inch high for grouped equipment and load designation and ¼ inch for individual equipment, loads and devices.

B. Warning Signs:

1. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, non-adhesive backed, indoor-outdoor

with punched mounting holes, Brady B-120. 2. Polyester overlaminated with plastic coating, adhesive-backed, indoor-

outdoor, Brady B-302. 3. High Voltage warning signs to read “Danger-High Voltage-Keep Out.” 4. Provide identical signs for each application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Provide labels and signs in accordance with NEC requirements. 2. Install labels and signs at locations for best convenience of viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 3. All nameplates and signs used on the project shall be of similar size, style

and appearance.

B. Equipment Nameplates:

1. Provide engraved identification nameplates for each of the following: a. Panelboards b. Circuit breakers c. Switches d. Contactors e. Pull and junction boxes

2. Nameplate legends shall include the equipment identification number as

indicated on the design drawings and an appropriate service description.


3. Nameplates for switchgear assemblies, panelboards, and separately enclosed breakers, switches, starters and contactors shall include the operating voltage.

4. Attach engraved nameplates to equipment with self-tapping, stainless steel, round head screws. Use adhesive attachment only where the substrate material is not suitable for screw attachment.

C. Warning Signs:

1. Voltage warning signs where required by the NEC, where indicated on

drawing and as follows: a. Equipment Rooms: On all doors to equipment rooms containing

equipment or circuits over 600 volts or containing exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 7 inches x 10 inches.

b. Pull Boxes: On removable covers for all pull and junction boxes containing circuits over 600 volts.

c. Equipment: On front and rear compartment access doors and covers enclosing live parts. Signs provided as part of equipment that meet these requirements are acceptable.

d. Fences: On each gate and on each side of fences that enclose equipment or circuits over 600 volts or exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Locate at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

2. Multiple Source Signs:

a. Where enclosures contain voltages from more than one source which are not interrupted by opening the local unit disconnecting means, provide an engraved nameplate bearing the following (or similar) legend:

“WARNING – MULTIPLE ELECTRICAL SOURCES EXIST WITHIN THIS ENCLOSURE” OR “WARNING – VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH OPEN”

3. Hazardous Operation: a. Where operation of an electric switch or control device may create

an unsafe or undesirable operating condition, provide an engraved plastic sign with appropriate warning statement.

D. Multiple Services:


1. Where multiple services exist, provide each service disconnect with an

additional sign which states the name and location of other service disconnects.

E. Conduits:

1. Identify conduits at each termination and at all transitions from exposed

to concealed or underground installation. 2. Mark conduits legibly with a permanent marker pen to indicate conduit

per circuit number.

F. Cables:

1. Identify cables in pull and junction boxes, vaults, manholes and where entering switchgear panelboard assembly.

2. Provide an engraved plastic nameplate or other suitable permanent tag for each cable or cable assembly. Attach with self-locking nylon cable tie.

3. Cable identification shall include circuit number and phase as indicated on drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16123 WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes copper wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware used on systems operating at 600 volts or less.

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductor, Hard, Medium Hard, Or Soft.

B. National Electrical Contractor Association (NECA)

1. Standard of Installation

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables 2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper

Conductors 4. 486C Splicing Wire Connectors 5. 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating

Tape 6. 1569 Metal-Clad Cables

1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR APPROVAL:

A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010.

B. Product Data: Submit for each type of wire and cable, terminal lugs, connectors, and cable fittings.


A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300.




A. Furnish wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware bearing UL label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BUILDING WIRE:

A. Single conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductor, Class B stranded except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller used for lighting and power branch circuits may be solid. Insulation shall be 600 volt, type THHN/THWN per UL 83 or type XHHW per UL 44.

2.02 TYPE MC CABLE: Metal Clad Cable type MC multi-conductor cabling as manufactured by AFC Cable Systems or equivalent having the following construction features:

A. Conductor: Bare, soft annealed copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8.

B. Insulation: Polypropylene tape assembly with 600 volt, 90°C (dry) type THHN insulation with printed number and color identification.

C. Neutral conductor: White – 120v circuits; Gray – 480Y277v circuits

D. Grounding conductor: Green insulated copper ground conductor.

E. Assembly: Three insulated conductors with grounding conductor, non-hygroscopic fillers and overall binder tape per UL 1569.

F. Sheath: High strength, lightweight galvanized interlocking steel strip and color coded on the out side for easy identification.

G. U.L rated 1569

2.03 CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS:

A. Insulated Crimp Type Connectors and Terminals: Nylon insulated, Burndy INSULINK and INSULUG, or Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon.

B. Split Bolts: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy SERVIT or Thomas & Betts Split-Bolt.

C. Two Bolt Connectors: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy OKLIP, Type KVS or Blackburn 2BU.


D. Compression Terminals: Copper, long barrel, Burndy HYLUG or Thomas & Betts Color-Keyed.

E. Bolted Terminals: Cast copper alloy, Burndy QIKLUG or Thomas & Betts Locktite.

F. Spring Wire Connectors: Insulated, twist-on type, Ideal Wire Nut or 3M Scotchlok

2.04 CABLE TERMINATIONS:

A. Type MC Cable: Steel set screw connectors

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS:

A. Tape: UL 510

1. Vinyl Plastic: 3M Scotch 33+ or Scotch 88. 2. Varnished Cambric (VC): 3M Irvington 2920. 3. Friction: Black friction tape.

B. Pulling Lubricants: Ideal Yellow 77 or Polywater Type J.

C. Wire Markers:

1. Individual Wires: Heat shrink, machine printed, Raychem. 2. Multi-Conductor Cables or Groups of Wires as a Cable: Nylon tie on

marker, Thomas & Betts Nylon I.D. Ties, Ty-Raps.

D. Wire and Cable Ties: Thomas & Betts Ty-Raps.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION:

A. Wire and Cable:

1. THWN-THHN for power wiring through No. 250 AWG and control wiring in conduit. XHHW for sizes above No. 250 AWG in conduit.

2. TW or THW for equipment grounding conductor. 3. Type MC cable for fixture wipes no longer than 6’ and in accordance with

NEC Article 334. 4. No. 12 AWG minimum for power circuits and No. 14 AWG minimum for

control circuits unless noted otherwise on drawings.

B. Splices and Taps:


1. Use insulated spring wire connectors for lighting and receptacle branch circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller.

2. Use solderless pressure connectors for branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and larger.

3. Do not make splices or taps in feeder circuits or control circuits.

C. Terminals:

1. Use copper compression terminals, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 4 AWG and smaller, NEMA 2 hole for sizes No. 2 AWG and larger.

2. Use insulated, ring tongue terminals for signal and control conductors.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation.

B. Installation in Conduit:

1. Swab conduits completely and thoroughly before pulling in conductors. 2. Pull all conductors into conduit at same time. 3. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire No. 4 AWG and larger. 4. Do not pull in conductors until conduit system is completed. Do not pull

through boxes, fittings or enclosures where a change of conduit alignment or direction occurs.

5. Limit pulling tension to maximum values as recommended by manufacturer.

6. Do not combine circuits into a common conduit other than as indicated on the drawings.

C. Direct Burial Cable:

1. Trench and backfill for direct burial cables. Minimum depth of installation shall be 24 inches.

2. Terminate and ground metallic cable sheath with suitable fittings.

D. Compression Connectors and Terminals: 1. Install on wire and cable with approved tool and die to recommended

compression pressure. Do not cut strands from conductors to fit lugs or terminals.

E. Bolted Connectors and Terminals:


1. Torque to manufacturer’s recommended foot-pounds for size and class of connector.

2. Where manufacturer’s published torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with UL 486A torque values.

3. Use galvanized steel bolts, nuts, split-lock washers and flat washers on terminal connections.

F. Wiring in Enclosures:

1. Form and tie conductors in panelboards, cabinets, control panels, motor controllers, wireways, and wiring troughs in a neat and orderly manner.

2. Use Thomas & Betts wire and cable ties of appropriate size and type. 3. Limit spacing between ties to not more than 6 inches.

G. Taping:

1. Above Ground and Dry Locations: Fill voids and irregularities with half-lapped layers of VC (two minimum) or electrical insulation putty. Insulate with three half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic and one half-layer of friction tape.

2. In damp or wet locations, wrap insulated spring wire connectors with 2 layers of vinyl plastic tape.

3.03 COLOR CODING:

A. Power Wiring: Provide color coding for single and multi-conductor power circuits as follows:

Voltage ΦA ΦB ΦC Neutral 240 volts and below Black Red Blue White 250 – 600 volts Brown Purple Yellow Gray

1. For specified insulation and jackets not manufactured with integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color-coding tape.

2. Color code conductors entering boxes, troughs, cabinets, and other enclosures.

3. Color code conductors in wireways, trenches, and other locations where conductors are continuously accessible at intervals not exceeding 5 feet.

B. Insulated Equipment Ground: Green.

C. Isolated Ground conductor: Green with Yellow tracer.

3.04 WIRING IDENTIFICATION


A. Control Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall match approved schematic and wiring diagrams.

B. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall include source panel designation and circuit number.

3.05 FIELD TESTS:

A. Test conductors after installation is complete and prior to connection to equipment.

B. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor phase-to-ground with adjacent conductors grounded and test conductor disconnected from equipment. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for one minute. Minimum acceptable test values shall be 50 megohms. Investigate deviations in test values between adjacent phases.

C. Verify tightness of bolted connections with a calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be terminal lug manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16136 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:


1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) 2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (CRGS) 3. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 5. PVC Conduit (PVC) 6. Flexible Conduit 7. Associated Fittings 8. Wireways 9. Pull and Junction Boxes

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated 2. C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing – Zinc Coated 3. C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and

EPC-80) 2. TC 3 PVC Fitting for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 3. TC 13 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT) 4. TC 14 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit

and Fittings.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. 1 Flexible Metal Conduit 2. 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 3. 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings 4. 6 Rigid Metal Conduit 5. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 6. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 7. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing 8. 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings 9. 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous

(Classified) Locations


10. 1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 1.03 SUBMITTALS – FOR APPROVAL:

A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010.

B. Product Data: Submit for each type of conduit, fitting, connector, pull and junction box, and wireway used on the project.




PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS):

A. Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads and lacquered inside.

B. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast

malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or Gedney or an equal.

C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable

iron, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Boxes shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Boxes shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Gedney or equal.

D. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials

shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated fasteners and hardware will not be acceptable.

2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC - SCHEDULE 40):

A. Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit per NEMA TC 2 with a 900 UL rating, and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or approved equal.

B. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall

conform to NEMA TC 3 and shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit.

2.03 PVC COATED STEEL CONDUIT (CRGS):

A. Conduit: Prior to coating, all conduits, elbows, couplings, nipples etc. shall be standard weight rigid, threaded steel and shall be hot dipped galvanized inside


and out and over the ends. The conduit shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1, UL 6, and NEMA RN-1, 1980.

B. Fittings: Prior to coating, fittings shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped

galvanized, Appleton Form 35 or Crouse-Hinds or equivalent with cast cover and neoprene gasket.

C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with PVC coated conduit shall be cast

malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs and gasketed cast covers or device plates. Boxes shall be the product of Appleton or Crouse-Hinds.

D. PVC Coating: Conduit, fittings, boxes and accessories shall be Plasti-Bond 2

coated, as produced by Robroy Industries Inc. or an approved equal. Before coating, the galvanized surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy-acrylic primer. Exterior surfaces shall have a 40 mil PVC coating applied by dip method. Interior surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. shall have a fusion bonded phenolic coating with a thickness of 4-6 mils.

E. Fasteners and Supports: U-bolts, conduit clamps, straps, modular framing

channels shall be 1-5/8 1-5/8 minimum s e ction dime ns ions , Type 304 stainless steel, and shall be the product of Unistrut. Fasteners and attachment hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel.

2.04 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT:

A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings and nipples shall be standard weight, threaded, rigid aluminum 6063 alloy, with a copper content not to exceed 0.20%. The conduit shall have a silicon or lacquer coating inside.

B. Fittings: Fittings, accessories and device boxes for aluminum conduit systems

shall be the standard threaded type as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Both fittings and covers shall be aluminum containing less than 0.4 of 1% copper. All screws shall be stainless steel. Covers shall be gasketed.

C. Fasteners: All straps and clamps used to support aluminum conduit shall be hot-

dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron, with a 40 mil fused PVC coating, Plastibond, Ocal or equivalent. Strut type framing channels shall be either PVC coated galvanized steel or fiberglass.

D. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Galvanized

or cadmium-plated hardware will not be acceptable for use with aluminum conduit.

2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT):

A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out with an organic corrosion resistant coating applied to the inside.

B. Fittings and Boxes: Conduit fittings, boxes, and accessories for use with EMT

conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall be compression type. Setscrew


fittings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, OZ Gedney or an equal.

C. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials

shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. 2.06 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT:

A. Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit shall have a spiraled, flexible, galvanized steel inner core and an outer jacket of neoprene. Sizes 3/8" through 4" shall have a continuous, internal copper ground. Liquid-tight connectors shall be galvanized steel or malleable iron with neoprene sealing gaskets, external ground lugs and insulated throats. Connectors shall be Appleton type STB or Gedney or equal.

2.07 WIREWAYS:

A. Sheet Metal:

1. Indoor, dry locations: NEMA 1, sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. Finish being manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.

2. Outdoor and damp locations: NEMA 3R, galvanized sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6.

B. Non-Metallic:

1. NEMA 4X, Robroy Industries fiberglass trough with gasketed cover

attached with non-metallic fasteners.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, hubs, elbows, adapters, end caps and other fittings to match and mate with type of wireway furnished as required for a complete system.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION:

A. General:

1. All field wiring shall be installed in conduit except as otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2-inch nominal diameter.

B. Exposed:

1. Conduit installed outdoors exposed shall be rigid galvanized steel. 2. Conduit installed indoors exposed and below 7 feet shall be rigid

galvanized steel. Exposed conduit above 7 feet installed indoors may be EMT.

C. Underground:

1. Conduit installed underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC. See section

3.02-E for additional requirements.


2. Elbows used for underground conduit stub-ups from below grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, non-metallic Schedule 80 PVC, or Rigid Galvanized Steel completely taped with non-corrosive protective tape.

D. Concealed:

1. Conduit installed concealed above lay-in ceilings and in dry wall

construction shall be EMT.

E. Flexible Connections:

1. Indoor-dry areas: Flexible metal conduit. 2. Indoor-wet, damp areas: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3. Outdoors: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Installation Methods: Conduit shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceiling or underground as indicated on the drawings.

2. Cleaning: All conduit systems shall be completed and shall be swabbed

clean before conductors are pulled in.

3. Field cuts: Do not cut conduit with pipe cutters.

4. Bends: Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. The maximum number of 90 be nds , or e quiva le nt be twe e n pulling points in any conduit run shall be three. Pull and junction fittings and/or boxes shall be provided as necessary to satisfy this requirement.

5. Protection: The ends of all conduit runs shall be closed immediately after

installation to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign material.

6. Locknuts: Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and

cabinets with two locknuts. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits and shall be the insulating type.

7. Conduit couplings shall be threaded type for RGS or RA conduit and

compression type for EMT conduit. Set-screw couplings are not acceptable.

8. Spare conduits: Spare conduits shall have a pull cord installed. The pull

cord shall be plastic with a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds. Not less that 12 inches of slack shall be left at each end of the pull cord.

9. Supports: Supports shall be provided a minimum of every 10’ and within

3’ of all enclosures. In addition, conduits shall be rigidly supported


between couplings, on either side of bends and at terminations and fittings.

10. Boxes: Boxes shall be provided in the raceway system as indicated on the drawings and also wherever required for pulling of wires or making connections. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, boxes installed in normally wet locations or on the outside of exterior surfaces shall be NEMA 3R, stainless steel sheet construction. Boxes shall be furnished with hinged and gasketed doors and stainless steel back panels. Each box shall have the volume required by the NEC for the number of conductors enclosed in the box. All boxes shall be securely anchored in place.

11. Flexible Connections: Flexible connections of short length shall be

provided for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections. Flexible conduit connections shall be rigidly and securely supported in an approved manner at intervals not exceeding 24 inches in length and within 12 inches of each conduit termination. Lengths of not more than 36 inches may be installed without such supports where flexibility is required.

12. Identification: Identify conduits in accordance with Section 16075.

13. PVC: PVC conduit joints shall be solvent cement welded and shall be

watertight. All PVC conduits shall have a separate grounding conductor installed. Where transition is made to the metallic conduit or enclosures, the grounding conductor shall be bonded to the metal conduit or enclosure.

14. Penetrations through walls, floors, and roof: All penetrations shall be

sealed with a UL listed fire sealant equal to Dow Corning #3-6548.

B. Exposed Conduit:

1. Routing: Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to structure lines. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with fittings or symmetrical bends. Conduit in damp locations or outdoors shall be exposed to the air on all sides and shall not be installed tight against walls, ceilings and structural members, etc. Clamp backs and/or offsets shall be used as necessary to maintain uniform clearances.

2. Supports: Acceptable supporting and clamping materials for exposed

conduit include one-hole straps and clampback, "U" bolts, parallel or right angle conduit clamps, hot-dipped galvanized structural steel frames or modular stainless steel channel as manufactured by Unistrut or equal. Perforated steel tape, stamped steel one- and two-hole straps shall not be used. Conduits shall be supported in accordance with NEC 346-12.

3. Obstructions: Conduit shall be routed so as not to create any tripping or

head banging hazard and so as not to create any obstruction to Owner's operation and maintenance activities.


4. Hubs: Watertight conduit hubs shall be installed where conduits enter the tops or sides of sheet metal or non-metallic enclosures.

5. Drains: Drain fittings shall be installed at low points throughout the

conduit system where condensation is likely to occur.

C. PVC Coated Conduit:

1. PVC coated conduit requires special care to minimize damage to the PVC coating during cutting, threading, bending and installation. Contractor shall install conduit in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing strap wrenches, cutting dies,

vises, and other special tools required to install PVC coated conduit. Standard pipe wrenches, chain wrenches or channel locks shall not be used. Conduit bending equipment shall have the proper diameter shoes or dies to allow for the thickness of the PVC coating.

3. PVC coated conduit shall be supported with Type 304 stainless steel

clamps, straps, hangers and supports. Attachment hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

4. All PVC coated conduit and fittings that have teeth marks, cuts, nicks or

are otherwise damaged shall be repaired by coating damaged area with a liquid PVC touch-up compound. Spray-type compound is not acceptable.

5. Unistrut channel supports and related accessories for use with PVC

coated conduit shall be Type 304 stainless steel.

D. Aluminum:

1. Aluminum conduit shall not be installed in direct contact with earth, concrete, steel, copper, brass or bronze. Where aluminum conduit comes into contact with dissimilar metals or passes through concrete walls or floors, it shall be wrapped with 2 layers, half-lapped, of corrosion preventative pipe tape, Scotch 50 or equal.

2. Aluminum conduit threads shall have a Penetrox, No-Ox-ld or equal,

applied when installed.

E. Underground Conduit: 1. Under Landscaping (i.e. sod or grass):

a. Underground conduit runs shall be laid in sand and covered with a

4” red concrete cap. The conduit shall be surrounded by a minimum of 3-inches of virgin sand (top, bottom, and sides).

b. Where conduits are routed under paved areas that are accessible

to vehicles, the conduit shall be encased in steel reinforced concrete duct bank. See Section 16136-3.02-E-2.


c. The top of concrete cap or duct bank shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade, unless otherwise indicated and must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the 24 inches minimum depth cannot be met. Compact trench backfill to original density.

2. Concrete Encasement (Under Driveways and Roads):

a. Underground conduit runs shall be encased in red concrete. The

minimum thickness of cover shall be 3 inches.

b. Where conduits rise above grade, the concrete encasement shall extend to 6 inches above grade. Exposed concrete shall be natural color, not red. Where conduits run through equipment foundations or floor slabs, the concrete encasement shall butt the underside of the slab.

c. The top of concrete encasement shall be a minimum of 24 inches

below grade, unless otherwise indicated and must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the 24 inches minimum depth cannot be met. Compact trench backfill to original density.

d. The concrete encasement shall be reinforced with a minimum of

four (4) No. 4 steel reinforcing bars.

3. Separation: Minimum separation between the outside edges of adjacent conduits shall be 3 inches.

4. Elbows: All elbows shall be long radius type.

5. Spacers: Conduit spacers shall be installed at 5 feet on centers.

6. Expansion Fittings: Provide expansion fittings in aboveground, vertical

portion of each underground conduit stub-up. END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY:


1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Snap Switches 4. Wall Plates

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. WD1-83 General Requirements for Wiring Devices

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. 20-86 Standard for Safety General Use Snap Switches 2. 94-91 Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic

Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 3. 498091 Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Procedures: Submit for approval and record purposes in accordance with Section 01300 and 16010.

B. Product Data: Submit for each type of device used on project.


A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in National

Electrical Code, Article 100.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICES:

A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA Standards.

B: Receptacles, General Use Duplex Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy

duty, grounding type:

5-15R 5-20-R Manufacturer Color Duplex Duplex Hubbell Ivory 5262-I 5362-I Leviton Ivory 5262-I 5362-I P& S Ivory 5262-I 5362-I

C: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp,

heavy duty, grounding type "non feed-through" conforming to UL 498 and UL 943:

Manufacturer Color 5 - 15R 5 - 20R Hubbell Ivory GF5262-I GF5362-IA Leviton Ivory 7599-I 7899-I P & S Ivory 1591-RI 2091-IL

D: Snap Switches: 120/277 volt, 20 ampere, quiet rated, heavy duty, complying with

UL 20 and NEMA WD1:

Manufacturer Color 1 Pole 2 Pole 3 Way 4 Way Hubbell Ivory 1221-I 1222-I 1223-I 1224-I Leviton Ivory 1221-2I 1222-2I 1223-2I 1224-2I P & S Ivory 20AC1-I 20AC2-I 20AC3-I 20AC4-I

2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:

A. Wall Plates:

1. Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required by devices.

2. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached.

3. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates.

4. Provide plates possessing following additional construction features.

a. Device plates: stainless steel. b. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 inch sq boxes: 1/2 inch

stainless steel covers. c. Weatherproof covers for exterior devices or devices in damp

locations: Raintight while in use, UL listed, molded UV stabilized


poly-carbonate with stainless steel screws and mounting gaskets. Tay Mac Corporation safety outlet enclosure, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring

installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from building

materials, dirt and debris.

D. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, boxes for wiring devices shall be mounted so that the centerline of the device is at the following height above finished floor (AFF) or above finished grade (AFG).

FINISHED UNFINISHED

DEVICE AREAS AREAS Snap switches 48" 48"

Convenience Receptacles 18" 18"

E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

H. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through

connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails.

I. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw

to bolted outlet box connection. 3.02 PROTECTION:

A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.



A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity and for

short circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six (6) times.

B. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal for correct polarity,

proper ground connection and wiring faults.

C. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16441 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.


1.03 REFERENCES

A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL.

1.04 SUBMITTALS -- FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL

A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein.

B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:

1. Master drawing index 2. Dimensioned outline drawing 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Switch ratings including:

a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current

5. Fuse ratings and type 6. Cable terminal sizes.

1.05 SUBMITTALS -- FOR INFORMATION

A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted:

1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Product sheets.

1.06 SUBMITTALS--FOR CLOSEOUT

A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:

1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS


A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified.

1.08 NOT USED


A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions prior to installation. Installation of all switches shall comply with the National Electric Codes clearance and mounting height requirements.

B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Three (3) copies of these instruction manuals shall be submitted with the closeout documents listed in section 1.06.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Provide switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings:

1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC, DC; 600 volts AC (30A to 200A 600 volts DC) 3. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles 4. Non-Fusible and Fusible 5. Copper/aluminum standard mechanical lugs.

B. Construction 1. Switchblades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily pad lockable in the OFF

position. 3. Switches shall have defeat-able door interlocks that prevent the door

from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the

enclosure base.


5. Fusible switches rated 100A to 1200A shall have reinforced fuse clips.

6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick-

make/quick-break type (except 30A plug fuse-type). 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment.

9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. All exterior switches shall be heavy-duty type. 11. All interior switches shall be general-duty type unless otherwise noted.

C. Enclosures

A. Exterior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 3R rainproof unless otherwise noted.

B. Interior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted.

D. Fuses

1. Fuses shall be dual element, current limiting type such as Bussmann Low-Peak Yellow or equal.

2.04 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers nameplates shall be front cover mounted, contain a permanent record of switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

A. All switches shall be cleaned free of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance by the owner. Remove all miscellaneous paint markings, grease and tar.

3.02 FACTORY TESTING

A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION T-16442 LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE:

A. Furnish and install panelboards as specified herein and as indicated on the

drawings.

B. Panelboard types included in this Section are:

1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

1. Standard of Installation

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. PB 1 Panelboards 3. PB1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and

Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

1. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 2. 67 Panelboards

1.03 SUBMITTALS - FOR APPROVAL:

A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein.

B. Product Data:

1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Enclosure outline drawing with complete dimensions 3. Breaker layout drawing 4. Component list

5. Conduit entry/exit locations 6. Assembly ratings including:

a. Short circuit current b. Voltage c. Continuous current


7. Cable terminal sizes. 8. Installation Instructions



B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:

1. Final (as-built) drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.03

2. Installation, operation and maintenance instruction 3. Spare parts list

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers.

B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Cutler-Hammer

B. Square D

C. Siemens

2.02 RATINGS:

A. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

B. Panelboards rated 480 Vac shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. All panelboards shall be fully rated. Series ratings shall not be used.


2.03 CONSTRUCTION:

A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors.

B. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door covering all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semiflush, cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners.

C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible.

D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 inch on all sides. Trims shall be secured to box with concealed clamps.

E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of each door in a metal frame.

F. All locks shall be keyed alike.

2.04 BUS:

A. Main bus bars shall be tin-plated copper, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 650 C above an ambient of 400 C maximum.

B. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels.

C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards indicated to have a neutral bus. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings with oversized neutral conductors.

2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:

A. Distribution panelboards including circuit breakers contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall have bolt-on, molded case circuit breakers as indicated below.

B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated.

C. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically


trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.

D. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be current limiting.

E. Circuit breakers below 600-ampere shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics.

F. Circuit breakers 600-ampere through 1200-ampere shall be provided with microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units.

1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached.

2. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed.

3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an overload condition until after a preset time delay.

4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted, the trip unit shall be provided with an instantaneous override. Internal ground fault protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four-wire loads.

5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker, by means of a 120-volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all breakers 600-ampere and above.

6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based, time-current curve shaping adjustments:

Adjustable long-time pick-up Adjustable short-time pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping Adjustable instantaneous pick-up


Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping.

G. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure.

H. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as indicated on the drawings.

I. Circuit breakers supplying air conditioning branch circuits shall be UL listed as type HACR.

2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS:

A. The minimum integrated short circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be indicated on the drawings.

B. Bolt-in type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped.

C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100-ampere frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits and HACR for air conditioning branch circuits.

1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights, energy management and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels.

2.07 ENCLOSURE:

A. General: Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide and made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends.

B. Rating: NEMA type 12 enclosure except where other enclosure requirements are indicated.

2.08 FINISH: A. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a finish

coat of the manufacturers standard paint color shall be applied. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES


A. Provide TVSS system integral to distribution panelboards and appliance panelboards where indicated on drawings. Reference section 16671 for specifications on TVSS units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Confirm installation space and clearance requirements for panelboards in accordance with NEC requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install panelboards as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and NECA “Standard of Installation”.

B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6 feet 2 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Mounting:

1. Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. 2. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

D. Circuit Directory: Typed directory indicating final circuit connections. Obtain

approval before installing.

E. Install filler plates in unused breaker spaces.

F. Provisions for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards:

1. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future.

2. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade.

G. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap

with wire ties after completion of load balancing.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide unit nameplate in accordance with Section 16075.

B. Provided one (1) 8-1/2”x11” stainless steel nameplate engraved with one-line diagram and year installed. One-line diagram shall include panel voltages, amps, AIC ratings, and feeder sizes. Nameplate shall be mounted to the exterior door of the main distribution panel – LB.


3.04 GROUNDING:

A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required in Section 16060.

B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

C. Provide isolated ground bars for panels serving sensitive electronic equipment

and as indicated on panel schedules. 3.05 CONNECTIONS:

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in

accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

3.06 FIELD TESTING:

A. Inspect for compliance with drawings and specifications.

B. Inspect for defects, damaged or missing parts.

C. Operate each breaker a minimum of three (3) times to insure proper operation.

D. Perform insulation resistance test on complete assembly at 1000 Vdc.

Disconnect any solid-state devices prior to testing. Minimum acceptable test results are 100 megohms.

3.07 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards.

B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

C. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

D. Clean interior of panelboard. 3.08 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS:

A. Balancing Loads: Prior to final acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows:

1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised

by Owner. 2. Advise Engineer of load imbalances exceeding 20% or of loads

exceeding 80% of circuit ratings. Reconnect branch circuit loads as directed by Engineer.


3. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical circuits.

4. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16510

LUMINAIRES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes:

1. Lighting fixtures 2. Lamps 3. Ballasts 4. Emergency lighting units

1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. C78 Series Lamps 2. C82.1-97 Electric Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballast 3. C82.2-84 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Methods of Measurements 4. C82.4-92 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium

Lamps (Multiple Supply Type) 5. C82.11-93 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. C62.11-93 IEEE Recommended Practice on Metal Oxide Surge Arresters

for Alternating Current Power Circuits

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. 844-95 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) locations 2. 924-95 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 3. 935-95 Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 4. 1029-94 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 5. 1570-95 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures 6. 1571-95 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures 7. 1572-97 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures

1.03 DEFINITIONS: A. Emergency Lighting Unit: Fixture with integral emergency battery power supply and

means for controlling and charging battery. Emergency units are available with integral lamps only.

B. Fixture: Complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect


lamps to power supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include battery and means for controlling and recharging battery. Emergency lighting units are available with and without integral lamp heads and lamps.

C. Luminaire: Fixture. D. Average Life: Time after which 50% will have failed and 50% will have survived

under normal conditions. E. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic

current components divided by total fundamental (60 hz) current.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 26 01 00, and as stated herein. B. Product Data:

1. Describe fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following information: a. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal

features. b. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and

certified results of independent laboratory tests. c. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail nonstandard fixtures indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field

assembly, components, features, and accessories. D. Supplies:

1. Submit sample of fixture if different than specified. E. Miscellaneous:

1. Warranty for rechargeable battery. 2. Coordination drawings for fixtures that require coordination with other

equipment installed in the same space.

F. Substitutions to Specified Product

1. Prior approval requests will include the following :

a. Full submittal data, by type, clearly highlighted and arrowed to identify the specific proposed manufacturer’s nomenclature

b. Full submittal data of lamps of proposed manufacturer

c. Full submittal data of ballast/driver (LED) data of proposed

manufacturer

d. LED lumen data shall include: i. Lumen output ii. L70 and L90 testing iii. Confirmation of independent test lab data ITL iv. Color temperature and CRI with quantity of McAdam Ellipse

steps v. Data shall include sphere and goniometer results for total


lumen, total power, luminaire efficacy, CRI and junction temperature for the specified color temperature

vi. Make and brand of LED diode should be clearly identified on submittal data

vii. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to the specified drivers, Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range, freedom from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial environment.

viii. All substitutions must meet specified fixtures certifications ( UL, ETL,CE,CSA,RoHS,DLC, Energy Star)

2. Provide lighting calculations with the prior approval request based on

reflectance values and light loss factors provided by the engineer and displayed on lighting calculation drawings. (may be unique by area) Calculations shall be shown on one sheet with dimensions as shown on construction set. Data will be submitted electronically in dxf format on a flash drive and with printed calculations on Architectural E size sheets to scale with construction set sheets.

3. Prior approval request may require a sample of both the proposed and

specified fixtures provided by the alternate manufacturer at NO additional cost to the project. Samples of both specified and proposed must be provided within 10 working days of request.

4. Energy calculations (Comcheck) must be provided with specification sheets

including lamp and ballast data supporting input wattages highlighted in yellow and clearly identified by type. Input voltages must coincide with panel schedules. This data will be submitted under separate cover with the prior approval request

5. All data will be submitted electronically and in a bound format

a. Bound data will be secured in hard binder with 3” rings for ease of

review.

b. Types will be marked with a tab by type and indexed for ease of reference

6. LED warranty information MUST be included by type and marked in RED to

clearly identify the manufacturer’s warranty terms. Warranty data MUST meet or exceed the specified manufacturers terms

7. Prior to Bid Closing Date/Time: Any requests for substitutions, questions

about bid documents and/or discrepancies between the contract documents and actual job-site conditions, are to be submitted to the Nueces County Purchasing Agent. Submit to “Elsa N. Saenz, Purchasing Agent, Nueces County Courthouse, 901 Leopard Street, Room 106, Corpus Christi, Texas


78401 prior to five (5) calendar days before the time set for opening bids. Purchasing Agent will then provide answer(s) via an Addendum to all Bidders.

8. ALL prior approval data must be submitted in one package with complete

information. Information that is incomplete will be rejected without review.

9. The prior approval will be returned marked approved or rejected by type with no explanation. If any specification is deemed not equal the review will be stopped and the type rejected with no explanation.

10. Lumen output for the proposed fixture must be highlighted in yellow for clear

identification

11. All inverter systems that supply power to LED fixtures must have pure PWM sine wave function and work with any type of lighting load.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly

protect fixtures from damage. B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area

protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat and blocked off ground.

C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scarring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term “NRTL” shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms “listed and “labeled” shall be as defined in National Electrical Code,

Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Coordinate fixtures mounting hardware and trim with ceiling system.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 FIXTURES, GENERAL: A. Comply with requirements specified in Paragraphs below and lighting fixture

schedule.

2.02 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL: A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support

components to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light

leakage under operating conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated:


1. White Surfaces: 85% 2. Specular Surfaces: 83% 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75% 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90%

E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100% virgin acrylic plastic or water white,

annealed crystal glass except as indicated.

1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation.

2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch, minimum. 2.03 SUSPENDED FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS:

A. Single-Stem Hangers: ½-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, ½-inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

C. Rod Hangers: ¼-inch diameter cadmium plated, threaded steel rod.

D. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped

with threaded attachment, cord and locking-type plug. 2.04 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LED LAMPS

A. All LED products must be UL, ETL and/or CSA listed

B. All LED products must have LM-79 and LM-80 testing noted on specification sheet by an independent test lab

1. See note P this section

C. All LED products should be identified as L70 and/or L90 ratings based on

independent test lab data

D. All outdoor pole mounted products must have surge suppression within each fixture.


E. All outdoor and wet location listed products must clearly state the IP rating carried on the fixture based on independent test lab data

F. All LED products must be serviceable for accessable for field reapair needs

G. All outdoor lighting color rendering should be within a 7 step McAdams Ellipse. All

outdoor lighting should be 4000 kelvin unless specifically noted



H. All indoor lighting color rendering should be within a 3 step McAdams ellipse. All

indoor lighting should be 4000-4100 kelvin unless specifically noted


I. All control systems that interface with an LED product will be supported by a project “integrator” until project completion. This includes contact with the installer prior to installation, availability during installation, and final checkout and startup after installation. The quantity of days required for startup will be based on the manufacturer/agents discretion and need.

1. The project integrator must be capable of performing low voltage and dmx

terminations. High voltage terminations are performed solely by the electrical subcontractor.

2. Reporting of final startup completion of the controls system back to the

engineer is mandantory.

J. Invitation to attend the training with the owners representative should be made to the engineer no less than 5 days prior to training

K. Signature confirmation of training and startup is required within 5 business days after

completion back to the engineers office.

1. A follow up call will be made to the owner 30-45 days after the startup and training of the controls system by the manufacturers representative to ensure all systems are operating to design specification. A 3 hour onsite system fine tuning at no additional cost to the owner is inclusive if requested by the owner at that time for additional training and programming.

L. All LED drivers should be capable of 0-10 volt controls and DMX control and shall dim

to 1% of total lumen output . Where specifically specified the dimming driver may be required to dim to .1% of lumen output , otherwise known as “dim to dark”

M. Driver manufacturers must have a 5 year history producing dimmable electronic LED

drivers for the North American market.

N. Ambient driver tiemperatures must be within -20 degrees to 50 degrees C (-4 degrees to 122 degrees F)

O. Driver must limit inrush current.

1. Base specification: meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430

amp per 10 amps load with a maximum of 370 amps/2 seconds 2. Preferred specification : Meet or exceed 30ma’s at 277 VAC for up to 50

watts of load and 75A at 240us att 277 VAC for 100 watts of load 3. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as

defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A 4. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10% line


voltage input. 5. Total harmonic distortion less than 20%, and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum

allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD

6. See note P this section.

P. Any exceptions are at the engineers discretion based on project needs and applicability.

2.05 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES:

A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570.

B. Ballasts: Electronic type. Conform to UL 935, ANSI C82.11 and NFPA 70.

1. Certification: By Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). 2. Labeling: By Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P, 0.95 P.F. minimum. 4. Sound Rating: “A” rating, except as indicated otherwise. 5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. 6. Temperature: Start and operate at minimum of 500 F. 7. THD: 10 percent maximum.

C. Low Temperature Ballast: Start and maintain operation at a minimum of 00 F.

D. T-8 Lamp Ballasts: Full-light output type, compatible with energy-saving lamps.

Following are required average input wattages when tested according to ANSI C82.2.

1. 39 or less when operating one F32T8 lamp. 2. 62 or less when operating two F32T8 lamps. 3. 95 or less when operating three F32T8 lamps. 4. 114 or less when operating four F32T8 lamps.

E. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall have 100% acrylic prismatic lenses with a

minimum thickness of 0.125 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES:

A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572.

B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Provide ballasts with following features, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high-power-factor type. 2. Voltage rating matches system voltage. 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of –300 C. 4. Normal ambient operating temperature is 400 C. 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. 6. Noise Suppression: Manufacturer’s standard epoxy encapsulated model

designed to minimize audible fixture noise.


2.07 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES:

A. Conform to UL 1571. 2.08 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:

A. Conform to UL 844 or provide units that have Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) certification for indicated class and division of hazard.

2.09 EXIT SIGNS:

A. Conform to UL 924.

1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code.

B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Backup): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in self-contained power pack.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium type 1.5 hour minimum

emergency run time. 2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS:

A. Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with features and characteristics as indicated on the drawings.

2.11 LAMPS:

A. Conform to ANSI C78 series applicable to each type of lamp.

B. Fluorescent Lamps: Color temperature of 35000 K. 2.12 FINISH:

A. Steel Parts: Manufacturer’s standard finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters and defects. Remove fixtures showing evidence of corrosion during project warranty period and replace with new fixtures.

B. Other Parts: Manufacturer’s standard finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Set units plumb, square and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent fixtures, and secure according to manufacturer’s printed instructions and approved submittals.


B. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures.

C. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job prior to

commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style and pattern of ceiling being installed.

D. Where recessed fixtures are supported by ceiling support grid, install additional

support wires near each corner of the fixture.

E. Make branch circuit wiring connections with conductors having an insulation temperature rating suitable for the fixture.

F. Ground and bond fixtures in accordance with Section 26 06 00.

G. Install lamp units according to manufacturer’s instructions and fixture schedule.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Give 7-days notice of dates and times for field tests.

C. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits

have been energized with normal power source.

D. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation.

1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shut-down. 3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Low supply voltage transfer.

E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat

procedure until units operate properly. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Clean fixtures upon completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

C. Set and adjust photocells and/or time switches for proper operation as directed by

Owner.



SECTION 16671

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protective

devices (SPD) for the protection of all AC electrical circuits.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Other sections that may relate to the work in this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 262416 – Low-Voltage Panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product information for approval and final documentation in the quantities listed according to the Conditions of the Contract. All transmittals shall be identified by customer name, customer location, and customer order number.

B. Submittals shall include UL 1449 4th Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting www.UL.com, clicking “Certifications” link, searching using UL Category Code: VZCA. 1. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 2. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV) 4. I-nominal rating (I-n) 5. SPD shall be Type 1 UL listed and labeled

C. Upon request, an unencapsulated but complete SPD formally known as TVSS shall be presented for visual inspection.

D. Minimum of ten (10) year warranty

1.4 RELATED STANDARDS A. IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and

Less) AC Power Circuits, B. IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-

Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits, C. IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment

Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits. D. National Electrical Code: Article 285 E. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters F. UL 1449, Fourth Edition– Surge Protective Devices

1.5 LISTING REQUIREMENTS A. SPD shall bear the UL Mark and shall be Listed to most recent editions of UL 1449

and UL 1283. “Manufactured in accordance with” is not equivalent to UL listing and does not meet the intent of this specification.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least ten (10) years experience in manufacturing transient voltage surge suppressors.

B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment

for a minimum period of five (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

D. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation and

Maintenance Manuals. One (1) copy of this document to be provided with the equipment at time of shipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide an externally mounted transient voltage suppressors by Siemens or pre-approved equal. Approved manufacturers are as follows: 1. SIEMENS 2. Eaton 3. Square D / Schneider

2.2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE FEATURES A. SPD shall be UL 1449 listed and labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating

(SCCR). Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstrated withstand testing of SPD, per NEC 285.6.

B. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 intended for use without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls. Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal overcurrent and thermal over-temperature controls. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety disconnects do not meet the intent of this specification.

C. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n) (verifiable at UL.com) for compliance to UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.

D. Suppression components shall be heavy duty ‘large block’ MOVs, each exceeding 30mm diameter.

E. Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems.

F. If a dedicated breaker for the SPD is not provided in the switchboard, the service entrance SPD shall include an integral UL Recognized disconnect switch. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for distribution SPD’s.

G. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be:

a. Service Entrance applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 12 with Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall

be 250kA per phase. b. Distribution applications:

1.) Siemens Model TPS3 09 with Maximum surge current capability of 100kA per phase


2. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following: VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 208Y/120V 700V 700V 700V 480Y/277V 1500V 1500V 1500V

H. UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes of protection (verifiable at UL.com): System Voltage Allowable System Voltage Fluctuation (%) MCOV 208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/277V 20% 320V

I. Service Entrance SPD shall be complimentary UL 1283 listed for EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of -50dB at 100kHz.

J. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of ten (10) years, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period.

K. Service Entrance SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per

phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function

(excluding branch). 3. Form C dry contacts 4. Optional – Surge Counter 5. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before

or after installation. L. Distribution Panels SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics:

1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED.

2. Audible Alarm & Dry Contacts 3. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before

or after installation.


3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall meet the following criteria:

1. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations and contract documents. 2. Install units plumb, level and rigid without distortion 3. One primary suppressor shall be installed external to the service entrance in

accordance with manufacturer instructions. 4. Service Entrance SPD shall be installed on the line or load side of the main

service disconnect. 5. Service Entrance SPD ground shall be bonded to the service entrance

ground. 6. At Service Entrance or Transfer Switch, a UL approved disconnect switch

shall be provided as a means of servicing disconnect if a 60A breaker is not available.

7. One SPD shall be installed external to each designated distribution panelboard.

8. At Distribution, MCC and Branch, SPD shall have an independent means of servicing disconnect such that the protected panel remains energized. A 30A


breaker (or larger) may serve this function. 9. SPD shall be installed per manufacturer’s installation instructions with lead

lengths as short (less than 24”) and straight as possible. Gently twist conductors together.

10. Installer may reasonably rearrange breaker locations to ensure short & straightest possible leads to SPDs.

11. Before energizing, installer shall verify service and separately derived system Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers per NEC.

3.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING

A. Remove debris from SPD and wipe dust and dirt from all components. B. Repaint marred and scratched surface with touch up paint to match original finish.

3.3 TESTING A. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure

they are torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacture’s recommendations. B. Check all installed panels for proper grounding, fastening and alignment.

3.4 WARRANTY A. Equipment manufacturer warrants that all goods supplied are free of non-conformities

in workmanship and materials for one year from date of initial operations, but not more than eighteen months from date of shipment.



SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS

(ROUGH-IN)

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL

A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and

Special Conditions govern work under this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section includes work required to provide a system of raceways and outlet boxes

with covers to accommodate the installation of the horizontal distribution per specification section 16710.


A. Division 16 – ELECTRICAL 1.04 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Code (NEC)


A. It is the intent of this Specification to provide a system of raceways and outlets to

accommodate the installation of telephone and data cabling. The Contract Documents indicate the location and size of the main telephone service raceway and the location of telephone/data outlets and terminal boards. Routing of raceway system between outlets and terminal points shall be determined in the field by the contractor. Design of the system is based upon the premise that the telephone/data system installer will provide UL listed low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to NEC requirements, permitting open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Raceways: All raceways shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 16136.

B. Outlet Cover Plates: All outlet coverplates shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 16140.

C. Terminal Boards: See drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION


A. At the main terminal board, stub-up the service entrance conduits at one end of the

board within 3 inches of the supporting wall. B. Service entrance conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel or PVC encased in concrete

with steel reinforced where it passes through the foundation and for at least 5’ beyond the building line.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, distribution raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing, except the PVC Schedule 40 may be used where raceway is buried in concrete slabs, columns, or beams. Provide insulating bushings at the ends of all raceways.

D. The conduit size for each outlet shall be 1-1/4-inch minimum. E. Boxes shall be steel having the minimum dimensions of 4-11/16”x4-11/16”x2-1/8”. F. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type

ceiling. Terminate conduit with bushing. G. Provide raceways sufficient to accommodate cabling where passing through mechanical

and electrical equipment rooms, pipe chases, mechanical chases, areas without ceilings (exposed structure), and nonaccessible areas such as ceiling plenums and crawl spaces.

H. Refer to construction drawings for additional requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16750

CABLE TV SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL

A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions

govern work under this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section includes work required to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes with covers, terminal

boards, cabling, splitters, amplifiers, connectors, and grounding of a cable TV system.


A. Division 16 – ELECTRICAL 1.04 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Code (NEC)


A. It is the intent of this Specification to provide a system of raceways, cables and outlets to accommodate a

complete working CATV system. The Contract Documents indicate the location and size of the main Cable service raceway and the location of TV outlets. Routing of raceway system between outlets and terminal points shall be determined in the field by the contractor. Design of the system is based upon the premise that the cable TV system installer will provide UL listed low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to NEC requirements, permitting open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Raceways: All raceways shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 16136.

B. Outlet Cover Plates: Provide outlet cover plates in accordance with the requirements of Section 16140. C. Horizontal cabling: Provide RG6 coax cable that is U.L. Listed as low smoke producing plenum cabling

conforming to the NEC requirements for open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings. Provide cabling from each outlet to the closest IDF/MDF closet. Terminate cable on splitter/amplifier. Label cabling at both ends with the room number.

D. CATV Backbone cable shall be RG11 coax cable that is U.L. Listed as low smoke producing plenum cabling conforming to the NEC requirements for open wiring in plenum areas above accessible ceilings. Provide cabling from each IDF closet to the MDF closet. Terminate cable(s) on splitter/amplifier. Label cabling at both ends with the room number.

E. TV Outlets: Outlets shall be single port with type F connector. Terminal cable to outlet with proper RG6 connector.

F. Splitters: Provide cable splitters in IDF and MDF rooms as required too interconnect all drops. G. Amplifiers: Provide amplifiers as required in IDF and MDF rooms as required too amplify signal. H. Terminal Boards: Terminal boards shall be ¾-inch type Marine grade plywood having two coats of

insulating oil base exterior enamel paint applied before installation on both sides and all edges. The quantity and dimensions shall be as indicated on the drawings. Label terminal board “CATV”.



3.01 CONSTRUCTION

A. Install terminal boards straight and level at locations indicated on drawings. Attach to masonry walls using expansion anchors, to CMU walls using toggle bolts, and to sheetrock and plaster walls using wood or sheet metal lag bolts fastened into the wall supporting the structure. The use of toggle bolts in sheetrock and plaster walls is not acceptable. Install anchors at a maximum of 24-inches on center at the perimeter of each board.

B. At the main terminal board, stub-up the service entrance conduits at one end of the board within 3 inches of the supporting wall.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, distribution raceways shall be electrical metallic tubing, except the PVC Schedule 40 may be used where raceway is buried in concrete slabs, columns, or beams. Provide insulating bushings at the ends of all raceways.

D. The conduit size for each outlet shall be 1-inch minimum. E. Boxes shall be steel having the minimum dimensions of 4”x4”x2-1/8”. F. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling. Terminate

conduit with bushing. G. Install RG6 cabling from each outlet to the closest IDF/MDF closet. Connect cables to splitters/amplifiers

in IDF/MDF closets. H. Terminate cable at outlet with proper RG6 connector. I. Install RG11 cabling from each IDF closest to the MDF closet. Connect cables to splitters/amplifiers in the

MDF closet as required. J. Terminate RG11 cable with proper connectors. K. Provide raceways sufficient to accommodate cabling where passing through mechanical and electrical

equipment rooms, pipe chases, mechanical chases, areas without ceilings (exposed structure), and nonaccessible areas such as ceiling plenums and crawl spaces.

L. Provide ¾-inch conduit with #6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location and bond to building grounding system as indicated on drawings.

M. Provide pull wire or mylar cord in any empty conduit. N. Coordinate final termination with the Architect, MIS department and the Local Cable TV provider.

END OF SECTION